Abb Tmax Breaker Catalogue

Contact us
ABB SACE The data and illustrations are not binding. We reserve
1SDC210015D0205 - 07/2010 - 6.000
Tmax. T Generation Low voltage moulded-case circuit-breakers up to 1600 A

the right to modify the contents of this document on
A division of ABB S.p.A. the basis of technical development of the product,
L.V. Breakers without prior notice.
Via Baioni, 35 Copyright 2010 ABB. All rights reserved.
24123 Bergamo
Phone: +39 035.395.111
Fax: +39 035.395.306-433
www.abb.com
Technical catalogue - Edition 2010
Tmax. T Generation
Low voltage moulded-case
circuit-breakers up to 1600 A
Main characteristics
The ranges
Accessories
Characteristic curves
and technical information
4
Wiring diagrams
Overall dimensions
Ordering codes
1SDC210015D0205
T GENERA
TMAX. COMPLETE FREEDOM.
Tmax is freedom. Freedom now reaching up to 1600 A And also a wide range of accessories and the possibility
with the new Tmax T7 circuit-breaker. There's a bound- of selecting dedicated ranges for all market applications,
less and highly diversified world of differing types of even the most specific and advanced ones.
installations, requirements, needs and problems from 0
to 1600 A. With T Generation everything becomes sim- BE FREE TO INSTALL ALL THE SIZES WITHOUT ANY
ple and rational – seven sizes to find the solutions you're DIFFICULTY.
looking for. T Generation is undeniably the family of moulded-case
circuit-breakers with the top performance/size ratio avail-
BE FREE TO SIZE ANY TYPE OF INSTALLATION IN AN able on the market, so can you imagine how much more
IDEAL WAY AT ALL TIMES. space there is for cabling and how simply you'll be able
Thanks to the seven sizes and a complete series of mag- to carry it out? And further, what about the reduced
netic only, thermomagnetic and electronic trip units. dimensions of the switchboard?
ATION
BE FREE TO RIDE THE MOST ADVANCED FREEDOM OF TOTALLY SAFE SELECTION.

TECHNOLOGY. The safety of knowing that behind Tmax there's ABB
It is thanks to this technology that T Generation offers SACE's strong and constant commitment to continually
you performances which were out of the question until search for excellence of quality at the base of each prod-
now in circuit-breakers with these dimensions. And there uct and service. ABB quality.
are some exclusive technical solutions which only ABB
SACE can offer you, such as the brand new electronic
trip units designed for the new Tmax T7 or the new
rapid accessory fitting system.
TMAX T1, T2 AND T3.
ALL SOLUTIONS PERFECTLY
COORDINATED, UP TO 250 A.
Tmax T1, T2 and T3 – the three “little ones” of the Tmax fam- current releases, designed and constructed to optimise space in
ily - were thought up from the beginning to work together. You the switchboard and simplify coupling with the circuit-breaker.
can select functions and performances which until now couldn't Tmax T1, T2 and T3 have a completely standardised range of
be found in circuit-breakers with these dimensions. Perfect up to accessories.
250 A.
There are so many characteristics common to the three sizes.
The single depth (70 mm) of the three pieces of apparatus mak-
ing installation truly simpler, the new arcing chambers produced
with a gasifying material, and an innovative construction system
allowing the arc extinction time to be reduced.
All three sizes are fitted with adjustment of the thermal threshold
as standard and have new - three-pole and four-pole - residual
TMAX T1. THE LITTLE ONE THAT'S REALLY BIG. dimensions. A breaking capacity of 85 kA at 415 V AC can be
Thanks to its extremely compact dimensions, Tmax T1 is a achieved. Tmax T2 can be fitted with a latest generation elec-
unique circuit-breaker in its category. Compared with any other tronic trip unit.
circuit-breaker with the same performance (160 A – up to 36 kA
at 415 V AC), the overall dimensions of the apparatus are nota- TMAX T3. 250 A IN A DEPTH OF 70 MM FOR THE
bly smaller. FIRST TIME.
Tmax T3 is the first circuit-breaker which carries 250 A in con-
TMAX T2. INTELLIGENCE AND HIGH PERFORMANCE siderably limited overall dimensions compared with any other
IN THE PALM OF YOU R HAND. similar apparatus – a really large step forward for this type of
Tmax T2 is the only 160 A circuit- equipment.
breaker available with such high per- Tmax T3 allows coordinations for motor protection to be made
formances in such very limited overall up to a power of 90 kW at 415 V AC.
TMAX T4, T5 AND T6.
BE FREE TO CHOOSE
UP TO 1000 A.
Tmax T4, T5 and T6 are the moulded-case circuit-breakers with The series of electronic trip units, equipped with latest genera-
the best performance/size ratio on the market. tion technology, offers solutions exclusive to ABB.
Their application possibilities are practically unlimited, thanks to T4, T5 and T6 have the same depth, simplifying their position-
their dedicated and specific ranges, advanced electronics, as well ing in the switchboard compartments, and also
as a complete and standardised range of accessories. have a complete, standardised and
The top quality materials and innovative construction techniques unified range of
used by ABB SACE mean Tmax circuit-breakers can guarantee accessories avail- 103,5 mm
truly exceptional performances, with a really high rated current/ able, simplifying
volume ratio. For example, T4 and T5 guarantee a breaking selection, making
capacity up to 200 kA at 415 V AC and an extraordinary 80 kA them flexible to use and
at 690 V AC. Moreover, they complete the range of applications reducing stocks.
up to 1150 V in alternating current and 1000 V in direct current.
NEW PR223EF TRIP UNIT. THIS IS WHERE THE ing can be optimised. And the outcome? Considerable reductions
EXCLUSIVE INNOVATION IS TO BE FOUND. in plant costs.
The new PR223EF trip unit with the EFDP system offers two
characteristics which until now were antithetic: selectivity and NEW PR223DS TRIP UNIT. FREEDOM OF CONTROL.
rapid tripping. With the new PR223EF, a new range up to 1000 The new PR223DS trip unit has been conceived and built for
A has been conceived for specific needs power distribution circuit-breakers.
requiring high selectivity values: rapid Now all the different electrical values of the
detection of the fault and no limit to the installation can be measured. And that's not
number of hierarchical levels of the distri- all – there are LEDs available on the front of
bution plant. With the EFDP system, the the trip unit which signal some configura-
size of the apparatus inside the installation tions and the presence of any alarms (over-
can be reduced and cable and busbar siz- load, incorrect connections, etc.).
TMAX T7.
FREEDOM TO THE NTH
POWER.
The new Tmax T7, available in two versions up to 1600 A either A great news is the new rapid accessory wiring system. No wires
with manual operating mechanism or motor operator, was con- inside the circuit-breaker, rapid, simple and safe connection to
ceived with a really revolutionary design for circuit-breakers of the external circuit, and no screws for fixing the external power
this type: advanced electronics, exceptional performances and supply cables.
new installation and accessory fitting solutions.
The exclusive news of the new cable interlock provides notable
Flexibility is absolutely exceptional with Tmax T7: they can be benefits in terms of optimal sizing. By using this accessory it is
installed both vertically and horizontally (in the withdrawable possible to interlock two circuit-breakers in any position and,
version, too), there are all types of terminals (among which, flat above all, to interlock a T7 with an air circuit-breaker as well.
orientated rear terminals) and a new, faster and safer racking-out Impossible until today, this answer is ideal for automatic transfer
system for the moving part. Moreover, cabling is considerably switch solutions.
facilitated by the reduced height.
Special attention has been paid to the electronics and the results The PR231 and PR232 trip units, with dip-switches for setting
are there to be seen … PR231, PR232, PR331 and PR332 are the protection thresholds, offer LEDs to signal protection tripped
the new interchangeable electronic trip units, with modularity for each protection function: this means the reason for circuit-
and rating-plugs which can be replaced by the customer. breaker tripping can always be found.
The PR332 is decidedly ahead of its time in the present refer-
ence panorama: fitted with a large graphic display, it allows all
the information needed to be displayed simply and clearly. It
also offers advanced protection functions (as well as the “clas-
sic” protection functions). For example, the exclusive data logger
function allowing all the events and values before the fault to be
recorded for later analysis.
Main characteristics
1
Index
Overview of the Tmax family ...............................................................................................1/2
General ..................................................................................................................................1/4
Construction characteristics
Modularity of the series ...........................................................................................................1/6
Distinguishing features of the series .......................................................................................1/8
1/1
1SDC210015D0205
Overview of the Tmax family
Circuit-breakers for AC-DC distribution

T1 1p T1
Size [A] 160 160
1 In
Poles
[A]
[Nr]
16…160
1
16…160
3/4
Ue [V] (AC) 50 - 60 Hz 240 690
[V] (DC) 125 500
Icu (380-415 V AC) [kA] B 25* (220/230 V AC) 16
[kA] C 25
[kA] N 36
[kA] S
[kA] H
[kA] L
[kA] V
Circuit-breakers for zone selectivity
Size [A]
Poles [Nr]
Ue [V] (AC) 50 - 60 Hz
EFDP zone selectivity
ZS zone selectivity
Circuit-breakers for motor protection
Size [A]
Poles [Nr]
Ue [V] (AC) 50 - 60 Hz
Magnetic only trip unit,
IEC 60947-2
PR221DS-I trip unit, IEC 60947-2
PR222MP trip unit, IEC 60947-4-1
PR231/P-I trip unit, IEC 60947-2
Circuit-breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC
Size [A]
Poles [Nr]
Icu max [KA] 1000 V AC
[KA] 1150 V AC
[KA] 1000 V DC
4 poles in series
Switch-disconnectors
T1D
Ith [A] 160
Ie [A] 125
Poles [Nr] 3/4
Ue [V] (AC) 50 - 60 Hz 690
[V] (DC) 500
Icm [kA] 2.8
Icw [kA] 2
* For In 16 A and In 20 A: Icu @ 220/230 V AC = 16 kA
Note: ABB SACE’s moulded-case circuit-breakers are also available in the versions according to UL Standards
(see catalogue “ABB SACE molded case circuit-breakers - UL 489 and CSA C22.2 Standard”).
1/2
1SDC210015D0205
T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7
160 250 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000 800/1000/1250/1600
1.6…160
3/4
63…250
3/4
20…320
3/4
320…630
3/4
630...1000
3/4
200...1600
3/4
1
690 690 690 690 690 690
500 500 750 750 750
36 36 36 36 36
50 50 50 50 50 50
70 70 70 70 70
85 120 120 100 120
200 200 150
T4 T5 T6 T7
250/320 400/630 630/800/1000 800/1000/1250/1600
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
690/1000 690/1000 690 690
Q Q Q
Q
T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7
160 250 250/320 400/630 800 800/1000/1250
3 3 3 3 3 3
690 690 690 690 690 690
Q Q Q
Q Q Q Q
Q Q Q
Q
T4 T5 T6
250 400/630 630/800
3/4 3/4 3/4
20 20 12
12 12
40 40 40
T3D T4D T5D T6D T7D

250 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000 1000/1250/1600
200 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000 1000/1250/1600
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
690 690 690 690 690
500 750 750 750 750
5.3 5.3 11 30 52.2
3.6 3.6 6 15 20
1/3
1SDC210015D0205
General
Tmax family is now available as a complete range of moulded case circuit-breakers up to 1600 A.
All the circuit-breakers, both three-pole and four-pole, are available in the fixed version; the sizes T2,
T3, T4 and T5 in the plug-in version and T4, T5, T6 and T7 in the withdrawable one as well.
With the same frame size, the circuit-breakers in the Tmax family, are available with different breaking
capacities and different rated uninterrupted currents.
1 Rated uninterrupted
current [A]
1SDC210014F0001
1/4
1SDC210015D0205
The electric arc interruption system used on the Tmax circuit-breakers allows the short-circuit cur-
rents of very high value to be interrupted extremely rapidly. The considerable opening speed of the
contacts, the dynamic blasting action carried out by the magnetic field and the structure of the arcing
chamber contribute to extinguishing the arc in the shortest possible time, notably limiting the value
of the specific let-through energy I2t and the current peak.
Prospective
short-circuit
current
Limited
let-through
current
1SDC210015F0001
1/5
1SDC210015D0205
Modularity of the series
7
22
21
1
19
18
23 20
4
1
17
16
15 5
14
6
10
8 2
12
9
11
13
1/6
1SDC210015D0205
Starting from the fixed version circuit-breaker, all the other versions
used for various requirements are obtained by means of mounting
conversion kits.
The following are available:
– kit for converting a fixed circuit-breaker into the moving part of
a plug-in and withdrawable one
– circuit-breaker fixed parts for plug-in and withdrawable circuit-
breakers
– conversion kit for the connection terminals.
24
Various accessories are also available:
1. Breaking unit
1
2. Trip units
3. Front
4. Auxiliary contacts - AUX and AUX-E
5. Undervoltage release - UVR
6. Shunt opening release - SOR and P-SOR
7. Terminal covers
8. Front for lever operating mechanism - FLD
9. Direct rotary handle - RHD
10. Stored energy motor operator - MOE
25 11. Key lock - KLF
12. Early auxiliary contact - AUE
13. Transmitted rotary handle - RHE
14. Front terminal for copper cable - FC Cu
15. Front extended terminal - EF
16. Multi-cable terminal (only for T4) - MC
17. Front terminal for copper-aluminium - FC CuAl
18. Front extended spread terminal - ES
26 19. Rear orientated terminal - R
20. Conversion kit for plug-in/withdrawable versions
21. Guide of fixed part in the withdrawable version
22. Fixed part - FP
23. Auxiliary position contact - AUP
24. Phase separators
25. PR010T
26. TT1
27. Racking out crank handle
28. Residual current release.
27
28
1SDC210A16F0001
1/7
1SDC210015D0205
Distinguishing features of the series
Double insulation
Tmax has double insulation between the live power parts (excluding the terminals) and the front parts
of the apparatus where the operator works during normal operation of the installation. The seat of
each electrical accessory is completely segregated from the power circuit, thereby preventing any
risk of contact with live parts, and, in particular, the operating mechanism is completely insulated in
relation to the powered circuits.
Furthermore, the circuit-breaker has oversized insulation, both between the live internal parts and
in the area of the connection terminals. In fact, the distances exceed those required by the IEC
1SDC210A17F0001
Standards and comply with what is foreseen by the UL 489 Standard.

1
Positive operation
The operating lever always indicates the precise position of the moving contacts of the circuit-breaker,
thereby guaranteeing safe and reliable signals, in compliance with the prescriptions of the IEC 60073
and IEC 60417-2 Standard (I = Closed; O = Open; yellow-green line = Open due to protection trip).
The circuit-breaker operating mechanism has free release regardless of the pressure on the lever
and the speed of the operation. Protection tripping automatically opens the moving contacts: to
1SDC210A18F0001
close them again, the operating mechanism must be reset by pushing the operating lever from the
intermediate position into the lowest open position.
Isolation behaviour
In the open position, the circuit-breaker guarantees circuit in compliance with the IEC 60947-2
Standard. The oversized insulation distances guarantee there are no leakage currents and dielectric
resistance to any overvoltages between input and output.
1SDC210A19F0001
Degrees of protection
The table indicates the degrees of protection guaranteed by the Tmax circuit-breakers according to
the prescriptions of the IEC 60529 Standard:
With Without Without With high With low With IP40

front front (2) terminal terminal terminal protection kit
covers covers covers on the front
A IP 40(3) IP 20 - - - -
1SDC210A20F0001
B(4) IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 40 IP 40 IP 40
C - - - IP 40(1) IP 30(1) -
(1) (3)
After correct installation Also for front for lever operating mechanism and direct rotary handle
(2) (4)
During installation of the electrical accessories Only for T1...T6
The fixed parts are always preset with IP20 degree of protection. IP54 degree of protection can
be obtained with the circuit-breaker installed in a switchboard fitted with a rotary handle operating
mechanism transmitted on the compartment door and special kit (RHE – IP54).
1/8
1SDC210015D0205
Operating temperature
The Tmax circuit-breakers can be used in ambient conditions where the surrounding air temperature
varies between -25 °C and +70 °C, and stored in ambients with temperatures between -40 °C and
+70 °C.
The circuit-breakers fitted with thermomagnetic trip units have their thermal element set for a refer-
ence temperature of +40 °C. For temperatures other than +40 °C, with the same setting, there is a
thermal trip threshold variation as shown in the table on page 4/50 and following.
The electronic trip units do not undergo any variations in performance as the temperature varies
but, in the case of temperatures exceeding +40 °C, the maximum setting for protection against
overloads L must be reduced, as indicated in the derating graph on page 4/37 and following, to take
into account the heating phenomena which occur in the copper parts of the circuit-breaker passed
1
through by the phase current.
For temperatures above +70 °C the circuit-breaker performances are not guaranteed. To ensure
service continuity of the installations, the way to keep the temperature within acceptable levels for
operation of the various devices and not only of the circuit-breakers must be carefully assessed, such
as using forced ventilation in the switchboards and in their installation room.
1SDC210A21F0001
Altitude
Up to an altitude of 2000 m the Tmax circuit-breakers do not undergo any alterations in their rated
performances. As the altitude increases, the atmospheric properties are altered in terms of composi-
tion, dielectric resistance, cooling capacity and pressure. Therefore the circuit-breaker performances
undergo derating, which can basically be measured by means of the variation in significant parameters
such as the maximum rated operating voltage and the rated uninterrupted current.
Altitude [m] 2000 3000 4000 5000

Rated service voltage, Ue [V~] 690 600 500 440
Rated uninterrupted current % 100 98 93 90
1/9
1SDC210015D0205
Electromagnetic compatibility
Operation of the protections is guaranteed in the presence of interferences caused by electronic
apparatus, atmospheric disturbances or electrical discharges by using the electronic trip units and the
electronic residual current releases. No interference with other electronic apparatus near the place of
installation is generated either. This is in compliance with the IEC 60947-2 Appendix B + Appendix F
Standards and European Directive No. 89/336 regarding EMC - electromagnetic compatibility.
1
1SDC210A23F0001
Tropicalisation
Circuit-breakers and accessories in the Tmax series are tested in compliance with the IEC 60068-2-30
Standard, carrying out 2 cycles at 55 °C with the “variant 1” method (clause 7.3.3). The suitability of
the Tmax series for use under the most severe environmental conditions is therefore ensured with the
hot-humid climate defined in the climatograph 8 of the IEC 60721-2-1 Standards thanks to:
– moulded insulating cases made of synthetic resins reinforced with glass fibres;
– anti-corrosion treatment of the main metallic parts;
– Fe/Zn 12 zinc-plating (ISO 2081) protected by a conversion layer, free from hexavalent-cromium
(ROHS-compliant), with the same corrosion resistance guaranteed by ISO 4520 class 2c;
– application of anti-condensation protection for electronic overcurrent releases and relative acces-
1SDC210A25F0001
sories.
Resistance to shocks and vibrations

The circuit-breakers are unaffected by vibrations generated mechanically and due to electromagnetic
effects, in compliance with the IEC 60068-2-6 Standards and the regulations of the major classifica-
tion organisations(1):
– RINA
– Det Norske Veritas
– Bureau Veritas
– Lloyd’s register of shipping
– Germanischer Lloyd
– ABS
– Russian Maritime Register of Shipping.
The T1-T5 Tmax circuit-breakers are also tested, according to the IEC 60068-2-27 Standard, to
resist shocks up to 12g for 11 ms. Please ask ABB SACE for higher performances in terms of resist-
ance to shocks.
(1)
Ask to ABB for Tmax certificates of approval.
1/10
1SDC210015D0205
Versions and types
All the Tmax circuit breakers are available in fixed versions, T2, T3, T4 and T5 in the plug-in version
and T4, T5, T6(*) and T7 also in the withdrawable one.
All the circuit breakers can be manually operated, by the operating lever or the rotary handle (direct
or transmitted), and electrically operated. For this issue different solutions are available:
– The solenoid operator for T1, T2 and T3
– The stored energy motor operator for T4, T5 and T6
– T7 with the stored energy operating mechanism, gear motor for the automatic charging of the
1SDC210A40F0001
closing springs and shunt opening and closing releases.

1
1SDC210A41F0001
Installation
Tmax circuit-breakers can be installed in the switchboards, mounted in any horizontal, vertical or
lying down position on the back plate or on rails, without undergoing any derating of their rated
characteristics. Tmax circuit-breakers can be installed easily in all types of switchboards, above all
thanks to the possibility of being supplied either by top or bottom terminals, without jeopardizing
the apparatus functionality(**).
Apart from fixing on the base plate, T1, T2 and T3 can also be installed on DIN 50022 rails, thanks
to the special fixing brackets.
Furthermore, the depth of 70 mm takes Tmax T3 to the same standard as the two smaller sizes,
making assembly of circuit-breakers up to 250 A in standard switchboards even simpler. In fact, it is
possible to prepare standardised support structures, facilitating the design stage and construction
of the switchboard metalwork.
(*)
Not available on the 1000 A version.
(**)
For uses at a voltage of 1000 V, T4V250 and T5V400 in the fixed version, and T4L250 and T5L400 in the plug-in version must
be supplied from above.
1/11
1SDC210015D0205
Racking-out with the door closed

With Tmax T4, T5, T6 and T7 circuit-breakers, in the withdrawable version, the circuit-breaker can
be racked-in and out with the compartment door closed, thereby increasing operator safety and
allowing rationalisation of low voltage arc proof switchboards.
Racking out can only be carried out with the circuit-breaker open (for obvious safety reasons), us-
ing a special racking-out crank handle supplied with the conversion kit from fixed circuit-breaker to
moving part of withdrawable circuit-breaker.
1SDC210A35F0001
Range of accessories
The completeness and installation rationality of the Tmax series is also achieved thanks to innovative
solutions in development of the accessories:
– single range of accessories for T1, T2 and T3; one for T4, T5 and T6, and one for T7, charac-
terised by completeness and simplicity for installation. Harmonisation of the accessories allows
reduction in stocks and greater service flexibility, offering increasing advantages for users of the
Tmax series;
– new system of rapid assembly for internal electrical accessories of Tmax T7 without cables for
the connections to the terminal box;
– same possibility of equipping with accessories, in terms of connection devices (terminals, terminal
covers and phase separators), between fixed circuit-breakers and fixed parts of plug-in circuit-
breakers for Tmax T2 and T3.
– moreover, Tmax offers a wide choice of residual current releases:
- three-pole and four-pole RC221 and RC222 up to 250 A with T1, T2 and T3;
- RC222 placed below, four-pole up to 500 A for T4 and T5;
- RC223 (type B) also sensitive to currents with continuous slowly variable components (IEC 60947-2
Annex M), four-pole for T3 and T4, up to 250 A;
- integrated residual current protection for PR332/P-LSIRc trip unit available for Tmax T7.
1/12
1SDC210015D0205
Compliance with Standards and company quality system
Tmax circuit-breakers and their accessories comply with the international IEC 60947-2 Standards
and the EC directive:
– “Low Voltage Directives” (LVD) no. 2006/95/CE (replaces 72/23/EEC and subsequent amend-
ments)
– Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.
Certification of compliance with the product Standards mentioned above is carried out, in accordance
with the European EN 45011 Standard, by the Italian certification organisation ACAE (Association
for Certification of Electrical Apparatus), member of the European organization LOVAG (Low Voltage
Agreement Group) and by the Swedish certification organization SEMKO.
The Test Room at ABB SACE is accredited by SINAL (certificate No. 062). The Tmax series
1
also has a range which has undergone certification according to the severe American UL 489
and CSA C22.2 Standards. Furthermore, the Tmax series is certified by the Russian GOST
1SDC210A37F0001
(Russia Certificate of Conformity) certification organisation. The pieces of apparatus comply

with the prescriptions for on-board shipping installations and are approved by the major Naval
Registers - Lloyd’s Register of Shipping, Germanischer Lloyd, Bureau Veritas, Rina, Det Norske
Veritas, Russian Maritime Register of Shipping, and ABS (please ask ABB SACE for confirmation
about the versions available).
ABB SACE’s Quality System complies with the international ISO 9001-2000 Standard (model for
quality assurance in design, development, construction, installation and service assistance) and with
the equivalent European EN ISO 9001 and Italian UNI EN ISO 9001 Standards.
The third certifying Organisation is RINA-QUACER. ABB SACE received the first certification in 1990
with three-year validity and this has now reached its fifth confirmation.
The new Tmax series has a hologram on the front, obtained using special anti-imitation techniques - a
guarantee of the quality and genuineness of the circuit-breaker as an ABB SACE product. Attention
to protection of the environment is another priority commitment for ABB SACE, and, as confirmation
of this, the environmental management system has been certified by RINA. ABB SACE - the first
industry in the electromechanical sector in Italy to obtain this recognition - thanks to a revision of
the production process with an eye to ecology - has been able to reduce the consumption of raw
materials and waste from processing by 20%. ABB SACE’s commitment to safeguarding the environ-
ment is also shown in a concrete way by Life Cycle Assessments (LCA) of the products, carried out
directly by ABB SACE’s Research and Development in collaboration with the ABB Research Centre.
Selection of materials, processes and packing materials is made optimising the true environmental
impact of the product, also foreseeing the possibility of its being recycled.
Furthermore, in 1997 ABB SACE developed its Environmental Management system and got it certified
in conformity with the international ISO14001 Standard, integrating it in 1999 with the Management
System for Health and Safety in the workplace according to OHSAS 18001 (Swedish National Test-
ing and Research Institute).
1/13
1SDC210015D0205
The ranges
Index
Tmax circuit-breakers for power distribution
Electrical characteristics .........................................................................................................2/4
General characteristics............................................................................................................2/6 2
Thermomagnetic trip units ......................................................................................................2/8
Electronic trip units................................................................................................................2/11
Circuit-breaker for zone selectivity
Electrical characteristics .......................................................................................................2/38
General characteristics..........................................................................................................2/39
EFDP zone selectivity: PR223EF ...........................................................................................2/40
ZS zone selectivity: PR332/P ................................................................................................2/43
Tmax circuit-breakers for motor protection
General characteristics..........................................................................................................2/48
Protection against short-circuit .............................................................................................2/49
Integrated protection: PR221MP...........................................................................................2/51
Tmax circuit-breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC
2/1
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breakers for
power distribution
Index
Tmax circuit-breakers for power distribution
Electrical characteristics .........................................................................................................2/4
General characteristics............................................................................................................2/6 2
Thermomagnetic trip units ......................................................................................................2/8
Electronic trip units................................................................................................................2/11
2/3
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breakers for power distribution
Electrical characteristics
Tmax T1 1P Tmax T1 Tmax T2

Rated uninterrupted current [A] 160 160 160
Poles [No.] 1 3/4 3/4
Rated service voltage, Ue (AC) 50-60 Hz [V] 240 690 690
(DC) [V] 125 500 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8 8
Rated insulation voltage, Ui [V] 500 800 800
Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 min. [V] 3000 3000 3000
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu B B C N N S H L
(AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [kA] 25* 25 40 50 65 85 100 120
(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/400/415 V [kA] – 16 25 36 36 50 70 85
(AC) 50-60 Hz 440 V [kA] – 10 15 22 30 45 55 75
(AC) 50-60 Hz 500 V [kA] – 8 10 15 25 30 36 50
(AC) 50-60 Hz 690 V [kA] – 3 4 6 6 7 8 10
(DC) 250 V - 2 poles in series [kA] 25 (at 125 V) 16 25 36 36 50 70 85
(DC) 250 V - 3 poles in series [kA] – 20 30 40 40 55 85 100
(DC) 500 V - 2 poles in series [kA] – – – – – – – –
(DC) 500 V - 3 poles in series [kA] – 16 25 36 36 50 70 85
2 (DC) 750 V - 3 poles in series

Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, Ics
(AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V
[kA]
[%Icu]
–
75%
–
100%
–
75% 75%
– –
100%
–
100%
–
100% 100%
–
(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/400/415 V [%Icu] – 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 100% 75% (70 kA)
(AC) 50-60 Hz 440 V [%Icu] – 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 75%
(AC) 50-60 Hz 500 V [%Icu] – 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 75%
(AC) 50-60 Hz 690 V [%Icu] – 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 75%
Rated short-circuit making capacity, Icm
(AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [kA] 52.5 52.5 84 105 143 187 220 264
(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/400/415 V [kA] – 32 52.5 75.6 75.6 105 154 187
(AC) 50-60 Hz 440 V [kA] – 17 30 46.2 63 94.5 121 165
(AC) 50-60 Hz 500 V [kA] – 13.6 17 30 52.5 63 75.6 105
(AC) 50-60 Hz 690 V [kA] – 4.3 5.9 9.2 9.2 11.9 13.6 17
Opening time (415 V) [ms] 7 7 6 5 3 3 3 3
Utilisation category (IEC 60947-2) A A A
Reference Standard IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2
Isolation behaviour Q Q Q
Trip units: thermomagnetic
T fixed, M fixed TMF Q – –
T adjustable, M fixed TMD – Q Q
T adjustable, M adjustable (5…10 x In) TMA – – –
T adjustable, M fixed (3 x In) TMG – – Q(8)
T adjustable, M adjustable (2.5…5 x In) TMG – – –
magnetic only MA – – Q(MF up to In 12.5 A)
electronic PR221DS – – Q
PR221GP/PR221MP – – Q
PR222DS – – –
PR223DS – – –
PR231/P – – –
PR232/P – – –
PR331/P – – –
PR332/P – – –
Interchangeability – – –
Versions F F F-P
Terminals fixed FC Cu FC Cu-EF-FC CuAl-HR F-FC Cu-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R
plug-in – – F-FC Cu-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R
withdrawable – – –
Fixing on DIN rail – DIN EN 50022 DIN EN 50022
Mechanical life [No. operations] 25000 25000 25000
[No. Hourly operations] 240 240 240
Electrical life @ 415 V AC [No. operations] 8000 8000 8000
[No. Hourly operations] 120 120 120
Basic dimensions - fixed version 3 poles W [mm] 25.4 (1 pole) 76 90
4 poles W [mm] – 102 120
D [mm] 70 70 70
H [mm] 130 130 130
Weight fixed 3/4 poles [kg] 0.4 (1 pole) 0.9/1.2 1.1/1.5
plug-in 3/4 poles [kg] – – 1.5/1.9
withdrawable 3/4 poles [kg] – – –
TERMINAL CAPTION FC Cu = Front for copper cables VR = Rear flat vertical P = plug-in circuit-breakers
F = Front FC CuAl = Front for copper-aluminium cables HR/VR = Rear flat orientated W = withdrawable circuit-breakers
(*)
EF = Front extended R = Rear orientated MC = Multicable The breaking capacity for settings In = 16 A
ES = Front extended spread HR = Rear flat horizontal F = fixed circuit-breakers and In = 20 A is 16 kA
2/4
1SDC210015D0205
Tmax T3 Tmax T4 Tmax T5 Tmax T6 Tmax T7
250 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000 800/1000/1250/1600
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
690 690 690 690 690
500 750 750 750 –
8 8 8 8 8
800 1000 1000 1000 1000
3000 3500 3500 3500 3500
N S N S H L V N S H L V N S H L S H L V(6)
50 85 70 85 100 200 200 70 85 100 200 200 70 85 100 200 85 100 200 200
36 50 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 100 50 70 120 150
25 40 30 40 65 100 180 30 40 65 100 180 30 45 50 80 50 65 100 130
20 30 25 30 50 85 150 25 30 50 85 150 25 35 50 65 40 50 85 100
5 8 20 25 40 70 80 20 25 40 70 80 20 22 25 30 30 42 50 60
36 50 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 – – – –
40 55 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 20 35 50 65 – – – –
36 50 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
–
75% 50%
– 16 25 36 50
100% 100% 100% 100% 100%

70 16
100%
25 36 50
100% 100% 100% 100%

70 16
100%
20
100%
36
100%
50
75%
–
100%
–
100%
–
100%
–
100%
2
75% 50% (27 kA) 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 100% 100%
75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 100% 100%
75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%(1) 100%(2) 100% 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 75% 100%
75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%(1) 100%(2) 100%(2) 75% 75% 75% 75% 100% 75% 75% 75%
105 187 154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440 187 220 440 440
75.6 105 75.6 105 154 264 440 75.6 105 154 264 440 75.6 105 154 220 105 154 264 330
52.5 84 63 84 143 220 396 63 84 143 220 396 63 94.5 105 176 105 143 220 286
40 63 52.5 63 105 187 330 52.5 63 105 187 330 52.5 73.5 105 143 84 105 187 220
7.7 13.6 40 52.5 84 154 176 40 52.5 84 154 176 40 46 52.5 63 63 88.2 105 132
7 6 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 10 9 8 7 15 10 8 8
A A B (400 A)(3) - A (630 A) B (630A - 800A)(5) - A (1000A) B(7)
IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2
Q Q Q Q Q
– – – – –
Q Q (up to 50 A) – – –
– Q (up to 250 A) Q (up to 500 A) Q (up to 800 A)(4) –
Q – – – –
– – Q (up to 500 A) – –
Q Q – – –
– Q Q Q –
– – – – –
– Q Q Q –
– Q Q Q –
– – – – Q
– – – – Q
– – – – Q
– – – – Q
– Q Q Q Q
F-P F-P-W F-P-W F-W(4) F-W
F-FC Cu-FC Cu Al-EF-ES-R F-FC Cu-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R-MC F-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R-RC F-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R-RC F-EF-ES-FC CuAl-HR/VR
F-FC Cu-FC Cu Al-EF-ES-R EF-ES-HR-VR-FC Cu-FC CuAl EF-ES-HR-VR-FC Cu-FC CuAl – –
– EF-ES-HR-VR-FC Cu-FC CuAl EF-ES-HR-VR-FC Cu-FC CuAl EF-HR-VR EF-HR/VR-RS-ES
DIN EN 50022 – – – –
25000 20000 20000 20000 10000
240 240 120 120 60
8000 8000 (250 A) - 6000 (320 A) 7000 (400 A) - 5000 (630 A) 7000 (630A) - 5000 (800A) - 4000 (1000A) 2000 (S, H, L versions) / 3000 (V version)
120 120 60 60 60
105 105 140 210 210
140 140 186 280 280
70 103.5 103.5 103.5 154 (manual) /178 (motorizable)
150 205 205 268 268
1.5/2 2.35/3.05 3.25/4.15 9.5/12 9.7/12.5 (manual) - 11/14 (motorizable)
2.7/3.7 3.6/4.65 5.15/6.65 – –
– 3.85/4.9 5.4/6.9 12.1/15.1 29.7/39.6 (manual) - 32/42.6(motorizable)
(1) (5)
75% for T5 630 Icw = 7.6 kA (630 A) - 10 kA (800 A) Notes: In the plug-in version of T2, T3 and T5
(2) (6)
50% for T5 630 Only for T7 800/1000/1250 A 630 and in the withdrawable version
(3) (7)
Icw = 5 kA Icw = 20 kA (S,H,L versions) - 15 kA (V version) of T5 630 the maximum rated current
(4) (8)
W version is not available on T6 1000 A For availability, please ask ABB SACE available is derated by 10% at 40 °C
2/5
1SDC210015D0205
General characteristics
The series of Tmax moulded-case circuit-breakers - complying with the IEC 60947-2 Standard - is
divided into seven basic sizes, with an application range from 1 A to 1600 A and breaking capacities
from 16 kA to 200 kA (at 380/415 V AC).
For protection of alternating current networks, the following are available:
– T1B 1p circuit-breaker, equipped with TMF thermomagnetic trip units with fixed thermal and
magnetic threshold (I3 = 10 x In);
– T1, T2, T3 and T4 (up to 50 A) circuit-breakers equipped with TMD thermomagnetic trip units
with adjustable thermal threshold (I1 = 0.7…1 x In) and fixed magnetic threshold (I3 = 10 x In);
– T2, T3 and T5 circuit-breakers, fitted with TMG trip units for long cables and generator protection
with adjustable thermal threshold (I1 = 0.7…1 x In) and fixed magnetic threshold (I3 = 3 x In) for
T2 and T3 and adjustable magnetic threshold (I3 = 2.5…5 x In) for T5;
– T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers with TMA thermomagnetic trip units with adjustable thermal threshold
(I1 = 0.7…1 x In) and adjustable magnetic threshold (I3 = 5…10 x In);
– T2 with PR221DS electronic trip unit;
– T4, T5 and T6 with PR221DS, PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD and PR223DS electronic trip units;
– the T7 circuit-breaker, which completes the Tmax family up to 1600 A, fitted with PR231/P, PR232/P,
PR331/P and PR332/P electronic trip units. The T7 circuit-breaker is available in the two versions:
2 with manual operating mechanism or motorizable with stored energy operating mechanism(*).
The field of application in alternating current of the Tmax series varies from 1 A to 1600 A with volt-
ages up to 690 V. The Tmax T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers equipped with TMF, TMD and
TMA thermomagnetic trip units can also be used in direct current plants, with a range of application
from 1 A to 800 A and a minimum operating voltage of 24 V DC, according to the appropriate con-
nection diagrams.
The three-pole T2, T3 and T4 circuit-breakers can also be fitted with MF and MA adjustable magnetic
only trip units, both for applications in alternating current and in direct current, in particular for motor
protection (see page 2/45 and following).
For all the circuit-breakers in the series, fitted with thermomagnetic and electronic trip units, the
single-phase trip current is defined (see page 4/57).
(*)
For motorisation, the T7 circuit-breaker with stored energy operating mechanism must be ordered, complete with geared motor for automatic
spring charging, opening coil and closing coil.
Interchangeability
The Tmax T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers can be equipped either with TMF, TMD, TMG or TMA
thermomagnetic trip units, MA magnetic only trip units or PR221DS, PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD,
PR222MP and PR223DS electronic trip units.
Similarly, Tmax T7 can also mount the latest generation PR231/P, PR232/P, PR331/P(1) and
PR332/P(1) electronic trip units.
Trip units
Circuit-breakers TMD TMA TMG
In [A] 20 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 320 400 500
T4 250 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
T4 320 V V V V V V V V V
T5 400 Q Q V V
T5 630 V V Q V V V
T6 630 Q
T6 800 Q
T6 1000
T7 800
T7 1000
T7 1250
T7 1600
Q = Complete circuit-breaker already coded (1)
If ordered loose PR331/P and PR332/P must be completed with the “trip unit adapters”
V = Circuit-breaker to be assembled (see page 3/42)
2/6
1SDC210015D0205
Range of application of the circuit-breakers in alternating
current and in direct current
AC Trip unit Range [A]
T1 1p 160 TMF 16…160
T1 160 TMD 16…160
T2 160 TMD 1.6…160
TMG 16…160
MF/MA 1…100
PR221DS 10…160
PR221GP 63…160
PR221MP 40…100
T3 250 TMG 63…250
TMD 63…250
MA 100…200
T4 250/320 TMD 20…50
TMA 80…250
MA 10…200
PR221DS 100…320
PR222DS/P-PR222DS/PD 100…320
T5 400/630
PR223DS
TMG
160…320
320…500
2
TMA 320…500
PR221DS 320…630
PR222DS/P-PR222DS/PD 320…630
PR223DS 320…630
T6 630/800/1000 TMA 630…800
PR221DS 630…1000
PR222DS/P-PR222DS/PD 630…1000
PR223DS 630…1000
T7 800/1000/1250/1600 PR231/P-PR232/P 400…1600
PR331/P-PR332/P 400…1600
DC
T1 1p 160 TMF 16…160
T1 160 TMD 16…160
T2 160 TMD 1.6…160
MF/MA 1…100 MF = magnetic only trip unit with fixed magnetic thresholds
T3 250 TMD/TMG 63…250 MA = magnetic only trip unit with adjustable magnetic thresholds
MA 100…200 TMF = thermomagnetic trip unit with fixe thermal and magnetic
thresholds
T4 250/320 TMD 20…50
TMD = thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and
TMA 80…250 fixedmagnetic thresholds
MA 10…200 TMA = thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and
T5 400/630 TMA/TMG 320…500 magnetic thresholds
TMG = thermomagnetic trip unit for generator protection
T6 630/800/1000 TMA 630…800 PR22_, PR23_, PR33_ = electronic trip units
Thanks to their simplicity of assembly, the end customer can change the type of trip unit ex-
tremely rapidly, according to their own requirements and needs: in this case, correct assembly
is the customer’s responsibility. Above all, this means into increased flexibility of use of the
circuit-breakers with considerable savings in terms of costs thanks to better rationalisation of
stock management.
MA PR221DS-PR222DS/P-PR222DS/PD-PR223DS(2) PR231/P(3)-PR232/P-PR331/P-PR332/P
10 25 52 80 100 125 160 200 100 160 250 320 400 630 800 1000 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
V V V V V V V V V V V Q
Q Q
V V Q
Q
Q
Q
V V Q
V V V Q
V V V V Q
V V V V V Q
(2) (3)
PR223DS, minimum In = 160 A. Interchangeability of PR231/P can be requested by means of the dedicated ordering
code 1SDA063140R1.
2/7
1SDC210015D0205
Thermomagnetic trip units
The Tmax T1 1p, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers can be fitted with thermomagnetic trip
units and are used in protection of alternating and direct current networks with a range of use from
1.6 A to 800 A. They allow the protection against overload with a thermal device (with fixed threshold
for T1 1p and adjustable threshold for T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 and T6) realised using the bimetal technique,
and protection against short-circuit with a magnetic device (with fixed threshold for T1, T2 and T3
and T4 up to 50 A and adjustable threshold for T4, T5 and T6).
The four-pole circuit-breakers are always supplied with the neutral protected by the trip unit and with
protection of the neutral at 100% of the phase setting for settings up to 100 A. For higher settings,
the protection of the neutral is at 50% of the phase setting unless the protection of the neutral at
100% of the phase setting is required.
Thermomagnetic trip units TMD e TMG (for T1, T2 and T3)
Thermal threshold
Adjustable from 0.7 to 1 x In
1SDC210B02F0001
Thermal threshold
1SDC210B03F0001
TMD = thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal threshold (I1 = 0.7…1 x In) and fixed magnetic threshold (I3 = 10 x In).
TMG = thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal threshold (I1 = 0.7…1 x In) and fixed magnetic threshold (I3 = 3 x In).
2/8
1SDC210015D0205
Furthermore, for Tmax T2, T3 and T5, the TMG thermomagnetic trip units with low magnetic trip
threshold are available. For T2 and T3 the trip unit has adjustable thermal threshold (I1 = 0.7…1 x In)
and fixed magnetic threshold (I3 = 3 x In), whereas for T5 the trip unit has adjustable thermal thresh-
old (I1 = 0.7…1 x In) and adjustable magnetic threshold (I3 = 2.5… 5 x In). The thermomagnetic trip
units can be used to protect long cables and for generator protection, both in direct current and in
alternating current.
TMD - T1 and T3
In [A] 16(1) 20(1) 25(2) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 125 160 200 250
Neutral [A] - 100% 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 – 160 200 250
I1=0.7…1 x In Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – – 80 100 125 160 2

T1 160 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q – Q – –
T3 250 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
I3 [A] 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 1000 1250 1250 1600 2000 2500
Neutral [A] - 100% 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 1000 1250 1250 1600 2000 2500
I3 = 10 x In Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – – 800 1000 1250 1600
TMD - T2
In [A] 1.6 2 2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Neutral [A] - 100% 1.6 2 2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
I1=0.7…1 x In Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 80 100
I3 [A] 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 500 500 500 500 500 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Neutral [A] - 100% 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 500 500 500 500 500 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
I3 = 10 x In Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 800 1000
TMG - T2
In [A] 25 40 63 80 100 125 160
Neutral [A] - 100% 25 40 63 80 100 125 160
I1=0.7…1 x In
I3 [A] 160 200 200 240 300 375 480
Neutral [A] - 100% 160 200 200 240 300 375 480
I3 = 3 x In
TMG - T3
In [A] 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
Neutral [A] - 100% 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
I1=0.7…1 x In
I3 [A] 400 400 400 400 480 600 750

Neutral [A] - 100% 400 400 400 400 480 600 750
I3 = 3 x In
Notes: (1) only T1B (2)

only T1B and T1C (3)
T1N I3 [A] = 500; T1B-C available also the version with I3 [A] = 500
– In identifies the setting current for protection of the phases (L1, L2 and L3) and of the neutral.
– The TMD and TMA thermomagnetic trip units have the thermal element with adjustable threshold I1 = 0.7…1 x In. The value of the thermal element adjustment which is obtained by acting on the
special selector, is intended at 40 °C. The magnetic element has fixed trip threshold with ± 20% tolerance according to what is indicated by the IEC 60947-2 (pos. 8.3.3.1.2) Standard. The trip
thresholds of the magnetic protection I3 are a function of the setting used both by the phase and neutral protection.
2/9
1SDC210015D0205
Thermomagnetic trip units
Thermomagnetic trip units TMD/TMA and TMG (for T4, T5 and T6)
Thermal threshold
Adjustable
Thermal threshold
1SDC210B04F0001
2 TMA = thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal threshold (I1 = 0.7…1 x In) and adjustable magnetic threshold (I3 = 5… 10 x In)
TMG (for T5) = thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal threshold (I1 = 0.7…1 x In) and adjustable magnetic threshold (I3 = 2.5 …5 x In)
TMD/TMA - T4
In [A] 20 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250
Neutral [A] - 100% 20 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250
I1=0.7…1 x In Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – 80 100 125 160
I3 = 10 x In [A] 320 320 500
I3 = 5...10 x In [A] 400…800 500…1000 625…1250 800…1600 1000…2000 1250…2500
I3 = 10 x In Neutral [A] - 100% 320 320 500 400…800 500…1000 625…1250 800…1600 1000…2000 1250…2500
I3 = 5...10 x In Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – 400…800 500…1000 625…1250 800…1600
TMA - T5
In [A] 320 400 500
Neutral [A] - 100% 320 400 500
I1=0.7…1 x In Neutral [A] - 50% 200 250 320
I3 [A] 1600…3200 2000…4000 2500…5000
Neutral [A] - 100% 1600…3200 2000…4000 2500…5000
I3 = 5...10 x In Neutral [A] - 50% 1000…2000 1250…2500 1600…3200
TMG - T5
In [A] 320 400 500
Neutral [A] - 100% 320 400 500
I1=0.7…1 x In
I3 [A] 800…1600 1000…2000 1250…2500
Neutral [A] - 100% 800…1600 1000…2000 1250…2500
I3 = 2.5...5 x In
TMA - T6
In [A] 630 800
Neutral [A] - 100% 630 800
I1=0.7…1 x In Neutral [A] - 50% 400 500
I3 [A] 3150...6300 4000...8000
Neutral [A] - 100% 3150...6300 4000...8000
I3 = 5…10 x In Neutral [A] - 50% 2000...4000 2500...5000
Notes
– In identifies the setting current for protection of the phases (L1, L2 and L3) and of the neutral.
– The TMA and TMG thermomagnetic trip units which equip the Tmax T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers have the thermal element with adjustable threshold I1 = 0.7…1 x In. The set current value which is obtained using
the special selector is intended at 40 °C. The magnetic element has adjustable trip threshold (I3 = 5…10 x In for TMA and I3 = 2.5…5 x In for TMG) with a tolerance of ± 20% according to what is indicated in the
IEC 60947-2 (par. 8.3.3.1.2) Standard. The trip thresholds of the magnetic protection I3 are a function of the setting used both by the phase and neutral protection.
2/10
1SDC210015D0205
Electronic trip units
The Tmax T2, T4, T5, T6 and T7 circuit-breakers, for use in alternating current, can be equipped with
overcurrent releases constructed using electronic technology. This allows protection functions to be
obtained which guarantee high reliability, tripping precision and insensitivity to temperature and to
the electromagnetic components in conformity with the standards on the matter.
The power supply needed for correct operation is supplied directly by the current sensors of the
release, and tripping is always guaranteed, even under single-phase load conditions and in corre-
spondence with the minimum setting.
Characteristics of the Tmax electronic trip units

Operating temperature -25 °C … +70 °C
Relative humidity 98%
Self-supply 0.2 x In (single phase)
Auxiliary power supply (where applicable) 24 V DC
Operating frequency 45…66 Hz
Electromagnetic compatibility (LF and HF) IEC 60947-2 Annex F
For Tmax T2, T4, T5 and T6 the protection trip unit consists of:
– 3 or 4 current sensors (current transformers) 2
– external current sensors (e.g. for the external neutral), when available
– a trip unit
– a trip coil (for T2 housed in the right slot, for T4, T5 and T6 integrated in the electronic trip unit).
For Tmax T7 the protection trip unit consists of:
– 3 or 4 current sensors (Rogowski coils and current transformers)
– external current sensors (e.g. for the external neutral)
– interchangeable rating plug
– a trip unit
– a trip coil housed in the body of the circuit-breaker.
Rating plugs
Circuit-breaker CS Rated In [A]
current 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
T7 800
1000
1250
1600
The current sensors supply the electronic trip unit with the energy needed for correct operation of
the trip unit and the signal needed to detect the current.
The current sensors are available with rated primary current as shown in the table.
Current sensors
In [A] 10 25 63 100 160 250 320 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
PR221DS T2 Q Q Q Q Q
T4 Q Q Q Q
T5 Q Q Q
T6 Q Q Q
PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD, T4 Q Q Q Q
PR223DS(1) T5 Q Q Q
T6 Q Q Q
PR231/P, PR232/P,
PR331/P, PR332/P T7 Q Q Q Q Q Q
(1)
For PR223DS, the minimum rated current is In=160 A.
When a protection function trips, the circuit-breaker opens by means of the trip coil, which changes
over a contact (AUX-SA, supplied on request, see chapter “Accessories” at page 3/20 and follow-
ing) to signal trip unit tripped. Signalling reset is of mechanical type and takes place with resetting
of the circuit-breaker.
2/11
1SDC210015D0205
Basic protection functions

(L) Protection against overload
This protection function trips when there is an overload with inverse long-time delay trip according to the IEC 60947-2
Standard (I2t=k). The protection cannot be excluded.
(S) Protection against short-circuit with time delay

This protection function trips when there is a short-circuit, with long inverse time-delay trip (I2t=k ON) or a constant
trip time (I2t=k OFF). The protection can be excluded.
(I) Instantaneous protection against short-circuit

This protection function trips instantaneously in case of a short-circuit. The protection can be excluded.
(G) Protection against earth fault

The protection against earth fault trips when the vectorial sum of the currents passing through the current sensors
exceeds the set threshold value, with long inverse time-delay trip (I2t=k ON) or a constant trip time (I2t=k OFF).
The protection can be excluded.
2
Advanced protection functions
The PR332/P trip unit makes it possible to carry out highly developed protection against the most varied types
of fault. In fact, it adds the following advanced protection functions to the basic protection functions.
(L) Protection against overload (IEC 60255-3)

This protection trips in case of an overload with inverse long-time delay according to IEC 60255-3 Standard, for
the coordination with fuses and MV protections. The protection can be excluded.
IEC 60255-3
(U) Protection against unbalanced phase

The protection function against unbalanced phase U can be used in those cases where a particularly precise
control is needed regarding missing and/or unbalance of the phase currents. The trip time is instantaneous. The
protection can be excluded.
(OT) Protection against overtemperature

The protection against overtemperature trips instantaneously when the temperature inside the trip unit exceeds
OT 85 °C, in order to prevent any temporary or continual malfunction of the microprocessor. The protection cannot
be excluded.
(Rc) Protection against residual current (1)
This integrated protection is based on current measurements made by an external toroid and is alternative to
Rc protection against earth fault G. The protection can be excluded.
(ZS) Zone selectivity (2)

ZS zone selectivity is an advanced method for carrying out coordination of the protections in order to reduce the
ZS trip times of the protection closest to the fault in relation to the time foreseen by time selectivity. Zone selectivity can
be applied to the protection functions S and G, with constant time-delay trip. The protection can be excluded.
(UV, OV, RV) Protections against voltage

The three protections trip with a constant time-delay in the case of undervoltage, overvoltage and residual volt-
age respectively. The latter allows to detect interruptions of the neutral (or of the earthing conductor in systems
UV OV RV with earthed neutral) and faults which cause movement of the star centre in systems with isolated neutral (e.g.
large earth faults) to be identified. Movement of the star centre is calculated by vectorially summing the phase
voltages. The protections can be excluded.
(RP) Protection against reversal of power

The protection against reversal power causes tripping of the breaker, with constant time-delay trip, when the
RP flow of power reverses sign and exceeds, as an absolute value, the set threshold. It is particularly suitable for
protection of large machines such as generators. The protection can be excluded.
(UF, OF) Protections of frequency

The two protections detect the variation in network frequency above or below the adjustable thresholds, opening
UF OF the circuit-breaker, with constant time-delay trip. The protection can be excluded.
(1)
It is not suitable for human protection.
(2)
For further information about zone selectivity, please see the section: “Circuit-breakers for zone selectivity”.
2/12
1SDC210015D0205
Electronic trip units for power distribution
SACE PR221DS
PR221DS PR221DS PR221GP
Protection functions
/
SACE PR222DS/P
2
PR222DS/P PR222DS/P
SACE PR222DS/PD
PR222DS/PD PR222DS/PD
SACE PR223DS
PR223DS
2/13
1SDC210015D0205
SACE PR231/P
PR231/P PR231/P
/
SACE PR232/P
2
PR232/P
SACE PR331/P
PR331/P
SACE PR332/P
PR332/P PR332/P PR332/P PR332/P

(1)
Protection functions Rc
(***) (***) (***) (***)
Advanced protection function(*) OT OT OT OT
Opt.(**) UV OV RV RP UF OF UV OV RV RP UF OF UV OV RV RP UF OF UV OV RV RP UF OF
(1)
In alternative to Rc (with external toroid). (**)
Available with PR330/V. Measurement module.
(*)
For all versions. (***)
According to IEC 60255-3.
2/14
1SDC210015D0205
PR221DS
The PR221DS trip unit, available for T2,T4, T5 and T6, provides protection functions against overload
L and short-circuit S/I (version PR221DS-LS/I): with this version, by moving the dedicated dip-switch,
you can choose whether to have inverse time-delay S or instantaneous I protection against short-
circuit. Alternatively, the version with only the protection function against instantaneous short-circuit
I is available (version PR221DS-I, also see page 2/45 and following).
There is a single adjustment for the phases and the neutral. However, for the neutral it can be decided
whether to request the protection threshold of the functions at 50 - 100% of that of the phases for
Tmax T2 In = 160 A (T2 In<160 A, N = 100%), whereas for T4, T5 and T6 it is possible to select
the protection threshold OFF, 50% or 100% directly from the front of the trip unit by means of the
specific dip switch.
The trip coil is always supplied with the PR221DS trip unit for Tmax T2 and is housed in the right-
hand slot of the circuit-breaker. Dedicated auxiliary contacts are available for T2 with electronic trip
unit (see page 3/22).
For Tmax T4, T5 and T6, the opening solenoid is housed internally and therefore, by not using the
right-hand slot of the circuit-breaker, all the auxiliary contacts available can be used.
PR221DS-LS/I
2
Protection S Dip-switch for
Against short-circuit neutral setting
with delayed trip (only for T4, T5 and T6)
Protection L
Against overload Socket for TT1
test unit
Protection I
Against short-circuit
with instantaneous trip
1SDC210B05F0001
PR221DS - Protection functions and parameterisations

Protection functions(1) Trip threshold Trip curves Excludability Relation t = f(I)
Against overload with long I1 = 0.40 - 1 x In step = 0.04 x In at 6 x I1

inverse time delay trip and Trip between 1.1...1.30 x I1 (T4,T5,T6) t1 = 3-6 (only for T2) - 12s (only for T4,T5,T6)
trip characteristic according Trip between 1.05...1.30 x I1 (T2) Tolerance: ± 10% up to 6 x In (T4,T5,T6)
to an inverse time curve ± 10% up to 2 x In (T2) – t = k/I2
(I2t=k) according to ± 20% above 6 x In (T4,T5,T6)
IEC 60947-2 Standard ± 20% above 2 x In (T2)
Against short-circuit with I2 = 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-5.5-6.5- at 8 x In

inverse short time delay 7-7.5-8-8.5-9-10 x In(2) t2 = 0.1 - 0.25s
trip and trip characteristic Tolerance: ± 10% (T4,T5,T6) Tolerance: ± 10% up to 6 x In (T4,T5,T6)
with inverse time (I2t=k) ± 10% up to 2 x In (T2) ± 20% above 6 x In (T4,T5,T6) Q t = k/I2
(selectable as an alternative ± 20% above 2 x In (T2) ± 20% (T2)
to protection function I)
Against short-circuit with I3 = 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-5.5-6.5-

instantaneous trip (selectable 7-7.5-8-8.5-9-10 x In(2)
as an alternative to Tolerance: ± 10% (T4,T5,T6) instantaneous Q t=k
protection function S) ± 20% (T2)
(1)
These tolerances hold in the following conditions: (2)
For T4 In = 320 A. T5 In = 630 A and T6 In = 1000 A I2max = 9.5 x In,
– self-powered trip unit at full power (without start-up) I3max = 9.5 x In.
– two or three-phase power supply The setting at 10 x In corresponds to 9.5 x In.
In conditions other than those considered, the following tollerances hold:
Trip threshold Trip time
S ± 20% ± 20%
I ± 20% ) 40ms
2/15
1SDC210015D0205
PR221GP
The PR221GP electronic release, only available on Tmax T2, is specific for protection of generators
with the following rated currents: In = 63 A, In = 100 A, In = 160 A.
It allows wide adjustment of the protection against overload L, I1 = 0.4…1 x In and above all provides
the possibility of selecting four trip curves.
Generator protection typically requires low trip thresholds with regard to protection against short-
circuit. Thanks to the PR221GP protection with time delay adjustable up to 2.5 times the rated current,
I2 = 1…2.5 x In is guaranteed, with the possibility of selecting between two trip curves.
It is also possible to set an instantaneous protection again short-circuit (I) fixed at 4 times the trip
threshold of the protection against delayed short-circuit (S).
The S and I protection functions are not alternative to each other.
As for Tmax T2 PR221DS, it is necessary to house the opening solenoid (SA) in the right-hand slot
of the circuit-breaker. Tmax T2 PR221GP can be fitted with the same electrical accessories avail-
able with PR221DS.
The functions present on this release allow the requirements imposed by the major naval registers,
such as LLRRS, ABS and RINA to be satisfied.
2
PR221GP
Protection S
with delayed trip Socket for TT1
test unit
Protection I
Protection L Against short-circuit
Against overload with instantaneous trip
1SDC210B59F0001
PR221GP – Protection and parameterisation functions

Relation
Protection function(1) Trip threshold Trip curves Excludability
t = f(I)
Against overload with long I1 = 0.40 - 1 x In at 6 x I1
inverse time delay trip and trip step = 0.04 x In t1 = 0.7 - 1.4 - 2.8 - 5.5 s
characteristic according to an Tolerance: ± 10% up to 2 x In
inverse time curve (I2t=constant) ± 20% over 2 x In – –
according to IEC 60947-2
Standard
Against short-circuit with inverse I2 = 1...2.5 x In at 5 x In

short time delay trip and trip step = 0.5 x In t2 = 0.07 - 0.175 s
characteristic with inverse time Tolerance: ± 10% Tolerance: ± 10% up to 2 x In – t = k/I
(I2t=constant)
Against short-circuit with in- I3 = 4 x I2 fixed

stantaneous trip with adjustable Tolerance: ± 20%
threshold instantaneous Q t=k
(1)
The tolerances are valid with these hypotheses:
– self-supplied release at full power and/or auxiliary power supply (without start up)
– two-phase or three-phase power supply
For all the cases not foreseen in the above hypotheses, the following tolerance
values are valid:

S ± 20% ± 20%
I ± 20% ) 40ms
2/16
1SDC210015D0205
PR222DS/P
The PR222DS/P trip unit, available for T4, T5 and T6, has protection functions against overload L,
delayed S and instantaneous I short-circuit (version PR222DS/P-LSI). Alternatively, as well as the
functions L, S, I, it also has protection against earth fault G (version PR222DS/P-LSIG).
Setting of the PR222DS trip unit can be carried out by means of dip switches on the front of the
circuit-breaker or electronically, using the PR010/T programming and control unit (see page 3/46) or
the BT030 wireless communication unit (see page 3/42).
There is a single setting for the phases and neutral, for which one can decide whether to set the
threshold of the protection functions to OFF, to 50% or to 100% that of the phases by means of two
dedicated dip switches.
Furthermore, on the front of the PR222DS/P (or PR222DS/PD) trip units, signalling of pre-alarm and
alarm of protection L is available. The pre-alarm threshold value, signalled by the red LED fixed, is
equal to 0.9 x I1. It is also possible to transmit remotely the alarm of protection L, simply connecting
connector X3 to the dedicated contact.
PR222DS/PD
Apart from the protection functions available for the PR222DS/P trip unit (for the settings see page
2
2/20), the PR222DS/PD trip unit, available for T4, T5 and T6 also has the dialogue unit integrated
with Modbus® RTU protocol.
The Modbus® RTU protocol has been known and used worldwide for many years and is now a mar-
ket standard thanks to its simplicity of installation, configuration and to its integration in the various
different supervision, control and automation systems, as well as good level performances.
The PR222DS/PD trip units allow the Tmax T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers to be integrated in a com-
munication network based on the Modbus® RTU protocol. Modbus® RTU provides a Master-Slave
system architecture where a Master (PLC, PC…) cyclically interrogates several Slaves (field devices).
The devices use the EIA RS485 standard as the physical means for data transmission at a maximum
transmission speed of 19.2 kbps.
Again for this trip unit, the power supply needed for correct operation of the protection functions is
supplied directly by the current transformers of the trip unit, and tripping is always guaranteed, even
under conditions of single-phase load down. Nevertheless, communication is only possible with an
auxiliary power supply of 24 V DC.
PR222DS/PD - Electrical characteristics

Auxiliary power supply (galvanically insulated) 24 V DC ± 20%
Maximum ripple ± 5%
Inrush current @ 24 V 1 A for 30 ms
Rated current @ 24 V 100 mA
Rated power @ 24 V 2.5 W
The PR222DS/PD release, with integrated communication and control functions, allows a wide
range of information to be acquired and transmitted remotely, opening and closing commands to be
carried out by means of the electronic version motor operator, the configuration and programming
parameters of the unit to be stored, such as the current thresholds of the protection functions and
the protection curves.
All the information can be consulted both locally, directly on the front of the circuit-breaker with the
front display unit FDU or on the HMI030 switchgear multi-meter, and remotely by means of supervi-
sion and control systems.
Moreover, by means of the BT030 external module, to be connected to the test connector of the
PR222DS/PD trip unit, wireless communication to a PDA or Notebook is possible through a Blue-
tooth port.
The PR222DS/PD trip units can be associated with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts in electronic ver-
sion, to know the state of the circuit-breaker (open/closed), and with MOE-E motor operator (the
AUX-E are compulsory when MOE-E is to be used) to remotely control circuit- breaker opening and
closing as well.
If the circuit-breaker fitted with the PR222DS/PD trip unit is inserted in a supervision system, during
the test phases with the PR010/T unit, communication is automatically abandoned and starts again
on completion of this operation.
2/17
1SDC210015D0205
Communication functions PR222DS/P PR222DS/PD PR223DS

Protocol Modbus RTU Modbus RTU
standard standard
Physical medium EIA RS485 EIA RS485
Speed (maximum) 19.2 kbps 19.2 kbps
Measurement functions
Phase currents Q(1) Q Q
Neutral current Q(1) Q Q
Ground current Q(1) Q Q
Voltages (phase to phase, phase to earth) Q(6)
Powers (active, reactive, apparent) Q(6)
Power factors Q(6)
Energies Q(6)
Peak factor Q
Frequency Q(6)
Signalling functions
L pre-alarm and alarm LED Q(5) Q(5) Q
2 L alarm output contact (2)
Available data
Q Q Q
Circuit-breaker status (open, closed) (3) Q Q

Mode (local, remote) Q Q
Protection parameters set Q(1) Q Q
Alarms
Protections: L, S, I, G Q(1) Q Q
Failed tripping under fault conditions Q(1) Q Q
Maintenance
Total number of operations Q Q
Total number of trips Q Q
Number of trip tests Q Q
Number of manual operations Q Q
Number of trips for each individual protection function Q Q
Record of last trip data Q(1) Q Q
Commands
Circuit-breaker opening/closing (with motor operator) Q Q
Alarm reset Q(1) Q Q
Circuit-breaker reset (with motor operator) Q Q
Setting the curves and protection thresholds Q(1) Q Q
Safety function
Automatic opening in the case of failed
Trip command fail (with motor operator) (4) Q Q
Events
Changes in circuit-breaker state, in the protections and all the alarms Q Q
(1)
With PR010/T unit or BT030 unit
(2)
Typical contact: MOS photo Vmax: 48 V DC/30 V AC
Rmax = 35 ohm
(3)
Available with AUX-E electronic auxiliary contacts
(4)
The motor operator must be in electronic version (MOE-E) and electronic auxiliary contacts (AUX-E) have to be used
(5)
Signals: – Pre-alarm L - permanently lit
– Alarm L - flashing (0.5 s ON / 0.5 s OFF)
– Incongruent manual setting (L > S / S > I) - flashing (1 s ON / 2 s OFF)
– WINK (remote control to identify the relay) - flashing (0.125 s ON / 0.125 s OFF)
(6)
With VM210
2/18
1SDC210015D0205
PR222DS/P
Protection S
with delayed trip
Protection I
Protection L
Against overload
Socket for TT1

test unit
Dip-switch for
neutral setting
Socket for connection

of PR010/T test unit
and BT030 wireless Selection for electronic
communication unit or manual setting
1SDC210B06F0001
2
PR222DS/PD
Protection S
with delayed trip Protection I
Protection L
Against overload
Dip-switch for
Socket for TT1 neutral setting
test unit
Enablement of
remote operations
and BT030 wireless Selection for electronic
communication unit or manual setting
1SDC210B07F0001
PR223DS
LED signalling
the status of the
circuit-breaker
and BT030 wireless
communication unit
Push botton for
operation
Socket for TT1 mode selection
test unit (local/remote)
and on-board
diagnosis system
LED signalling alarm
of the circuit-breaker
1SDC210B08F0001
2/19
1SDC210015D0205
PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD and PR223DS(5) - Protection functions and parameterisations

Protection functions Trip threshold Trip curves(1) Excludability Relation t = f(I)
Against overload with long Manual setting Manual setting

inverse time delay trip and I1 = 0.40….1 x In step = 0.02 x In at 6 x I1
trip characteristic according t1 = 3 - 6 - 9 - 18s(2)
to an inverse time curve
– t = k/I2
(I2t= k) according to Electronic setting Electronic setting
IEC 60947-2 Standard I1= 0.40…1 x In step 0.01 x In at 6 x I1 t1 = 3…18s step 0.5s(2)
Trip between 1.1...1.3 x I1 Tolerance: ± 10%
Against short-circuit with Manual setting Manual setting

inverse short time delay trip I2 = 0.6-1.2-1.8-2.4-3-3.6-4.2-5.8-6. at 8 x In
(3)
and trip characteristic with 4-7-7.6-8.2-8.8-9.4-10 x In t2 = 0.05 - 0.1- 0.25 - 0.5s
inverse time (I2t= k) Q t = k/I2
or definite time Electronic setting Electronic setting
I2 = 0.60…10 x In step 0.1 x In at 8 x In t2 = 0.05…0.5s step 0.01s
Tolerance: ± 10% Tolerance: ± 10%(4)
Manual setting Manual setting
2 I2 = 0.6-1.2-1.8-2.4-3-3.6-4.2-5.8-6. t2 = 0.05 - 0.1 - 0.25 - 0.5s

4-7-7.6-8.2-8.8-9.4-10 x In(3)
Q t=k
Electronic setting Electronic setting
I2 = 0.60…10 x In step 0.1 x In t2 =0.05…0.5s step 0.01s
Tolerance: ± 10% Tolerance: ± 10%(4)
Against short-circuit with Manual setting

instantaneous trip I3 = 1.5-2.5-3-4-4.5-5-5.5-6.5-7-7.5
-8-9-9.5-10.5-12 x In(3)
instantaneous Q t=k
Electronic setting
I3 = 1.5…12 x In(3) step 0.1 x In
Tolerance: ± 10%
Against earth fault with Manual setting Manual setting

inverse short time delay I4 = 0.2-0.25-0.45-0.55-0.75-0.8- up to up to up to up to
trip and trip characteristic 1 x In 3.15 x I4 2.25 x I4 1.6 x I4 1.10 x I4
according to an inverse time t4 = 0.1s t4 = 0.2s t4 = 0.4s t4 = 0.80s
Q t = k/I2 (6)
curve (I2t= k)
I4 = 0.2…1 x In step 0.1 x In t4 = 0.1...0.8s step 0.01s
Tolerance: ± 10% Tolerance: ± 15%
(1)
For T4 In = 320 A, T5 In = 630 A and T6 In = 1000 A t1 = 10.5s
– self-powered trip unit at full power and/or auxiliary supply (3)
For T4 In = 320 A and T5 In = 630 A. T6 In = 1000 A I2max = 9.5 x In andI3max = 9.5 x In
– two or three-phase power supply For T6 In = 800 A I3max = 10.5 x In
(4)
In conditions other than those considered, the following tollerances hold: Tolerance: ± 10 ms
(5)
The setting of the PR223DS trip unit is electronic only (local/remote)
Trip threshold Trip time The L protection can be set at I1 = 0.18...1 x In. For I1 < 0.4 x In the neutral setting must be at
S ± 20% ± 20% 100% of that of the phases
(6)
t = k/I2 up to the current value indicated, t = k (equating to the chosen setting) beyond the
I ± 20% ) 50ms
current value indicated
G ± 20% ± 20%
2/20
1SDC210015D0205
PR223DS
Apart from the traditional L, S, I, and G protection functions, the PR223DS release, available on
T4, T5 and T6, also offers the possibility of measuring the main electrical values. In fact, using the
accessory VM210, and without using any voltage transformers, the user has access not only to the
current values but also to the voltage, power and energy values, both locally, directly on the front of
the circuit-breaker with the front display unit FDU, or on the interface for the front of the switchboard
HMI030, and remotely via a supervisor and control system.
Setting the PR223DS release can only be carried out electronically, using the PR010/T test unit
(setting in local mode) or the dialogue (setting in remote mode). For the protection function adjust-
ments, see page 2/20.
For the neutral, it is possible to set the protection threshold of the functions to OFF, to 50% and to
100% of that of the phases (for protection L settings below 0.4 x In, it is obligatory to set the neutral to
100%). The pre-alarm and alarm signalling of protection L are also available by means of a dedicated
LED on the front of the release. The pre-alarm threshold value is equal to 0.9 x I1.
Still on the front of the release, the LEDs signalling the following information are available: state of the
connection to the opening solenoid, use of the default parameters, mode (local or remote), presence
of auxiliary power supply and setting the neutral.
2
PR223DS - Measurements
Measurements With distributed N Without distributed N
Effective current values I1, I2, I3, Ine I1, I2, I3
Effective voltage values V1, V2, V3, V12, V23, V31 V12, V23, V31
Apparent powers Stot, S1, S2, S3 Stot
Active powers Ptot, P1, P2, P3 Ptot
Reactive powers Qtot, Q1, Q2, Q3 Qtot
Power factors cos cos
Energies ETOT ETOT
Phase peak factor Q Q
Frequency f f
The PR223DS trip unit, with integrated ModBus RTU protocol based dialogue unit, allows a wide
range of information to be acquired and transmitted remotely and to carry out opening and closing
commands.
The PR223DS trip unit can be associated with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts, to know the state of the
circuit-breaker (open, closed), and with MOE-E motor operator (the AUX-E are compulsory when
MOE-E is to be used) to remotely control circuit-breaker opening and closing as well.
If the PR223DS trip unit is inserted in a supervision system, during the test and configuration with
the PR010/T unit, communication is automatically abandoned and starts again on completion of
these operations.
The unit is self-supplied by means of current sensors housed in the electronic release. Operation of
the electronic release is also guaranteed when there is a single-phase load and in correspondence
with the minimum setting. An external power supply must be connected to activate the dialogue
function and the measurement functions.
Auxiliary power supply - Electrical characteristics

PR223DS
Inrush current @ 24 V ~ 4 A for 0.5 ms
Rated current @ 24 V ~ 80 mA
Rated power @ 24 V ~2W
2/21
1SDC210015D0205
PR231/P
The PR231/P trip unit is the basic trip unit for Tmax T7. It provides protection functions against
overload L and short-circuit S/I (version PR231/P-LS/I): with this version, by moving the dedicated
dip-switch, you can choose whether to have protection S or protection I. Alternatively the version
with only the protection function against instantaneous short-circuit I is available (version PR231/P-I
see also page 2/45 and following).
Setting the trip parameters of the PR231/P trip unit is made directly on the front of the circuit-breaker
by means of dip switches, and there is only one for the phases and the neutral, so it is possible to
set the protection threshold, at 50% or at 100% of the phase protection.
To guarantee protection of the installation by means of the PR231/P protection trip unit, it is necessary
to select the rated network frequency (50/60 Hz), by means of the special dip-switch.
Interchangeability of PR231/P can be requested by means of the dedicated ordering code
1SDA063140R1.
2 PR231/P
Protection S
with delayed trip
Protection L
Against overload
Dip-switch for
Socket for TT1 neutral setting
test unit
Protection I
Rating Plug
1SDC210B54F0001
Dip-switch for
network frequency
PR231/P - Protection functions and parameterisations

Against overload with long inverse time I1 = 0.40...1 x In step = 0.04 x In at 6 x I1 at 6 x I1

delay trip and trip characteristic according Trip between 1.1...1.3 x I t1 = 3 - 12s
1
to an inverse time curve (I2t= k) according to Tolerance: (10% – t = k/I2
IEC 60947-2 Standard
Against short-circuit with long inverse time I2 = 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-5.5- at 10 x In at 10 x In

delay trip and trip characteristic with inverse 6.5-7-7.5-8-8.5-9-10 x In t2 = 0.1 - 0.25s
time (I2t= k) (selectable as an alternative to Tolerance: (10% Tolerance: (10% Q t = k/I2
protection function I)
Against short-circuit with istantaneous trip I3 = 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-

(selectable as an alternative to protection 5.5-6.5-7-7.5-8-8.5-9-
function S) 10 x In instantaneous – t=k
Tolerance: (10%
(1)
These tolerances hold in the following conditions:
– self-powered trip unit at full power
– two or three-phase power supply

S ± 10% ± 20%
I ± 15% ) 60ms
2/22
1SDC210015D0205
PR232/P
The PR232/P release, available for T7, provides protection functions against overload L, delayed
short-circuit S and instantaneous short-circuit I (version PR232/P-LSI).
Setting the trip parameters (see table) of the PR232/P release can be carried out by means of the
dip-switches, and is unique for the phases and the neutral, for which it is possible to set the protection
threshold to OFF, to 50%, 100% or 200% of the threshold of the phases directly from the front of the
release by means of a special dip-switch. In particular, adjustment of the neutral to 200% of the phase
current requires setting protection L to respect the current-carrying capacity of the circuit-breaker.
To guarantee protection of the installation by means of the PR232/P protection release, it is necessary
to select the rated network frequency (50/60 Hz), by means of the special dip-switch.
PR232/P LED signalling Alarm for protection function S

Protection S
Against short-circuit with delayed trip
Protection I
LED signalling Alarm for protection function L Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip
Protection L
Against overload
LED signalling Alarm
for protection function I
2
Socket for TT1
test unit Dip-switch for
neutral setting
Dip-switch for
network frequency
Rating Plug
1SDC210B55F0001
Socket for connection of SACE

PR010/T, BT030 and PR030/B

Thermal Excludability Relation
Protection functions Trip threshold Trip curves(1) memory(2) t = f(I)
Against overload I1 = 0.40...1 x In step = 0.04 x In at 6 x I1
with long inverse Trip between 1.1...1.3 x I1 t1 = 3s t1 = 6s t1 = 12s t1 = 18s
time delay trip and Tolerance: (10%
trip characteristic
according to an Q – t = k/I2
inverse time curve
(I2t= k) according to
IEC 60947-2
Standard
Against short-circuit I2 = 0.6 - 0.8 - 1.2 - 1.8 - 2.4 - at 10 x In

with inverse short 3 - 3.6 - 4.2 - 5 - 5.8 - 6.6 - t2=0.1s t2=0.25s t2=0.5s t2=0.8s
time delay trip and 7.4 - 8.2 - 9 - 10 x In Q Q t = k/I2
Tolerance: (10%
trip characteristic Tolerance: (10%
with inverse time
(I2t = k) or definite I2 = 0.6 - 0.8 - 1.2 - 1.8 - 2.4 - I > I2
time 3 - 3.6 - 4.2 - 5 - 5.8 - 6.6 - t2=0.1s t2=0.25s t2=0.5s t2=0.8s
7.4 - 8.2 - 9 - 10 x In – Q t=k
Tolerance: (10%
Tolerance: (10%
Against short-circuit I3 = 1.5 - 2.5 - 3 - 4 - 4.5 - 5 -

with istantaneous 5.5 - 6.5 - 7 - 7.5 - 8 - 9 -
trip 9.5 - 10.5 - 12 x In instantaneous – Q t=k
Tolerance: (10%
(1)
These tolerances hold in the following conditions:
– self-powered trip unit at full power (without start-up)
– two or three-phase power supply
S ± 10% ± 20%
I ± 15% ) 60ms
(2)
Active up to 7 min. after tripping of the breaker (ON/OFF setting by means of PR010/T test unit).
2/23
1SDC210015D0205
There are three red LEDs available on the front of the PR232/P trip unit dedicated to signalling alarm
of protections L, S, and I. Furthermore, a yellow flashing LED allows the state of pre-alarm of function
L to be signalled, which is activated when 90% of the set trip threshold is reached.
The yellow flashing LED every 3s indicates the normal operation.
PR232/P - Alarm and Pre-alarm LED

Protection Colour Pre-alarm Alarm Last trip
Yellow Q – –
Red – Q Q
Red – Q Q
2
Red – Q Q
Following circuit-breaker opening, it is possible to know which protection function made the release
trip by connecting the PR030/B battery unit onto the front of the release. This is also possible thanks
to the PR010/T test and configuration unit.
By means of the BT030 wireless communication unit the PR232/P can be connected to a PDA or
to a personal computer, extending the range of information available for the user. Infact, by means
of the ABB SACE’s SD-Pocket communication software, it is possible to read the values of the
currents flowing through the circuit-breaker, the value of the last 20 interrupted currents, and the
protection settings.
2/24
1SDC210015D0205
PR331/P
The PR331/P, available for Tmax T7 in the PR331/P-LSIG version, with its complete range of protec-
tion functions together with the wide combination of thresholds and trip times offered is it suitable for
protecting a wide range of alternating current installations. In addition to protection functions the unit
is provided with multifunction LED indicators. Furthermore, PR331/P allows connection to external
devices enhancing its advanced characteristics like remote signalling and monitoring, or interface
from front of HMI030 panel.
PR331/P Protection S Protection I

Against short-circuit with delayed trip Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip
LED signalling Alarm for

LED signalling Alarm and prealarm for protection function L protection function I
Protection L
Against overload LED signalling Alarm for
protection function G
Dip-switch for
neutral setting
Dip-switch for
Protection G
Against earth fault
2
network frequency
Info/test
Rating Plug push button
1SDC210B56F0001
Socket for connection of SACE

PR010/T, BT030 and PR030/B LED signalling Alarm for protection function S

Against overload with long I1 = 0.40….1 x In step = 0.025 x In at 3 x I1

inverse time-delay trip and Trip between 1.05 ... 1.2 x I1 t1 = 3 - 12 - 24 - 36 - 48 - 72 -
trip characteristic according 108 - 144s
– t = k/I2
to an inverse time curva Tolerance: ±10% up to 6 x In
(I2t=k) according to the IEC ±20% above 6 x In
60947-2 Standard
Against short-circuit with I2 = 0.6 - 0.8 - 1.2 - 1.8 - 2.4 - at 10 x In
short inverse time-delay trip 3 - 3.6 - 4.2 - 5 - 5.8 - 6.6 - t2 = 0.1….0.8s step = 0.1s
and trip characteristic with 7.4 - 8.2 - 9 - 10 x In Tolerance: min (±10%. ±40ms) Q t = k/I2
inverse time (I2t=k) or with Tolerance: ±7% up to 6 x In
definite time ±10% above 6 x In
I2 = 0.6 - 0.8 - 1.2 - 1.8 - 2.4 - I > I2
3 - 3.6 - 4.2 - 5 - 5.8 - 6.6 - t2 = 0.1….0.8s step = 0.1s
7.4 - 8.2 - 9 - 10 x In Tolerance: ±15% up to 6 x In Q t=k
Tolerance: ±7% up to 6 x In ±20% above 6 x In
±10% above 6 x In
Against short-circuit with I3 = 1.5-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12-
adjustable instantaneous 13-14-15 x In(2) ) 30 ms Q t=k
trip Tolerance: ±10%
Against earth fault with I4 = 0.2-0.3-0.4-0.6-0.8-0.9-1 x In 4.47 x I4 3.16 x I4 2.24 x I4 1.58 x I4

short inverse time-delay Tolerance: ±7% t4 = 0.1s t4 = 0.2s t4 = 0.4s t4 = 0.80s
trip and trip characteristic Q t = k/I2 (3)
Tolerance: ±15%
according to an inverse time
curve (I2t=k) or with definite
time I4 = 0.2-0.3-0.4-0.6-0.8-0.9-1 x In t4 = 0.1s t4 = 0.2s t4 = 0.4s t4 = 0.80s
Q t=k
Tolerance: ±7% Tolerance: min (±10%. ±40ms)
(1)
For T7 In = 1250 A/1600 A I3max = 12 x In
(3)
– self-powered trip unit at full power and/or auxiliary supply t = k/I2 up to the current value indicated, t = k equating to the chosen setting)
– two or three-phase power supply beyond the current value indicated

L Release between 1.05 and 1.25 x I1 ± 20%
S ± 10% ± 20%
I ± 15% ) 60ms
G ± 15% ± 20%
2/25
1SDC210015D0205
User interface
The user communicates directly with the trip unit by means of the dip switches. Up to four LEDs
(according to the version) are also available for signalling. These LEDs (one for each protection) are
active when:
• a protection is timing. For protection L the pre-alarm status is also shown;
• a protection has tripped (the corresponding LED is activated by pressing the “Info/Test” pushbut-
ton);
• a failure in connection of a current sensor or in the trip coil is detected. The indication is active
when the unit is powered (through current sensors or an auxiliary power supply);
• wrong rating plug for the circuit-breaker.
The protection tripped indication works even with the circuit-breaker open, without the need for any
internal or external auxiliary power supply. This information is available for 48 hours of inactivity after
the trip and is still available after reclosing. If the query is made more than 48 hours later it is sufficient
to connect a PR030/B battery unit, PR010/T, or a BT030 wireless communication unit.
Setting the neutral

Protection of the neutral can be set at 50%, 100% or 200% of the phase currents. In particular, adjust-
2 ment of the neutral at 200% of the phase current is possible if the following inequality is respected:
I1 x In x %Ne ) Iu. The user can also switch the neutral protection OFF.
Test function
The Test function is carried out by means of the Info/Test pushbutton and the PR030/B battery unit
(or BT030) fitted with a polarized connector housed on the bottom of the box, which allows the device
to be connected to the test connector on the front of PR331/P trip units. The PR331/P electronic
trip unit can be tested by using the SACE PR010/T test and configuration unit by connecting it to
the TEST connector.
Power supply
The unit does not require an external power supply either for protection functions or for alarm signal-
ling functions. It is self-supplied by means of the current sensors installed on the circuit-breaker.
For operation, it is required for the three phases to be passed through by a current of 70 A. An ex-
ternal power supply can be connected in order to activate additional features, and in particular for
connection to external devices: HMI030 and PR021/K.
PR331/P - Electrical characteristics

Maximum ripple 5%
Inrush current @ 24 V 3 A for 5 ms
Rated power @ 24 V 1W
Communication
By means of the BT030 wireless communication unit, PR331/P can be connected to a PDA or to
a personal computer, extending the range of information available for the user. In fact, by means of
ABB SACE’s SD-Pocket communication software, it is possible to read the values of the currents
flowing through the circuit-breaker, the value of the last 20 interrupted currents, and the protection
settings.
PR331/P can also be connected to the optional external PR021/K signalling unit, for the remote
signalling of protections alarms and trips, and to HMI030, for the remote user interfacing.
2/26
1SDC210015D0205
PR332/P
The SACE PR332/P trip unit for Tmax T7 (available in four versions: PR332/P-LI, PR332/P-LSI,
PR332/P-LSIG and PR332/P-LSIRc) is a sophisticated and flexible protection system based on a
state-of-the art microprocessor and DSP technology. Fitted with the optional internal PR330/D-M
dialogue unit, PR332/P turns into an intelligent protection, measurement and communication device,
based on the Modbus® RTU protocol. By means of the PR330/D-M, PR332/P can also be con-
nected to the ABB EP010 Fieldbus plug adapter, which makes it possible to choose among several
different networks, such as Profibus and DeviceNet.
The new PR332/P is the result of ABB SACE’s experience in designing protection trip units. The
exhaustive range of settings makes this protection unit ideal for general use in power distribution.
Access to information and programming using a keyboard and graphic liquid crystal display is ex-
tremely simple and intuitive. An integrated ammeter and many other additional features are provided
over and above the protection functions. These additional functions can be further increased with
addition on board of the dialogue, signalling, measurement, and wireless communication units. All
the thresholds and trip curve delays of the protection functions are stored in special memories which
retain the information even when no power is supplied.
2
PR332/P
ENTER button to confirm data or change pages
Alarm LED
Cursor UP button
Cursor DOWN button

Warning
indicator LED Button to exit
submenus or cancel
operations (ESC)
Rating Plug
1SDC210B57F0001
Info/test push button
PR332/P with PR330/V Cursor UP button

ENTER button to confirm data or change pages
Cursor DOWN button
PR330/V measurement
module
Alarm LED
Selector for setting
Warning
the voltage source for
indicator LED
PR330/V (EXT, TEST, INT)
PR330/V
power supply LED
Rating Plug Info/test push button
1SDC210B58F0001
Button to exit submenus or cancel

operations (ESC)
2/27
1SDC210015D0205

Relation Thermal Zone
Protection functions Trip threshold Trip curves(1) Excludability
t = f(I) memory(2) selectivity(2)
Against overload with inverse I1 = 0.4...1 x In step = 0.01 x In at 3 x I1
long-time delay trip according to Trip between 1.05...1.2 x I1 t2 = 3...144s step = 3s Q
– t = k/I2 –
IEC 60947-2 Standard (I2t=k) or in Tolerance: ±10% up to 6 x In
accordance with the IEC 60255-3 ±20% above 6 x In
Standard (t=f(_)(3))
I1 = 0.4...1 x In step = 0.01 x In at 3 x I1
t2 = 3...144s step = 3s t = f(_)(3)
Trip between 1.05...1.2 x I1 Q Q –
Tolerance: ±10% up to 6 x In _ = 0.02-1-2
±20% above 6 x In
Against short-circuit with short I2 = 0.6...10 x In step = 0.1 x In at 10 x In

inverse time-delay trip and trip Tolerance: ±7% up to 6 x In t2 = 0.05...0.8s step = 0.01s
characteristic with inverse time Q t = k/I2 Q –
±10% above 6 x In Tolerance: ±15% up to 6 x In
(I2t=k) or with definite time ±20% over 6 x In
I2 = 0.6...10 x In step = 0.1 x In t2 = 0.05...0.8s step = 0.01s

Tolerance: ±7% up to 6 x In t2 sel = 0.04...0.2s step = 0.01s Q t=k – Q
2 Against short-circuit with

adjustable instantaneous trip
±10% above 6 x In
I3 = 1.5...15 x In step = 0.1 x In

Tolerance: min (±10%; ±40ms)
) 30 ms Q t=k – –
Tolerance: ±10%
Against earth fault with short I4 = 0.2...1 x In step = 0.02 x In t4 = 0.1...1s step = 0.05s
inverse time-delay trip and trip Q t = k/I2 (5) – –
Tolerance: ±7% Tolerance: ±15%
characteristic according to an
inverse time curve (I2t=k) or with I4 = 0.2...1 x In step = 0.02 x In t4 = 0.1...1s step = 0.05s
definite time t4 sel = 0.04...0.2s step = 0.05s Q t=k – Q
Tolerance: ±7%
Tolerance: min (±10%; ±40ms)
Against residual current fault with I6 = 3-5-7-10-20-30 A t6 = 0.06-0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4-0.5-

Rc definite time-delay trip Tolerance: 0-20% 0.8s Q t=k – –
Tolerance: ±20%
Against overtemperature of the trip Trip unit temperature over 85 °C

unit with instantaneous trip
OT instantaneous – temp = k – –
Against unbalanced phase with I6 = 2%...90% x I1 step = 1% x I1 t6 = 0.5...60 s step = 0.5s

definite time-delay trip Tolerance: ±10% Tolerance: min (±20%; ±100ms) Q t=k – –
PR332/P with PR330/V - Advanced protection functions and parameterisations

Relation Thermal Zone
Advanced protection functions Trip threshold Trip curves(1) Excludability
t = f(I) memory(2) selectivity
Against undervoltage with U8= 0.5...0.95 x Un step = 0.01 x Un t8 = 0.1...5s step = 0.1s
UV adjustable constant time Q t=k – –
Tolerance: ±5% Tolerance: min (±20% ±100ms)
Against overvoltage with adjustable U9= 1.05...1.2 x Un step = 0.01 x Un t9 = 0.1...5s step = 0.1s
OV constant time Q t=k – –
Against residual voltage with U10= 0.1...0.4 x Un step = 0.01 x Un t10 = 0.5...30s step = 0.5s
RV adjustable constant time Q t=k – –
Against reversal of power with P11= -0.3...-0.1 x Pn step = 0.02xPn t11 = 0.5...25s step = 0.1s
RP adjustable constant time Q t=k – –
Against underfrequency with f12= 0.90...0.99 x fn step = 0.01 x fn t12 = 0.5...3s step = 0.1s
UF adjustable constant time Q t=k – –
Tolerance:±5% Tolerance: min (±10% ±100ms)
Against overfrequency with f13= 1.01...1.10 x fn step = 0.01 x fn t13 = 0.5...3s step = 0.1s
OF adjustable constant time Q t=k – –
Tolerance:±5% Tolerance: min (±10% ±100ms)
(1) (2)
These tolerances are valid under the following conditions: Active with 24V auxiliary power supply
– trip unit self-supplied at full power and/or auxiliary supply (3_ - 1)
– two or three-phase power supply L Release between 1.05 and 1.25 x I1 ± 20% (3)
t= t (3 x I1)
I _-1 1
In conditions other than those considered, the following
S
I
± 10%
± 15%
± 20%
) 60ms I1()
tollerances hold: (4)
For T7 In = 1250 A/1600 A I3max = 12 x In
G ± 15% ± 20% (5)
k = (2s) · (I4)2
Other ± 10% ± 20%
2/28
1SDC210015D0205
Setting the neutral
In PR332/P, the neutral protection is 50% of the value set for phase protection in the standard ver-
sion. The neutral protection can be excluded or set to 100%.
In installations where very high harmonics occur, the resulting current at the neutral can be higher
than that of the phases. Therefore it is possible to set the neutral protection at 150% or 200% of the
value set for the phases. In this case it is necessary to reduce the setting of protection L accord-
ingly. The table below lists the neutral settings for the various possible combinations between type
of circuit-breaker and the threshold I1 setting.
Adjustable neutral protection settings

Threshold I1 settings (overload protection)
Circuit-breaker model 0.4 < I1 < 0.5 0.5 < I1 < 0.66 0.66 < I1 < 1(*)
T7 0-50-100-150-200% 0-50-100-150% 0-50-100%
(*)
The setting I1 =1 indicates the maximum overload protection setting. The actual maximum setting allowable must take into account any derating
based on temperature, the terminals used and the altitude (see the “Installations” chapter)
2
Start-up function
The start-up function allows protections S, I and G to operate with higher trip thresholds during the
start-up phase. This avoids untimely tripping caused by the high inrush currents of certain loads
(motors, transformers, lamps).
The start-up phase lasts from 100 ms to 30 s, in steps of 0.01 s. It is automatically recognized by
the PR332/P trip unit when the peak value of the maximum current exceeds the threshold that can
be set by the user. A new start-up becomes possible after the current has fallen down to 0.1 x In, if
the trip unit is supplied from an external source.
Protection against overtemperature

The user has the following signals or commands available for the protection against overtempera-
ture:
– lighting up of the “Warning” LED when the temperature is higher than 70 °C or lower than -20 °C
(temperature at which the microprocessor is still able to operate correctly);
– lighting up of the “Alarm” LED when the temperature is higher than 85 °C or lower than -25 °C
(temperature above which the microprocessor can no longer guarantee correct operation) and,
when decided during the unit configuration stage, simultaneous opening of the circuit-breaker
with indication of the trip directly on the display, as for the other protections.
Self-diagnosis
The PR332/P range of trip units contains an electronic circuit which periodically checks the continu-
ity of internal connections (trip coil and each current sensor, including the Source Ground Return
when present).
In the case of a malfunction an alarm message appears directly on the display. The Alarm is high-
lighted by the Alarm LED as well.
Residual Current
Different solutions are available for integrated residual current protection. The basic choice is
PR332/P-LSIRc, which has all the characteristics of PR332/P-LSI and residual current protection
as well. When additional features are required, the solution is PR332/P-LSIG with an additional
PR330/V module (see next paragraph). Using this configuration, residual current protection is added
to a powerful unit, having the features of PR332/P-LSI and all the add-ons described for the PR330/V
module, such as voltage protection and advanced measurement functions.
Residual current protection acts by measuring the current by means the external dedicated toroid.
2/29
1SDC210015D0205
Test Functions
Once enabled from the menu, the “Info/Test” pushbutton on the front of the trip unit allows correct
operation of the chain consisting of the microprocessor, trip coil and circuit-breaker tripping mecha-
nism to be checked.
The control menu also includes the option of testing correct operation of the display, signalling
LEDs.
By means of the front multi-pin connector it is possible to apply a SACE PR010/T Test unit which
allows the functions of the PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD, PR223DS, PR223EF, PR232/P, PR331/P and
PR332/P ranges of trip units to be tested and checked.
User interface
The human-machine interface (HMI) of the device is made up of a wide graphic display, LEDs, and
browsing pushbuttons. The interface is designed to provide maximum simplicity.
The language can be selected from among five available options: Italian, English, German, French
and Spanish.
As in the previous generation of trip units, a password system is used to manage the “Read” or “Edit”
2 modes. The default password, 0001, can be modified by the user.
The protection parameters (curves and trip thresholds) can be set directly via the HMI of the device.
The parameters can only be changed when the trip unit is operating in “Edit” mode, but the informa-
tion available and the parameter settings can be checked at any time in “Read” mode.
When a communication device (internal PR330/D-M module or external BT030 device) is connected,
it is possible to set parameters simply by downloading them into the unit (over the network for PR330/
D-M, by using the SD-Pocket software and a PDA or a notebook for BT030). Parameterisation can
then be carried out quickly and automatically in an error-free way by transferring data directly from
DocWin.
Indicator LEDs
LEDs on the front panel of the trip unit are used to indicate all the pre-alarms (“WARNING”) and alarms
(“ALARM”). A message on the display always explicitly indicates the type of event concerned.
Example of events indicated by the “WARNING” LED:
– unbalance between phases;
– pre-alarm for overload (L1>90% x I1);
– first temperature threshold exceeded (70 °C);
– contact wear beyond 80%;
– phase rotation reversed (with optional PR330/V).
Example of events indicated by the “ALARM” LED:

– timing of function L;
– timing of function S;
– timing of function G;
– second temperature threshold exceeded (85 °C);
– contact wear 100%;
– timing of Reverse Power flow protection (with optional PR330/V).
Data logger
By default PR332/P, is provided with the Data Logger function that automatically records in a wide
memory buffer the instantaneous values of all the currents and voltages. Data can be easily down-
loaded from the unit by means of SD-Pocket or SD-TestBus2 applications and can be transferred
to any personal computer for elaboration. The function freezes the recording whenever a trip occurs
or in case of other events, so that a detailed analysis of faults can be easily performed. SD-Pocket
and SD-TestBus2 allow also reading and downloading of all the others trip information.
• Number of analog channels: 8
• Maximum sampling rate: 4800 Hz
• Maximum sampling time: 27 s (@ sampling rate 600 Hz)
• 64 events tracking.
2/30
1SDC210015D0205
Trip information and opening data
In case a trip occurs PR332/P store all the needed information:
• Protection tripped
• Opening data (current)
• Time stamp (guaranteed with auxiliary supply or self-supply with power failure no longer than
48h).
By pushing the “Info/Test” pushbutton the trip unit shows all these data directly on display.
No auxiliary power supply is needed. The information is available to user for 48 hours with the circuit
breaker open or without current flowing.
The information of the latest 20 trips are stored in memory.
If the information can be furthermore retrieved more than 48 hours later, it is sufficient to connect a
PR030/B battery unit or a BT030 wireless communication unit.
Load control
Load control makes it possible to engage/disengage individual loads on the load side before the
overload protection L is tripped, thereby avoiding unnecessary trips of the circuit-breaker on the
supply side. This is done by means of contactors or switch-disconnectors (externally wired to the
trip unit), controlled by the PR332/P through PR021/K unit.
2
Two different Load Control schemes can be implemented:
– disconnection of two separate loads, with different current thresholds
– connection and disconnection of a load, with hysteresis.
Current thresholds and trip times are smaller than those available for selection with protection L,
so that load control can be used to prevent overload tripping. External PR021/K accessory unit is
required for Load Control. The function is only active when an auxiliary power supply is available.
PR330/V Measurement Module

This optional internal module, installed in PR332/P, allows the trip unit to measure the phase and
neutral voltages and to process them in order to achieve a series of features, in terms of protection
and measurement.
PR330/V module, when is ordered mounted on the circuit-breaker, does not require any external
connection or voltage transformers since it is connected internally to the upper terminals of Tmax
T7 (selector in “INT” position) through the internal voltage sockets. When necessary, the connection
of voltage pick-ups can be moved to any other point (i.e. lower terminals), by using the alternative
connection located in the terminal box and switching the selector to the “EXT” position. For the
dielectric test of the circuit-breaker the selector must be switched to the “Insulating TEST” position.
PR330/V is able to energize the PR332/P while line voltage input is above 85 V. The use of Voltage
Transformers is mandatory for rated voltages higher than 690 V.
Voltage transformers shall have burdens between 5 VA and 10 VA and accuracy class 0.5 or better.
Additional Protections with PR330/V:
– Undervoltage (UV) protection
– Overvoltage (OV) protection
– Residual voltage (RV) protection
– Reversal of power (RP) protection
– Underfrequency (UF) protection
– Overfrequency (OF) protection.
All the above indicated protections can be excluded, although it is possible to leave only the alarm
active when required: in this case the trip unit will indicate the “ALARM” status. With the circuit-breaker
closed, these protections also operate when the trip unit is self-supplied. With the circuit-breaker
open, they operate when the auxiliary power supply (24 V DC or PR330/V) is present.
Measurement function
The current measurement function (ammeter) is present on all versions of the PR332/P trip unit. The
display shows histograms showing the currents of the three phases and neutral on the main page.
Furthermore, the most loaded phase current is indicated in numerical format. Earth fault current,
where applicable, is shown on a dedicated page.
The latter current value takes on two different meanings depending on whether the external toroidal
transformer for the “Source Ground Return” function or the internal transformer (residual type) is
connected.
2/31
1SDC210015D0205
The ammeter can operate either with self-supply or with an auxiliary power supply voltage. The display
is rear-lit and the ammeter is active even at current levels lower than 160 A.
Accuracy of the ammeter measurement chain (current sensor plus ammeter) is no more than 1.5%
in the 0.3-6 x In current interval of In.
– Currents: three phases (L1, L2, L3), neutral (Ne) and earth fault;
– Instantaneous values of currents during a period of time (data logger);
– Maintenance: number of operations, percentage of contact wear, opening data storage (last 20
trips and 20 events).
When the optional PR330/V is connected the following additional measurement function are
present:
– Voltage: phase-phase, phase-neutral and residual voltage
– Instantaneous values of voltages during a period of time (data logger)
– Power: active, reactive and apparent
– Power factor
– Frequency and peak factor
– Energy: active, reactive, apparent, counter.
2 Communication
PR332/P electronic trip unit can be fitted with communication modules, which make possible to
exchange data and information with other industrial electronic devices by means of a network.
The basic communication protocol implemented is Modbus RTU, a well-known standard of wide-
spread use in industrial automation and power distribution equipment. A Modbus RTU communica-
tion interface can be connected immediately and exchange data with the wide range of industrial
devices featuring the same protocol. ABB SACE has developed a complete series of accessories
for electronic trip unit PR332/P:
– PR330/D-M is the communication module for PR332/P protection trip units. It is designed to allow
easy integration of the Tmax circuit-breakers in a Modbus network. The Modbus RTU protocol is
of widespread use in the power as well as the automation industry. It is based on a master/slave
architecture, with a bandrate of up to 19.2 kbps. A standard Modbus network is easily wired up
and configured by means of an RS485 physical layer. ABB SACE trip units work as slaves in the
field bus network. All information required for simple integration of PR330/D-M in an industrial
communication system are available on the ABB Web page.
– BT030 is a device to be connected to the Test connector of PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD, PR223DS,
PR223EF, PR232/P, PR331/P and PR332/P trip units. It allows Bluetooth communication between
the trip unit and a PDA or a Notebook with a Bluetooth port. This device is dedicated to use with
the SD-Pocket or SD-TestBus2 application. It can provide the auxiliary supply needed to energize
the protection trip unit by means of rechargeable batteries.
– EP010-FBP-PDP22 is the Fieldbus Plug interface allows connection of ABB SACE trip units with
Modbus communication to a Profibus, DeviceNet, or AS-I field bus network.
Furthermore, a new generation of software dedicated to installation, configuration, supervision and

control of protection trip units and circuit- breakers is now available:
– SD-View 2000
– SD-Pocket
– SD-TestBus2.
All information required for simple integration of PR330/D-M in an industrial communication system
are available on the ABB Web page (http://www.abb.com).
2/32
1SDC210015D0205
Measurement, signalling and available data functions
Details about functions available on PR332/P, trip units with PR330/D-M and EP010 – FBP – PDP22
are listed in the table below:
Communication functions PR332/P PR332/P+PR330/D-M

+PR330/D-M and EP010
Protocol Modbus RTU FBP-PDP22
standard
Physical means RS485 Profibus-DP or DeviceNet cable
Speed (maximum) 19.2 kbps 115 kbps
Measurement functions
Phase currents Q Q
Neutral current Q Q
Ground current Q Q
Voltage (phase-phase, phase-neutral, residual) opt.(1) opt.(1) (2)
Power (active, reactive, apparent) opt.(1) opt.(1) (3)
Power factor opt.(1) (4)
Frequency and peak factor

Energy (active, reactive, apparent)
opt.(1)
opt.(1)
(4)
(4)
2
Harmonic analysis – –
Signalling functions
LED: auxiliary power supply, pre-alarm, alarm, transmission, reception Q Q
Temperature Q Q
Indication for L, S, I, G and other protection Q Q
Available data
Circuit-breaker status (open, closed) Q Q
Circuit-breaker position (racked-in, racked-out) Q Q
Mode (local, remote) Q Q
Protection parameters set Q Q
Load control parameters Q Q
Alarms
Protections: L, S, I, G Q Q
Undervoltage, overvoltage and residual voltage protection (timing and trip) opt.(1) opt.(1)
Reverse power protection (timing and trip) opt.(1) opt.(1)
Directional protection (timing and trip) – –
Underfrequency/overfrequency protection (timing and trip) opt.(1) opt.(1)
Phases rotation – –
Failed tripping under fault conditions Q Q
Maintenance
Total number of operations Q Q
Total number of trips Q Q
Number of trip tests Q Q
Number of manual operations Q Q
Number of separate trips for each protection function Q Q
Contact wear (%) Q Q
Record data of last trip Q Q
Commands
Circuit-breaker open/close Q Q
Alarms reset Q Q
Setting of curves and protection thresholds Q Q
Synchronize system time Q Q
Events
Status changes in circuit-breaker, protections and all alarms Q Q
(1)
with PR330/V
(2)
no residual voltage
(3)
no apparent power available
(4)
please ask ABB for further details
2/33
1SDC210015D0205
Power supply
The PR332/P trip unit does not normally require any external power supplies, being self-supplied
from the current sensors (CS): to activate the protection and ammeter functions, it is sufficient for at
least one phase to have a current load higher than 80 A.
The unit ensures fully self-supplied operation. When an auxiliary power supply is present, it is also
possible to use the unit with the circuit-breaker either open or closed with very low current flowing
through (<80 A).
It is also possible to use an auxiliary power supply provided by the PR030/B portable battery unit
(always supplied), which allows the protection functions to be set when the trip unit is not self sup-
plied.
PR332/P stores and shows all the information needed after a trip (protection tripped, trip current,
time, date). No auxiliary supply is required for this functionality.
PR332/P PR330/D-M
Auxiliary power supply (galvanically insulated) 24 V DC ± 20% from PR332/P
2 Maximum ripple
Inrush current @ 24 V
5%
3 A for 5 ms
± 5%
~0.5 A for 5 ms
Rated power @ 24 V 2W +1 W
Inrush current @ 24 V when modules connected 5 A for 5 ms
Rated power @ 24 V when modules connected 3W
(*)
PR330/V can give power supply to the trip unit when at least one line voltage is equal or higher to 85V RMS.
2/34
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breaker for
zone selectivity
Index
General characteristics..........................................................................................................2/39 2
EFDP zone selectivity: PR223EF ...........................................................................................2/40
ZS zone selectivity: PR332/P ................................................................................................2/43
2/37
1SDC210015D0205
Zone selectivity
T4 T5 T6 T7
Rated uninterrupted current [A] 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000 800/1000/1250/1600

Poles [No.] 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
Rated service current, Ue (AC) 50-60 Hz [V] 690 690 690 690
(DC) [V] 750 750 750 750
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8 8 8
Rated insulation voltage, Ui [V] 1000 1000 1000 1000
Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 min. [V] 3500 3500 3500 3500
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu L L L S H L V(1)
(AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [kA] 200 200 200 85 100 200 200
(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V [kA] 120 120 100 50 70 120 150
(AC) 50-60 Hz 440 V [kA] 100 100 80 50 65 100 130
(AC) 50-60 Hz 500 V [kA] 85 85 65 40 50 85 100
(AC) 50-60 Hz 690 V [kA] 70 70 30 30 42 50 60
(AC) 50-60 Hz 1000 V [kA] 16 16 – – – – –
2 Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, Ics

(AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [%Icu] 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 100% 100%
(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V [%Icu] 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 100% 100%
(AC) 50-60 Hz 440 V [%Icu] 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 100% 100%
(AC) 50-60 Hz 500 V [%Icu] 100% 100%(2) 75% 100% 100% 75% 100%
(AC) 50-60 Hz 690 V [%Icu] 100% 100%(3) 75% 100% 75% 75% 75%
(AC) 50-60 Hz 1000 V [%Icu] 50% 25% – – – – –
(AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [kA] 440 440 440 187 220 440 440
(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V [kA] 264 264 220 105 154 264 330
(AC) 50-60 Hz 440 V [kA] 220 220 176 105 143 220 286
(AC) 50-60 Hz 500 V [kA] 187 187 143 84 105 187 220
(AC) 50-60 Hz 690 V [kA] 154 154 63 63 88.2 105 132
(AC) 50-60 Hz 1000 V [kA] 32 32 – – – – –
Utilisation category (IEC 60947-2) A B (400A)(4) - B (630A - 800A)(5)- B(6)
A (630A) A (1000A)
Isolation behaviour Q Q Q Q
Reference Standard IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2
Trip unit: electronic PR223EF Q Q Q –
PR332/P – – – Q
Versions F-P-W(7) F-P-W(7) F-W F-W
Terminals fixed F-FC Cu-FC CuAl- F-FC Cu-FC CuAl- F-FC CuAl- F-EF-ES-FC CuAl-
EF-ES-R-MC(8) EF-ES-R(8) EF-ES-R-RC HR/VR
plug-in EF-ES-HR-VR-FC EF-ES-HR-VR-FC
– –
Cu-FC CuAl Cu-FC CuAl
withdrawable EF-ES-HR-VR-FC EF-ES-HR-VR-FC EF-HR-VR EF-HR/VR-ES-RS
Cu-FC CuAl Cu-FC CuAl
Mechanical life [No. operations] 20000 20000 20000 10000
[No. Hourly operations] 240 120 120 60
Electrical life @ 415 V AC [No. operations] 8000 (250A) - 7000 (630A) - 7000 (630A) - 2000 (S, H, L versions) -
6000 (320A) 5000 (800A) 5000 (800A) - 3000 (V version)
4000 (1000A)
[No. Hourly operations] 120 60 60 60
Basic dimensions - fixed version 3 poles W [mm] 105 140 210 210
4 poles W [mm] 140 184 280 280
D [mm] 103.5 103.5 103.5 154 (manual)/178 (motorizable)
H [mm] 205 205 268 268
Weight fixed 3/4 poles [kg] 2.35/3.05 3.24/4.15 9.5/12 9.7/12.5 (manual)/
11/14 (motorizable)
plug-in 3/4 poles [kg] 3.6/4.65 5.15/6.65 – –
withdrawable 3/4 poles [kg] 3.85/4.9 5.4/6.9 12.1/15.1 29.7/39.6 (manual)/
32/42.6 (motorizable)
(1) (6)
TERMINAL CAPTION HR = Rear flat horizontal Only for T7 800/1000/1250 A Icw = 20 kA (S, H, L versions) - Note: in the plug-in/withdrawable
(2)
EF = Front extended VR = Rear flat vertical 75% for T5 630 15 kA (V version) version of T5 630 the
(3) (7)
F = Front HR/VR = Rear flat horientated 50% for T5 630 For applications at 1000 V, only maximum rated current is
(4)
ES = Front extended spread F = Fixed circuit-breaker Only up to 630 V, Icw = 5 kA available in the fixed version derated by 10% at 40 °C.
(5) (8)
R = Rear orientated P = Plug-in circuit-breaker Icw = 7.6 kA (630 A) - 10 kA (800 A) For applications at 1000 V, only
MC = Multi-cable W = Withdrawable circuit-breaker available with Fc Cu terminals
2/38
1SDC210015D0205
X
Zone 1
OUT
IN
Zone 2
X
OUT
IN OUT
IN
Zone 3
X X X
1SDC210B12F0001
OUT OUT OUT
IN IN IN
This type of coordination, a development of time coordination, is made by means of logic connec-
tions between current measuring devices which, once the set threshold having been exceeded is
2
detected, allow just the fault area to be identified and to have its power supply cut off.
By means of zone selectivity it is possible obtain selectivity considerably reducing the trip times and
therefore the thermal stresses all the plant components are subjected to during the fault.
Making the protection is done by connecting all the zone selectivity outputs of the trip units belong-
ing to the same zone to each other and taking this signal to the zone selectivity input of the trip unit
immediately to the supply side. By means of a simple shielded twisted-pairwire (maximum length of
200 m), each circuit-breaker which detects a fault communicates this to the one on the supply side
sending a timed locking signal. The circuit-breaker which does not receive any communication from
those on the load side, sends the opening command within the set selectivity time.
Zone selectivity can be activated for Tmax circuit-breakers in the case where:
– there is a source of 24 V auxiliary power supply;
– the Tmax T4, T5 or T6 circuit-breaker is equipped with the PR223EF trip unit (EFDP zone selectiv-
ity) or Tmax T7 equipped with the PR332/P trip unit (ZS zone selectivity).
Current sensors
In [A] 160 250 320 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
PR223EF T4 250 Q Q
T4 320 Q
T5 400 Q Q
T5 630 Q
T6 630 Q
T6 800 Q
T6 1000 Q
PR332/P T7 800 V V Q
T7 1000 V V V Q
T7 1250 V V V V Q
T7 1600 V V V V V Q
Q = Complete circuit-breaker already coded
V = Circuit-breaker to be assembled
When only PR223 are used, it is possible to invert the selectivity chain hierarchy by means of the
SW210 interlock module.
For further information on zone selectivity, please consult the section: “Characteristic curves and
technical information” on page 4/73.
2/39
1SDC210015D0205
EFDP Zone selectivity: PR223EF
The PR223EF electronic trip unit available on T4, T5 and T6 in the L version (120 kA @ 380/415 V)
for use in alternating current, is able to isolate a fault present in extremely rapid times.
This performance is made possible thanks to the EFDP (Early Fault Detection and Prevention) al-
gorithm, which is able to detect the short-circuit at its onset, exploiting analysis of the trend of the
shunted current in relation to the current. The PR223EF trip unit therefore offers two performances
simultaneously which, until today, were antithetic: selectivity and trip rapidity.
Thanks to extremely rapid detection and quenching of the short-circuit, the MCCB equipped with this
trip unit are totally selective up to over 100 kA, and are not subject to any limits regarding the number
of hierarchical levels of the installation. Trip rapidity, together with just as rapid transmission of the
order to wait, allow a high number of circuit-breakers to be interlocked, making a global selectivity
chain in the installation: by using the PR223EF no limitation in topological terms is introduced, with
distances between interlocked circuit-breakers reaching up to 1 Km, thereby making the protection
system highly flexible.
EFDP zone selectivity is carried out by means of a logic interlocking protocol (Interlocking, IL). The
connection is made by means of a simple screened-twisted-pair cable cable which connects the
circuit-breakers fitted with the PR223EF. In the case of a fault, the circuit-breaker immediately to the
supply side sends a locking signal to the hierarchically higher circuit-breaker by means of the bus
2 and, before intervening, checks that a similar locking signal has not been reached by the circuit-
breakers on the load side.
The soundness of the system is controlled by a monitoring function of the interlock channel, guar-
anteeing the system a very high level of safety.
All the protection functions can be programmed remotely using the dialogue function present on the
trip unit or locally by means of the PR010/T which can be connected to a serial port on the front of
the PR223EF.
The trip unit can be supplied from a 24 V DC auxiliary source or directly through the current trans-
formers (self-supply). The electronic trip unit operation is guaranteed even in the case of single-phase
load up to 0.18 x In.
In the presence of an auxiliary power supply:
• the device implements the L, S, EF and G protection functions; if the EF is disabled by the user,
function I is enabled
• EFDP zone selectivity is implemented on the S, EF and G functions.
If it is under self-supply conditions:
• the trip unit disables the EF, implementing the classic protection functions which also characterize
the PR223/DS trip unit: L, S, I and G
• EFDP zone selectivity is not enabled.
Auxiliary power supply - Electrical characteristics

PR223EF
Inrush current @ 24 V ~4 A for 0.5 ms
Rated current @ 24 V ~80 mA
Rated power @ 24 V ~2 W
Connection of the logic interlock and auxiliary power supply is made by means of the X3 and X4
connectors located on the back of the trip unit.
For the neutral, it is possible set the protection threshold of the functions to OFF, at 50% and at
100% that of the phase, by means of the dialogue function or PR010/T. Furthermore, pre-alarm
and alarm signalling of protection L is available on the front of the trip units. The pre-alarm threshold
value is 0.9 x I1.
The PR223EF trip unit, just like the PR223DS one, allows storage and display of information regarding
a trip unit trip. The information is saved permanently and up to 20 trip events are recorded, which
can be acquired by a supervision system using the Modbus protocol or can be displayed locally by
means of the FDU or PR010/T unit.
2/40
1SDC210015D0205
PR223EF
LED signalling the status

Socket for connection of the circuit-breaker
and BT030 wireless
communication unit
Push button for

Socket for TT1 test unit operation mode
selection (local/remote)
and on-board
diagnosis system
LED signalling alarm
of the circuit-breaker
1SDC210215F1002
2
PR223EF - Protection functions and parameterisations
Relation EFDP zone
Protection functions Trip threshold Trip curves(1) Excludability
t = f(I) selectivity
Against overload with Electronic setting Electronic setting
long inverse time-delay I1=0.18…1 x In(5) step 0.01 x In at 6 x I1 t1 = 3…18s(2) step 0.5s
trip and trip characteristic
according to an inverse Trip between 1.1...1.3 x I1 Tolerance: ± 10%
(IEC 60947-2) – t = k/I2 –
time curva (I2t=k) according
to the IEC 60947-2
Standard
Against short-circuit with Electronic setting Electronic setting(3)

short inverse time-delay I2 = 0.60…10 x In(3) step 0.1 x In at 8 x In t2 = 0.05…0.5s step 0.01s Q t = k/I2 Q
trip and trip characteristic Tolerance: ± 10% Tolerance: ± 10%
with inverse time (I2t=k) or
with definite time Electronic setting Electronic setting
I2 = 0.60…10 x In(3) step 0.1 x In t2 =0.05…0.5s step 0.01s Q t=k Q
Against short-circuit with

EF ultra rapid trip(4) Q t=k Q
Against short-circuit with Electronic setting

instantaneous trip with I3 = 1.5…12 x In(3) step 0.1 x In
adjustable threshold Tolerance: ± 10% instantaneous Q t=k –
Against earth fault with Electronic setting Electronic setting

inverse short time delay I4 = 0.2…1 x In (step 0.1 x In) t4 = 0.1...0.8s (step 0.01s)
trip and trip characteristic Tolerance: ± 10% Tolerance: ± 15% Q t = k/I2 Q
with inverse time (I2t=k)
(1)
These tolerances are valid under the following conditions: (2)
For T4. In = 320 A and T5. In = 630 A t1 = 10.5s
– trip unit self-supplied at full power and/or auxiliary supply; (3)
For T4 In = 320 A, T5 In = 630 A and T6 In = 1000 A I2max = 9.5 x In, I3max = 9.5 x In
– two or three-phase power supply; For T6 In = 800 A I3max = 10.5 x In
(4)
Active in auxiliary power supply (24 V DC)
In conditions other than those considered, the following tollerances hold: (5)
For I1 < 0.4 x In the neutral setting must be at 100% of that of the phases
Trip threshold Trip curves
S ± 20% ± 20%
I ± 20% ) 50ms
G ± 20% ± 20%
2/41
1SDC210015D0205
EFDP Zone selectivity: PR223EF
The information recorded when the protection release trips is:

• Currents (L1, L2, L3, N) which caused opening
• Events
• States
• Alarms
• Trips
• Tripped protection
• Parameters of the tripped protection.
When there is an auxiliary power supply, providing it is complete with the VM210 module, the PR223EF
enables you to see not only the currents but also the voltages in the system, both locally via the FDU
or HMI030, and remotely via a supervisor system using the Modbus protocol. In addition, up to 20
trip events can be recorded, even in self-supply mode.
PR223EF - Measurements
Measurements With distributed N Without distributed N
2 Effective current values

Effective voltage values
I1, I2, I3, Ine
V1, V2, V3, V12, V23, V31
I1, I2, I3
V12, V23, V31
Phase peak factor Q Q
Frequency f f
The PR223EF trip unit is an integral part of the circuit-breaker and is therefore not interchangeable
with the other protection trip units available on T4, T5 and on T6.
2/42
1SDC210015D0205
ZS Zone selectivity: PR332/P
With the PR332/P trip unit (see chapter: “Tmax circuit-breakers for power distribution”, page 2/27
and foll.) it is now possible to extend the ZS zone selectivity function, already available on ABB SACE
Emax air circuit-breakers to the Tmax moulded-case circuit-breakers.
The ZS zone selectivity, which is applicable to protection functions S and G, can be enabled in the
case where the curve with fixed time is selected and the auxiliary power supply is present.
To realize correctly the ZS zone selectivity the following settings are suggested for the upstream
circuit-breaker:
S t2 * t2 set time + 70 ms*

I I3 = OFF
G t4 * t4 set time + 70 ms*
Selectivity time same setting for each circuit-breaker
* At minimum between the trip times of two CBs in series, with auxiliary power supply.
** See page 2/28 for t2set and t4set settings.
To carry out the cabling, a shielded twisted pair cable (not supplied with the trip unit; ask ABB for
information) can be used. The shield should only be earthed on the trip unit of the circuit-breaker
on the supply side.
2
The maximum length of the cabling for zone selectivity, between two units, is 200 meters.
The maximum number of the circuit-breakers which can be connected to the outputs (Z out) of a
trip unit is 16.
The ZS of selectivity is identical to that which can be obtained through the trip units type PR333/P
(for Emax X1) and PR122/P- PR123/P (for Emax). Tmax T7 circuit-breaker equipped with PR332/P
can be connected directly without external accessories on the load side of a zone selectivity chain
created through the other devices (PR333/P, PR122/P and PR123/P).
For example:
X
Zone 1
OUT
PR123/P IN
X
Zone 2
OUT
PR122/P IN OUT
PR122/P IN
Zone 3
X X X
1SDC210F25F0001
OUT OUT OUT

PR332/P IN PR332/P IN PR332/P IN
2/43
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breakers
for motor protection
Index
General characteristics..........................................................................................................2/48 2
Protection against short-circuit .............................................................................................2/49
2/45
1SDC210015D0205
Motor Protection Tmax T2 Tmax T3

Rated uninterrupted current [A] 160 250
Rated service current, In [A] 1…100 100…200
Poles [No.] 3 3
Rated service current, Ue (AC) 50-60 Hz [V] 690 690
(DC) [V] 500 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8
Rated insulation voltage, Ui [V] 800 800
Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 min. [V] 3000 3000
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu N S H L N S
(AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [kA] 65 85 100 120 50 85
(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V [kA] 36 50 70 85 36 50
(AC) 50-60 Hz 440 V [kA] 30 45 55 75 25 40
(AC) 50-60 Hz 500 V [kA] 25 30 36 50 20 30
(AC) 50-60 Hz 690 V [kA] 6 7 8 10 5 8
2 (AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V

(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V
[%Icu]
[%Icu]
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
75% (70 kA)
75%
75%
50%
50% (27 kA)
(AC) 50-60 Hz 440 V [%Icu] 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 50%
(AC) 50-60 Hz 500 V [%Icu] 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 50%
(AC) 50-60 Hz 690 V [%Icu] 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 50%
(AC) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [kA] 143 187 220 264 105 187
(AC) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V [kA] 75.6 105 154 187 75.6 105
(AC) 50-60 Hz 440 V [kA] 63 94.5 121 165 52.5 84
(AC) 50-60 Hz 500 V [kA] 52.5 63 75.6 105 40 63
(AC) 50-60 Hz 690 V [kA] 9.2 11.9 13.6 17 7.7 13.6
Opening time (415 V) [ms] 3 3 3 3 7 6
Utilisation category (IEC 60947-2) A A
Isolation behaviour Q Q
Reference Standard IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2
Protection against short-circuit
Magnetic only trip unit MA Q(MF up to In 12.5 A) Q
Electronic trip unit PR221DS-I Q –
PR231/P-I – –
Integrated protection (IEC 60947-4-1)
Electronic trip unit PR221MP Q –
PR222MP – –
Interchangeability – –
Versions F-P F-P
Terminals fixed F - FC Cu - FC CuAl - EF - ES - R F - FC Cu - FC CuAl -
EF - ES - R
plug-in F - FC Cu - FC CuAl - EF - ES - R F - FC Cu - FC CuAl -
EF - ES - R
withdrawable – –
Fixing on DIN rail DIN EN 50022 DIN EN 50022
Mechanical life [No. operations] 25000 25000
[No. Hourly operations] 240 240
Electrical life @ 415 V AC [No. operations] 8000 8000
[No. Hourly operations] 120 120
Basic fixed version dimensions W [mm] 90 105
D [mm] 70 70
H [mm] 130 150
Weight fixed [kg] 1.1 1.5
plug-in [kg] – –
withdrawable [kg] 1.5 2.7
(1)
TERMINAL CAPTION FC CuAl = Front for CuAl cables 75% for T5 630 Note: in the plug-in version of T2, T3 and T5 630,
(2)
F = Front MC = Multicable 50% for T5 630 and in the withdrawable version of T5 630
(3)
EF = Front extended HR = Rear flat horizontal Icw = 5 kA the maximum rated current is derated by
(4)
ES = Front extended spread VR = Rear flat vertical Icw = 10 kA 10% at 40 °C.
(5)
FC Cu = Front for copper cables HR/VR = Rear flat orientated Icw = 20 kA (S, H, L versions) - 15 kA (V version)
R = Rear orientated
2/46
1SDC210015D0205
Tmax T4 Tmax T5 Tmax T6 Tmax T7
250/320 400/630 630/800 800/1000/1250
10…320 320, 400, 630 630, 800 –
3 3 3 3
690 690 690 690
750 750 750 –
8 8 8 8
1000 1000 1000 1000
3500 3500 3500 3500
N S H L V N S H L V N S H L S H L V
70 85 100 200 200 70 85 100 200 200 70 85 100 200 85 100 200 200
36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 100 50 70 120 150
30 40 65 100 180 30 40 65 100 180 30 45 50 80 50 65 100 130
25 30 50 85 150 25 30 50 85 150 25 35 50 65 40 50 85 100
20 25 40 70 80 20 25 40 70 80 20 22 25 30 30 42 50 60
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
75%
75%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
2
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 100% 100%
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%(1) 100%(2) 100% 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 75% 100%
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%(1) 100%(2) 100%(2) 75% 75% 75% 75% 100% 75% 75% 75%
154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440 187 220 440 440
75.6 105 154 264 440 75.6 105 154 264 440 75.6 105 154 220 105 154 264 330
63 84 143 220 396 63 84 143 220 396 63 94.5 105 176 105 143 220 286
52.5 63 105 187 330 52.5 63 105 187 330 52.5 73.5 105 143 84 105 187 220
40 52.5 84 154 176 40 52.5 84 154 176 40 46 52.5 63 63 88.2 105 132
5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 10 9 8 7 15 10 8 8
A B (400 A)(3) - A (630 A) B(4) B(5)
Q Q Q Q
IEC 60947-2/IEC 60947-4 IEC 60947-2/IEC 60947-4 IEC 60947-2/IEC 60947-4 IEC 60947-2
Q – – –
Q Q Q –
– – – Q
– – – –
Q Q Q –
Q Q Q Q
F-P-W F-P-W F-W F-W
F - FC Cu - FC CuAl - EF - ES - R - F - FC Cu - FC CuAl - EF - ES - F - FC CuAl - EF - ES - R - RC F - EF - ES - FC CuAl - HR/VR
MC - HR - VR R - HR - VR
EF - ES - R - FC Cu - FC CuAl - EF - ES - R - FC Cu - FC CuAl - – –
HR - VR HR - VR
EF - ES - FC Cu - FC CuAl EF - ES - FC Cu - FC CuAl EF - HR - VR EF - HR/VR - ES - RS
– – – –
20000 20000 20000 10000
240 120 120 60
8000 7000 5000 2000 (S, H, L versions) / 3000 (V version)
120 60 60 60
105 140 210 210
103.5 103.5 103.5 154 (manual) /178 (motorizable)
205 205 268 268
2.35 3.25 9.5/12 9.7/12.5 (manual) - 11/14 (motorizable)
3.6 5.15 – –
3.85 5.4 12.1/15.1 29.7/39.6 (manual) - 32/42.6(motorizable)
2/47
1SDC210015D0205
General characteristics
Starting, switching and protection of three-phase asynchronous motors are basic operations for their
correct use. ABB SACE proposes two different solutions for this type of application:
– a traditional system, which foresees a circuit-breaker for protection against short-circuit, a
thermal relay for protection against overload and missing or unbalanced phase and a contactor
for motor switching;
– a system of integrated protection thanks to the PR222MP trip unit, which ensures both pro-
tection against short-circuit, and against overload, as well as that against missing or unbalanced
phase and that against the rotor block.
All this must necessarily take into account the problems which arise at the moment of starting.
In particular, when selecting these devices, different factors must be taken into consideration, such
as:
– the motor power
– the diagram and type of starting
– the type of motor: with cage rotor or with wound rotor
– the fault current at the point of the network where the motor is installed.
2
Circuit-breaker with
electronic release
Circuit-breaker
PR222MP
with magnetic
only release
PR212/CI
Contactor
Contactor
Thermal relay
Motor
Motor
PTC
Protection against short-circuit Integrated protection
2/48
1SDC210015D0205
With the new series of Tmax moulded-case circuit-breakers, ABB SACE proposes a range up to
400 A, which implementing exclusively the protection against short-circuit, is suitable for use inside
protected starters of traditional type.
The Tmax T2 ,T3 and T4 circuit-breakers in the three-pole version with fixed magnetic only trip unit
(only for T2, I3= 13 x In up to In = 12.5 A) or adjustable between 6 and 12 times the rated service
current for T2 and T3, and between 6 and 14 times for T4, stand out for their compactness and
exceptional performances in terms of breaking capacity and limitation of the specific let-through
energy. Furthermore, thanks to the great flexibility given by the wide range of magnetic threshold
settings, they allow optimal motor protection.
They can be used in a wide range of start-ups, from 0.37 kW to 45 kW for T2 and up to 250 kW
for T5 (at 400 V).
Finally, thanks to their wide setting range of protection against short-circuit, T2, T4, T5 and T6, in
the three-pole version equipped with PR221DS-I electronic trip units and T7, in three-pole version
equipped with PR231/P-I electronic trip units, allow the most suitable trip value to be selected for
any type of motor for rated currents up to 1250 A and 560 kW (at 400 V).
1SDC210B26F0001
MF – Fixed magnetic only trip units

Tmax T2
In [A] 1 1.6 2 2.5 3.2 4 5 6.5 8.5 11 12.5
I3 = 13 x In 13 21 26 33 42 52 65 84 110 145 163
Note: The magnetic only trip units which equip the Tmax T2 in three-pole version circuit-breaker have a trip threshold I3 fixed at 13 x In, according to what is indicated in the table.
MA – Adjustable magnetic only trip units

Tmax T2-T3-T4
In [A] 10 20 25 32 52 80 100 125 160 200
Tmax T2 Q Q Q Q Q
Tmax T3 Q Q Q Q
Tmax T4 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
Tmax T2, T3
I3= 6…12 x In – 120…240 – 192…384 312…624 480…960 600…1200 750…1500 960…1920 1200…2400
Tmax T4
I3= 6…14 x In 60…140 – 150…350 – 312…728 480…1120 600…1400 750…1750 960…2240 1200…2800
Note: The magnetic only trip units which equip the Tmax T2 and T3 three-pole version circuit-breakers have a trip thresould I3 which can be adjusted from 6 to 12 x In for T2 and T3 and from 6 to
14 x In for T4, according to what is indicated in the table.
2/49
1SDC210015D0205
Current sensors
In [A] 10 25 63 100 160 250 320 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
PR221DS-I T2 160 Q Q Q Q Q
T4 250 Q Q Q
T4 320 V V V Q
T5 400 Q Q
T5 630 V V Q
T6 630 Q
T6 800 Q
PR231/P-I T7 800 V Q
T7 1000 V V Q
T7 1250 V V V Q
T7 1600 V V V V Q
2 I3 [A] 10...100 25...250 63...630 100...1000 160...1600 250...2500 320...3200 400...4000 630...6300 800...8000 1000...10000 1250...12500 1600...16000
V = Circuit-breaker to be assembled
PR221DS-I
Protection function Trip threshold Excludability Relation t=f(I)
Against short-circuit with I3 = 1 - 1.5 - 2 - 2.5 - 3 - 3.5 - 4.5 - 5.5 - 6.5 - 7 - 7.5 - 8 - 8.5 -
adjustable instantaneous trip 9 - 10 x In
Q t=k
Tolerance: ± 20% (T2)
± 10% (T4-T5, T6)
Note: The tolerances are valid under the following hypotheses:
– relay self-supplied on running and/or auxiliary power supply (without start up)
In all the cases not foreseen by the above-mentioned hypotheses, the following tolerance values are valid:
I ± 20% ) 40ms
PR231P-I
Protection function Trip threshold Excludability Relation t=f(I)
Against short-circuit with I3 = 1 - 1.5 - 2 - 2.5 - 3 - 3.5 - 4.5 - 5.5 - 6.5 - 7 - 7.5 - 8 - 8.5 -
adjustable instantaneous trip 9 - 10 x In – t=k
Tolerance: ± 10%
Note: The tolerances are valid under the following hypotheses:
– relay self-supplied on running and/or auxiliary power supply (without start up)
In all the cases not foreseen by the above-mentioned hypotheses, the following tolerance values are valid:
I ± 15% ) 60ms
2/50
1SDC210015D0205
Integrated protection: PR221MP
The PR221MP electronic release is dedicated to protection of motors with powers up to 55 kW.
The L protection function protects the motor from overloads according to the indications and classes
defined by the IEC 60947-4-1 Standard. The function can be adjusted manually, I1 = 0.65…1 x In,
by means of the dip switches on the front of the release. Then the start-up class of the motor must
be selected which determines the trip time for overload, in accordance with the IEC 60947-4-1
Amend. 2, Table 2 Standards: “Class 3E” corresponds to a trip time of t1 = 2.77s, “Class 5E”
t1 = 4.16s, “Class 10E” t1 = 8.33s, and “Class 20E” t1 = 11.1s at 7.2 x I1.
The protection against short-circuit allows adjustment of the trip threshold up to 17.5 times the rated
current, I3 = 2.5…17.5 x In.
As for Tmax T2 PR221DS, it is necessary to house the opening solenoid (SA) in the right-hand slot
of the circuit-breaker. Tmax T2 PR221MP can be fitted with the same electrical accessories avail-
able with PR221DS.
PR221MP
2
Socket for TT1
test unit
Protection L
Against overload Protection I
1SDC210B60F0001
PR221MP – Protection and parameterisation functions

Relation
Protection function(1) Trip threshold Trip curves Excludability
t = f(I)
Against overload with long I1 = 0.65 - 1 x In Trip classes:
inverse time delay trip and step = 0.05 x In 3E - 5E - 10E - 20E
trip characteristic according Protection for unbalanced phase
to an inverse time curve not available – –
(I2t=constant) according to
IEC 60947-2 Standard
Against short-circuit with I3 = 2.5...17.5 x In

instantaneous trip with step = 1 x In
adjustable threshold instantaneous – t=k
Tolerance: ± 20% (T2)
(1)
The tolerances are valid with these hypotheses:
– self-supplied release at full power and/or auxiliary power supply (without start up)
For all the cases not foreseen in the above hypotheses, the following tolerance values are valid:

I ± 20% ) 40ms
2/51
1SDC210015D0205
In the three-pole version, the Tmax T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers are fitted with PR222MP electronic
trip units. This makes it possible to obtain functions which guarantee high trip precision, extreme reli-
ability and immunity to variations in the external temperature. The PR222MP trip units fully integrated
on board the circuit-breaker guarantee complete protection of the motor. In fact, it is not necessary to
provide the help of an external thermal relay for protection against overloads as, on the other hand,
occurs with the standard solution.
The PR222MP can be connected to a contactor for the basic protection function (NORMAL mode)
of the motor: the circuit-breaker can control contactor opening in the case of a fault (excluding short-
circuit), by means of the SACE PR212/CI accessory control unit. In fact, a contactor has breaking
capacities at high currents which are less efficient than the circuit-breaker, but a high number of
possible operations consistently higher than those of the circuit-breaker (about 1.000.000). The
combination of the two devices therefore optimises motor protection and control. In Heavy operation
mode and for currents below the set magnetic trip threshold, the PR222MP trip unit allows control
of the circuit-breaker opening and not of the contactor. In this operating mode, the circuit-breaker is
therefore called on to protect the plant under any overcurrent conditions, assigning just motor control
operations (turning on and turning off) to the contactor.
1SDC210B14F0001
2 PR222MP electronic trip unit - Current sensors

Tmax T4-T5-T6
In [A] 100 160 200 320 400 630
T4 250 Q Q Q
T5 400 Q Q
T6 800 Q
In any case, the PR010/T unit for testing the trip unit and checking the protection functions, and
the PR021/K signalling unit are available for the PR222MP trip unit. The electronic trip units are
self-supplied and are made up of three current transformers, the PR222MP protection unit and a
trip coil which acts directly on the circuit-breaker operating mechanism. The current transformers,
housed inside the trip unit, supply the energy and the signal required for correct protection opera-
tion. Operation is guaranteed with a single-phase current equal to 20% of the rated current. The
trip unit is temperature-compensated and is sensitive to missing phase according to Table IV of the
IEC60947-4-1 7.2.1.5.2 Standards.
The T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers for motor protection are perfectly integrated with the new line of
ABB contactors. The latter - defined as A-line - together with the line of thermal relays and ABB SACE
moulded-case circuit-breakers, is the basis for the new generation of apparatus specially designed to
guarantee a system of products which can be integrated according to the required applications. All
this has the aim not only of continually improving the products, but above all of providing designers,
installers and end users with the best solutions in terms of performances and reliability, combined
with the simplicity of the system.
The Tmax T4 and T5 circuit-breakers with PR222MP trip unit and the “A” series of contactors are,
in particular, an extraordinary solution in terms of compactness, sharing the same width and thereby
saving space, assembly material, installation time and relative cabling operations. The combination
of circuit-breaker-contactor allows an extremely compact protected starter to be made.
2/52
1SDC210015D0205
Typical operating characteristic of an asynchronous motor
1SDC210B15F0001
l1 = function L trip current
l3 = function I trip current
I5 = function R trip current
t5 = function R trip time
I6 = function U trip current
t6 = function U trip time
le = rated service current of the motor
la = motor starting current
Ip = peak value of the sub-transient starting current
ta = motor starting time
tp = duration of the sub-transient starting phase
m = typical motor starting curve
c = example of trip curve of a motor protection circuit-breaker with electronic release
The different curves of the functions, with numerous threshold and time settings, allow an overall trip curve to be drawn which is really close to
the motor starting curve, thereby optimising its protection.
2/53
1SDC210015D0205
(L) Protection against overload

Function L protects the motor against overloads according to the indications and classes defined
by the IEC 60947-4-1 Standard.
The protection is based on a pre-defined model (ABB SACE international patent) which, by simulating
the copper and iron over-temperatures inside the motor, allows precise safeguarding of the motor.
1SDC210B16F0001
The protection intervenes when the established over-temperature is reached. The trip time is fixed
by selecting the trip class defined in the above-mentioned Standard.
The function is temperature-compensated and sensitive to a missing/unbalanced phase according
to the IEC 60947-4-1 Standard.
In the case of an auxiliary power supply, the thermal memory function is guaranteed, which allows
the trip unit to continue to calculate the motor temperature even following an opening.
Function L, which cannot be excluded, can be set manually to I1 = 0.4…1 x In with 60 thresholds
which can be set by means of the dip-switches on the front of the trip unit, or electronically by means
of the SACE PR010T test and configuration unit.
2 The starting class of the motor must then be selected, which determines the trip time for overload
according to the IEC 60947-4-1 5.7.3 Table II Standards: class 10 A corresponds to a trip time
t1= 4s, class 10 to t1= 8s, class 20 to t1= 16s and class 30 to t1= 24s at 7.2 x In . Setting this trip time
can also be carried out electronically with the PR010T: the electronic steps are equal to 1s.
Tripping of this protection leads to contactor opening (with the PR212/CI unit). Any anomaly of the
contactor would make the circuit-breaker open, thanks to the BACK UP function.
For protection L, there is then a pre-alarm and an alarm LED: the pre-alarm threshold value is
fixed and equal to 0.9 x I1 and the LED is permanently lit, whereas it flashes in case of alarm
(I > 1.05 x I1). It is also possible to transmit remotely the alarm of protection L, simply connecting
connector X3 to the dedicated contact.
(R) Protection against rotor block

Function R protects the motor against possible rotor block during operation. Protection R has the
characteristic of protecting the motor in two different ways, according to whether the fault is present
at start-up or whether it is present during normal service of an already active plant.
In the former case, protection R is linked to protection L for time selection as well: in the presence
of a fault during start-up, protection R is inhibited for a time equal to the time set with the trip class.
1SDC210B17F0001
Once this time is exceeded, protection R becomes active leading to a trip after a fixed set t5 time.
In the latter case, protection R is already active and the protection tripping time will be equal to t5.
The protection intervenes when at least one of the phase currents exceeds the established value
and remains over that threshold for time t5.
Function R can be set manually I5= 3…10 x I1 with 8 thresholds which can be set by means of the
dip-switches on the front of the trip unit, or with 70 thresholds by means of the SACE PR010T test
and configuration unit (steps of 0.1 x I1). The trip time t5 can be set to 1, 4, 7 or 10 seconds by means
of a dip-switch, or with steps of 0.5s by means of PR010T.
Tripping of this protection leads to contactor opening (with the PR212/CI unit); any anomaly of the
(I) Protection against short-circuit

This protection function intervenes in the case of a short-circuit between phases. It is sufficient for
just a single phase to exceed the set threshold to cause immediate opening of the circuit-breaker
(protection cannot be excluded).
The PR222MP trip unit is able to recognise whether the motor to be protected is in the start-up
hase or if there is a short-circuit: this has the aim of allowing completely safe start-up conditions. It
1SDC210B18F0001
cannot be excluded.
2/54
1SDC210015D0205
(U) Protection against missing phase and/or unbalanced
Function U can be used in those cases where a particularly precise control is needed regarding phase
missing/unbalanced. This protection can be excluded and intervenes if the effective value of one
or two currents drops below the level equal to 0.4 of the current I1 set for protection L and remains
there for longer than 4 seconds.
This protection can be set electronically with the PR010T from 0.4 to 0.9 x I1 with time adjustable
1SDC210B19F0001
between 1 and 10s (steps of 0.5s).

Tripping of this protection leads to contactor opening (with the PR212/CI unit); any anomaly of the
Parameterisation of the PR222MP trip unit

Man/Elt: by means of a dip switch located on the front, the trip unit can be provided for manual
parameterisation (Man) of the thresholds and times acting directly on the dip switches located on the
front of the trip unit or with electronic parameterisation (Elt) by means of the PR010T.
2
Reset Mode
Auto/Man: this function (AUTO) allows the state of activation of the PR212/CI to be automatically
reset following contactor trip for L function, after a fixed time of 15s. The AUTO reset is only possible
when there is an auxiliary voltage.
Setting the working modes

Normal: the Normal mode foresees the use of a circuit-breaker and a contactor: this configuration
makes intervention towards the contactor possible, through the PR212/CI unit, when the PR222MP
considers this appropriate.
Heavy: the heavy mode foresees circuit-breaker opening for all overcurrent conditions, and the
contactor is assigned just the motor operation function.
BACK UP Function
This protection is conceived to manage the possibility that an opening command sent to the contac-
tor might not have a positive outcome, i.e. that the contactor does not intervene. In this case, after
having waiting for the time defined using the dip switch “k time” (min = 80ms or max = 160ms), the
PR222MP sends a trip signal to the circuit-breaker.
By introducing a time delay between the command sent to the contactor and to the back-up one,
it is necessary to compensate the contactor actuation time.
Setting the PTC protection

PTC: by means of a PTC sensor inserted in the motor, this protection controls the internal tempera-
ture of the protected motor. In the case of excessive temperature, the PR222MP release will com-
mand opening of the contactor (if it is in “Normal” mode) or of the circuit-breaker (if it is in “Heavy”
mode).
0/1: in this mode, as an alternative to the PTC protection, it is possible to signal the state of a generic
1SDC210B20F0001
contact without potential by means of the ABB SACE PR021/K signalling unit (see page 3/43) (for
the electrical circuit diagram, see page 5/20).
2/55
1SDC210015D0205
PR222MP
Protection R Protection I
Against rotor block Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip
Protection L
Against motor overload Protection U
Against phase
current unbalance or
Socket for connection loss of phase
of SACE PR010/T test
unit and BT030 wireless
communication unit
Socket for SACE TT1 Setting the work methods

test unit
Man/Elt
Class Release parametrisation
Class of motor starting methods
2 according to the IEC

60947-4-1 Standards
1SDC210B21F0001
Setting the reset
following trip
Selection between: - manual
- PTC(1) temperature sensor input - automatic
- 0/1 generic input
Setting the back-up time
(1)
A special input is available to connect a PTC temperature probe, inserted in the motor to be protected
PR222MP - Protection functions and parameterisation

Thermal
Protection functions Trip threshold Trip curves(1) Excludability t = f(I)
memory (2)
Against overload with Manual setting Manual setting
long inverse time delay I1 = 0.4…1 x In step = 0.01 x In Trip classes: 10 A - 10 - 20 - 30
trip and trip characteristic Tolerance: ± 15% (IEC 60497-4-1)
according to an inverse t1 = 4-8-16-24s where t1 is the trip
time curve according to time at 7.2 x I1 cold. depending on
– – Q
IEC 60947-4-1 Standard the class selected

I1 = 0.4…1 x In step = 0.01 x In t1 = 4…24s step = 1s
Against rotor block with Manual setting Manual setting

delayed trip and trip I5 = OFF - 3...10 x I1 step = 1 x In t5 = 1 - 4 - 7 - 10 s
characteristic with definite Tolerance: ± 15% Tolerance: ± 10%
R time
Q t = k/I2 –
I5 = OFF - 3…10 x I1 step = 0.1 x I1 t5 = 1…10s step = 0.5s

Against short-circuit with Manual setting

instantaneous trip I3 = 6…13 x In step = 1 x In
Tolerance: ± 15%
instantaneous – t = k(3) –
Electronic setting
I3 = 6…13 x In step = 0.1 x In
Tolerance: ± 15%
Against phase current Manual setting Manual setting

unbalance or loss of I6 = ON (0.4 x I1) - OFF t6 = 4s
phase with delayed trip Tolerance: ± 15% Tolerance: ± 10%
and trip characteristic with Q t=k –
definite time Electronic setting Electronic setting
I6 = 0.4…0.9 x I1 - OFF t6 = 1…10s step 0.5s
(1)
Available in auxiliary supply at 24 V DC
– self-powered trip unit at full power and/or auxiliary supply (without start-up); (3)
Full power: t = t5
– two or three-phase power supply. Start up: t = t1 + t5
R ± 20% ± 20%
I ± 20% ) 50ms
U ± 20% ± 20%
2/56
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breakers for use up to
1150 V AC and 1000 V DC
Index
2/59
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breakers for use up to 1150 V AC
and 1000 V DC
The range of T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers for applications in direct current at 1000 V or in alternating
current up to 1150 V (T6 up to 1000 V) also comes into the panorama of the Tmax proposals.
The typical sectors of use are installations in mines, road and railway tunnels, electrical transport and
industrial applications in general.
The circuit-breakers are available in the three-pole and four-pole version with TMD or TMA adjustable
thermomagnetic releases or with PR221DS, PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD, PR222MP and PR223EF
electronic trip units (see the dedicated section on page 2/37).
The dimensions of these circuit-breakers are the same as the standard one. The Tmax circuit-breakers
for these applications are available in the fixed, plug-in and withdrawable version (for which the use
of the 1000 V fixed parts supplied only by upper terminals is mandatory) and they are compatible
with all the accessories except for the residual current release.
T4-T5 circuit-breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and T6 circuit-breakers for use up to 1000 V AC
Tmax T4 Tmax T5 Tmax T6
Rated uninterrupted current [A] 250 400/630 630/800
2 Poles
Rated service voltage, Ue (AC) 50-60 Hz [V] 1000
3, 4
1150 1000
3, 4
1150
3, 4
1000
Rated insulation voltage, Ui [V] 1000 1150 1000 1150 1000
Test voltage at power frequency for 1 min. [V] 3500 3500 3500
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu L V(1) L V(1) L(1)
(AC) 50-60 Hz 1000 V [kA] 12 20 12 20 12
(AC) 50-60 Hz 1150 V [kA] 12 12
(AC) 50-60 Hz 1000 V [kA] 12 12 10 10 6
(AC) 50-60 Hz 1150 V [kA] 6 6
(AC) 50-60 Hz 1000 V [kA] 24 40 24 40 24
(AC) 50-60 Hz 1150 V [kA] 24 24
Category of use (IEC 60947-2) A B (400 A)(2) - A (630 A) B (3)
Behaviour on isolation Q Q Q
Reference Standards IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2
Thermomagnetic releases TMD Q
TMA Q Q Q
Electronic trip units PR221DS/LS/I Q Q Q Q Q
PR221DS/I Q Q Q Q Q
PR222DS/P_LSI Q Q Q Q Q
PR222DS/P_LSIG Q Q Q Q Q
PR222DS/PD_LSI Q Q Q Q Q
PR222DS/PD_LSIG Q Q Q Q Q
PR222MP Q Q
Terminals FC Cu FC Cu F - FC CuAl - R
Version F, P, W F F, P, W(4) F F (5)
[No. hourly operations] 240 120 120
Basic fixed dimensions(6) 3 poles W [mm] 105 140 210
4 poles W [mm] 140 184 280
D [mm] 103.5 103.5 103.5
H [mm] 205 205 268
Weight fixed 3/4 poles [kg] 2.35 / 3.05 2.35 / 3.05 3.25 / 4.15 3.25 / 4.15 9.5 / 12
plug-in 3/4 poles [kg] 3.6 / 4.65 5.15 / 6.65
withdrawable 3/4 poles [kg] 3.85 / 4.9 5.4 / 6.9
(1)
TERMINAL CAPTION R = Rear Power supply only from the top
(2)
F = Front F = Fixed circuit-breakers Icw = 5 kA
(3)
FC Cu = Front for copper cables P = Plug-in circuit-breakers Icw = 7.6 kA (630 A) - 10 kA (800 A)
(4)
FC CuAl = Front for copper cables CuAl W = Withdrawable circuit-breakers Tmax T5630 is only available in the fixed version
(5)
For T6 in the withdrawable version, please ask ABB SACE
(6)
Circuit-breaker without high terminal covers
2/60
1SDC210015D0205
PR221DS and PR222DS for use up to 1150 V AC - Current sensor
Tmax T4-T5-T6
In [A] 100 250 320 400 630 800
T4 250 Q Q
T5 400 Q Q
T5 630 Q
T6 630(1) Q
T6 800(1) Q
Note: For the PR222MP setting, please see page 2/56
(1)
up to 1000 V
Circuit-breakers for use at 1000 V DC

Tmax T4 Tmax T5 Tmax T6
Rated uninterrupted current [A] 250 400/630 630/800
Poles
Rated service voltage, Ue [V]
4
1000
4
1000
4
1000 2
Rated insulation voltage, Ui [V] 1150 1150 1000
Test voltage at power frequency for 1 min. [V] 3500 3500 3500
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu V(2) V(2) L(2)
(DC) 4 poles in serie(1) [kA] 40 40 40
(DC) 4 poles in serie [kA] 20 20
Category of use (IEC 60947-2) A B (400 A)(3) - A (630 A) B(4)
Behaviour on isolation Q Q Q
Reference Standards IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2
Thermomagnetic releases TMD Q – –
TMA Q Q Q
Terminals FC Cu FC Cu F - FC CuAl - R
Interchangeability Q Q Q
Versions F F F(5)
[No. hourly operations] 240 120 120
Basic fixed dimensions 4 poles W [mm] 140 184 280
D [mm] 103.5 103.5 103.5
H [mm] 205 205 268
Weight fixed 4 poles [kg] 3.05 4.15 12
(1)
TERMINAL CAPTION See the wiring diagrams on page 4/65 diagram D
(2)
F = Front Power supply only from above
(3)
FC Cu = Front for copper cables Icw = 5 kA
(4)
FC CuAl = Front for copper cables CuAl Icw = 7.6 kA (630 A) - 10 kA (800 A)
(5)
R = Rear For T6 in the withdrawable version, please ask ABB SACE
F = Fixed circuit-breakers
Thermomagnetic trip unit for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC - TMD and TMA
In [A] 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800
Neutral [A] - 100% 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800
T4 250 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
T5 400 Q Q
I1=0.7…1xIn T5 630 Q
T6 630 Q
T6 800 Q
I3 = 10 x In [A] 320 500
I3 = 5...10 x In [A] – – 400...800 500...1000 625...1250 800...1600 1000...2000 1250...2500 1600...3200 2000...4000 2500...5000 3150...6300 4000...8000
I3 = 10xIn
I3 = 5...10xIn
2/61
1SDC210015D0205
Index
2/63
1SDC210015D0205
The Tmax switch-disconnectors derive from the corresponding circuit-breakers, of which they keep the
overall dimensions, versions, fixing systems and the possibility of mounting accessories unchanged.
This version only differs from the circuit-breakers in the absence of the protection trip units. They are
characterised by a rated voltage of 690 V in alternating current and 750 V in direct current.
Tmax T1D
Conventional thermal current, Ith [A] 160
Rated service current in category AC22, Ie [A] 160
Rated service current in category AC23, Ie [A] 125
Poles [No.] 3/4
Rated service voltage, Ue (AC) 50-60 Hz [V] 690
(DC) [V] 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8
Rated insulation voltage, Ui [V] 800
Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 minute [V] 3000
2 Rated short-circuit making capacity, Icm (min) switch-disconnector only
(max) with circuit-breaker on supply side
[kA]
[kA]
2.8
187
Rated short-time withstand current for 1s, Icw [kA] 2
Reference Standard IEC 60947-3
Versions F
Terminals FC Cu - EF -
FC CuAl
Mechanical life [No. operations] 25000
[No. Hourly operations] 120
Basic dimensions, fixed 3 poles W [mm] 76
4 poles W [mm] 102
D [mm] 70
H [mm] 130
Weight fixed 3/4 poles [kg] 0.9/1.2
plug-in 3/4 poles [kg] –
withdrawable 3/4 poles [kg] –
Switch-disconnector coordination [380/415 V AC]

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 400
B C N N S H L N S N S H L V N S H L V
Icu [kA] 16 25 36 36 50 70 85 36 50 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 120 200
T1D 160 16 25 36 36 50 70 85
T3D 250 36 50 36 50 70 120 200
T4D 320 36 50 70 120 200
T5D 400 36 50 70 120 200
T5D 630
T6D 630
T6D 800
T6D 1000
T7D 1000
T7D 1250
T7D 1600
Applications
They can be used as general circuit-breakers in sub-switchboards as switching and isolation parts
for lines, busbars or groups of apparatus, or as bus-ties. They can be part of general isolation devices
of groups of machines or of complexes for motor switching and protection.
Isolation
The main function carried out by this apparatus consists of isolation of the circuit they are inserted in.
Once the contacts are open they are at a distance which prevents an arc from striking, in accordance
with the prescriptions in the standards regarding isolation behaviour. The position of the operating
lever corresponds definitely with that of the contacts (positive operation).
2/64
1SDC210015D0205
Tmax T3D Tmax T4D Tmax T5D Tmax T6D Tmax T7D
(1)
250 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000 1000/1250/1600
250 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000 1000/1250/1600
200 250 400 630/800/800 1000/1250/1250
3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
690 690 690 690 690
500 750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8 8
800 800 800 1000 1000
3000 3000 3000 3500 3000
5.3
105
5.3
440
11
440
30
440
40
440
2
3.6 3.6 6 15 20
IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-3
F-P F-P-W F-P-W F-W F-W
F-FC CuAl-FC Cu- F-FC CuAl-FC Cu-EF- F-FC CuAl-FC Cu-EF- F-FC CuAl-EF- F-EF-ES-FC CuAl
EF-ES-R ES-R-MC-HR-VR ES-R-HR-VR ES-R-RC HR/VR
25000 20000 20000 20000 10000
120 120 120 120 60
105 105 140 210 210
140 140 184 280 280
70 103.5 103.5 268 154(manual)/178(motorizable)
150 205 205 103.5 268
1.5/2 2.35/3.05 3.25/4.15 9.5/12 9.7/12.5(manual)/11/14(motorizable)
2.1/3.7 3.6/4.65 5.15/6.65 – –
– 3.85/4.9 5.4/6.9 12.1/15.1 29.7/39.6(manual)/32/42.6(motorizable)
(1)
Withdrawable version not available for T6 1000 A.
T5 630 T6 630 T6 800 T6 1000 T7 1000 T7 1250 T7 1600
N S H L V N S H L N S H L N S H L S H L V S H L V S H L
36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 100 36 50 70 100 36 50 70 100 50 70 120 150 50 70 120 150 50 70 120
36 50 70 120 200
36 50 70 100 36 50 70 100 36 50 70 100
36 50 70 100 36 50 70 100
36 50 70 100
50 70 120 150 50 70 120 150 50 70 120
50 70 120 150 50 70 120
50 70 120
Protection
Each switch-disconnector must be protected on the supply side by a coordinated device which
safeguards it against short-circuits. The coordination table below indicates the Tmax circuit-breaker
which can carry out the protection function for each switch-disconnector. These are always pieces
of apparatus of a size corresponding to or smaller than that of the switch disconnector.
Making capacity
The making capacity Icm is a performance of notable importance since a switch-disconnector must
be able to withstand the dynamic, thermal and current stresses which can occur during closure
without being destroyed, up to the short-circuit closing conditions.
2/65
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Index
Versions and types ................................................................................................................. 3/2
Connection terminals ............................................................................................................. 3/7
Service releases ................................................................................................................... 3/16
Electrical signals ................................................................................................................... 3/20
Remote control ..................................................................................................................... 3/25
Operating mechanisms and locks ........................................................................................ 3/30
Residual current releases ..................................................................................................... 3/36
Accessories for electronic trip units ..................................................................................... 3/40

3
Test and configuration accessories ...................................................................................... 3/46
Automatic transfer switch - ATS010 ..................................................................................... 3/47
Installation accessories and spare parts .............................................................................. 3/50
Compatibility of internal accessories ................................................................................... 3/51
Communication devices and systems ................................................................................ 3/52
3/1
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Versions and types
Starting from the fixed version with front terminals, the Tmax circuit-breakers can be converted into
the various versions (plug-in for T2, T3, T4 and T5; withdrawable for T4, T5, T6 and T7), using the
conversion kits. This makes management of the product, its versions and stocks as a whole very
flexible. In any case, it is always possible to request the circuit-breaker in the desired version completely
preset in the factory, by ordering, on the same line, the fixed circuit-breaker and the conversion kit,
to which must be added the fixed part.
T7 is available in two different versions: the lever operating mechanism version similar to the other
sizes in the Tmax family, and the new motorizable version.
Fixed
The Tmax FIXED three-pole or four-pole version circuit-breakers foresee:
– circuit-breakers characterised by just two depths up to 1000 A: 70 mm for Tmax T1, T2 and T3 and
103.5 mm for Tmax T4, T5 and T6. For T7 the depth varies according to the type of operating
1SDC210C02F0001
mechanism (with lever or spring charging motor)

– standard front in groups of circuit-breakers: 45 mm for Tmax T1, T2 and T3 and 105 mm for T4
and T5, 140 mm for T6 and 280 mm for T7
– flange for compartment door
– possibility of assembly on back plate (or on DIN rail with T1, T2 and T3, with the help of the special
accessory, see page 3/50)
– thermomagnetic (on Tmax T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 and T6) or electronic (on Tmax T2, T4, T5, T6 and
3 T7) trip units
– standard FC Cu type terminals (front for copper cables) for T1 and F type (front) on all the Tmax
family sizes.
Plug-in
The PLUG-IN version of the circuit-breaker (Tmax T2, T3, T4 and T5) consists of:
– fixed part to be installed directly on the back plate of the unit
– moving part obtained from the fixed circuit-breaker with addition of the isolating contacts (near the
connection terminals), of the rear frame (for fixing to the fixed part) and of the terminal covers.
The circuit-breaker is racked out by unscrewing the top and bottom fixing screws. A special lock
1SDC210C03F0001
prevents circuit-breaker racking in and racking out with the contacts in the closed position.
In the case where the circuit-breaker has electrical accessories mounted (SOR, UVR, MOS, MOE,
MOE-E, AUX , AUX-E, AUE, RC222), the socket-plug connectors or the adapters for isolation of the
relative auxiliary circuits must also be ordered (see page 3/28).
3/2
1SDC210015D0205
Withdrawable
The circuit-breakers in the WITHDRAWABLE version (Tmax T4, T5, T6(*) and T7) are made up of:
– fixed part to be installed directly on the back plate of the unit fitted with lateral guides to allow
the moving part racking-in and racking-out operation to be carried out easily, and a dedicated
flange for the compartment door to replace the one provided with the circuit-breaker in the fixed
version;
– moving part obtained from the fixed circuit-breaker with addition of the relative conversion kit from
1SDC210C04F0001
fixed to withdrawable moving part;

– mandatory accessory to be applied onto the front of the circuit-breaker selected between front
for lever operating mechanism (standard supply for circuit-breakers fitted with accessories in the
factory, excluding T7) motor operator and rotary handle operating mechanism. Application of one
of these accessories allows the racking-in and racking-out of the moving part with the compart-
ment door closed (on T7 no accessory is required to have racking-out with the door closed).
Racking-in and racking-out of the moving part is carried out by means of the special operating lever
always supplied with the fixed part. This particular device allows the circuit-breaker to be placed
in the isolated position (with power and auxiliary circuits disconnected) with the compartment door
closed, to the great advantage of operator safety. The handle can only be inserted with the circuit-
breaker open. Once removed or racked-out, the circuit-breaker can be operated in open/closed and,
by means of special connection extensions, blank tests can be carried out of the auxiliary control
circuit functions.
The T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers in the withdrawable version can only be fitted with pre-wired
electrical accessories, provided with the appropriate ADP adapters for isolation of the relative auxiliary
circuits (see page 3/28).
3
Motorizable
The T7 circuit-breaker in the motorizable version can be equipped with the spring charging motor. To
allow a complete remote control with T7 motorizable, the circuit-breaker must be fitted with:
– shunt opening release;
– shunt closing release;
1SDC210D15F0001
– spring charging motor.
Versions available
F P W
Fixed Plug-in Withdrawable
T1 Q
T2 Q Q
T3 Q Q
T4 Q Q Q
T5 Q Q Q
T6 Q Q
T7 Q Q
T7M Q Q
(*)
Not available on the 1000 A version.
3/3
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Versions and types
Fixed part - FP
The fixed part, available for all the sizes of the Tmax family starting from T2, allows the circuit-breaker
to be made in the plug-in or withdrawable version. Different positions of the circuit-breaker are pos-
sible:
– plug-in: connected, removed;
– withdrawable: connected, removed, racked-out for test (only for T7), racked-out.
In the standard version, the fixed parts of T2 and T3 are available with front terminals (F). A distinctive
characteristic is the possibility of fitting these fixed parts with the same terminal, terminal cover and
1SDC210C05F0001
phase separator kits used for the fixed circuit-breakers. With Tmax T4, T5, T6 and T7, fixed parts
with dedicated front and rear terminals are available. Moreover, the fixed parts of T4 and T5 with front
terminals can also be fitted with the special ES, FC Cu and FC CuAl terminals.
The rear flat terminals of the fixed parts of Tmax T7 are orientated (horizontally or vertically). Factory
assembly is horizontal as standard. By means of the extra code 1SDA063571R1, it is possible to
ask for the fixed part with vertical terminals. This extra code can be associated either with the top
terminals or with the bottom ones (in the case of asking for assembly of both the terminals vertically,
the extra code must be repeated twice). The anti-racking-in locks, to be mounted on the left side
of the fixed part, and which prevent racking-in of incorrect moving parts are supplied as standard
fitting of the fixed parts of Tmax T7. In detail, it is possible to define the different ways of combination
between the fixed part and the moving part according to: T7 with lever or which can be motorised,
breaking capacity and rated uninterrupted current.
Kit for conversion of fixed part of plug-in into fixed part

of withdrawable
3 For Tmax T4 and T5 is available a conversion kit which is made up by a guide to prepare the fixed part
1SDC210C06F0001
of the circuit-breaker in the plug-in version in the fixed part of the circuit-breaker in the withdrawable
version, a racking-out crank handle and by the flange for the compartment door to replace the one
supplied with the fixed or plug-in circuit-breaker version.
Racking-out crank handle

This allows racking-out and racking-in of the circuit-breaker in the withdrawable version into the fixed
1SDC210C07F0001
part, with the door closed. The crank handle is the same for the whole range of circuit-breakers and
is automatically supplied with the fixed part of withdrawable circuit-breakers or with the conversion
kit for fixed part of plug-in into fixed part of withdrawable.
Sliding contacts blocks

The sliding contacts blocks are required for Tmax T7 in withdrawable version equipped with electrical
1SDC210D16F0001
accessories or with an electronic trip unit. Their function is to realize the electrical connections of the
secondary circuits between the mobile part and the fixed part and these blocks work in pairs: one
block is to be mounted on the mobile part and the respective one on the fixed part. The following
table combines the types of sliding contacts blocks and the electrical accessories.
Left block Central block Right block

Spring charging motor PR331 Auxiliary contacts (Q or SY)
Sping charged contact (AUX-SC) PR332 Shunt opening release
Ready to close contact (AUX-RTC) Shunt closing release
Early auxiliary contacts (AUE) Under voltage release
Contact for signalling trip coil release trip (AUX-SA)
Trip reset
If at least one of the electrical accessories listed in the previous table is fitted on the circuit breaker
the respective pair of blocks must be mounted on the mobile part and on the fixed part.
3/4
1SDC210015D0205
Kit for conversion into moving part of plug-in for T2 - T3 - T4 - T5
Allows the fixed circuit-breaker with front terminals to be converted into the moving part of a plug-in
circuit-breaker. The kit consists of:
– isolating contacts
– anti-racking out safety device
– assembly screws and nuts
– low terminal covers for the moving part.
The fixed part for plug-in version is necessary to complete the circuit-breaker.
1SDC210C08F0001
T2-T3
1SDC210C09F0001
3
T4-T5
Kit for conversion into moving part of withdrawable

for T4 - T5 - T6 - T7
Allows the fixed circuit-breaker with front terminals to be converted into the moving part of a with-
drawable circuit-breaker. The kit consists of:
– isolating contacts
1SDC210C10F0001
– frame
– assembly screws and nuts
– low terminal covers for the moving part.
T4-T5-T6
The circuit-breakers in the withdrawable version must always be completed either with the front for
lever operating mechanism (standard supply for circuit-breakers fitted with accessories in the factory,
excluding T7), rotary handle operating mechanism or motor operator.
The fixed part for withdrawable version is necessary to complete the circuit-breaker.
The kit for converting a fixed CB into a withdrawable version is not available for the T6 1000 A
circuit-breaker.
1SDC210D17F0001
T7
3/5
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Versions and types
Kit for conversion of fixed part into plug-in for RC222

and RC223 residual current releases
With the dedicated conversion kit, the RC222 and RC223 residual current releases for T4 and T5 as
well can be converted from the fixed to the plug-in version. The kit consists of four copper busbars
which make the connection between the terminals of the residual current relay and the isolating
contacts mounted on the circuit-breaker terminals.
Therefore, to obtain a circuit-breaker fitted with the residual current release accessory in the plug-
in version, the two kits for conversion of circuit-breakers and for residual current release must be
ordered.
The power circuit is connected to the connection terminals of the fixed part.
Kit for conversion of plug-in into withdrawable for RC222

and RC223 residual current releases
The RC222 and RC223 residual current releases for T4 and T5 can be converted from the plug-in
to withdrawable version by adding the special kit consisting of a bellows to be applied on the front
of the residual current release to allow racking-out of the circuit-breaker and of the residual current
release with the switchgear door closed.
This kit can also be mounted on the fixed version circuit-breaker when there is the front for locks or
the direct rotary handle operating mechanism, therefore widening the range of use of the residual
3 current releases.
3/6
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Connection terminals
The basic version circuit-breaker is supplied with:

– front terminals for copper cables (FC Cu), for the Tmax T1 circuit-breaker
– front terminals (F), for all the other Tmax family sizes.
Different types of terminals, which can be combined together in different ways, are also available (top
of one type, bottom of a different type), thereby allowing the circuit-breaker to be connected to the
plant in the most suitable way in relation to installation requirements.
The following can be distinguished:
– front terminals which allow connection of cables or busbars working directly from the front of
the circuit-breaker
– orientated rear terminals which allow installation of the circuit-breakers in switchboards with
rear access to both the cable and busbar connections.
Terminals are available for direct connection of bare copper or aluminium cables and terminals for
connection of busbars or cables with cable lugs.
On page 3/9 and following, the information needed to make the connections for each type of ter-
minal is summarised. For connection with bare cables, the minimum and maximum cross-sections
of the cables, which can be clamped in the terminals, the type of cables (rigid or flexible) and the
diameter of the terminal are indicated. For connections with busbars, flat terminals of different sizes
and composition are recommended.
The torque values to be applied to the tightening screws of the terminals for cables and to the screws
used to connect the busbars to the flat terminals are indicated.
The circuit-breakers can be ordered complete with the terminals required (mounted directly in the
factory), by associating the terminal kit codes with the code of the standard version circuit-breaker,
or the terminals can be ordered individually in packs of 3 - 4 - 6 or 8 pieces.
To receive the circuit-breaker with mixed terminals, the two terminal half-kits must be specified, loading
the one to be mounted on top as the first half-kit and then the one to be mounted below.
3
If the top terminals are the same as the bottom ones, it is compulsory to order the complete kit (6 or
8 pieces) and not the two half-kits: the configuration would not be accepted by the system.
Insulating terminal covers

1SDC210C11F0001
The terminal covers are applied to the circuit-breaker to prevent accidental contact with live parts
and thereby guarantee protection against direct contacts. The following are available:
– low terminal covers (LTC): these guarantee IP30 degree of protection for fixed circuit-breakers
with rear terminals and for moving parts of plug-in and withdrawable circuit-breakers
– high terminal covers (HTC): these guarantee IP40 degree of protection, for fixed circuit-breakers
with front, front extended, front for cables terminals.
With Tmax T2 and T3, the fixed parts of plug-in circuit-breakers can use the same terminal covers
as the corresponding fixed circuit-breakers. For fixed parts of T4 and T5, the proper terminal covers
(TC-FP) are available.
The degrees of protection indicated at page 1/8 are valid for the circuit-breaker installed in a switch-
board.
1SDC210C12F0001
3/7
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Phase separators
These allow the insulation characteristics between the phases at the connections to be increased.
They are mounted from the front, even with the circuit-breaker already installed, inserting them into
the corresponding slots and they are available in two versions:
– 100 mm high
– 200 mm high.
The H=100 mm phase separators are supplied as compulsory with front extended type terminals
(EF), whereas the ones with height H=200 mm are compulsory with front extended spread type
terminals (ES).
The phase separating partitions are incompatible with both the high and low insulating terminal
1SDC210C13F0001
covers.
The fixed parts can use the same phase separating partitions as the corresponding fixed circuit
breakers.
With the phase separating partitions mounted, on request, with Tmax T1, T2 and T3 a special kit is
available to reach IP40 degree of protection from the front of the circuit-breaker.
It is possible to mount the phase separating partitions between two circuit-breakers or fixed parts
side by side.
Screws for sealing the terminal covers

3 These are applied to the terminal covers of fixed circuit-breakers or to the moving parts of plug-in or
withdrawable circuit-breakers. They prevent removal of both the high and low terminal covers and
1SDC210C14F0001
can be locked with a wire and lead seal.
Kit for taking up the auxiliary power supply

1SDC210C15F0001
Special kits are available with the fixed version of Tmax T2, T3, T4 and T5 circuit-breakers for taking
up the auxiliary power supply directly from the connection terminals. They can only be combined
with the front terminals for copper cables (FC Cu) for T2, T3 and T4 or with the front terminals (F)
for T4-T5.
3/8
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breaker
HR for
F EF ES FC Cu FC CuAl FC CuAl MC RC CuAl HR VR R
RC221/222
Front Front Front Front Front Front Multi-cable Rear Rear Rear Rear Rear
terminals extended extended terminals terminals terminals terminals terminals flat flat flat horizontal
terminals spread for copper for CuAl for CuAl for CuAl horizontal vertical horizontal terminals
terminals cables cables cables(1) cables terminals terminals terminals
T1 F F(2) F F F
(2)
T2 F F F F F F F
T3 F(2) F F F F F F
T4 F(2) F F F F F F F
T5 F(2) F F F F F F
T6 630 F(2) F F F F F
T6 800 F(2) F F F F F
T6 1000 F(2)(3) F(3) F(3) F(3)
T7 F(2) F F F F F F
(1)
Housed externally
3
(2)
Standard supply
(3)
A type of terminal among those indicated in the table must necessarily be mounted on the T6 1000 A circuit-breaker (complete circuit-breaker, breaking part and loose protection trip unit).
F = Fixed
Fixed part
F EF ES FC Cu FC CuAl FC CuAl R RS HR VR HR/VR
Front Front Front Front Front Front Rear Rear Rear Rear Rear
terminals extended extended terminals terminals terminals horizontal spreaded flat flat flat
terminals spread for copper for CuAl for CuAl terminals terminals horizontal vertical terminals
terminals cables cables cables(1) terminals terminals
T2 P(2) P P P P P P
T3 P(2) P P P P P P
T4 P-W P-W P-W P-W P-W
T5 P-W P(3)-W(3) P-W P-W P-W P-W
T6 W W W
T7 W W W W
(1)
Housed externally
(2)
Standard supply
(3)
For T5 630 only
P = Plug-in
W = Withdrawable
3/9
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Front terminals - F
1SDC210C26F0001
Allow connection of busbars or cables terminated with cable terminal
Type Version Pieces Busbars/cable terminal [mm] Tightening [Nm] Terminal covers Phase separators
W H D Ø high low fixed part
T2 F-P 1 20 7.5 5 6.5 6 R R – R
T3 F-P 1 24 9.5 8 8.5 8 R R – R
T4 F 1 25 9.5 8 8.5 18 R R – R
T5 F 1 35 11 10(1) 10.5 28 R R – R
T6 630 F 2 40 12 5 2x7 9 R R – R
T6 800 F 2 50 12 5 2x7 9 R R – R
T7 1250(2) F 2 50 20 8 2 x 11 18 – R – R
T7 1600 F 2 50 20 10 2 x 11 18 – R – R
(1) (2)
minimum 5 mm up to 1250 A
1SDC210C27F0001
1SDC210C28F0001
3
Front extended terminals - EF
1SDC210C29F0001
Type Version Pieces Busbars [mm] Cable terminal [mm] Tightening [Nm] Terminal covers Phase separators
W D Ø W Ø A B(1) high low fixed part
T1 F 1 15 5 8.5 15 8.5 7 9 R – – S
T2 F-P 1 20 4 8.5 20 8.5 6 9 R – – S
T3 F-P 1 20 6 10 20 10 8 18 R – – S
T4 F 1 20 10 10 20 10 18 18 R – – S
P-W 1 20 10 8 20 8 – 9 – – R R
T5 F 2 30 7 11 30 11 28 18 R – – S
P-W 2 30 15 10 30 10 – 18 – – R R(7)
T6 630 F-W 2 40 5 11(2) 40 11(2) 9 18 R R R R
T6 800 F-W 2 50 5 14 50 14 9 30 – R R R
T6 1000 F 2 50 6 14 50 14 9 30 – – – –
T7 1250(3) F-W 2 50 8 4x11(4) – – 18(5) 40(6) – R – S
T7 1600 F-W 2 50 10 4x11(4) – – 18(5) 40(6) – R – S
(1) (3) (5)
class 4.8 screws (not supplied) up to 1250 A 12 Nm onto fixed part of withdrawable circuit-breaker
(2) (4) (6)
14 mm for W only use two holes diagonally class 8.8 screws (not supplied)
(7)
Standard for T5 630
1SDC210C30F0001
1SDC210C31F0001
A = Tightening the terminal onto the circuit-breaker

B = Tightening the cable/busbar onto the terminal
R = On request
S = Standard
Pieces = Number of busbars, cables or cable terminals
3/10
1SDC210015D0205
Front extended spread terminals - ES
1SDC210C32F0001
W P Ø W Ø A B(1) high low fixed part
T2 F-P 1 30 4 10.5 30 10.5 6 18 – – – S
T3 F-P 1 30 4 10.5 30 10.5 8 18 – – – S
T4 F 1 30 6 10.5 30 10.5 18 18 – – – S
T5 F-P(2)-W(2) 1 40 10 11 11 11 28 18 – – – S
T6 F 1 80 5 3 x 13 3 x 45 13 9 30 – – – –
T7 F 2 50 10 3x13 4x45 13 18 40 – – – S
W 2 80 6 3x13 4x45 13 40 40 – – – –
(1) (2)
class 4.8 screws (not supplied) for T5 630 only
1SDC210C33F0001
1SDC210C34F0001
3
Front terminals for copper cables - FC Cu
1SDC210C35F0001
Allow connection of bare copper cables directly to the circuit-breaker
Type Assembly Version Pieces Cable [mm2] Flexible busbars Tightening [Nm] Ø [mm] Terminal covers Phase
rigid flexible W x S x N(1) A B high low fixed part separators
T1/T1 1p standard F 1 2.5…70 2.5…50 9x0.8x6 – 7 12 R R – R
standard F 2 – 2.5…35 – – 7 12 R R – R
T2 standard F-P 1 1…95 1…70 13x0.5x10 – 7 14 R R R R
standard F-P 2 – 1…50 – – 7 14 R R R R
T3 standard F-P 1 6…185 6…150 15.5x0.8x10 – 10 18 R R R R
standard F-P 2 – 6…70 – – 10 18 R R R R
T4 standard F-P-W 1 2.5…185 2.5…120 15.5x0.8x10 – 10 18 R R S R
standard F-P-W 2 – 2.5…95 – – 10 18 R R S R
T5 standard F-P-W 1 16…300 16…240 24x1x10 – 25 28 R R S R
standard F-P-W 2 – 16…150 – – 25 28 R R R –
external F 2 120…240 – – 18 25 – S – – –
(1)
W = width; S = thickness; N = n. of bars
1SDC210C36F0001
1SDC210C37F0001

R = On request
S = Standard
3/11
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Front terminals for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl
1SDC210C40F0001
1SDC210C41F0001
1SDC210C39F0001
Allow connection of bare copper or aluminium cables directly to the
circuit-breaker (solid aluminium cables cannot be used)
T2-T5 T4-T5 T6-T7

Standard External
Type Assembly Version Pieces Cable [mm2] Tightening [Nm] Ø [mm] Terminal covers Phase separators
rigid A B high low fixed part
T1 external F 1 2.5…50 7 5.6 9.9 S – – –
T1 external F 1 35…95 7 13.5 14 S – – –
T2 standard F-P 1 1…95 – 7 14 R R R R
external F-P 1 70…185 6 25 18 S – S –
external F-P 2 35…95 6 12 16 S – S –
T3 standard F-P 1 70…185 – 16 18 R – R R
external F-P 1 150…240 8 40 24 S – S –
external F-P 2 35…150 8 16 18 S – S –
T4 standard F-P-W 1 6…185 9 31 18 R R S R
external F 2 35…150 18 16 18 S – S –
external F 1 150…240 18 40 24 S – – –
standard F 1 2.5…50 9 5.6 9.9 R R R R
T5 external F-P-W 1 120…240 18 43 21.5 R R R S
standard F-P-W 1 185…300 18 43 24.5 R R S R
external F 2 95…240 18 31 24.5 S – S –
external F 2 95…120 18 31 – S – – R
3 T6 630
T6 800
standard
external
F
F
2
3
120…240
70…185
5
9
31
43
21.5
19
R
S
–
–
–
–
R
–
T6 1000 external F 4 70…150 9 43 19 S – – –
T7 630 standard F 2 185…240 18 43 21.5 – S – R
T7 1250(1) external F 4 70...240 18 43 21.5 S – – –
(1)
up to 1250 A
1SDC210C42F0001
1SDC210C43F0001
Multi-cable terminals - MC
1SDC210C44F0001
Allow connection of cables directly to the circuit-breaker
Type Version Pieces Cable [mm2] Tightening [Nm] Terminal covers Phase separators
max flexible rigid A B high low fixed part
T4 F 6 2.5…25 2.5…35 18 7 S – – –
T5 F 6 – 16…50 18 5 S – – –
1SDC210C45F0001

R = On request
S = Standard
3/12
1SDC210015D0205
Rear terminals for copper/aluminium cables - RC CuAl
Allow connection of bare copper or aluminium cables directly to
1SDC210C46F0001
1SDC210C46F0001
the circuit-breaker
Type Version Pieces Cable Tightening [Nm] Ø [mm] Terminal covers

rigid A B high low
T6 630 F 2 150…240 9 43 21 S –
T6 800 F 3 70…185 9 31 17.5 S –
Rear flat horizontal terminals - HR
1SDC210C47F0001
Allow connection of busbars or cable terminal at the rear.
They can only be installed horizontally.
T1
W D Ø W Ø A B(1) high low
T1 F 1 14 5 6.2 14 6.2 7 5 – S –
T7 1250(2)
T7 1600
F
F
2
2
50
50
8
10
2x11
2x11
–
–
–
–
20
20
40
40
–
–
S
S
–
– 3
(1) (2)
class 8.8 screws (not supplied) up to 1250 A
Rear flat vertical terminals - VR

They can only be installed vertically.
W D Ø W Ø A B(1) high low fixed part
T7 1250(2) F 2 50 8 2x11 – – 20 40 – S –
T7 1600 F 2 50 10 2x11 – – 20 40 – S –
(1) (2)

R = On request
S = Standard
3/13
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Rear flat horizontal terminals for RC221/RC222 - HR
1SDC210C48F0001
Allow connection of busbars or cable terminal at the
rear with RC221/RC222.
They can be installed horizontally
Type Version Pieces Busbars [mm] Tightening [Nm] Terminal covers Phase separators
W D Ø A B high low
T1 F 1 14 5 6.2 7 5(1) – – –
(1)
class 8.8 screws (not supplied)
Rear terminals - R
1SDC210C49F0001
They can be installed in 4 different positions to facilitate
connection to cable/busbars
W D Ø A B(1) high low
T2 F-P 1 20 4 8.5 6 9 – S –
T3 F-P 1 20 6 8.5 6 9 – S –
T4 F 1 20 10 8.5 6 9 – S –
3 T5
T6 630
F
F
2
2
30
40
7
5
11
14
18
18
18
30
–
–
S
S
–
–
T6 800 F 2 50 5 14 18 30 – S –
T6 1000 F 2 50 6 14 18 30 – S –
T7 1250(2) F 2 50 8 2x11 20 40 – S –
T7 1600 F 2 50 10 2x11 20 40 – S –
(1) (2)
1SDC210C50F0001
Rear spreaded terminals - RS

Allow connection of busbars and cable terminal at the rear.
W D Ø A B high low fixed part
T7 W 2 60 10 2x11 18 40 – – – –

R = On request
S = Standard
3/14
1SDC210015D0205
Rear flat horizontal and vertical terminals for fixed parts - HR/VR
1SDC210C51F0001
These allow connection of busbars or cable
terminals at the rear.
There are rear horizontal or vertical terminals.
Type Version Pieces Busbars [mm] Cable terminal [mm] Tightening [Nm] Terminal covers Phase
W D Ø W Ø A B(1) high low fixed part separators
T4 P-W 1 20 10 10 20 10 6 18 – – – –
T5 400 P-W 1 25 10 12 25 12 9 18 – – – –
T5 630 P-W 2 40 15 11 40 11 – 18 – – – –
T6 630 W 2 40 5 14 40 14 – 30 – – – –
T6 800 W 2 50 5 14 50 14 – 30 – – – –
T7 1250(2)(3) W 2 50 8 2x11 – – 12 40 – – – –
T7 1600(3) W 2 50 10 2x11 – – 12 40 – – – –
(1) (2) (3)
class 4.8 screws (not supplied) up to 1250 A for vertical assembly directly in the factory, use extra code 1SDA063571R1

R = On request
S = Standard
3/15
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Service releases
The Tmax family of circuit-breakers can be fitted with service releases (shunt opening release, shunt
closing release and undervoltage release). These are available in the pre-cabled version, depending
on the size of the circuit-breaker fitted with 1 m long free cables, with a connector with 1 m cables
or with a simple pin connector and two terminals to be mounted in the terminal board, or in the
uncabled version, with cabling to be carried out by the customer.
Assembly is carried out for all the releases by pressing into the special seat in the left part of the
circuit-breaker (right for T7) and fixing with the screw provided.
The releases are always alternative to each other for T1, T2, T3 (both for the three-pole and four-pole
version), whereas for T4, T5 and T6 in the four-pole version the shunt opening release (not possible
with PS-SOR) and the undervoltage release can be housed at the same time, as long as they are
in the wired version and with the shunt opening release necessarily mounted in the slot of the third
pole. T4, T5, T6 circuit-breakers in the withdrawable version can be equipped only with pre-cabled
accessories; the T4-T5-T6 circuit-breakers complete with motorized controls can only be fitted with
prewired undervoltage and shunt opening releases.
The T7 circuit-breaker allows simultaneous mounting of all three service releases. These two pos-
sibilities are available on the three-pole version as well. Moreover Tmax T7 can be equipped with two
shunt opening releases instead of the undervoltage release to facilitate some specific applications
where a very high safety level of the remote circuit-breaker opening command is required.
Shunt opening release – SOR

Allows circuit-breaker opening by means of an electric command. Operation of the release is guar-
anteed for a voltage between 70% and 110% of the rated power supply voltage value Un, both in
alternating current and in direct current. For Tmax T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 and T6, the SOR shunt opening
release is fitted with a limit contact for cutting off the power supply in the open position and with the
1SDC210C52F0001
release tripped.
3
T1-T2-T3
1SDC210C53F0001
1SDC210C54F0001
1SDC210C55F0001
T4-T5-T6
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5-T6
SOR - Electrical characteristics

1SDC210D18F0001
Inrush power consumption

Tmax T1, T2, T3 Tmax T4, T5, T6 Tmax T7
Version AC [VA] DC [W] AC [VA] DC [W] AC [VA] DC [W]
T7 12 V DC 50 150
24 V AC/DC 300 300
24…30 V AC/DC 50 50 150 150
30 V AC/DC 300 300
48 V AC/DC 300 300
48…60 V AC/DC 60 60 150 150
60 V AC/DC 300 300
110…120 V AC/DC 300 300
120…127 V AC/DC 300 300
110…127 V AC - 110…125 V DC 50 50 150 150
220…240 V AC/DC 300 300
220…240 V AC - 220…250 V DC 50 50 150 150
240…250 V AC/DC 300 300
380…400 V AC 300
380…440 V AC 55 150
415…440 V AC 300
480…525 V AC 55 150
Opening times [ms] 15 15 15 15 50 50
3/16
1SDC210015D0205
Shunt opening release with permanent service – PS-SOR
Furthermore, for T4, T5 and T6, opening coils with permanent service (PS-SOR) are available, with
much lower power consumption and which can be supplied continuously: in this case, in fact, they
are not fitted with auxiliary limit contact. The pre-cabled or uncabled version can be chosen for these
coils as well.
PS-SOR - Electrical characteristics

Tmax T4, T5, T6
Version AC [VA] DC [W]
24 V AC/DC 4 4
110…120 V AC 4 –
SOR Test Unit

The SOR Test Unit - control/monitoring unit - allows correct operation of the shunt opening releases
which can be mounted on the Tmax from T1...T7 circuit-breaker to be verified, to guarantee a high
level of reliability for the circuit-breaker opening command.
The SOR Test Unit - control/monitoring unit - allows continuity of the shunt opening releases with a
rated service voltage between 24 V and 250 V (AC and DC) to be verified, as well as operation of
the electronic circuit of the opening coil. The check of continuity is carried out cyclically at an interval
1SDC210C56F0001
of 20 seconds between one test and the next.

The unit has LED optic signals on the front which provide the following information: 3
– POWER ON: presence of power supply
– YO TESTING: test being carried out
– TEST FAILED: indication following a failed test or lack of auxiliary power supply
– ALARM: signalling after three failed tests.
There are also two relays and a changeover switch available on board the unit which allow the fol-
lowing two events to be signalled remotely:
– failure of a test (resetting takes place automatically when the alarm goes off)
– failure of three tests (resetting only takes place by means of the manual RESET from the front of
the unit).
Characteristics
Auxiliary power supply 24 V…250 V AC / DC
Maximum interrupted current 6A
Maximum interrupted voltage 250 V AC
Shunt closing release – SCR

The shunt closing release - only available on the motorizable versions of Tmax T7 - allows remote
1SDC210D18F0001
closure of the circuit-breaker when the circuit-breaker closing springs are charged. The technical
characteristics and the service voltages of the shunt closing release are identical to those of the shunt
opening release available on T7. The closing time of the circuit-breaker by means of SCR is 50 ms.
T7 Thanks to the anti-surge system, the closure of the circuit-breaker is not possible before the open-
ing operation has entirely been performed. Thus a delay of at least 30 ms between the opening and
closing command is required.
3/17
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Service releases
Undervoltage release – UVR

Opens the circuit-breaker due to lack of release power supply voltage or to drops to values under
0.7 x Un with a trip range from 0.7 to 0.35 x Un. After tripping, the circuit-breaker can be closed
again starting from a voltage higher than 0.85 x Un. With the undervoltage release de-energised, it
is not possible to close the circuit-breaker or the main contacts.
UVR - Electrical characteristics UVR T1...T6

Power consumption during permanent operation
1SDC210C57F0001
Tmax T1, T2, T3 Tmax T4, T5, T6

Version AC [VA] DC [W] AC [VA] DC [W]
24 V AC/DC
T1-T2-T3 24…30 V AC/DC 1.5 1.5 6 3
30 V AC/DC
48 V AC/DC 1 1 6 3
60 V AC/DC 1 1 6 3
110…120 V AC/DC
120…127 V AC/DC
1SDC210C53F0001
110…127 V AC - 110…125 V DC 2 2 6 3
220…240 V AC/DC
220…240 V AC - 220…250 V DC 2.5 2.5 6 3
240…250 V AC/DC
T4-T5-T6 380…400 V AC
380…440 V AC 3 6
3 415…440 V AC
480…525 V AC 4 6
Opening times [ms] 15 15 ) 25 ) 25
1SDC210D18F0001
T7
1SDC210C58F0001
1SDC210C55F0001
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5-T6
UVR - Electrical characteristics UVR T7

Characteristics
Power supply (Un) 24 V AC/DC 240-250 V AC/DC
30 V AC/DC 380-400 V AC
48 V AC/DC 415-440 V AC
60 V AC/DC
110-120 V AC/DC
120...127 V AC/DC
220...240 V AC/DC
Operating limits IEC EN 60947-2 Standards
Inrush power (Ps) DC = 300 W
Inrush time ~ 100 ms AC = 300 VA
Continuous power (Pc) DC = 3.5 W
AC = 3.5 VA
Opening time (UVR) 30 ms
Insulation voltage 2500 V 50 Hz (for 1 min)
3/18
1SDC210015D0205
Time delay device for undervoltage release – UVD
The undervoltage release (UVR) can be combined with an external electronic power supply time
delay device, which allows circuit-breaker opening to be delayed in the case of a drop or failure in
the power supply voltage of the release itself, according to preset and adjustable delays, in order to
prevent unwarranted trips caused by temporary malfunctions. The delay device must be combined
with an undervoltage release with the same corresponding voltage.
Two time delay devices with the same characteristics are available. For T1-T6 a time delay device
1SDC210C59F0001
which can be combined also on the Isomax S3-S4-S5 circuit-breakers is available. The time delay
device for Tmax T7 is the one already available on the Emax ranges.
UVD
Circuit-breaker Power supply voltage [V AC/DC]
T1…T6 24…30
T1…T6 48…60
T1…T6 110…125
T1…T6 220…250
Delay which can be set [s] 0.25 - 0.5 - 0.75 - 1 - 1.25 - 2 - 2.5 - 3
Trip time tolerance ± 15%
Circuit-breaker Power supply voltage [V AC/DC]

T7 24…30
T7 48
T7
T7
60
110…125 3
T7 220…250
Delay which can be set [s] 0.5 - 1 - 1.5 - 2 - 3
Testing extension for service releases

Available for Tmax T4, T5 and T6, this allows the service releases to be supplied with the circuit-breaker
1SDC210C60F0001
in the removed position. With the circuit-breaker in safe conditions, i.. isolated in relation to the power
circuits, this makes it possible to carry out blank tests of the circuit-breaker functionality.
1SDC210C61F0001
3/19
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Electrical signals
These allow information on the operating state of the circuit-breaker to be taken outside.
Installation of these accessories is carried out directly from the front of the circuit-breaker in special
slots placed on the right-hand side of the circuit-breaker, completely segregated from the live parts
- all to the benefit of user safety. The auxiliary contacts can be supplied (depending on the type)
either in the version with cabling to be carried out by the customer by means of connection to the
terminals integrated in the auxiliary contacts, or with cabling directly on the circuit-breaker terminal
board or in the pre-cabled version, depending on the size of the circuit-breaker fitted with free ca-
bles 1 m long, with a connector with 1 m long cables. The pre-cabled version is mandatory on the
T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers in the withdrawable version. The auxiliary contacts for T7 are always
fitted with three terminals to be mounted in the terminal board to carry out the cabling. The auxiliary
contacts are available for use both in direct and alternating current at various voltages. The signals
are reset when the circuit-breaker is reset.
T1-T7 (AUX)
Available both in the pre-cabled and uncabled version, they supply the following electrical signalling:
– open/closed: indicates the position of the circuit-breaker contacts (Q)
– release trip: signals circuit-breaker opening due to overcurrent release trip (for overload or short circuit),
trip of the residual current release, of the opening coil or of the undervoltage release, of the emergency
opening pushbutton of the motor operator or two to operation of the test pushbutton (SY)
– contact for signalling electronic trip unit tripped: signals intervention of one of the protection func-
tions of the electronic trip unit (S51).
1SDC210C62F0001
The auxiliary contacts for T7 are always fitted with terminals to be mounted in the terminal box to carry
out wiring.
T4, T5, T6 and T7 with electronic trip units (AUX-SA)

AUX - 250 V AC/DC
3 There is a contact for signalling electronic trip units tripped, only available in the pre-cabled version for use at
250 V AC.
T4, T5 and T6 (AUX-MO)

This auxiliary contact, only in the cabled version, must necessarily be combined with the motor
operator and indicates the motor operation mode (manual or remote).
1SDC210C63F0001
T7 (AUX-RTC)
The “circuit-breaker ready to close” auxiliary contact is available with wiring directly on the terminal
box of the T7 circuit-breaker with stored energy operating mechanism and signals that the circuit-
breaker is ready to accept a closing command if there are the following five conditions:
AUX-C - 250 V AC/DC
– circuit-breaker open
– closing springs charged
– any opening coil de-energised
– any undervoltage coil energised
1SDC210D19F0001
– opening solenoid armed.
T7 (AUX-SC)
Indicates the state of the circuit-breaker operating mechanism closing springs remotely (supplied
T7
only with the spring charging motor).
T4, T5 and T6 with PR222DS/PD, PR223DS and PR223EF electronic trip unit (AUX-E)
Only available in the pre-cabled version, the auxiliary contacts AUX-E (also called electronic version
contacts) communicate the state of the circuit-breaker to the electronic trip unit and make an open/
closed signal available to the outside and another one for electronic trip unit tripped.
They can only be combined with the PR222DS/PD or PR223DS electronic trip unit and only function
when there is a 24 V DC auxiliary power supply to the trip unit for the communication functions.
The AUX-E contacts can, moreover, be directly connected to the MOE-E motor operator (see page
3/26).
The “traditional” version of the auxiliary contacts can also be combined with the protection trip units
with dialogue; in this case, only electrical signalling of the state of the circuit-breaker will be provided
and it will not be possible to communicate remotely or control the motor.
3/20
1SDC210015D0205
1SDC210C64F0001
1SDC210C64F0001
AUX AUX-C
AUX - Electrical characteristics

AUX 250 V - T1...T6
Power supply voltage Service current
Category of utilisation (IEC 60947-5-1)
AC 14 DC 13
125 V 6A 0.3 A
250 V 5A 0.15 A
Protection with gG 10x38
type fuse (Imax 6 A)
AUX 400 V - T4...T7 3

Power supply voltage Service current In [A]
AC DC
125 V – 0.3
250 V 12(1) 0.15
400 V 3 –
(1)
5 A for Tmax T7
AUX 24 V - T1...T7
Power supply voltage Service current In [A]
AC DC
24 V – * 0.75 mA
5V – * 1 mA
AUX-E - T4...T6
Typical contact Mosfet
Vmax 48 V DC/30 V AC
Rmax 35 ohm
Pmax (resistive load) 200 mW
System contact/earth insulation 2000 V AC (1 min. @ 50 Hz)
Contact/contact insulation 400 V DC
Table of the possible combinations of the T7-T7M auxiliary contacts
T7 SY Q1 1Q + 1SY T7M Q2 Q3 2Q
Q2 Q3 2Q Q4 Q1 2Q
SY Q1 Q2 Q3 3Q + 1SY Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 4Q
3/21
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Electrical signals
Types of auxiliary contacts

Version T1 T2 TMD T2 PR221 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7
AUX 250 V AC/DC 1 open/closed changeover contact + pre-cabled/

1 release tripped changeover contact not cabled Q Q Q Q Q Q
AUX 250 V AC/DC 3 open/closed changeover contacts + pre-cabled/
AUX 250 V AC/DC 1 SA electronic release trip contact + pre-cabled
1 open/closed changeover contact +
1 release tripped changeover contact Q
AUX 250 V AC/DC 2 open/closed changeover contacts + pre-cabled
AUX 400 V AC 1 open/closed changeover contact + pre-cabled
1 release tripped changeover contact Q Q Q Q
AUX 400 V AC 2 open/closed changeover contacts pre-cabled Q Q Q Q
AUX 24 V DC 1 open/closed changeover contact + pre-cabled
AUX 24 V DC 2 open/closed changeover contacts pre-cabled Q
AUX 24 V DC 3 open/closed changeover contacts + pre-cabled/
AUX-SA 250 V AC 1 SA electronic release trip contact pre-cabled Q Q Q Q
AUX-MO 1 contact signalling manual/remote not cabled Q Q Q
AUX-RTC 24 V DC 1 contact signalling ready to close pre-cabled Q
AUX-RTC 250 V AC/DC 1 contact signalling ready to close pre-cabled Q
AUX-SC 24 V DC 1 contact signalling closing springs charged pre-cabled Q
AUX-SC 250 V AC/DC 1 contact signalling closing springs charged pre-cabled Q
3 AUX-E 1 open/closed contact +

1 relay tripped contact
(only with PR222DS/PD and PR223DS)
pre-cabled
Q Q Q
Testing extension for auxiliary contacts

Available for Tmax T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers, this allows the auxiliary contacts to be connected
1SDC210C60F0001
to the relative power supply circuit with the circuit-breaker in the removed position. With the circuit-
breaker in a safe position, i.e. isolated in relation to the power circuits, it is possible to carry out blank
function tests of the circuit- breaker.
1SDC210C65F0001
3/22
1SDC210015D0205
Early auxiliary contacts – AUE
Normally open contacts, advanced in relation to closing (2 contacts for all the sizes, except for T7
where there are 3). They allow the undervoltage release to be supplied in advance, in relation to
closing of the main contacts, in compliance with the IEC 60204-1 and VDE 0113 Standards. They
1SDC210C66F0001
are mounted inside the direct and transmitted rotary handle operating mechanism, whereas on T7
with lever operating mechanism, they are mounted directly on the circuit-breaker. The early contacts
are only supplied in the cabled version with 1 m long cables, complete with socket-plug with 6 poles
for T1, T2 and T3 or with socket-plug connectors with 1 m. cables for T4, T5 and T6. It is neces-
sary to bear in mind that the connectors for T4, T5 and T6, once inserted in the special slot on the
left-hand side of the circuit-breaker, extend in relation to the outline of the circuit-breaker itself. The
early auxiliary contacts for T7 are always fitted with 3 terminals to be mounted in the terminal board
to carry out the cabling.
1SDC210C67F0001
Auxiliary position contacts – AUP
With Tmax circuit-breakers, auxiliary position contacts which provide electrical signalling of the circuit-
breaker position in relation to the fixed part are available. The following auxiliary position contacts
3
are available:
T2 - T3
– contacts signalling circuit-breaker racked-in.
T4 - T5 - T6
1SDC210C68F0001
– circuit-breaker racked-in signalling contacts for plug-in and withdrawable versions

– circuit-breaker racked-out signalling contacts only for withdrawable version
– circuit-breaker racked-in signalling contacts for plug-in and withdrawable versions 24 V DC
– circuit-breaker racked-out signalling contacts only for withdrawable version 24 V DC.
T7
– contacts for signalling circuit-breaker racked-in
– contacts for signalling circuit-breaker in isolated-test
– contacts for signalling circuit-breaker racked-out.
1SDC210D20F0001
T7
1SDC210C69F0001
1SDC210C70F0001
T2-T3 T4-T5
3/23
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Electrical signals
A maximum of three contacts can be installed on the fixed part of T2, T3, T4 and T5, whereas up
to five auxiliary contacts can be mounted on the fixed part of T6 in all the combinations (for T4 and
T5, in the withdrawable version, only one contact for signalling circuit-breaker racked-out can be
housed in the compartment closest to the bottom terminals).
The auxiliary contacts for T7 are inserted in a single block consisting of two contacts for signalling
racked-in, two for isolated-test and two for racked-out.
Trip reset
Available on T7 in the version with possibility of motorisation, this is a coil which allows remote circuit-
breaker resetting following a trip of the overcurrent releases. It is available with two power supply
voltages: 24...30 V AC/DC, 110...130 V AC/DC and 200...240 V AC/DC.
1SDC210N78F0001
Mechanical operation counter

Available on T7 motorizable, it is connected to the operating mechanism by means of a simple lever
1SDC210D22F0001
mechanism. It indicates the number of circuit-breaker mechanical operations. The indication is visible
from the outside on the front of the circuit-breaker.
3
3/24
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Remote control
Solenoid operator for T1, T2 and T3 – MOS

Allows remote circuit-breaker opening and closing control and is particularly recommended for use
in electric network supervision and control systems. A selector allows passage from automatic to
manual operation and it is also available a block (supplied as standard) for the operating mode of
the motor. It is always provided with a padlock in the open position which prevents any command,
either locally or remotely. It operates both circuit-breaker opening and closing, working directly on
the circuit-breaker lever.
1SDC210C71F0001
It is offered in two versions, one “side-by-side” with the circuit-breaker, with T1 and T2, for installation
on a panel or DIN EN 50022 rail, the other on the “front”, with T1, T2 and T3, suitable for installation
directly on the front of the circuit-breaker.
The latter is complete with operating handle. The front version can also be used with plug-in circuit-
breakers.
Coupling with the residual current release is only allowed for a circuit-breaker with solenoid operator
side-by-side, to allow access to the user interface of the residual current release from the front of
the switchgear. In fact, using the solenoid operator superimposed would imply the circuit-breaker
position on the rear of the door and its residual current release and the interface would no longer
be accessible. This combination can only be installed directly on the back plate of the switchgear.
Both versions can be used either in the three-pole or four-pole version. The solenoid operator is
supplied complete with 1m long cables and, just for the superimposed version, with a socket-plug
1SDC210C72F0001
connector with 5 poles.

Both the opening and closing commands are operated by the solenoid which acts directly on the
circuit-breaker lever. The solenoid operator functions are also guaranteed thanks to permanent
opening/closing electric power.
The main parameters relative to the solenoid operator are indicated in the table.
Rated voltage, Un 3
AC [V] 110…250
DC [V] 48…60 / 110…250
Operating voltage 85…110% Un
Inrush power consumption during operation 1800 [VA] / 1000 [W]
Power on stand-by < 100 [mW]
Time opening [s] < 0.1
closing [s] < 0.1
Mechanical life [No. operations] 25000
[No. operations/h] 240 (T1 and T2); 120 (T3)
Degree of protection, on the front IP30
Minimum control impulse time on opening and closing [ms] >100
The unit is permanently supplied on stand-by, a control is applied by means of an external contact (relay, opto-insulator) in a low power circuit.
Contact characteristics: V AC/DC = 24 V
I AC/DC = 50 mA
1SDC210C73F0001
1SDC210C74F0001
3/25
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Remote control
Stored energy motor operator for T4, T5 and T6 – MOE and MOE-E
With the stored energy motor operator, it is possible to control both opening and closing of the circuit-
breaker on which it is installed. During opening of the circuit-breaker, the spring system is recharged
automatically: the stored energy is exploited in this way to close the circuit-breaker.
The motor operator is always supplied with socket-plug connectors with 1 m long cables and is always
fitted with a padlock in the open position, which prevents any command, either locally or remotely.
The connectors, once inserted in the special slot on the left-hand side of the circuit-breaker, extend
1SDC210C75F0001
in relation to the outline of the circuit-breaker itself and are only compatible with pre-wired electrical
accessories. A selector allows passage from automatic to manual operation and it is also available a
block (supplied as standard) for the operating mode of the motor.
The motor operator can be fitted both with a key lock in the open position (with the same MOL-S
keys for groups of circuit-breakers or different MOL-D keys) and with an MOL-M key lock against
manual operation: in the former case, the lock in the open position is both of electrical and mechanical
type, in the latter case, only of mechanical type, i.e. only closing from the front of the circuit-breaker
(remote closing is allowed).
In the case of interlocked circuit-breakers, for safety reasons the key lock against manual operation
is required.
The motor operator is always fitted with a contact to signal “auto” or “manual” (not on changeover).
On request, it can also be fitted with an AUX-MO auxiliary contact (on changeover), which provides a
signal of its state of service: “auto” (remote control of the circuit-breaker) or “manual”.
If the circuit-breaker is fitted with the PR222DS/PD and PR223DS electronic trip unit, instead of the
MOE motor operator, it is possible to use the MOE-E motor operator: for its use, the circuit-breaker
must also be fitted with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts (standard supply with MOE-E). The MOE-E
allows use of the digital signals coming from the supervision and control system, by means of the
PR222DS/PD, PR223DS and PR223EF trip unit and the AUX-E contacts, and to convert these into
3 power signals to operate the motor operator. All the characteristics indicated above for the MOE mo-
tor operator are also valid for the MOE-E. The motor operator functions are also guaranteed thanks
to permanent opening/closing electric power.
The main parameters relative to the stored energy motor operator are indicated in the table.
MOE and MOE-E

Tmax T4-T5 Tmax T6
Rated voltage, Un AC [V] DC [V] AC [V] DC [V]
– 24 – 24
– 48…60 – 48…60
110…125 110…125 110…125 110…125
220…250 220…250 220…250 220…250
380 – 380 –
Operating voltage [% Un] 85…110 85…110 85…110 85…110
Power consumption on inrush Ps ) 300 VA ) 300 W ) 400 VA ) 400 W
Power consumption in service Pc )150 VA )150 W )150 VA )150 W
Duration opening [s] 1.5 3
closing [s] < 0.1 < 0.1
resetting [s] 3 5
Mechanical life [No. operations] 20000 10000
Degree of protection, on the front IP30 IP30
Minimum control impulse time on
opening and closing [ms] *100 *100
1SDC210C76F0001
3/26
1SDC210015D0205
Testing extension for motor operators
Available for circuit-breakers Tmax T4, T5 and T6, this allows the motor operator to be connected
to the relative power supply circuit with the circuit-breaker in the removed position. With the circuit-
breaker in a safe position, i.e. isolated in relation to the power circuits, it is possible to carry out blank
tests of the circuit-breaker functions.
Spring charging motor for T7 motorizable

Only available on Tmax T7 in the motorizable version, it automatically charges the circuit-breaker
operating mechanism springs. This operation is carried out automatically immediately after closure
of the circuit-breaker.
When there is no power supply or during maintenance work, the closing springs can, in any case,
be charged manually by means of the special operating mechanism lever. It is always fitted with
limit contact.
1SDC210D23F0001
The spring charging motor can be fitted with a terminal to be mounted in the terminal board to carry
out the cabling.
Spring charging motor

Tmax T7
Rated voltage, Un AC [V]
24…30
DC [V]
24…30
3
48…60 48…60
100…130 100…130
220…250 220…250
380...415
Opering voltage [% Un] 85…110 85…110
Power consumption ) 100 VA ) 100 W
Charging time [s] 8 - 10 8 - 10
Note: To allow a complete remote control with T7 motorizable, the circuit-breaker must be fitted with:
– shunt opening release;
– shunt closing release;
– spring charging motor.
3/27
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Remote control
Adapters – ADP
For the SOR, PS-SOR, UVR, AUX, MOE or MOE-E and AUE pre-wired electrical accessories, used
with Tmax T4, T5 and T6 in the plug-in or withdrawable version, it is necessary to use the adapters
to be coupled with the plug, which will than be connected to the socket on the fixed part, for the
moving parts,.
According to the electrical accessories required, one or two adapters will be needed to be mounted
on the left and/or right side of the moving part.
There are four types adapters available:
– 5-way adapters
– 6-way adapters
– 10-way adapters
– 12-way adapters.
The table below indicates the adapters which have to be used for the various possible combinations
of electrical accessories:
Adapters ADP for T4, T5 and T6 wired accessories

5- way 6- way 10- way 12- way
left side
SOR Q
UVR Q
SA for residual current release RC222 Q
SOR or UVR + SA for residual current release RC222 Q
MOE (MOE-E) Q
3 MOE (MOE-E) + SOR or UVR

MOE (MOE-E) + SOR or UVR + SA for residual current release RC222
Q
Q
AUE Q
AUE + SOR or UVR Q
AUE + SOR or UVR + SA for residual current release RC222 Q
right side
AUX 1Q + 1SY 1 open/closed changeover contact +
1 trip unit tripped changeover contact Q
AUX 2Q 2 open/closed changeover contacts Q
AUX 3Q + 1SY 3 open/closed changeover contacts +
For Tmax T2 and T3 in the plug-in version, it is necessary, on the other hand, to order the socket-plug
connectors: with 12 poles for the AUX auxiliary contacts - 3 open/closed changeover + 1 release
tripped changeover, with 6 poles for the AUX auxiliary contacts -1 open/closed changeover + 1
release tripped changeover and with 3 poles for the service releases (SOR or UVR).
For T2 in the plug-in version with PR221 electronic trip unit and suitable auxiliary contacts, it is nec-
essary to order a 6 and a 3 pole socket-plug connector.
3/28
1SDC210015D0205
Socket plug connectors
In order to allow the racking-in and racking-out operations of the moving part of the plug-in circuit-
breaker, the wired and unwired electrical accessories of Tmax T2 and T3 and the unwired electrical
accessories of Tmax T4, T5 and T6 must be fitted with one or more socket plug connectors, as per
the table below.
Socket plug connectors

3 poles 6 poles 12 poles
T2-T3-T4-T5-T6
SOR Q
UVR Q
AUX 1Q +1SY 1 open/closed changeover contact +
AUX 2Q 2 open/closed changeover contacts Q
AUX 3Q + 1SY 3 open/closed changeover contacts +
T2-T3
MOS overload(1) Q
AUE Q
AUX 2Q + 1SY for PR221 2 open/closed contacts +
1 trip unit tripped changeover contact Q Q
AUX 1S51 + 1Q + 1SY for PR221
1 changeover contact + 1 SA electronic release trip contact
1 trip unit tripped changeover contact Q Q
(1)
Always provided with the overlaid solenoid operator
3
3/29
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Operating mechanism and locks
Rotary handle operating mechanism – RHD/RHE

Thanks to its ergonomic grip, the rotary handle facilitates the circuit-breaker closing and opening
operations.
1SDC210C77F0001
It is always fitted with a padlock-lock in the open position which prevents circuit-breaker closing. The
opening in the padlock-lock can take up to 3 padlocks - 7 mm Ø stem (not supplied). It is always
fitted with a compartment door lock and on request it can be supplied with a key lock in the open
position. Application of the rotary handle operating mechanism is an alternative to the motor operator
and to the front interlocking plate (MIF) for T1, T2 and T3, or to the motor operator and to the front for
lever operating mechanism for T4, T5 and T6. The rotary handle operating mechanism is available in
either the direct version or in the transmitted version on the compartment door and the rotary handle
operating mechanism in the emergency version, complete with red on yellow background handle,
1SDC210C78F0001
suitable for controlling machine tools, is available in both the versions.

The rotary handle operating mechanism is available on T7 with lever operating mechanism and, only
for the direct version, is characterised by an articulated grip which allows the switchgear door to be
T4-T6 opened in case of an emergency with the circuit-breaker closed. The release settings and nameplate
data remain accessible to the user.
The transmitted rotary handle operating mechanisms can be ordered by building up the following
three devices:
– rotary handle on the compartment door
– transmission rod (500 mm)
– base for circuit-breaker or, alternatively, by using the code of the ready-configured version.
Type of RH_ operating mechanism

T1 T2, T3 T4, T5 T6 T7(1)
3 F F P F P W F W F W
RHD Direct Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
RHD_EM Emergency direct Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
RHE Transmitted with adjustable distance Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
RHE_EM Emergency transmitted with adjustable distance Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
RHE_B Base for circuit-breaker Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
RHE_S Rod for transmitted adjustable hadle Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
RHE_H Handle for transmitted RH with adjustable distance Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
RHE_H_EM Emergency handle for transmitted RH with adjustable distance Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
(1)
The rotary handle operating mechanism is only available for T7 with lever operating mechanism and it is as an alterative to the key lock mounted on the circuit-breaker.
1SDC210C79F0001
T4-T6
3/30
1SDC210015D0205
IP54 protection for rotary handle
Allows IP54 degree of protection to be obtained.
It is available for the transmitted rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door (RHE)
for all the Tmax circuit-breakers.
1SDC210C80F0001
Front for lever operating mechanism – FLD

This can be installed on fixed, plug-in or withdrawable Tmax T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers. In the
case of withdrawable circuit-breakers, installed in a switchboard, it allows the IP40 degree of protec-
tion to be maintained for the whole isolation run of the circuit-breaker.
It is always fitted with a padlock in the open position (6 mm Ø stem up to three padlocks - not supplied)
which prevents closing of the circuit-breaker and of the compartment door, and with compartment
1SDC210C81F0001
door lock. On request, it can be fitted with a key lock in the open position.
It is available in the following versions:
– for fixed or plug-in circuit-breaker
– for withdrawable circuit-breaker.
The front for lever operating mechanism is always an alternative to the motor operator and to the
rotary handle and to the display FDU.
The same flange for the compartment door already supplied with the circuit-breaker or the one sup-
plied with the conversion kit for withdrawable version can be used.
3
Padlock for operating lever – PLL

1SDC210C82F0001
This is applied to the T1 - T2 - T3 circuit-breaker cover to prevent the lever closing or opening op-
eration. It allows installation up to a maximum of three padlocks - 7 mm Ø stem (not supplied). It is
available in the following versions:
– plug-in locking device only of the closing operation
– locking plate on the closing and opening operation according to the assembly position. The lock
on the opening operation does not prevent release of the mechanism following a fault or remote
control command
– locking plate just for the closing operation.
It is incompatible with the front accessories: solenoid operator, rotary handle operating mechanism
and mechanic interlock.
The padlock is also available for T7 and it is directly mounted on the circuit-breaker cover.
1SDC210C83F0001
T1-T3
1SDC210C84F0001
T1-T3
3/31
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Key lock on the circuit-breaker for T1, T2, T3 and T7 – KLC

1SDC210C85F0001 This allows the mechanical closing operation of the circuit-breaker to be locked and is installed
directly on the front in the slot in correspondence with the left pole. This cannot be installed when
the front operating mechanism, rotary handle operating mechanism, motor operator, and RC221/
RC222 residual current releases are present, or on the three-pole circuit-breakers equipped with
service releases (UVR, SOR). The key lock is the Ronis 622 type and is available in two versions:
– standard type, with key only removable with the circuit-breaker locked
– special type, with key removable in both positions.
On T7 the key lock in the open position is mounted directly on the circuit-breaker cover both in the
version with different keys and with the same keys. Presetting for Ronis and Profalux key locks are
also available.
Key lock for rotary handle operating mechanism for T1, T2 and T3 – RHL
This allows the mechanical closing operation of the circuit-breaker to be locked.
1SDC210C86F0001
The following versions are available:

– lock with different key for each circuit-breaker
– lock with the same key for groups of circuit-breakers.
The circuit-breaker in the open position ensures isolation of the circuit in accordance with the IEC
60947-2 Standard. It is also available in the version which allows the lock both in the open and
3 closed position. The lock in the closed position does not prevent release of the mechanism following
a fault or remote control.
Key lock for T4, T5, T6 and T7 – KLF-D and KLF-S

1SDC210D24F0001
This allows mechanical operation of the circuit-breaker to be locked. This lock can be used with
the direct or transmitted rotary handle operating mechanism mounted on the base for circuit-breaker
or with the front for lever operating mechanism.
The lock of the circuit-breaker in the open position ensures isolation of the circuit in accordance with
the IEC 60947-2 Standard. For T4, T5, T6 and T7 in the lever operating mechanism version key locks
in the open position are available either with different keys (KLF-D) or with the same keys (KLF-S): in
this case, up to four different key numbering codes are available (n. 2005-2006-2007-2008).
Lock in the racked-out position for fixed part (T4, T5 and T6)
For T4, T5 and T6 withdrawable circuit-breakers, key or padlocks locks are available to be applied
onto the rail of the fixed part, to prevent racking-in of the plug-in part.
Selection can be made among the following:
– key lock with different keys (KLF-D FP)
– key lock with the same keys for groups of circuit-breakers (KLF-S FP)
– Ronis type key lock (KLF-D Ronis FP)
– padlock, which can take up to three padlocks with 6 mm stem Ø, not supplied (PLL FP).
3/32
1SDC210015D0205
Lock in racked-in – isolated – racked-out position for fixed part of T7
This device allows the moving part of a withdrawable version T7 circuit-breaker to be locked in the
1SDC210D24F0001
racked-in, isolated-test or racked-out position in the relative fixed part. Thanks to mounting an ad-
ditional accessory, the lock can be limited just to the racked-out position.
The fixed part can be equipped with 1 or 2 of these key locks.
Mechanical lock of compartment door

Available on T7 both for the lever operating mechanism and for the motorizable version. It does
not allow the compartment door to be opened with the circuit-breaker closed (and circuit-breaker
racked-in for circuit-breakers in the withdrawable version) and locks the circuit-breaker closing with
1SDC210D25F0001
the compartment door open.

Two versions are available: a door lock made by means of cables and a second type fixed directly
on the side of the circuit-breaker or of the relative fixed part. The cable door lock must also be fitted
with the interlock cable kit and the interlocking plate corresponding to the combined circuit-breaker.
Sealable thermal adjustment lock 3

This is applied to the circuit-breaker cover near the thermal element regulator of the TMD thermomag-
netic trip unit for T1, T2 and T3 and prevents it being tampered with.
1SDC210C87F0001
Overview of the available locks

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7
FDL Front for lever operating mechanism Q Q Q
PLL_ Padlock for operating lever Q Q Q Q
KLC_ Key lock on the circuit-breaker Q Q Q Q
RHL Keylock for rotary handle operating mechanism Q Q Q
KLF-D and KLF-S Key lock for front for lever and rotary handle Q Q Q
MOL-D and MOL-S_ Key lock in open position for MOE and MOE_E Q Q Q
MOL-M_ Key lock against manual operation for MOE and MOE_E Q Q Q
KLF-FP and PLL FP_ Locks in open position for fixed part Q Q Q Q
Mechanical lock on compartment door Q
Sealable lock of thermal adjustment Q Q Q
3/33
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Mechanical interlock
T1-T2-T3
The mechanical MIF interlock can be applied on the front of two T1, T2 or T3 circuit-breakers
mounted side by side, in either the three-pole or four-pole fixed version and prevents simultaneous
closing of the two circuit-breakers. Fixing is carried out directly on the back plate of the switchboard.
The front interlocking plate allows installation of a padlock in order to fix the position (possibility of
locking in the O-O position as well). It is also possible to interlock three circuit-breakers side by side,
1SDC210C88F0001
using the proper plate, thereby making the following interlock combinations: IOO-OIOOOI-OOO. It
is incompatible with the front accessories (solenoid operator, rotary handle operating mechanism)
and with the residual current releases.
T1-T2-T3
T3
For T3, in the three-pole or four-pole fixed or plug-in version, the MIR mechanical interlock is available.
This rear interlock, available in the horizontal (MIR-H) and vertical (MIR-V) version, is compatible with
all the front accessories and with the residual current release (only MIR-H).
The following interlocking combinations can be made: IO-OI-OO.
T4-T5-T6
1SDC210C89F0001
The mechanical interlock for T4, T5 and T6 allows installation of two circuit-breakers on a single sup-
port and, by means of special lever mechanisms, makes them mechanically interdependent.
For Tmax T4 and T5 this is a rear interlock consisting of a vertical or horizontal frame group (MIR-HR
or MIR-VR) and of a pair of metal plates for fixing the circuit-breakers (MIR-P). The frame group is
T3-T4-T5-T6 made up of metal frame and of the lever mechanism interlock. The metal plates are of different type
3 according to the sizes of circuit-breakers to be interlocked.

For Tmax T6 this is a rear interlock consisting of a vertical or horizontal support.
Interlock
Type
A T4 (F-P-W) + T4 (F-P-W)
B T4 (F-P-W) + T5 400 (F-P-W) o T5 630 (F)
C T4 (F-P-W) + T5 630 (P-W)
D T5 400 (F-P-W) o T5 630 (F) + T5 400 (F-P-W) o T5 630 (F)
E T5 400 (F-P-W) o T5 630 (F) + T5 630 (P-W)
F T5 630 (P-W) + T5 630 (P-W)
There are no limitations on the versions to be interlocked, therefore, for example, a fixed circuit-breaker
can be interlocked with a withdrawable version switch-disconnector.
Since this is a rear interlock, all the front accessories which are compatible with the circuit-breakers
installed can be used.
In the vertical interlock the bottom terminals of the upper circuit-breaker and the top terminals of the
lower circuit-breaker must be of rear type.
To be able to receive the circuit-breakers mounted directly on the interlocking plate, code
1SDC210D26F0001
“1SDA050093R1” must be specified as the accessory of the second circuit-breaker (or fixed part)
you want to interlock.
T7
This mechanism makes the mechanical interlock between two T7 circuit-breakers by means of flex-
ible cables, which are connected on a plate mounted on the side of the circuit-breaker preventing
simultaneous closing of the two circuit-breakers. The plates to be mounted on the circuit-breaker
differ according to whether the circuit-breaker is in the fixed or withdrawable version.
The interlock is available both for the manual operating mechanism version and for the motor opera-
tor one.
1SDC210D27F0001
3/34
1SDC210015D0205
Transparent pushbutton protection – TCP
A transparent protection for the circuit-breaker opening and closing pushbuttons is available in two
1SDC210D28F0001
different versions on T7 with stored energy operating mechanism: one which protects both the push-
buttons and the other which alternatively protects either the opening or the closing pushbutton.
There is the possibility of putting a padlock, which adds the lock function to the protection. In the
closed position this lock does not prevent release of the mechanism following a fault or a remote
command.
IP54 door protection

Available with T7 motorizable, it is made by means of a transparent plastic cover which completely
protects the front of the circuit-breaker and allows IP54 degree of protection to be reached. Mounted
on hinges, it is provided with a key lock.
3/35
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Residual current releases
All the Tmax series of circuit-breakers, both automatic circuit-breakers and switch-disconnectors,
are preset for combined assembly with residual current releases.
In particular, the Tmax T1, T2 and T3 circuit-breakers can be combined with the new version of the
SACE RC221 or RC222 series of residual current releases and four-pole T4 and T5 with RC222 or
RC223 to be installed below the circuit-breaker.
The T6 and T7 circuit-breakers can be combined with the RCQ residual current switchgear release.
Apart from the protection against overloads and short-circuits typical of automatic circuit-breakers,
the residual current circuit-breakers derived from them also guarantee protection of people and
protection against earth fault currents, thereby ensuring protection against direct contacts, indirect
contacts and fire hazards. The residual current releases can also be mounted on the Tmax T1D, T3D,
T4D and T5D switch-disconnectors. In that case, the derived apparatus is a “pure” residual current
circuit-breaker, i.e. one which only guarantees residual current protection and not the protections
typical of circuit-breakers. “Pure” residual current circuit-breakers are only sensitive to the earth fault
current and are generally applied as main switch-disconnectors in small distribution switchboards
towards end users.
The use of “pure” and “impure” residual current circuit-breakers allows continual monitoring of the
state of plant insulation, ensuring efficient protection against fire and explosion hazards and, when
the devices have I6n ) 30 mA, ensure protection of people against indirect and direct earth contacts
to fulfil the compulsory measures foreseen by the accident prevention regulations and prescriptions.
The residual current releases are constructed in compliance with the following Standards:
– IEC 60947-2 appendix B
– IEC 61000: for protection against unwarranted release.
They are constructed using electronic technology and act directly on the circuit-breaker by means
of a trip coil, supplied with the residual current release, to be housed in the special slot made in the
left-hand pole area.
3 They do not require an auxiliary power supply as they are supplied directly by the network and their
operation is guaranteed even with only a single phase plus neutral or only two phases supplied
with voltage and in the presence of unidirectional pulsating currents with direct components. All the
possible connection combinations are allowed, except for guaranteeing, in the four-pole version,
connection of the neutral to the first pole on the left.
The RC221 and RC222 residual current releases can either be supplied from above or from below.
The operating conditions of the apparatus can be continually controlled by means of the electronic
circuit test pushbutton and the magnetic indicator of residual current trip.
A disconnection device of the power supply during the insulation test is available.
The four-pole circuit-breaker complete with residual current release can be fitted with the electrical
accessories normally available for the circuit-breaker. The shunt opening and undervoltage releases
are housed in the special slot made in the neutral pole for the four-pole circuit-breakers, whereas
they are incompatible with the three-pole circuit-breakers.
The residual current releases are supplied complete with:

– a trip coil to be housed in the area of the third pole, complete with an auxiliary contact signalling
residual current release trip
– dedicated flange.
A changeover contact for signalling residual current protection trip is always supplied for Tmax circuit-
breakers, combined with the RC221 and RC222 residual current releases. Two changeover contacts
for signalling pre-alarm and alarm are also available with the RC222 release.
The opening solenoid for the RC221, RC222 and RC223 residual current releases is available as a
spare part.
A circuit-breaker cannot have the residual current release and the rotary handle or the motor operator
mounted at the same time (except for MOS in the side-by-side version for T1 and T2).
3/36
1SDC210015D0205
RC221 and RC222 residual current releases for T1, T2 and T3
The RC221 and RC222 residual current releases for T1, T2 and T3 circuit-breakers are available both
with three-pole and four-pole circuit-breakers, in the fixed version.
The configuration foresees insertion of the circuit-breaker on the structure of the corresponding re-
sidual current release, making access to the adjustments on the left-hand side of the circuit-breaker
available, whilst the toroid is in the underneath position.
A distinguishing characteristic is provided by the type of cable connection which is made directly on
the circuit-breaker, once the residual current release has been mounted, thereby ensuring simplifica-
1SDC210C90F0001
tion and rationalisation of the installation procedure.

With Tmax T2 and T3, only front terminals for copper cables (FC Cu) at the bottom are mounted on
the residual current releases.
For this reason, when the residual current release is ordered, the FC Cu terminal semi-kit is always
supplied (consult the code section on page 7/36).
On the other hand, for four-pole Tmax T1, it is also possible to mount the rear horizontal flat terminal
kit below (HR for RC221/ RC222).
Furthermore, still for four-pole T1, a version of the RC222 residual current release is available in 200
mm modules. This release keeps the same technical characteristics as the normal RC222 for T1, T2
and T3 but, thanks to its reduced height, allows installation in 200 mm modules. Its special shape
also allows a reduction in the overall dimensions when two or more units are placed side by side.
1SDC210C91F0001
The bracket for fixing onto DIN 50022 rail is available on request.
A circuit-breaker cannot have the residual current release and the overlaid solenoid operator or the
rotary handle operating mechanism mounted at the same time.
T1-T2-T3
RC222 residual current release for T4 and T5 3

The RC222 release for T4 and T5 is available in the four-pole version and is mounted below the
circuit-breaker.
The release is supplied with standard front terminals, but it can also be combined with all the terminals
available for the corresponding circuit-breaker.
The RC222 residual current release, in the fixed version, can easily be converted into plug-in and
into withdrawable by adding the special conversion kit and applying a derating of the performances
1SDC210C92F0001
as indicated in the table on the next page.

A circuit-breaker cannot have the residual current release and the motor operator mounted at the
same time.
1SDC210C93F0001
RC223 (B type) residual current release for T3 and T4 250 A

The RC223 residual current trip unit (of type B), which can be combined with Tmax T3 and T4 250 A
four-pole fixed, plug-in or withdrawable version circuit-breakers (only plug-in and withdrawable for T4).
T4-T5 The RC223, which can only be used in plants with 50/60 Hz frequency, must be supplied from a pri-
mary line voltage between 110 V and 500 V. Operation is guaranteed starting from 55 V phase-neutral.
It features the same types of reference as the RC222 release (type S and AE), but can also claim
conformity with type B operation, which guarantees sensitivity to residual current faults with alternat-
ing, alternating pulsating components and with direct current.
The reference Standards are: IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-2 Annex B, and IEC/TR 60755.
Apart from the signals and adjustments typical of the RC222 residual current release, by means of
a three-position 400-700-1000 Hz selector, the RC223 also allows the maximum frequency band
of the residual current fault read to be defined. It is therefore possible to adapt the residual current
device to the various industrial plant requirements according to the frequency of prospective faults
generated on the load side of the release.
Typical installations which may require fault frequency thresholds other than the standard ones (50-60
Hz) are welding plants for the automobile industry (1000 Hz), textile industry (700 Hz), airports and
three-phase drives (400 Hz).
A circuit-breaker cannot have the residual current release and the motor operator mounted at the
same time.
The RC223 residual current release for T3 has front terminals by default. For connection of the T3
and RC223 assembly use the following:
– on the top terminals of the CB: terminal kit available for size T3;
– on the bottom terminals of the CB: terminal kit available for size T4.
3/37
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
RC221 RC222 RC223

Circuit-breakers size T1-T2-T3 T1-T2-T3 T4 and T5 T3 and T4
(4p version only) (4p version only)
Type “L” shaped “L” shaped Placed below Placed below
Technology microprocessor-based microprocessor-based microprocessor-based microprocessor-based
Action with trip coil with trip coil with trip coil with trip coil
Primary service voltage(1) [V] 85…500 85…500 85…500 110…500
Operating frequency [Hz] 50-60(3) 50-60(3) 50-60(3) 50-60(3)
Fault frequency [Hz] − − − 0...400 - 0…700 - 0…1000
Self-supply Q Q Q Q
Test operation range(1) [V] 85…500 85…500 85…500 110…500
Rated service current [A] up to 250 A up to 250 A up to 500 A up to 250 A (225 A for T3)
Rated residual current trip [A] 0.03 - 0.1 - 0.3 0.03 - 0.05 - 0.1 - 0.3 0.03 - 0.05 - 0.1 0.03 - 0.05 - 0.1
0.5 - 1 - 3 0.5 - 1 - 3 - 5 - 10 0.3 - 0.5 - 1 - 3 - 5 - 10 0.3 - 0.5 - 1
Time limit for non-trip [s] instantaneous instantaneous - instantaneous - instantaneous -
0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 - 0 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 -
0.5 - 1 - 2 - 3 0.5 - 1 - 2 - 3 0.5 - 1 - 2 - 3
Tolerance over trip times ± 20% ± 20% ± 20%
Power consumption(2) < 8 W at 400 V AC < 10 W at 400 V AC < 10 W at 400 V AC < 10 W at 400 V AC
Local trip signalling Q Q Q Q
Trip coil with changeover contact for trip signalling Q Q Q Q
Input for remote opening Q Q Q
NO contact for pre-alarm signalling Q Q Q
NO contact for alarm signalling Q Q Q
Indication of pre-alarm from 25% I6n (tollerance ±3%) Q Q Q Q
3 Indication of alarm timing at 75% I6n (tollerance ±3%)
“A” type for pulsanting alternating current,
Q

Q

Q

Q

AC for alternating current Q Q Q Q
“AE” type for remote release device Q Q Q
Type B for pulsed current and direct current Q
Selective “S” type Q Q Q
Switch for insulation test Q Q Q Q
Power supply from above and below Q Q Q Q
Assembly with three-pole circuit-breakers Q Q
Assembly with four-pole circuit-breakers Q Q Q Q
Kit for conversion of circuit-breaker with
residual current release from fixed to plug-in Q Q
(1)
Operation up to 50 V Phase-Neutral (55 V for RC223)
(2)
The values of power consumption can be inferior at lower supply voltage
(3)
Tolerance 45...66 Hz
RC222-RC223 T4-T5 Maximum withstand current

Performances
Fixed Plug-in/Withdrawable
T3 250 A(1) −
T4 250 250 A 250 A
T4 320(2) 320 A 280 A
T5 400(2) 400 A 400 A
T5 630(2) 500 A −
(1)
225 A with RC223
(2)
Available only with RC222
Homopolar toroid for residual current protection

The electronic PR332/P LSIRc and PR332/P LSIG (with PR330/V and rating plug RC) trip units can
be used combined with the homopolar toroid for residual current protection, which allows activation
of the residual current protection. If used with PR332 LSIG, the G protection is no longer available.
This accessory must be mounted on the busbars and is available in a single size up to 1600 A.
1SDC210D29F0001
This accessory is alternative to the homopolar sensor. The PR332/P LSIRc electronic trip unit can be
used combined with this accessory, which allow the activation of the residual current protection.
3/38
1SDC210015D0205
Homopolar sensor for the main power supply earthing conductor
(star centre of the transformer)
SACE PR332/P electronic trip units can be used in combination with an external sensor located on
1SDC210D30F0001
the conductor, which connects the star centre of the MV/LV transformer (homopolar transformer) to
earth. In this case, the earth protection is defined as Source Ground Return. Through two different
combinations of connection of its terminals, the In of the same toroid can be set at 100 A, 250 A,
400 A, 800 A.
This is alternative to the homopolar toroid for residual current protection.
SACE RCQ switchboard residual current relay

The Tmax circuit-breakers can also be combined with the SACE RCQ switchboard relay with separate
toroid (to be installed externally on the line conductors) and these fulfil requirements with thresholds
1SDC210C94F0001
up to 30 A trips and times up to 5 s or when the installation conditions are particularly restrictive, such
as with circuit-breakers already installed, or limited space in the circuit-breaker compartment.
Thanks to the wide range of settings, the SACE RCQ switchboard relay is suitable for applications
where a system of residual current protection coordinated with the various distribution levels, from
the main switchboard to the end user, is required. It is particularly recommended when low sensitiv-
ity residual current protection is required, such as in partial (current) or total (chronometric) selective
chains, and for high sensitivity applications (physiological sensitivity) to provide protection of people
against direct contacts.
On a drop in the auxiliary power supply voltage, the opening command can intervene after a minimum
time of 100 ms and after the time set plus 100 ms.
The SACE RCQ relay is a type A residual current relay and detects residual currents both of the
alternating and pulsating type with continuous components.
The SACE RCQ relay is of the type with indirect action and acts on the circuit-breaker release mecha-
nism by means of the shunt opening release (or of the undervoltage release) of the circuit-breaker
3
itself (to be ordered by the user), to be housed in the special slot made on the left-hand pole of the
circuit-breaker.
Residual current relay SACE RCQ

Power supply voltage AC [V] 80 ... 500
DC [V] 48 ... 125
Operating frequency [Hz] 45 ÷ 66 Hz
Power consumption on in rush 100 [VA] / 100 [W]
Power consumption in service 6 [VA] / 6 [W]
Trip threshold adjustment I6n
1st range of adjustments [A] 0.03-0.05-0.1-0.3-0.5
2nd range of adjustments [A] 1-3-5-10-30
Trip time adjustment [s] instantaneous 0.1-0.2-0.3-0.5-0.7-1-2-3-5
Pre-alarm threshold adjustment [%] x I6n 25 ... 75% x I6n
Range of use of closed transformers
Toroidal transformer Ø 60 [mm] [A] 0.03 ... 30
Range of use of transformers which can be opened
Toroidal transformer Ø 230 [mm] [A] 1 ... 30
Signalling for alarm pre-threshold Yellow flashing LED 1 N.O., change-over contact
6 A - 250 V AC 50/60 Hz
Residual current relay trip signalling Yellow magnetic flag change-over contacts
(N.O. N.C.; N.O.)
6 A - 250 V AC 50/60 Hz
Remote opening control N.O. contact - Trip time 15 ms
Connection to the toroidal transformer By means of 4 twisted conductors.
Maximum length: 5 m
Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 96 x 96 x 131.5
Drilling for assembly on door [mm] 92 x 92
Degree of protection on the front IP41
Degree of protection on the rear IP30
3/39
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Accessories for electronic trip units
Front display unit – FDU

The front display is a display unit of the setting currents, alarms and parameters of the PR222DS/P,
PR222DS/PD, PR223DS and PR223EF electronic trip units of T4, T5 and T6. The display unit can operate
correctly with self-supply with I * 0.35 x In on at least one phase.
If the display is used in combination with the PR222DS/PD, PR223DS or PR223EF trip units, and
therefore with an auxiliary power supply, it is also possible to detect the protection, which has caused
the release trip and the fault current.
1SDC210C95F0001
Connection of the display to the PR223DS and PR223EF trip units must, compulsorily, pass through
the AUX-E auxiliary contacts in electronic version, whereas with the PR222DS/P trip unit it can be
made directly.
It is not compatible with the front accessories: rotary handle operating mechanism, motor operator
and front for lever operating mechanism.
When combined with PR223DS trip unit with VM210 device, the FDU is able to display a wide range
of measurements, as shown in the table.
Measurement With N Without N

Effective current values I1, I2, I3, In I1, I2, I3
Effective voltage values V1, V2 e V3, V12, V23, V31 V12, V23, V31
Apparent powers Stot. S1, S2, S3 Stot
Active powers Ptot. P1, P2, P3 Ptot
Reactive powers Qtot, Q1, Q2, Q3 Qtot
Power factors cos cos
Active energy Q Q
3 Reactive energy
Apparent energy
Q
Q
Q
Q
Frequency Q Q
Peak factors Q Q
Circuit-breaker state
Protection function parameters Q Q
Trip warnings and alarms (only with Vaux) Q Q
Phase 1, 2, 3 and N trip current Q Q
Protection tripped (L, S, EF , I, G)
(1)
Q Q
Current levels and trip times (L, S, EF(1), I, G) Q Q
(1)
only PR223EF
VM210
The VM210 accessory, combined with the PR223DS and PR223EF trip units for T4, T5 and T6, is
able to provide the various measurements of the electrical values of the plant.
The VM210 can provide the measurements relative to a maximum of 5 PR223DS or PR223EF trip
units. The maximum connection distance between the module and the trip unit is 15 meters. For
distances longer than 1 meters, a shielded multi-core cable must be used.
1SDC210C96F0001
VM210 Conditions of use Values

Power supply 24 V DC ±20%
Ripple ±5%
Operating Temp. -25 °C…+70 °C
Relative humidity 5%...98%
Certifications
Product IEC 60068
Electromagnetic compatibility IEC 61000
3/40
1SDC210015D0205
HMI030 interface on the front of switchgear
This accessory, which can be used with all the protection trip units fitted with dialogue, is designed
for installation on the front of the switchgear. It consists of a graphic display where all the trip unit
measurements and alarms/events are displayed. The user can navigate in a simple and intuitive way
among the measurements by using the navigation pushbuttons. The device can replace the traditional
multimeters without the need for current/voltage transformers. The HMI030 is connected directly to
the protection trip unit by means of a serial line and requires a 24 V DC power supply.
Optional modules
The PR332/P trip unit for T7 can be enriched with additional internal modules, thereby increasing
the capacity of the trip units and making these units highly versatile.
PR330/V voltage measuring module

The PR330/V module measures and processes the phase and neutral voltages, transferring these
data to the protection trip unit so that a series of protection and measurement functions can be
implemented.
The module has two different positions, which can be selected using the special selector: the “Con-
nected” position where the protection and measurement functions are active, and the “Insulating
Test” position where the module is disconnected from the busbars.
1SDC21028FF0001
The PR330/V module is available in two different configurations:

1. Module with internal voltage sockets, with connection directly to the top terminals of the circuit-
breaker, for use in networks with line voltages up to 690 V.
2. Module with external voltage sockets, with connection through the circuit-breaker terminal box
and voltage transformers, for connections to the bottom terminals or for use in networks with line 3
voltages higher than 690 V.
The new module will only be available mounted inside the circuit-breaker.
The PR332/P LSIRc, PR333/P LSI and PR333/P LSIG protection trip units are supplied as standard
with the internal voltage sockets; the external voltage sockets can be requested by specifying the
relative extracode together with the circuit-breaker code.
PR330/D-M communication module (Modbus RTU)

The PR330/D-M communication module is the solution for connecting Tmax to a Modbus network
for remote supervision and control of the circuit-breaker.
It is suitable for the PR332/P trip unit for T7. As for the PR330/V, this module can be added to the
1SDC210D31F0001
protection trip unit and its presence is recognised automatically.

The electronic trip unit is supplied with three LEDs on the front:
– “Power” power supply LED, which indicates the presence of auxiliary power supply to the
PR333/ D-M module
– “Tx” data transmission LED
– “Rx” data reception LED.
PR330/R – Actuator module

The PR330/R actuator module is fitted in the right slot of T7 and it is used for opening (for T7 with
lever operating mechanism it is allowed only the opening operation), and closing the circuit-breaker
1SDC210D32F0001
by means of the shunt opening and closing releases by remote control. It is suitable for the PR332/P
and must be compulsory ordered with the PR330/D-M communication module.
BT030 wireless communication unit

BT030 is a device to be connected to the Test connector of PR222DS, PR223DS, PR223EF, PR232/P,
PR331/P and PR332/P. It allows Bluetooth communication between the protection trip unit and a
hand-held or laptop PC with a Bluetooth port. BT030 can also be used with Emax circuit-breakers
1SDC210D33F0001
fitted with PR121/P, PR122/P and PR123/P.

This device is dedicated to use with the SD-Pocket und SD-TestBus2 application.
BT030 can provide the power supply needed for self-supply and for the protection release by means
of a rechargeable Li-ion battery.
3/41
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
PR030/B power supply unit

With this accessory, which is always supplied with the PR332/P range of trip units, it is possible to
read and configure the parameters of the unit whatever the state of the circuit-breaker is (open-closed,
in the isolated for test position or racked-in, with/without auxiliary power supply).
PR030/B is needed for readout of the data relative to trips if the trip occurred more than 48 hours
previously and the trip unit was no longer supplied.
1SDC210D34F0001
An electronic circuit inside it allows power supply to the unit for about 3 hours continuously to carry
out just the data reading and configuration operations.
The life of the battery decreases if the SACE PR030/B is also used to carry out the Trip test and the
Auto test.
Trip unit adapter

In order to allow all the connections between the electronic trip unit type PR33x and the terminal
board on the circuit-breaker, the circuit-breaker it self must be fitted with a trip unit adapter.
1SDC210D35F0001
Two different trip unit adapters are available: one is suitable with T7 level operating mechanism, the
other with T7 motorizable.
Rating plug
1SDC210D36F0001
Available on the electronic trip units which can be mounted on T7, it must be applied on the front of
3 the trip unit itself and provides information about the current sensor settings. It is therefore no longer
necessary to change the circuit-breaker current sensors, but is sufficient just to replace the rating
plug to obtain modification of the rated current of the circuit-breaker.
Type of Rated In (A)

circuit-breaker current Iu 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
T7 800 Q Q Q
1000 Q Q Q Q
1250 Q Q Q Q Q
1600 Q Q Q Q Q Q
EP010 - FBP
It is the “E-plug” interface which can connect T4, T5 and T6, equipped with the PR222DS/PD
electronic trip unit, to the field bus plug system, allowing user to choose among several field bus
system (ASI, Device Net, Profibus). This must be connected to the PR222DS/PD trip unit by means
of the specific X3 connector. It can be used with T7 with PR332/P electronic trip unit equipped with
1SDC210C99F0001
PR330/D-M communication module.

When using EP010 for profibus, the PDP22 Fieldbus Plug must be used. The PDP21 Fieldbus Plug
cannot be used with EP010.
SACE PR212/CI contactor control unit

The SACE PR212/CI accessory unit can be associated with PR222MP for Tmax and PR212MP for
the SACE Isomax S family.
When the special dip switch on the front of the PR222/MP is positioned on “Normal mode” working
mode, it is possible to control contactor opening in the case of a fault due to overload L, locked rotor
1SDC210D01F0001
R or missing/unbalance of phase U.
The SACE PR212/CI unit can be installed either on a DIN rail or on the rear of the door.
3/42
1SDC210015D0205
SACE PR021/K signalling unit
The SACE PR021/K signalling unit can convert the digital signals supplied by the PR222DS/PD (LSI
or LSIG), PR222MP, PR223DS, PR223EF, PR331 and PR332 trip unit into electrical signals, with
normally open electrical contacts.
The unit is connected to the protection trip unit by means of the Modbus RTU standard serial
changeover line, on which all the information about the activation status of the protection functions
1SDC210D37F0001
flows. The corresponding electrical contacts are closed based on these information.
In particular, the following signals are available:
– the alarm signal remains active throughout the overload, until the trip unit is tripped
– the trip signals of the protections remain active during the timing phase, and even after the trip
unit is tripped.
A reset pushbutton allows the state of all the signals to be reset.
The unit also has ten LEDs to visually signal the following information:
– “PW/WD”: auxiliary power supply present and W.D.
– “TX/RX”: flashing synchronised with dialogue with the serial Bus and several warning indications
– eight LEDs associated with the internal contacts.
The table indicates the characteristics of the signalling relays available in the SACE PR021/K unit.
Power contacts electrical characteristics

Maximum changeover power (resistive load) 100W / 1250 VA (resistive load)
Maximum changeover voltage 130 V DC / 250 V AC
Maximum changeover current 5A
Breaking capacity (resistive load) @ 30 V DC
Breaking capacity (resistive load) @ 250 V AC
3.3 A
5A
3
Contact/coil insulation 2000 V rms (1 min @ 50 Hz)
Note: the PR021/K unit is an alternative to any supervision and control systems.
Available signals
K51 PR222MP
1 Protection L alarm
2 Protection R alarm
3 Protection I alarm
4 Protection U alarm
Welded conctactor alarm contacts (*)
5 Bus K.O.
6 PTC alarm (temperature sensor on motor)
Generic input 0/1 (*)
7 Release trip
8 Protection L pre-alarm
Back-up protection alarm (*)
(*)
alternatively by means of dip-switch.
K51 PR222DS-PR223DS-PR223EF
1 Protection L alarm
2 Protection S alarm
3 Protection I alarm
4 Protection G alarm
5 Bus K.O.
6-7 Release trip
8 Protection L pre-alarm
3/43
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Current sensor for external neutral

This is applied to the external neutral conductor and allows protection G against earth faults to be
carried out with external neutral three-pole circuit-breakers.
The current sensor must be connected to the trip unit by means of the specific connectors X4 for T4,
T5 and T6 or with a direct connection in the terminal board for T7. The combination is not possible
with electronic trip unit PR221, PR231 and PR232.
T4 [A] T5 [A] T6 [A] T7 [A]

100 320 630 400…1600
160 400 800
250 630 1000
320
Connectors
Connectors X3 and X4 allow connection of the electronic trip units with external plant units or compo-
nents. In fact, they are used to make the L alarm signal available outside, connection of the external
neutral, connection to the PR021/K signalling unit, to the PR212/CI contactor control unit or to the
temperature sensor of the PTC motor and allows two-way communication from the circuit-breaker
fitted with dialogue towards the outside and vice versa.
Both the connectors are available both for fixed version circuit-breakers and for plug-in or withdraw-
able version circuit-breakers.
3
Connector Function Trip unit
X3 PR021/K PR222DS/PD, PR223DS and PR223EF
L alarm signal PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD, PR223DS and PR223EF
Auxiliary supply PR222DS/PD, PR223DS, PR223EF and PR222MP
Connection to load side PR223EF
circuit-breaker
EP 010 PR222DS/PD, PR223DS and PR223EF
X4 External neutral PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD, PR223DS and PR223EF
VM210 PR223DS and PR223EF
PR212/CI PR222MP
PTC generic contact 0/1 PR222MP
Connection to supply side PR223EF
circuit-breaker
SW210 Bus Switch

The SW210 Switch module was created to be used in combination with the EFDP zone selectivity
system for plant applications where the possibility of carrying out zone selectivity with open ring
(railway tunnels, underground railways, etc.) and distribution plants where a high level of service
continuity is required. Following a fault with ring distribution, a part of the plant can be isolated and
the electric network re-supplied from another direction.
The SW210 module allows the up-link and down-link signals to be inverted for a pair of circuit-breakers
fitted with PR223EF electronic release, re-ordering the hierarchy between the circuit-breakers when
the flow of power is inverted. The state of the contacts after the changeover is indicated by a yellow
LED coming on.
The module is controlled by a status signal of 24 V DC ± 20% and is available in a housing to be
mounted on a DIN rail (one module).
3/44
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories for trip units
Circuit-breakers T2-T4-T5-T6 T4-T5-T6 T7
PR222DS/PD
PR222DS/P
PR222MP
PR223DS
PR223EF
PR231/P
PR232/P
PR331/P
PR332/P
PR221
Trip units
Accessories
TT1 - Test unit Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
PR010/T - Test unit Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
PR021/K(1) - Signalling unit Q Q Q Q Q Q
FDU(2) - Front display unit Q Q Q Q
HMI030(1) - Interface on the front of switchgear Q Q Q Q Q
VM210 - Voltage measuring unit Q Q
X3 - Connectors Q Q(3) Q Q(3) Q(3)
X4 - Connectors Q Q Q Q(3) Q(3)
X13 - Connectors SHORT/LONG Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
BT030 - Wireless communication unit Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
MOE-E (AUX-E included)(2) - Motor operator Q Q Q
AUX-E - Auxiliary contacts Q Q Q
EP010(1) - Field Bus plug Q Q Q Q
CT - Current transformers Q Q Q Q Q
PR212/CI - Contactor control unit Q
Q
Extracode for interchangeability
Rating plugs Q Q Q Q 3
PR030/B - Power supply unit Q Q Q
PR330/D-M - Communication module Q
PR330/V - Voltage measuring module Q
PR330/R - Actuator module Q
CT Sensor - Current sensors Q Q
SW210 - Bus switch Q
(1)
Accessories not compatible
(2)
Accessories not compatible
(3)
Compulsory
3/45
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Test and configuration accessories
SACE PR010/T test and configuration unit

The SACE PR010/T unit is an instrument capable of performing the Test, programming and param-
eter reading functions for the protection units equipping SACE Isomax S and Tmax moulded-case
circuit-breakers and SACE Emax\air circuit-breakers.
1SDC210D03F0001
In particular, for Tmax T4, T5, T6 and T7 circuit-breakers fitted with the different versions of trip units,
the test programming and parameter reading functions are available.
All the functions mentioned can be carried out ON BOARD by connecting the SACE PR010/T unit to
the front multi-pin connector on the protection units. Special interfacing cables supplied as standard
with the unit guarantee the connection.
The human-machine interface is ensured by using a membrane keypad and a multi-line alphanu-
merical display.
There are also two LEDs on the unit which indicate, respectively:
– POWER-ON and STAND BY state
– state of the battery charge.
Two different types of test are provided: manual and automatic.
By means of connection to a computer (with the software supplied by ABB SACE), it is possible to
upgrade the software of the SACE PR010/T unit to allow upgrading of the test unit as new products
are developed.
The results of greatest interest regarding the test can, moreover, be stored in the unit itself and sent
to the PC on specific request for “issue of report”.
In automatic and manual mode the SACE PR010/T unit can test:
– protection functions L, S, I, G
– protection functions L, R, I, U (for PR222MP)
– monitoring correct operation of the microprocessor.
The SACE PR010/T unit is portable, operating with rechargeable batteries and/or with an external
3 power supply.
In the standard supply, the unit includes the following:
– SACE PR010/T test unit complete with rechargeable batteries
– SACE TT1 test unit
– 100…240 V AC/12 V DC external power supply
– connection cables between the unit and the multi-pin connector on the range of trip units which
equip the Tmax, SACE Isomax S and SACE Emax series
– connection cable between the unit and the PC (RS232 serial)
– power supply cable
– instruction manual and diskette with application SW
– plastic container.
SACE TT1 test unit

This allows tripping of all the electronic trip units which equip the Tmax family of circuit-breakers in
1SDC210D04F0001
the various versions (except for PR33x) to be checked and the trip test of the trip coil (CTC). The
device, supplied with power by means of a replaceable 12 V battery, is provided with a two-pole
polarised connector housed at the back of the box which allows connection of the device to the test
input bushings located on the front of the electronic trip unit.
The compact dimensions of the accessory make it practically pocket size.
3/46
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Automatic transfer switch - ATS010
Automatic transfer switch – ATS010

The switching unit ATS010 (Automatic Transfer Switch) is the new network-group switching device
offered by ABB SACE. It is based on microprocessor technology in compliance with the leading
electromagnetic compatibility and environmental standards (EN 50178, EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2,
IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, and IEC 60068-2-3).
The device is able to manage the entire switching procedure between the normal line and emergency
line circuit breakers automatically, allowing great flexibility of settings. In case of an error in the normal
1SDC210D05F0001
line voltage, in accordance with the delays set, the normal line circuit breaker is opened, the genera-
tor started and the emergency line circuit breaker closed. Similarly, when the normal line returns to
range, the reverse switching procedure is automatically controlled.
It is especially suited for use in all emergency power supply systems requiring a solution that is ready
to install, easy to use and reliable.
Some of the main applications include: power supply for UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply) units,
operating rooms and primary hospital services, emergency power supply for civilian buildings,
airports, hotels, data banks and telecommunications systems, power supply of industrial lines for
continuous processes.
The switching system consists of the ATS010 unit connected to two motor-driven and mechanically
interlocked circuit breakers.
The Tmax T4, T5, T6 and T7 circuit-breakers and the switch-disconnectors of the respective sizes
can be used (for T3, please ask ABB SACE).
The built-in mains sensor of the SACE ATS010 device makes it possible to detect errors in the
mains voltage. The three inputs may be directly connected to the three phases of the normal power
supply line for networks with rated voltage up to 500 V AC. Networks with a higher voltage require
the insertion of voltage transformers (TV), setting a rated voltage for the device that matches their
secondary voltage (typically 100 V).
Two change-over contacts for each circuit breaker connect directly to the motor operator. The circuit 3
breaker connection is completed by wiring the status contacts: Open/Closed, Relay tripped, Racked-
in (for draw out/plug-in circuit-breakers).
That is why on every circuit breaker connected to the ATS010 unit, the following are included in ad-
dition to the mechanical interlock accessories:
– motor operator from 24 V to 110 V DC or up to 250 V AC
– key lock only against manual operation for motor operator
– open/closed contact and contact for tripped
– racked-in contact (in the case of withdrawable)
The ATS010 device is designed to ensure extremely high reliability for the system it controls. It contains
various safety systems intrinsically related to software and hardware operation.
For software safety, a special logic prevents unwarranted operations, while a constantly opera-
tive watchdog system points out any microprocessor malfunctions via a LED on the front of the
device.
Hardware safety allows integration of an electrical interlock via power relay, so that there is no need
to use an external electrical interlock system. The manual selector on the front of the device can
also control the entire switching procedure, even in the event of a microprocessor fault, by working
electromechanically on the control relays.
General specifications
Rated supply voltage 24 V DC ± 20%
(galvanically insulated from earth) 48 V DC ±10%
(maximum ripple ±5%)
Maximum absorbed power 5 W @ 24 V DC
10 W @ 48 V DC
Rated power (mains present and circuit breakers not controlled) 1.8 W @ 24 V DC
4.5 W @ 48 V DC
Operating temperature -25 °C…+70 °C
Maximum humidity 90% without condensation
Storage temperature -25 °C…+80 °C
Protection rating IP54 (front panel)
Dimensions [mm] 144 x 144 x 85
Weight [kg] 0.8
3/47
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Setting range for thresholds and times

Minimum voltage Un Min -5%…-30% Un
Maximum voltage Un Max +5%…+30% Un
Fixed frequency thresholds 10%…+10% fn
t1: opening delay of the normal line circuit breaker due to network error (CB-N) 0…32s
t2: generator start-up delay due to network error 0…32s
t3: stopping delay of the generator 0…254s
t4: switching delay due to network stop 0…254s
t5: closing delay of the emergency line circuit breaker (CB-E)
after detecting the generator voltage 0…32s
Operating sequence
VN ok

CB-N on
GE start
VE ok
3 CoCo on
CB-E on
LOAD off
Caption
VN Mains voltage
CB-N Normal line circuit breaker closed
GE Generator
VE Emergency line voltage
CoCo Enable switching to emergency line
CB-E Emergency line circuit breaker closed
LOAD Disconnection of lower priority connected loads
3/48
1SDC210015D0205
Side panel settings

Caption
1 Selectors to set the under- and over-
voltage thresholds
2 Dip-switches to set:
– rated voltage
– normal single-phase or three-phase
line
1SDC210D06F0001
– mains frequency
– switching strategy
3 Switching delay time settings for
T1…T5
3
Front panel

Caption
1 Status of the ATS010 unit and logic
2 Operating mode selector
3 Normal line check
1SDC210D07F0001
4 Normal line circuit breaker status

5 Voltage on the emergency line
6 Emergency line circuit breaker status
7 Generator status
3/49
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Installation accessories and spare parts
Bracket for fixing on DIN rail

This is applied to the fixed circuit breaker and allows installation on standardized DIN EN 50022 rails.
It simplifies assembly of the T1 - T2 - T3 circuit breakers in standard switchboards.
The bracket for fixing on DIN rail is also available for Tmax circuit breakers combined with RC221
and RC222 residual current releases or with the solenoid operator of the side-by side type.
1SDC210D08F0001
Flange for compartment door

This is always supplied with the Tmax circuit-breakers. All the flanges in the Tmax series are of new
design and do not require the use of screws for installation: fixing is greatly simplified by just a simple
coupling operation. When a rotary handle operating mechanism or residual current releases is used,
1SDC210D09F0001
a dedicated flange is supplied to be used instead of the one supplied with the circuit-breaker.
For T4, T5, T6 and T7 withdrawable circuit-breakers, the flange supplied with the fixed part must be
used instead of the one supplied with the fixed circuit-breaker.
3
1SDC210D38F0001
1SDC210D10F0001
Spare parts
A wide range of spare parts is available for the Tmax family of circuit-breakers. For further details
about the complete range of spare parts available, please ask for the “Spare Parts Catalogue” from
the Service Division of ABB SACE.
3/50
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Compatibility of internal accessories
Compatibility
An overview of the assembly compatibility of (internal) accessories with the Tmax Series circuit-break-
ers can be found in this section.
Possible combination among the internal accessories

The drawing represents the internal slot of the circuit-breakers. A, C and F are housed in the slots
on the left of the operating lever, while B, D, E and G in the right one.
E E
A/C(1) B A A(2)/C B A/C D A C D
T1, T2 TMD, T3, T1, T2 TMD, T3, T4, T2 PR221DS, T2 PR221DS,

T4, T5, T6 3 poles T5, T6 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles
B B
A(4) A(3)
F
A(4) A(3)
3
T7 3/4 poles T7M 3/4 poles
(1)
only for T1-T2-T3
(2)
only SOR-C for T4-T5-T6. Order also the 3-way connector for second SOR-C 1SDA055273R1
(3)
position for assembly of the SOR
(4)
position for assembly of the UVR
A = Shunt opening release (SOR) or Undervoltage release (UVR)

B = Auxiliary contacts
C = Trip coil of the residual current
D = Trip coil of the electronic trip unit PR221DS
E = Auxiliary contacts for T2 with electronic trip unit PR221DS
F = Spring charging motor
G = Shunt closing release (SCR)
3/51
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Communication devices and systems
SD-View 2000
SD-View 2000 is a “ready-to-use” system, consisting of software for personal computers, which
allows complete supervision of the low voltage electrical installation. Putting the SD-View 2000
system into operation is quick and easy. In fact, the software itself guides the user in recognizing
and configuring the protection units. The user only needs knowledge of the installation (such as
how many circuit-breakers are installed and how they are connected to each other). No engineering
work on the supervision system is required, since all the pages displayed are already configured in
the system, ready to be used.
Usage of the software is intuitive and easy to learn for the operator: SD-View 2000 has graphic
pages, based on Internet Explorer, which make the system as simple to manage as surfing on the
Internet.
System architecture
System architecture is based on the latest developments in personal computer and industrial com-
munication network technology. SD-View 2000 is able to manage up to 8 serial lines, with a maximum
of 31 devices each.
System architecture
Maximum number of serial ports RS485 4
Maximum number of devices for each serial port 31
9600 – 19200 Baud
3 Protocol Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU on RS-485
Converter
RS232-RS485
Tmax T1-T3 Tmax T4-T5-T6 Emax X1

+ AC31 + PR222DS/PD + PR332 or PR333
or PR223DS + PR330/D-M
or PR223EF
3/52
1SDC210015D0205
Complete supervision of the installation
SD-View 2000 is the ideal tool available to system managers, in order to have the situation of the instal-
lation under control at all times and to be able to supervision all the functions easily and in real time.
3
SD-View 2000 allows information from the installation to be received and send commands to the
circuit-breakers and the relative trip units.
In particular, it is possible to:
– send opening and closing commands to the circuit-breakers
– read the electrical installation values (current, voltage, power factor, etc.)
– read and modify the trip characteristics of the protection units
– determine the status of the apparatus (open, closed, number of operations, trip for fault, etc.)
– determine the abnormal operating situations (e.g. overload) and, in the case of the releases trip-
ping, the type of fault (short-circuit, earth fault, etc.)
– plot by means of graphs the temporal evolution of the installation, through the history log of cur-
rents and voltages (with a time span for 15 days)
Access to the various system functions can be enabled by means of passwords with different levels
of authorization. Usage of the system is really simple and the graphic pages relative to each device
are particularly intuitive and easy to use.
Devices which can be connected

The circuit-breakers with electronic trip units which can be interfaced with SD-View 2000 are:
– Emax X1 air circuit-breakers and Tmax T7 moulded-case circuit-breakers fitted with PR332/P or
PR333/P trip units with Modbus RTU PR330/D-M communication unit
– Emax air circuit-breakers from E1 to E6 fitted with PR122/P or PR123/P trip units with Modbus
RTU PR120/D-M communication unit
– Emax air circuit-breakers from E1 to E6 fitted with PR112/PD or PR113/PD Modbus trip units
– Tmax moulded-case circuit-breakers from T4,T5,T6 fitted with PR222DS/PD or PR223DS or
PR223EF trip units
– Isomax circuit-breakers from S4 to S7 fitted with PR212/P trip unit with Modbus RTU PR212/D-M
communication unit.
3/53
1SDC210015D0205
Accessories
Communication devices and systems
In addition, SD-View 2000 can acquire current, voltage and power measurements in real time from
the MTME-485 multimeters with Modbus communication.
Furthermore, it is possible to interface any air or molded-case circuit breaker or switch-disconnec-
tor, not fitted with a communication module, with the SD-View 2000 supervision system by means
of a PLC type ABB AC31. For the circuit-breakers or switch disconnectors connected in this way,
SD-View 2000 shows the status of the apparatus (open, closed, tripped, racket-in or racket-out) in
real time and allows it to be operated remotely.
All the characteristics of the above mentioned devices are preconfigured in the SD-View 2000 system.
The user doesn’t have to carry out any detailed configuration (neither to insert tables with the data
shown for each trip unit, nor to draw specific graphic pages). It is enough to insert in the system
the list of the connected devices.
Technical characteristics
Serial ports up to 4
ABB SACE devices for each serial port up to 31
9600 or 19200 Baud
Protocol Modbus RTU
Personal computer requirements

Pentium 1 GHz, 512 MB RAM, 100 GB hard disk, Windows 2000 XP, Internet Explorer 6, Ethernet
card, RS232 Serial port, USB port (for the license key), Printer (optional).
3/54
1SDC210015D0205
SD-Pocket
SD-Pocket is an application designed to connect the new protection trip units to a PDA or to a
personal computer. This means it is now possible to use wireless communication to:
– configure the protection threshold function;
– monitor measurement functions, including reading of data recorded in data logger (PR332/P or
PR333/P);
– verify the status of the circuit-breaker (i.e. number of operations, trip data, according to the trip
unit connected).
SD-Pocket application scenarios include:
– during start-up of switchgear, with rapid and error-free transfer of the protection parameters to
the trip units (also using the dedicated exchange file directly from Docwin);
– during normal installation service, gathering information on the circuit-breaker and load conditions
(last trip information, runtime currents, and other information).
To use all these functions, it is sufficient to have a PDA with MS Windows Mobile 2003 and BT
interface or a personal computer with MS Windows 2000/XP OS.
The trip units must be equipped with the PR120/D-BT interface device or PR030. Its use does not
require the presence of dialogue units for the trip units. SD-Pocket is freeware and it can be down-
loaded from the ABB SACE’s website (http:// www.abb.com).
SD-TestBus2
SD-TestBus2 is the commissioning and diagnostic software of ABB SACE for all Modbus RTU
devices.
It can be used during system startup, or to troubleshoot an installed network.
SD-TestBus2 automatically scans the RS-485 bus, detects all connected devices and checks
their communication settings. All possible combination of device address, parity and baud rate are
3
checked.
A click on “scan” is enough to spot devices which are not responding, wrong addresses, misconfig-
ured parity bits, and so on. This function is not limited to ABB SACE is devices: all standard Modbus
RTU devices are detected and their configuration is displayed.
After the scan, the software displays warning messages about potential problems and configuration
errors, allowing complete diagnosis of a field bus network.
When ABB SACE’s circuit-breakers are detected, additional functions can be used to check wirings,
send open/ close/reset commands, and retrieve diagnostic information.
This user-friendly tool makes commissioning of Modbus networks a breeze.
SD-TestBus2 can also communicate though a Bluetooth adapter (widcomm compatible) with all the
ABB SACE devices equipped with BT030 wireless communication unit.
SD-TestBus2 is freeware and can be downloaded from ABB SACE’s website (http:// www.abb.com).
3/55
1SDC210015D0205
and technical information
Index
Examples of curve readout......................................................................................................4/2
Trip curves for power distribution

Circuit-breakers with thermomagnetic trip units .....................................................................4/3
Circuit-breakers with electronic trip units................................................................................4/7
Trip curves for zone selectivity

Circuit-breakers with PR223EF trip unit ................................................................................4/13
Trip curves for motor protection

Circuit-breakers with magnetic only trip units .......................................................................4/14
Circuit-breakers with PR221DS, PR231/P e PR221MP electronic trip units ........................4/15
Use of the trip curves of circuit-breakers with PR222MP electronic trip unit .......................4/16
Circuit-breakers with PR222MP electronic trip unit ..............................................................4/18
Specific let-through energy curves (1)

230 V .................................................................................................................................... 4/19
400-440 V ............................................................................................................................. 4/21
500 V .................................................................................................................................... 4/23
690 V .................................................................................................................................... 4/25
1000 V .................................................................................................................................. 4/27
4
1150 V .................................................................................................................................. 4/28
Limitation curves (1)

230 V .................................................................................................................................... 4/29
400-440 V ............................................................................................................................. 4/31
500 V .................................................................................................................................... 4/33
690 V .................................................................................................................................... 4/35
1000 V .................................................................................................................................. 4/37
1150 V .................................................................................................................................. 4/38
Technical information
Temperature performances
Circuit-breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units and switch-disconnectors .....4/39
Circuit-breakers with thermomagnetic trip units ..................................................................4/57
Power losses....................................................................................................................... 4/59
Magnetic trip values ........................................................................................................... 4/60
Special applications
Use of apparatus at 16 2/3Hz ..............................................................................................4/61
Use of apparatus at 400 Hz..................................................................................................4/64
Use of direct current apparatus............................................................................................4/67
Zone selectivity ....................................................................................................................4/76
(1)
For T1 1p and T2 with PR221DS, please ask ABB SACE directly.
4/1
1SDC210015D0205
Examples of curve readout
t [s]
Example 1 - T4N 250 104

103
(thermomagnetic trip unit) ~357.8
Considering a T4N 250 In = 250 A circuit-breaker. By means of the 102 ~105.3
thermal adjustment trimmer, the current threshold I1 is selected, for

~21.4
example at 0.9 x In (225 A); the magnetic trip threshold I3, adjustable
10
from 5 to 10 x In, we select at 10 x In, equal to 2500 A.
It can be noted that, on the basis of the conditions in which the overload 2 x I1
is presented, i.e. with the circuit-breaker at thermal running or not, the 1
thermal relay trip varies considerably. For example, for an overload

current of 2 x I1, the trip time is between 21.4 and 105.3 s for hot trip,
10-1
and between 105.3 and 357.8 s for cold trip.
For fault current values higher than 2500 A, the circuit-breaker trips
1SDC210E01F0001
instantaneously with the magnetic protection. 10-2
10-1 1 10 102
x I1
Ip [kA]
Example 2 - T2S 160
200
Limitation curves
100 84 Curve A
The following figure shows the trend of the Tmax T2S 160, ≈68
In = 160 A circuit-breaker current-limiting curve. The r.m.s. of the 50
prospective symmetrical short-circuit current is indicated on the

abscissa of the diagram, whereas the peak short-circuit current Curve B
20 16.2
value is indicated on the ordinates. The current-limiting effect can

be assessed by comparing - at the same symmetrical short-circuit 10
current value, the corresponding peak value at the prospective

short-circuit current (curve A) with the limited peak value (curve B). 5
The T2S 160 circuit-breaker with thermomagnetic trip unit In = 160 A
4 at a voltage of 400 V limits the short-circuit current to 16.2 kA for a fault

current of 40 kA, with a reduction of about 68 kA compared with the
2
1SDC210E02F0001
peak value of the 84 kA prospective short-circuit current. 1
1 2 3 10 20 40 50 100 200
Irms [kA]
Example 3 - T3S 250 103

I2t[106·A2s]
Specific let-through energy curves

102
An example of reading the graph of the specific let-through energy
curve of the T3S 250 In = 160 A circuit-breaker at a voltage of 400 V
is given below. 10
The prospective symmetrical short-circuit current is indicated on the
abscissa of the diagram, whereas the ordinates show the specific let-
through energy values expressed in A2s. 1.17
1
In correspondence with a short-circuit current of 20 kA, the circuit-
breaker lets through a value of I2t equal to 1.17 · 106 · A2s.
10-1
1SDC210E03F0001
10-2
1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200
Irms [kA]
Abbreviations used
In = rated current of the thermomagnetic or electronic trip unit
I1 = set trip current for overload
I3 = trip current for short-circuit
Irms = prospective symmetrical short-circuit current
4/2
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breakers with thermomagnetic trip units
T1 160 – TMD T1 160 – TMD

I3 = 500 A I3 = 630 A
In = 16÷63 A In = 16÷63 A
t [s] t [s]
104 104
103 103
102 102
10 10
1 1
In = 16 A ⇒ I3 = 630 A
In = 16 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A In = 20 A ⇒ I3 = 630 A
In = 20 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A In = 25 A ⇒ I3 = 630 A
10-1 In = 25 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
10-1 In = 32 A ⇒ I3 = 630 A
In = 32 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A In = 40 A ⇒ I3 = 630 A
In = 40 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A In = 50 A ⇒ I3 = 630 A
In = 50÷63 A ⇒ I3 = 10 x In In = 63 A ⇒ I3 = 10 x In
1SDC210E04F0001
1SDC210F63F0001
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1
T1 160 – TMD T2 160 – TMD

In = 80÷160 A In = 1.6÷100 A
4
t [s] t [s]
104 104
103 103
102 102
10 10
1 1
In = 1,6÷12,5 A ⇒ I3 = 10xIn
In = 16 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
In = 20 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
10-1 10-1 In = 25 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
In = 32 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
I3 = 10 x In In = 40 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
In = 50÷100 A ⇒ I3 = 10 x In
1SDC210E06F0001
1SDC210E05F0001
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1
4/3
1SDC210015D0205
T2 160 – TMD T2 160 – TMD

In = 125 A In = 160 A
t [s] t [s]
104 104
103 103
102 102
10 10
1 1
10-1 10-1
I3 = 10 x In I3 = 10 x In
1SDC210E07F0001
1SDC210E07F0001
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1
T2 160 – TMG T3 250 – TMD

4 In = 63÷250 A
t [s] t [s]
104 104
103 103
102 102
10 10
1 1
In = 16 A I3 = 160 A
In = 25 A I3 = 160 A
In = 40 A I3 = 200 A
10-1 In = 63 A I3 = 200 A 10-1
In = 80...160 A I3 = 3 x In
I3 = 10 x In
1SDC210E08F0001
1SDC210E09F0001
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1
4/4
1SDC210015D0205
T3 250 – TMG T4 250 – TMD
In = 63÷250 A In = 20÷50 A
t [s] t [s]
104 104
103 103
102 102
10 10
1 In = 63 A ⇒ I3 = 400 A 1
In = 80 A ⇒ I3 = 400 A
In = 100 A ⇒ I3 = 400 A
In = 125 A ⇒ I3 = 400 A In = 20 A ⇒ I3 = 320 A
In = 160 A ⇒ I3 = 480 A
10-1 In = 200 A ⇒ I3 = 600 A 10-1 In = 32-50 A ⇒ I3 = 10 x In
In = 250 A ⇒ I3 = 750 A
1SDC210E10F0001
1SDC210E11F0001
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1
T4 250/320 – TMA T5 400/630 – TMA

In = 80÷250 A In = 320÷500 A 4
t [s]
t [s]
104
104
103
103
102
102
10
10
1
1
10-1
10-1
I3 = 5…10 x In
I3 = 5…10 x In
1SDC210E12F0001
1SDC210E13F0001
10-2
10-1 1 10 10-2
102 10-1
x I1 1 10 102
x I1
4/5
1SDC210015D0205
T5 400/630 – TMG T6 630 – TMA

In = 320÷500 A In = 630 A
t [s]
t [s]
104
104
103
103
102
102
10
10
1
1
10-1
I3 = 5...10 x In
10-1
I3 = 2,5…5 x In
10-2
1SDC210E14F0001
1SDC210E15F0001
10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1
1.05
10 102
x I1 x I1
T6 800 – TMA
4 In = 800 A
t [s]
104
103
102
10
10-1
I3 = 5...10 x In
10-2
1SDC210E16F0001
1.05
10-1 1 10 102
x I1
4/6
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breakers with electronic trip units
T2 160 – PR221DS T2 160 – PR221DS

L-I Functions L-S Functions
t [s] t [s]
104 104
0.4...1 0.4...1
0.4 1 0.4 1
1 0.6
103 103
1...10 1...10
Up to In = 10 A Up to In = 10 A
102 102
10 10
10 10
102 102
1 1
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
1SDC210E18F0001
1SDC210E17F0001
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 1 10 10-1 1 10 1 10
x In I [kA] x In I [kA]
T2 160 – PR221GP T4 250/320 - T5 400/630 - T6 630/800/1000

L-S-I Functions PR221DS 4
L-I Functions
Note: For T4 In = 320 A, T5 In = 630 A and T6 In = 1000 A I3max = 9.5 x In
t [s] t [s]
104 104
0.4...1 0.4...1
0.4 1 0.4 1
1
103 103
1...2.5
1 1 2.5
1...10
102 102
4 x I2
4 10
10
10 10
102
1 1
10-1 10-1
T4
T5 400
T5 630
10-2 10-2 T6 630
T6 800
T6 1000
1SDC210E19F0001
1SDC210F72F0001
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10 10-1 1 10 1 10
x In x In I [kA]
4/7
1SDC210015D0205
T4 250/320 - T5 400/630 - T6 630/800/1000 T4 250/320 - T5 400/630 - T6 630/800/1000

PR221DS PR222DS - PR222DS/PD - PR223DS
L-S Functions L-S-I Functions
Note: For T4 In = 320 A, T5 In = 630 A and T6 In = 1000 A I2max = 9.5 x In Note: The dotted curve of function L corresponds to the maximum delay (t1) which can be set at
6 x I1, in the case where 320 A CTs are used for T4 and 630 A for T5. For all the CT sizes
t1 = 18s except with 320 A CT (T4), 630 A CT (T5) and 1000 A CT (T6) where
t1 = 10.5s. For T4 In = 320 A, T5 In = 630 A and T6 In = 1000 A I2max = 9.5 x In,
I3max = 9.5 x In. For T6 In = 800 A I3max = 10.5 x In. For PR223DS the L pro-
t [s]
tection function can be set to I1 = 0.18...1 x In.
t [s]
104 104
0.4...1 0.4...1
0.4 1 0.4 1
1
103 103
1...10
0.6...10
0.6 10
102 102 1.5...12
1.5 12
I2t ON
10
10 10
102 102
1 1
T4
I2t OFF T5 400

10-1 10-1 T5 630
T4
T5 400
T5 630
10-2 T6 630 10-2 T6 630
T6 800 T6 800
T6 1000 T6 1000
1SDC210E21F0001
1SDC210E20F0001
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 1 10 10-1 1 10 1 10
T4 250/320 - T5 400/630 - T6 630/800/1000 T7 800/1000/1250/1600 – PR231/P

4 PR222DS - PR222DS/PD - PR223DS L-I Functions
G Function
t [s] t [s]
104 104
0.2...1 0.4...1
0.2 1 0.4 1
103 103
102 102
1 1...10 10
10 10
102
1 1
I4 = 0.2...0.49 In disabled at 4 In
10-1 10-1
T7 S,H,L
T7 S,H,L
T7 V
10-2 10-2
T7 V
1SDC210E22F0001
1SDC210F28F0001
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10 2 10-1 1 10 10 102
In x In I [kA]
4/8
1SDC210015D0205
T7 800/1000/1250/1600 – PR231/P T7 800/1000/1250/1600 – PR232/P
L-S Functions L-S-I Functions
t [s] t [s]
104 104
0,4...1 0,4...1
0,4 1
0,4 1
103 103 0,6...10

0,6 10
1...10
1 10
1,5...12
102 102 1,5 12
t = k/I2
10 10
I2t = k
102 102
t=k
1 1
10-1 10-1
T7 S,H,L T7 S,H,L
T7 V T7 V
10-2 10-2
1SDC2100F30F0001
1SDC210F29F0001
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10 102 10-1 1 10 10 102
T7 800/1000/1250/1600 – PR331/P T7 800/1000/1250/1600 – PR331/P

L-S-I Functions G Function 4
Note: For T7 In = 1250 A, 1600 A ⇒ I3max = 12 x In
t [s] t [s]
104 0.4...1 104 0.2...1
0.4 1 0.2 1
103 103
0.6...10
0.6 10
3...144
102 102
1.5...15
1.5 15
10 10
t = k/I2
102
t = k/I2
1 1
I4 = 0.2-0.3-0.4 In disabled at 4 In
t=k I4 = 0.6 In disabled at 6 In
I4 = 0.8-0.9-1 In disabled at 8 In
10-1 10-1
T7 S,H,L
T7 V
t=k
10-2 10-2
1SDC210F31F0001
1SDC210F32F0001
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10 102 10-1 1 10 10 2
x In I [kA] I [kA]
4/9
1SDC210015D0205
T7 800/1000/1250/1600 – PR332/P T7 800/1000/1250/1600 – PR332/P

L-I Functions L-S-I Functions
Note: For T7 In = 1250 A, 1600 A I3max = 12 x In Note: For T7 In = 1250 A, 1600 A I3max = 12 x In
t [s] t [s]
104 104
0.4...1
0.4...1 0.4 1
0.4 1
103 103
0.6...10
0.6 10
3...144
102 3...144 102
1.5 15
1.5...15 1.5...15
1.5 15
10 10
t = k/I2
102 102
1 1
t=k
10-1 10-1
T7 S,H,L T7
10-2 T7 V 10-2 T7 V
1SDC210F33F0001
1SDC210F34F0001
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10 102 10-1 1 10 10 102
T7 800/1000/1250/1600 – PR332/P T7 800/1000/1250/1600 – PR332/P

4 G Function Rc Function
t [s] t [s]
104 104
0.2...1 3...30
0.2 1 3 30
103 103
102 102
10 10
t = k/I2
1 1
10-1 10-1
t=k
10-2 10-2
1SDC210F36F0001
1SDC21036FF0001
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10 2 10-1 1 10 10 2
I [kA] I [kA]
4/10
1SDC210015D0205
T7 800/1000/1250/1600 – PR332/P T7 800/1000/1250/1600 – PR332/P
L Function according to IEC 60255-3 L Function according to IEC 60255-3
k = 0,14 _ = 0,02 k = 13,5 _=1

t [s] t [s]
104 104 0.4...1
0.4 0.4...1 1 0.4 1
103 103
IEC 60255-3
102 102
3...144
3...144
10 10
1 1
1SDC210F38F0001
1SDC210F37F0001
10-1 10-1
10-1 1 10 10 2 10-1 1 10 10 2
x In x In
T7 800/1000/1250/1600 – PR332/P T7 800/1000/1250/1600 – PR332/P

L Function according to IEC 60255-3 U Function 4
k = 80 _=2 k = 0,14 _ = 0,02

t [s]
104 0.4...1 2% 90%
0.4 1 2...90%
103
3...144
102
IEC 60255-3 6
10
0.5...6
0.5
1SDC210F39F0001
1SDC210F48F0001
10-1
10-1 1 10 10 2
x In
4/11
1SDC210015D0205
T7 800/1000/1250/1600 T7 800/1000/1250/1600
PR332/P with PR330/V PR332/P with PR330/V
UV Function OV Function
k = 13,5 _=1
UV OV
0.1....5 0.1....5
1SDC210F50F0001
1SDC210F49F0001
T7 800/1000/1250/1600 T7 800/1000/1250/1600
4 PR332/P with PR330/V PR332/P with PR330/V
RV Function RP Function
RV
RP
0.5...30 0.5...25
1SDC210F51F0001
1SDC210F52F0001
4/12
1SDC210015D0205
Trip curves for zone selectivity
Circuit-breakers with PR223EF trip unit
T4L 250/320 - T5L 400/630 - T6L 630/800/1000 T4L 250/320 - T5L 400/630 - T6L 630/800/1000
PR223EF - Vaux ON PR223EF - Vaux OFF
L-S-EF Functions L-S-I Functions
Note: The dotted curve of function L corresponds to the maximum delay (t1) which can be Note: The dotted curve of function L corresponds to the maximum delay (t1) which can
set at 6 x I1, in the case where 320 A CTs are used for T4 and 630 A for T5. For all be set at 6 x I1, in the case where 320 A CTs are used for T4 and 630 A for T5.
the CT sizes t1 = 18s except with 320 A CT (T4), 630 A CT (T5) and 1000 A CT (T6) For all the CT sizes t1 = 18s except with 320 A CT (T4), 630 A CT (T5) and 1000 A
where t1 = 10.5s. For T4 In = 320 A, T5 In = 630 A and T6 In = 1000 A I2max = CT (T6) where t1 = 10.5s. For T4 In = 320 A, T5 In = 630 A and T6 In = 1000 A
9.5 x In and I3max = 9.5 x In. For T6 In = 800 A I3max = 10.5 x In. I2max = 9.5 x In and I3max = 9.5 x In. For T6 In = 800 A I3max = 10.5 x In.
t [s] t [s]
104 0.18-0.44-0.48-0.52-0.56-0.60-0.64-0.68-
104 0.18-0.44-0.48-0.52-0.56-0.60-0.64-0.68-
0.72-0.76-0.80-0.84-0.88-0.92-0.96-1 0.72-0.76-0.80-0.84-0.88-0.92-0.96-1
0.18 1 0.18 1
103 103
0.6 0.6
102 102
10 10
I2t ON I2t ON
10 10
102
1 1
T4
I2t OFF I2t OFF T5 400
10-1 10-1 T5 630
10-2 10-2 T6 630

T6 800
T6 1000
1SDC210E23F0001
1SDC210E25F0001
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 1 102
I [kA] x In I [kA]
T4L 250/320 - T5L 400/630 - T6L 630/800/1000

PR223EF - Vaux ON/OFF 4
G Function
t [s]
104 0.2-0.4-0.44-0.48-0.52-0.56-0.60-0.64-0.68-
0.72-0.76-0.80-0.84-0.88-0.92-0.96-1
0.2 1
103
102
10
1
10-1
10-2
1SDC210E26F0001
10-3
10-1 1 10 102
I [kA]
4/13
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breakers with magnetic only trip units
T2 160 – MF T2 160 - T3 250 – MA

I3 = 13 x In I3 = 6...12 x In
t [s] t [s]
104 104
103 103
102 102 Overload limit

Overload limit
10 10
1 1
I3 = 13 x In
I3 = 6…12 x In
10-1 10-1
1SDC210E28F0001
1SDC210E27F0001
10-2 10-2
1 10 102 1 10 102
x In x In
T4 250 – MA
4 I3 = 6...14 x In
t [s]
104
103
102 Overload limit
10
I3 = 6…14 x In
10-1
1SDC210E29F0001
10-2
1 10 102
x In
4/14
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breakers with PR221DS, PR231/P
and PR221MP electronic trip unit
T2 160 – PR221DS-I T4 250/320 - T5 400/630 - T6 630/800

I Function PR221DS-I
I Function
t [s] t [s]
104 104
1 10
103 103 1
Overload limit
T4 250 - T5 400 - T6 630/800
Overload limit
Overload limit T4 320 - T5 630
102 102
10
10 10
102 102
1 1
10-1 10-1
T4
T5 400
10-2 10-2 T5 630
T6 630
T6 800
1SDC210E30F0001
1SDC210E31F0001
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 1 10 10-1 1 10 1 10
T7 800/1000/1250 – PR231/P-I T2 100 – PR221MP

I Function L-I Functions 4
t [s] t [s]
104 104
0.65...1
0.65 1
103 1
103
20E
Overload limit
1
3E
102 102
10 2.5...17.5
2.5 17.5
10 10
1...10 102
1 1
T7 V
T7 S,H,L
10-1 10-1
10-2 10-2
1SDC21037FF0001
1SDC210F73F0001
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 10 102 10-1 1 10 10
x In I [kA] x In
4/15
1SDC210015D0205
Use of the trip curves of circuit-breakers
with PR222MP electronic trip unit
For correct parameter setting of the SACE PR222MP electronic trip unit, it may be useful to compare
the overall circuit-breaker curve with the motor starting curve.
For this purpose, with the protection function graphics shown on the following pages, it is possible
to draw the overall curve required for the circuit-breaker fitted with SACE PR222MP trip unit simply
and immediately.
N.B. For function L, as for all the other functions, make sure you place a glossy tracing
sheet over the curve so that the times on the axis of the co-ordinates coincide.
Function L (cannot be excluded)

Protection against overload
To protect the motor against any overloads, as a first step it is necessary to adjust function L to a
current I1 higher than or equal to the rated current of the motor Ie: I1 * Ie.
For example, if Ie = 135 A, an T4 250 circuit-breaker can be selected with In = 160 A and the
following adjustment carried out: I1 = 0.85 x In = 136 A.
The second step is to select the trip class according to the motor starting time. For a motor with a
start-up overload of 6 seconds, class 10 can be selected, with a trip time of 8s at 7.2 x I1.
To trace the curve correctly on the glossy sheet, according to I/In, simply place the glossy sheet over
the graph of function L so that I/In = 0.85 (on the glossy sheet) corresponds to I/I1 = 1 (on the graph)
and draw the curve relative to class 10.
Function R (can be excluded)

Protection against rotor blockage
Protection against rotor blockage can be set both with regard to the trip current I5 = 3 ... 10 x I1
(in this case I5 = 3 ... 10 x 0.85 x 160), and with regard to the trip time t5.
To trace the curve correctly on the glossy sheet, simply place the glossy sheet over the graph of
function R so that I/In = I1/In (on the glossy sheet) corresponds to I/I1 = 1 (on the graph). In this case
I/In = I1/In = 0.85, and draw the desired curve.
4 Function I (cannot be excluded)

This protection function against short-circuit recognises whether the motor is in the starting phase,
thereby avoiding unwarranted trips; the trip threshold can be set from 6 x In to 13 x In.
function I so that I/In = 1 (on the glossy sheet) corresponds to I/In = 1 (on the graph) and draw the
desired curve.
Function U (can be excluded)

Protection against loss and/or unbalance of a phase
Protection against loss or unbalance of a phase, if set to ON, intervenes when one or two phases
have a current lower than 0.4 x I1 (0.4 x 0.85 x In = 0.4 x 0.85 x 160 A = 54.4 A in this case).
function U so that I/In = I1/In (on the glossy sheet) corresponds to I/I1 = 1 (on the graph). In this case
I/In = I1/In = 0.85, and draw the desired curve.
4/16
1SDC210015D0205
Characteristic operating curve of an asynchronous motor
1SDC210E32F0001
l1 = function L trip current
l3 = function I trip current
I5 = function R trip current
t5 = function R trip time
I6 = function U trip current
t6 = function U trip time
le = rated service current of the motor 4
la = motor starting current
Ip = peak value of the sub-transient starting current
ta = motor starting time
tp = duration of the sub-transient starting phase
m = typical motor starting curve
c = example of trip curve of a motor protection circuit-breaker with electronic trip unit
4/17
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breakers with PR222MP electronic trip unit
T4 250 - T5 400 - T6 800 – PR222MP T4 250 - T5 400 - T6 800 – PR222MP

L Function (hot and cold trip) L Function (hot trip with 1 or 2 phases supplied)
t [s] t [s]
105 105

104

104
103 103
102 102
10A
10A
10 10
30
20
10
30 30
10A
1 20 1 20
10 10
10A
10A
10-1 10-1
1SDC210E33F0001
1SDC210E34F0001
1,05 1,05
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x In x In
T4 250 - T5 400 - T6 800 – PR222MP T4 250 - T5 400 - T6 800 – PR222MP

4 R-U Functions I Function
t [s] t [s]
105 103
6...13
6 13

104

102
103
10
102 4
5 1
6
7
8
10
10 10
4
10-1
1 1
10-2
10-1
1SDC210E35F0001
1SDC210E36F0001
10-3
1,05
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 10 2
x I1 I [kA]
4/18
1SDC210015D0205
T1 160 T2 160
230 V 230 V
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

10 1
80A÷160A
40A÷63A
25A-32A
10-1 20A
16A
12,5A
10-2 10A
1
8A
6,3A
5A
4A
10-3
160A 3,2A
125A
100A
80A 10-4
-1
10 40A-63A
32A
20A-25A
16A 2,5A
10-5
2A
1,6A
1A
1SDC210E37F0001
1SDC210E38F0001
10-2 10-6
1 10 102 103 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103 104 105
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T3 250 T4 250/320
230 V 230 V 4
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

10 10
250A
1 200A 1
160A
125A
100A-320A
100A 80A
80A 32A-50A
63A 20A-25A
10A
10-1 10-1
1SDC210E39F0001
1SDC210E40F0001
10-2 10-2
1 10 102 103 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
4/19
1SDC210015D0205
T5 400/630 T6 630/800/1000
230 V 230 V
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

10 10 3
102
T6 800-1000
1 10
T6 630
1
1SDC210E41F0001
1SDC210E42F0001
10-1
10-1 1 10 102 103
1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T7 800/1000/1250/1600
4 230 V
I2t [106·A2s]
103
102
T7 S,H,L
T7 V
10
1
1SDC210F40F0001
10-1
1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]
4/20
1SDC210015D0205
T1 160 T2 160
400-440 V 400-440 V
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

10 1
80A÷160A
40A÷63A
10-1 25A-32A
20A
16A
12,5A
1 10-2
160A
10A
125A
8A
100A
6,3A
80A
10-3 5A
40A÷63A
4A
32A
20A-25A
16A
10-1 10-4
3,2A
2,5A
2A
10-5 1,6A
1A
1SDC210E43F0001
1SDC210E44F0001
10-2 10-6
1 10 102 103 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103 104 105
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T3 250 T4 250/320
400-440 V 400-440 V 4
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

10 10
250A
200A
160A
125A
1 1
100A
100A-320A
80A 80A
63A 32A-50A
20A-25A
10A
10-1 10-1
1SDC210E45F0001
1SDC210E46F0001
10-2 10-2
1 10 102 103 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
4/21
1SDC210015D0205
T5 400/630 T6 630/800/1000
400-440 V 400-440 V
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

103
10
102
T6 800-1000
T6 630
10
1
1
1SDC210E47F0001
1SDC210E48F0001
10-1 10-1
103 1 10 102 103
1 10 102
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T7 800/1000/1250/1600
4 400-440 V
I2t [106·A2s]
103
102
T7 S,H,L
T7 V
10
1
1SDC210F41F0001
10-1
1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]
4/22
1SDC210015D0205
T1 160 T2 160
500 V 500 V
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

1 1
80A÷160A
160A
40A÷63A
125A
25A-32A
100A
10-1 20A
80A
16A
40A÷63A
12,5A
32A
10A
20A-25A
8A
16A 10-2
6,3A
5A
4A
3,2A
10-1 10-3
2,5A
2A
1,6A
10-4
1A
10-5
1SDC210E50F0001
1SDC210E49F0001
10-2 10-6
1 10 102 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103 104
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T3 250 T4 250/320
500 V 500 V 4
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

10 10
250A
200A
160A
125A
1 100A 1 100A-320A
80A
80A
63A
32A-50A
20A-25A
10A
10-1 10-1
1SDC210E51F0001
1SDC210E52F0001
10-2 10-2
1 10 102 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
4/23
1SDC210015D0205
T5 400/630 T6 630/800/1000
500 V 500 V
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

10 102
T6 800-1000
T6 630
10
1
1SDC210E53F0001
1SDC210E54F0001
10-1 10-1
1 10 102 103 1 10 102
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T7 800/1000/1250/1600
4 500 V
I2t [106·A2s]
103
102
T7 S,H,L
T7 V
10
1
1SDC210F42F0001
10-1
1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]
4/24
1SDC210015D0205
T1 160 T2 160
690 V 690 V
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

1 1
0,50 80A÷160A
10-1
40A÷63A
25A-32A
100÷160A 20A
50÷80A 16A
16÷40A 10-2
12,5A
0,20
10A
8A
6,3A
10-1 10-3 5A
0,05
10-4
4A
3,2A
2,5A
2A
10-5
1,6A
0,02
1A
1SDC210E55F0001
1SDC210E56F0001
10-2 10-6
1 2 10 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103
5
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T3 250 T4 250/320
690 V 690 V 4
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]
10 10
100A-320A
80A
1 1 32A-50A
250A
200A 20A-25A
160A 10A
125A
100A
80A
63A
10-1 10-1
1SDC210E57F0001
1SDC210E58F0001
10-2 10-2
1 10 102 103 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
4/25
1SDC210015D0205
T5 400/630 T6 630/800/1000
690 V 690 V
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

103
10
102
T6 800-1000
10 T6 630
1
1
1SDC210E59F0001
1SDC210E60F0001
10-1 10-1
1 10 102 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T7 800/1000/1250/1600
4 690 V
I2t [106·A2s]
103
102
T7 S,H,L
T7 V
10
1
1SDC210F43F0001
10-1
1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]
4/26
1SDC210015D0205
T4 250 T5 400/630
1000 V 1000 V
I2t [106·A2s] I2t [106·A2s]

10 10
32A-50A
80A-250A
400A-630A
1
10-1
1SDC210E61F0001
1SDC210E62F0001
10-2 10-1
1 10 102 1 10 102
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T6
1000 V 4
I2t [(kA)2s]
102
10
1
1SDC210E66F0001
10-1
1 10 102
I s [kA]
4/27
1SDC210015D0205
T4 250 T5 400/630
1150 V 1150 V
I2t [(kA)2s] I2t [(kA)2s]

10 10
10-1
1SDC210E67F0001
1SDC210E68F0001
10-2 10-1
1 10 102 1 10 102
I rms [kA] Irms [kA]
4/28
1SDC210015D0205
Limitation curves
T1 160 T2 160
230 V 230 V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
103 102
80A÷160A
40A÷63A
25A-32A
20A
10
16A
12,5A
102
10A
1 8A
6,3A
5A
160A
4A
125A
3,2A
10 100A
2,5A
80A
2A
40A÷63A 10-1
1,6A
32A
1A
20A-25A
16A
1SDC210E63F0001
1SDC210E64F0001
1 10-2
1 10 102 103 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103 104 105
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T3 250 T4 250/320
230 V 230 V 4
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
103 102
102
100A-320A
250A 80A
10
200A 32A-50A
160A 20A-25A
125A 10A
100A
10 80A
63A
1SDC210E65F0001
1SDC210E66F0001
1 1
1 10 102 103 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
4/29
1SDC210015D0205
Limitation curves
T5 400/630 T6 630/800/1000
230 V 230 V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
102
102
T6 800-1000
T6 630
10
10
1SDC210E67F0001
1SDC210E68F0001
1
1 10 102 103 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T7 800/1000/1250/1600
4 230 V
Ip [kA]
103
T7 S,H,L
102 T7 V
10
1SDC210F44F0001
1
1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]
4/30
1SDC210015D0205
T1 160 T2 160
400-440 V 400-440 V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
103 102
80A÷160A
40A÷63A
25A-32A
20A
16A
10 12,5A
102
10A
8A
6,3A
5A
1
4A
3,2A
160A
125A 2,5A
100A 2A
10
80A 1,6A
40A÷63A 1A
10-1
32A
20A-25A
16A
1SDC210E69F0001
1SDC210E70F0001
1 10-2
1 10 103 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103 104 105
102
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T3 250 T4 250/320
400-440 V 400-440 V 4
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
103 102
100A-320A
102
80A
32A-50A
20A-25A
250A 10
200A 10A
160A
125A
100A
10
80A
63A
1SDC210E71F0001
1SDC210E72F0001
1 1
1 10 102 103 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
4/31
1SDC210015D0205
Limitation curves
T5 400/630 T6 630/800/1000
400-440 V 400-440 V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
102
102
T6 800-1000
T6 630
10
10
1SDC210E74F0001
1SDC210E73F0001
1
102 103 1 10 102 103
1 10 Irms [kA]
Irms [kA]
T7 800/1000/1250/1600
4 400-440 V
Ip [kA]
103
T7 S,H,L
T7 V
102
10
1SDC210F45F0001
1
1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]
4/32
1SDC210015D0205
T1 160 T2 160
500 V 500 V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
102 102
80A÷160A
40A÷63A
25A-32A
20A
16A
10 12,5A
160A 10A
125A 8A
100A 6,3A
80A 5A
40A÷63A 4A
32A 3,2A
10 1
20A-25A
2,5A
16A
2A
1,6A
1A
10-1
1SDC210E76F0001
1SDC210E75F0001
1 10-2
1 10 102 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T3 250 T4 250/320
500 V 500 V 4
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
102 102
250A
200A
160A 100A-320A
125A
100A 80A
80A
32A-50A
63A
20A-25A
10 10 10A
1SDC210E77F0001
1SDC210E78F0001
1 1
1 10 102 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
4/33
1SDC210015D0205
Limitation curves
T5 400/630 T6 630/800/1000
500 V 500 V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
102 102
T6 800-1000
T6 630
10 10
1SDC210E80F0001
1SDC210E79F0001
1 1
1 10 102 103 1 10 102
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T7 800/1000/1250/1600
4 500 V
Ip [kA]
103
T7 S,H,L
102 T7 V
10
1SDC210F46F0001
1
1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]
4/34
1SDC210015D0205
T1 160 T2 160
690 V 690 V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
10 102
100÷160A
80A÷160A
50÷80A
40A÷63A
16÷40A
25A-32A
20A
10 16A
12,5A
5 10A
8A
6,3A
5A
4A
1
3,2A
2,5A
2A
1,6A
1A
2 10-1
1SDC210E82F0001
1SDC210E81F0001
1 10-2
1 2 5 10 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T3 250 T4 250/320
690 V 690 V 4
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
103 102
100A-320A
80A
102
32A-50A
20A-25A
10A
10
250A
200A
160A
10
125A
100A
80A
63A
1SDC210E83F0001
1SDC210E84F0001
1 1
1 10 102 103 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
4/35
1SDC210015D0205
Limitation curves
T5 400/630 T6 630/800/1000
690 V 690 V
Ip [kA]
Ip [kA]
102
102
T6 800-1000
T6 630
10
10
1SDC210E85F0001
1SDC210E86F0001
1 1 10 102 103
1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T7 800/1000/1250/1600
4 690 V
Ip [kA]
103
102 T7 S,H,L
T7 V
10
1SDC210F47F0001
1
1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]
4/36
1SDC210015D0205
T4 250 T5 400/630
1000 V 1000 V
Ip[kA] Ip[kA]
102 102
400A-630A
32A-50A
80A-250A
10
1SDC210E87F0001 10
1SDC210E88F0001
1 1
1 10 102 1 10 102
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
T6
1000 V 4
Ip [kA]
102
10
1SDC210F71F0001
1
1 10 102
I s [kA]
4/37
1SDC210015D0205
Limitation curves
T4 250 T5 400/630
1150 V 1150 V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
102 102
10 10
1SDC210F69F0001
1SDC210F70F0001
1 1
1 10 102 1 10 102
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
4/38
1SDC210015D0205
Circuit-breakers with magnetic only or electronic trip units
and switch-disconnectors
T1D 160 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Imax [A] Imax [A] Imax [A] Imax [A]
FC 160 160 152 136
F 160 160 152 136
FC = Front cable terminals F = Front flat terminals
1SDC210E89F0001
4
4/39
1SDC210015D0205
T2 160 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1
F 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
EF 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
ES 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
FC Cu 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
FC CuAl 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
R 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
F = Front flat terminals EF = Front extended terminals ES = Front extended spread terminals
FC Cu = Front terminals for copper cables FC CuAl = Front terminals for CuAl cables R = Rear terminals
Note: in the plug-in version the maxi-
mum setting is derated by 10%
at 40 °C.
1SDC210E90F0001
T2 160 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
4 Plug-in F
Imax [A]
144
I1
0.9
Imax [A]
138
I1
0.84
Imax [A]
126
I1
0.80
Imax [A]
112
I1
0.68
EF 144 0.9 138 0.84 126 0.80 112 0.68
ES 144 0.9 138 0.84 126 0.80 112 0.68
FC Cu 144 0.9 138 0.84 126 0.80 112 0.68
FC CuAl 144 0.9 138 0.84 126 0.80 112 0.68
R 144 0.9 138 0.84 126 0.80 112 0.68
FC Cu = Front terminals for copper cables FC CuAl = Front terminals for CuAl cables R = Rear terminals
at 40 °C.
1SDC210F62F0001
4/40
1SDC210015D0205
T3D 250 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Imax [A] Imax [A] Imax [A] Imax [A]
F 250 250 227 204
F = Front flat terminals

mum setting is derated by 10% 260
at 40 °C.
255
250
245
240
235
230
225
220
215
210
205
1SDC210E91F0001
200
T3D 250 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Plug-in F
Imax [A]
225
Imax [A]
208
Imax [A]
190
Imax [A]
170
4
EF 225 208 190 170
ES 225 208 190 170
FC Cu 225 208 190 170
FC CuAl 225 208 190 170
FC Cu = Front terminals for copper cables FC CuAl = Front terminals for CuAl cables

at 40 °C.
1SDC210E91F0001
4/41
1SDC210015D0205
T4 250 and T4D 250 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C

Fixed FC 250 1 250 1 250 1 220 0.88
F 250 1 250 1 250 1 220 0.88
R (HR) 250 1 250 1 250 1 220 0.88
R (VR) 250 1 250 1 250 1 230 0.92
FC = Front cables terminals F = Front flat terminals R (HR) = Rear terminals (horizontal)
R (VR) = Rear terminals (vertical)
Iu [A]
255
250
245
240 R(VR)
235 FC-F-R(HR)
230
225
220
1SDC210E92F0001
215
40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T [°C]
T4 250 and T4D 250

4 Plug-in / FC
up to 40 °C
Imax [A]
250
I1
1 250
50 °C
Imax [A] I1
1
60 °C
Imax [A]
230
I1
0.92
70 °C
Imax [A]
210
I1
0.84
F 250 1 250 1 230 0.92 210 0.84
Withdrawable
HR 250 1 250 1 230 0.92 210 0.84
VR 250 1 250 1 240 0.96 220 0.88
FC = Front cables terminals F = Front flat terminals HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals
VR = Rear flat vertical terminals
Iu [A]
255
250
245
R(VR)
240
235
230
225
220 FC-F-R(HR)
215
210
1SDC210E93F0001
205
40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T [°C]
4/42
1SDC210015D0205
T4 320 and T4D 320 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Fixed FC 320 1 294 0.92 269 0.84 243 0.76
F 320 1 294 0.96 269 0.84 243 0.76
R (HR) 320 1 294 0.92 269 0.84 243 0.76
R (VR) 320 1 307 0.96 281 0.88 256 0.80
Iu [A]
330
320
310
R(VR)
300
290
280
270
FC-F-R(HR)
260
250
1SDC210E94F0001
240
40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T [°C]
T4 320 and T4D 320

Plug-in / FC
up to 40 °C
Imax [A]
320
I1
1 294
50 °C
Imax [A] I1
0.92
60 °C
Imax [A]
268
I1
0.84
70 °C
Imax [A]
242
I1
0.76
4
F 320 1 294 0.92 268 0.84 242 0.76
Withdrawable
HR 320 1 294 0.92 268 0.84 242 0.76
VR 320 1 307 0.96 282 0.88 256 0.80
Iu [A]
330
320
310
R(VR)
300
290
FC-F-R(HR)
280
270
260
250
1SDC210E95F0001
240
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T [°C]
4/43
1SDC210015D0205
T4 320 and T4D 320 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C

Plug-in /
FC 282 0.88 262 0.82 230 0.72 212 0.66
Withdrawable F 282 0.88 262 0.82 230 0.72 212 0.66
with RC222 HR 282 0.88 262 0.82 230 0.72 212 0.66
VR 282 0.88 269 0.82 250 0.78 224 0.70
Iu [A]
290
280
270
VR
260
250
F-FC-HR
240
230
220
210
1SDC210F65F0001
200
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T [°C]
4/44
1SDC210015D0205
T5 400 and T5D 400 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Fixed FC 400 1 400 1 400 1 352 0.88
F 400 1 400 1 400 1 352 0.88
R (HR) 400 1 400 1 400 1 352 0.88
R (VR) 400 1 400 1 400 1 368 0.92
Iu [A]
405
400
395
390
385
R(VR)
380
FC-F-R(HR)
375
370
365
360
355
1SDC210E96F0001
350
40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T [°C]
T5 400 and T5D 400

Plug-in / FC
up to 40 °C
Imax [A]
400
I1
1 400
50 °C
Imax [A] I1
1
60 °C
Imax [A]
368
I1
0.92
70 °C
Imax [A]
336
I1
0.84
4
F 400 1 400 1 368 0.92 336 0.84
Withdrawable
HR 400 1 400 1 368 0.92 336 0.84
VR 400 1 400 1 382 0.96 350 0.88
Iu [A]
405
400
395
390
385 VR
380
375
370
365 HR-FC-F
360
355
350
345
340
335
1SDC210E97F0001
330
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T [°C]
4/45
1SDC210015D0205
T5 630 and T5D 630 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C

Fixed FC 630 1 580 0.92 529 0.84 479 0.76
F 630 1 580 0.92 529 0.84 479 0.76
R (HR) 630 1 580 0.92 529 0.84 479 0.76
R (VR) 630 1 605 0.96 554 0.88 504 0.80
Iu [A]
640
630
620
610
600
590
R(VR)
580
R(HR)-FC-F
570
560
550
540
530
520
510
500
490
480
1SDC210E98F0001
470
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T [°C]
T5 630 and T5D 630

4 Plug-in / EF
up to 40 °C
Imax [A]
567
I1
0.9 502
50 °C
Imax [A] I1
0.80
60 °C
Imax [A]
458
I1
0.72
70 °C
Imax [A]
409
I1
0.64
HR 567 0.9 502 0.80 458 0.72 409 0.64
Withdrawable
VR 567 0.9 526 0.82 480 0.76 429 0.68
EF = Front extended terminals HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals VR = Rear flat vertical terminals
Iu [A]
600
550
VR
500
EF-HR
450
1SDC210E99F0001
400
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T [°C]
4/46
1SDC210015D0205
T6 630 and T6D 630 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Fixed FC - F 630 1 630 1 598.5 0.95 567 0.9
R (VR) 630 1 630 1 630 1 598.5 0.95
R (HR) 630 1 630 1 567 0.9 504 0.8
R(VR)
F-FC
R(HR)
1SDC210F01F0001
T6 630 and T6D 630
Withdrawable EF
up to 40 °C
Imax [A]
630
I1
1
50 °C
Imax [A]
598.5
I1
0.95 567
60 °C
Imax [A] I1
0.9
70 °C
Imax [A]
504
I1
0.8
4
VR 630 1 630 1 598.5 0.95 567 0.9
HR 630 1 598.5 0.95 567 0.9 504 0.8
VR
EF-HR
1SDC210F02F0001
4/47
1SDC210015D0205
T6 800 and T6D 800 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C

Fixed FC - F 800 1 800 1 760 0.95 720 0.9
R (VR) 800 1 800 1 800 1 760 0.95
R (HR) 800 1 800 1 720 0.9 640 0.8
R(VR)
F-FC
R(HR)
1SDC210F03F0001
T6 800 and T6D 800
4 Withdrawable EF
up to 40 °C
Imax [A]
800
I1
1 760
50 °C
Imax [A] I1
0.95 720
60 °C
Imax [A] I1
0.9
70 °C
Imax [A]
640
I1
0.8
VR 800 1 800 1 760 0.95 720 0.9
HR 800 1 760 0.95 720 0.9 640 0.8
VR
EF-HR
1SDC210F04F0001
4/48
1SDC210015D0205
T6 1000 and up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
T6D 1000
FC 1000 1 960 0.96 877 0.88 784 0.78
R (HR) 1000 1 926 0.93 845 0.85 756 0.76
Fixed
R (VR) 1000 1 1000 1 913 0.91 817 0.82
ES 1000 1 900 0.90 820 0.82 720 0.72
FC = Front cables terminals R (HR) = Rear terminals (horizontal) R (VR) = Rear terminals (vertical)
ES = Front extended spread terminals
1100
1000
FC R(VR)
900
R(HR)
ES
1SDC210F05F0001
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
4/49
1SDC210015D0205
T7 S,H,L 800 and up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C

T7D 800
VR 800 1 800 1 800 1 755 0.94
F-EF-HR 800 1 800 1 800 1 700 0.87
Fixed
VR = Rear flat vertical F = Front flat terminals EF = Extended front
HR = Rear flat horizontal
VR
F-EF-HR
1SDC21030FF0001
T7 V 800
4 Fixed VR
up to 40 °C
Imax [A]
800
I1
1 800
50 °C
Imax [A] I1
1 800
60 °C
Imax [A] I1
1
70 °C
Imax [A]
755
I1
0.94
F-EF-HR 800 1 800 1 800 1 700 0.87
VR
F-EF-HR
1SDC21031FF0001
4/50
1SDC210015D0205
T7D 800
VR 800 1 800 1 800 1 718 0.89
F-EF-HR 800 1 800 1 800 1 700 0.87
Withdrawable
VR
F-EF-HR
1SDC21032FF0001
T7 V 800
Withdrawable VR
up to 40 °C
Imax [A]
800
I1
1 800
50 °C
Imax [A] I1
1 800
60 °C
Imax [A] I1
1
70 °C
Imax [A]
716
I1
0.89
4
F-EF-HR 800 1 800 1 763 0.95 682 0.85
VR
F-EF-HR
1SDC21033FF0001
4/51
1SDC210015D0205

T7D 1000
VR 1000 1 1000 1 1000 1 942 0.94
F-EF-HR 1000 1 1000 1 942 0.94 827 0.83
Fixed
1050
1000
VR
950
F-EF-HR
900
1SDC21034FF0001
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T7 S,H,L 1000 and

4 T7D 1000
VR
up to 40 °C
Imax [A]
1000
I1
1 1000
50 °C
Imax [A] I1
1 952
60 °C
Imax [A] I1
0.95
70 °C
Imax [A]
852
I1
0.85
F-EF-HR 1000 1 1000 1 942 0.94 827 0.83
Withdrawable
1050
1000
VR
950
F-EF-HR
900
1SDC21035FF0001
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
4/52
1SDC210015D0205
T7 V 1000 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Fixed VR 1000 1 1000 1.00 1000 1.00 894 0.89
EF-HR 1000 1 1000 1.00 895 0.89 784 0.78
EF = Extended front VR = Rear flat vertical HR = Rear flat horizontal
Note: For ratings below 1000 A Tmax T7 does not undergo any thermal derating.
1050
1000
VR
950
900
EF-HR
1SDC210F53F0001
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T7 V 1000
Withdrawable VR
up to 40 °C
Imax [A]
1000
I1
1 1000
50 °C
Imax [A] I1
1.00 913
60 °C
Imax [A] I1
0.91
70 °C
Imax [A]
816
I1
0.82
4
EF-HR 1000 1 1000 1.00 895 0.89 784 0.78
1050
1000
950
VR
900
EF-HR
1SDC210F54F0001
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
4/53
1SDC210015D0205
T7 S,H,L, 1250 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
and T7D 1250
VR 1250 1 1250 1.00 1250 1.00 1118 0.89
EF-HR 1250 1 1250 1.00 1118 0.89 980 0.78
Fixed
1300
1250
VR
1200
1150
1100
1050
EF-HR
1000
950
900
850
1SDC210F55F0001
800
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T7 V 1250
4 Fixed VR
up to 40 °C
Imax [A]
1250
I1
1 1201
50 °C
Imax [A] I1
0.96 1096
60 °C
Imax [A] I1
0.88
70 °C
Imax [A]
981
I1
0.78
EF-HR 1250 1 1157 0.93 1056 0.85 945 0.76
1300
1250
1200
1150
VR
1100
1050
EF-HR
1000
950
900
850
1SDC210F56F0001
800
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
4/54
1SDC210015D0205
T7 S,H,L, 1250 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
and T7D 1250
VR 1250 1 1250 1.00 1141 0.91 1021 0.82
EF-HR 1250 1 1250 1.00 1118 0.89 980 0.78
Withdrawable
1300
1250
1200
VR
1150
1100 EF-HR
1050
1000
950
900
850
1SDC210F57F0001
800
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T7 V 1250
Withdrawable VR
up to 40 °C
Imax [A]
1250
I1
1 1157
50 °C
Imax [A] I1
0.93 1056
60 °C
Imax [A] I1
0.85
70 °C
Imax [A]
945
I1
0.76
4
EF-HR 1250 1 1000 0.80 913 0.73 816 0.65
1300
1250
1200
1150
1100
VR
1050
1000
950
EF-HR
900
850
1SDC210F58F0001
800
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
4/55
1SDC210015D0205
T7 S,H,L, 1600 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
and T7D 1600
VR 1600 1 1537 0.96 1403 0.88 1255 0.78
EF-HR 1600 1 1481 0.93 1352 0.85 1209 0.76
Fixed
1700
1600
1500
VR
1400
EF-HR
1300
1200
1100
1SDC210F59F0001
1000
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
T7 S,H,L, 1600
4 and T7D 1600
VR
up to 40 °C
Imax [A]
1600
I1
1 1481
50 °C
Imax [A] I1
0.93 1352
60 °C
Imax [A] I1
0.85
70 °C
Imax [A]
1209
I1
0.76
EF-HR 1600 1 1280 0.80 1168 0.73 1045 0.65
Withdrawable
1700
1600
1500
VR
1400
1300
1200
EF-HR
1100
1SDC210F60F0001
1000
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
4/56
1SDC210015D0205
Tmax T1 and T1 1P(1)

10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
In [A] MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX
16 13 18 12 18 12 17 11 16 11 15 10 14 9 13
20 16 23 15 22 15 21 14 20 13 19 12 18 11 16
25 20 29 19 28 18 26 18 25 16 23 15 22 14 20
32 26 37 25 35 24 34 22 32 21 30 20 28 18 26
40 32 46 31 44 29 42 28 40 26 38 25 35 23 33
50 40 58 39 55 37 53 35 50 33 47 31 44 28 41
63 51 72 49 69 46 66 44 63 41 59 39 55 36 51
80 64 92 62 88 59 84 56 80 53 75 49 70 46 65
100 81 115 77 110 74 105 70 100 66 94 61 88 57 81
125 101 144 96 138 92 131 88 125 82 117 77 109 71 102
160 129 184 123 176 118 168 112 160 105 150 98 140 91 130
(*) For the T1 1p circuit-breaker (fitted with TMF fixed thermomagnetic trip unit), only consider the column corresponding to the
maximum adjustment of the TMD trip units.
Tmax T2
10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
1.6 1.3 1.8 1.2 1.8 1.2 1.7 1.1 1.6 1 1.5 1 1.4 0.9 1.3
2 1.6 2.3 1.5 2.2 1.5 2.1 1.4 2 1.3 1.9 1.2 1.7 1.1 1.6
2.5 2 2.9 1.9 2.8 1.8 2.6 1.8 2.5 1.6 2.3 1.5 2.2 1.4 2
3.2 2.6 3.7 2.5 3.5 2.4 3.4 2.2 3.2 2.1 3 1.9 2.8 1.8 2.6
4 3.2 4.6 3.1 4.4 2.9 4.2 2.8 4 2.6 3.7 2.4 3.5 2.3 3.2
5 4 5.7 3.9 5.5 3.7 5.3 3.5 5 3.3 4.7 3 4.3 2.8 4
6.3 5.1 7.2 4.9 6.9 4.6 6.6 4.4 6.3 4.1 5.9 3.8 5.5 3.6 5.1
8 6.4 9.2 6.2 8.8 5.9 8.4 5.6 8 5.2 7.5 4.9 7 4.5 6.5
10 8 11.5 7.7 11 7.4 10.5 7 10 6.5 9.3 6.1 8.7 5.6 8.1
12.5
16
10.1
13
14.4
18
9.6
12
13.8
18
9.2
12
13.2
17
8.8
11
12.5
16
8.2
10
11.7
15
7.6
10
10.9
14
7.1
9
10.1
13 4
20 16 23 15 22 15 21 14 20 13 19 12 17 11 16
25 20 29 19 28 18 26 18 25 16 23 15 22 14 20
32 26 37 25 35 24 34 22 32 21 30 19 28 18 26
40 32 46 31 44 29 42 28 40 26 37 24 35 23 32
50 40 57 39 55 37 53 35 50 33 47 30 43 28 40
63 51 72 49 69 46 66 44 63 41 59 38 55 36 51
80 64 92 62 88 59 84 56 80 52 75 49 70 45 65
100 80 115 77 110 74 105 70 100 65 93 61 87 56 81
125 101 144 96 138 92 132 88 125 82 117 76 109 71 101
160 (1) 129 184 123 178 118 168 112 160 105 150 97 139 90 129
(1)
For CB in plug-in version further 10% derating.
Tmax T3
10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
63 51 72 49 69 46 66 44 63 41 59 38 55 35 51
80 64 92 62 88 59 84 56 80 52 75 48 69 45 64
100 80 115 77 110 74 105 70 100 65 93 61 87 56 80
125 101 144 96 138 92 132 88 125 82 116 76 108 70 100
160 129 184 123 176 118 168 112 160 104 149 97 139 90 129
200 161 230 154 220 147 211 140 200 130 186 121 173 112 161
250 201 287 193 278 184 263 175 250 163 233 152 216 141 201
(1)
For CB in plug-in version further 10% derating.
4/57
1SDC210015D0205
Tmax T4
10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
20 19 27 18 24 16 23 13 20 12 17 10 15 8 13
32 26 43 24 39 22 36 20 32 16 27 14 24 11 21
50 37 62 35 58 33 54 32 50 27 46 25 42 22 39
80 59 98 55 92 52 86 50 80 44 74 40 66 32 58
100 83 118 80 113 74 106 70 100 66 95 59 85 49 75
125 103 145 100 140 94 134 88 125 80 115 73 105 63 95
160 130 185 124 176 118 168 112 160 106 150 100 140 90 130
200 162 230 155 220 147 210 140 200 133 190 122 175 107 160
250 200 285 193 275 183 262 175 250 168 240 160 230 150 220
Tmax T5
10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
320 260 368 245 350 234 335 224 320 212 305 200 285 182 263
400 325 465 310 442 295 420 280 400 265 380 250 355 230 325
500 435 620 405 580 380 540 350 500 315 450 280 400 240 345
Tmax T6
10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
630 520 740 493 705 462 660 441 630 405 580 380 540 350 500
800 685 965 640 905 605 855 560 800 520 740 470 670 420 610
4/58
1SDC210015D0205
Power losses
Power In [A] T1/T1 1P T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 S,H,L T7 V

[W/pole]
F F P F P F P/W F P/W F W F W F W
TMD 1 1.5 1.7
TMA 1.6 2.1 2.5
TMG 2 2.5 2.9
MF 2.5 2.6 3
MA 3.2 2.9 3.4
4 2.6 3
5 2.9 3.5
6.3 3.5 4.1
8 2.7 3.2
10 3.1 3.6
12.5 1.1 1.3
16 1.5 1.4 1.6
20 1.8 1.7 2 3.6 3.6
25 2 2.3 2.8
32 2.1 2.7 3.2 3.7 3.7
40 2.6 3.9 4.6
50 3.7 4.3 5 3.9 4.1
63 4.3 5.1 6 4.3 5.1
80 4.8 6.1 7.2 4.8 5.8 4.6 5
100 7 8.5 10 5.6 6.8 5.2 5.8
125 10.7 12 14.7 6.6 7.9 6.2 7.2
160 15 17 20 7.9 9.5 7.4 9
200 13.2 15.8 9.9 12.4
250 17.8 21.4 13.7 17.6
320 13.6 20.9
400 19.5 31
500 28.8 36.7
630 30.6 39
800 31 39.6
PR22..
PR23..
10
25
0.5
1
0.6
1.2 4
PR33.. 63 3.5 4
100 8 9.2 1.7 2.3
160 17 20 4.4 6
250 10.7 14.6
320 17.6 24 10.6 17.9
400 16.5 28 5 9 8 12
630 41 53.6 30 38.5 12 22 20 30
800 32 41.6 19.3 35.3 32 48
1000 50 30 55 50 75
1250 47 86 78.3 117.3
1600 77 141
4/59
1SDC210015D0205
Magnetic trip values
Single-phase trip
Release In [A] I3 [A] current
(% I3) (1)
T1 1p 160 TMF 16…160 500…1600
T1 160 TMD 16…50 500 150%
16…50 630 (2) 200%
63…160 630…1600 200%
T2 160 TMD 1.6…25 16…500 200%
32…50 500 180%
63…160 630…1600 150%
MF/MA 1…20 13…240 200%
32…52 192…624 180%
80…100 480…1200 150%
PR221 10…160 1…10 x In 100%
T3 250 TMG 63…250 400…750 150%
TMD 63…250 630…2500 150%
MA 100…200 600…2400 150%
T4 250/320 TMD 20…50 320…500 150%
TMA 80…250 400…2500 150%
MA 10…200 60…2800 150%
PR221DS 100…320 1…10 x In 100%
PR222DS/P-
100…320 1…12 x In 100%
PR222DS/PD
PR223DS 100…320 1.5…12 x In 100%
T5 400/630 TMG 320…500 1600…2500 150%
TMA 320…500 3200…5000 150%
PR221DS 320…630 1…10 x In 100%
PR222DS/P-
320…630 1…12 x In 100%
PR222DS/PD
PR223DS 320…630 1.5…12 x In 100%
T6 630/800/1000 TMA 630…800 3150…8000 150%
PR221DS 630…1000 1…10 x In 100%
4 PR222DS/P-
PR222DS/PD
630…1000 1…12 x In 100%
PR223DS 630…1000 1.5…12 x In 100%

T7 800/1000/1250/1600 PR231/P-PR232/P 400…1600 1.5…12 x In 100%
PR331/P-PR332/P 400…1600 1.5…15 x In 100%
I3 = instantaneous trip current
TMF = thermomagnetic release with fixed thermal and magnetic threshold
TMD = thermomagnetic release with adjustable thermal and fixed magnetic threshold
TMA = thermomagnetic release with adjustable thermal and magnetic threshold
TMG = thermomagnetic release for generator protection
PR22_, PR23_, PR33_ = electronic releases
(1)
Satisfies the requirements of the IEC 60947-2 Standard, section 8.3.3.1.2
(2)
Only T1B and T1C
4/60
1SDC210015D0205
Use of apparatus at 16 2/3 Hz
The series of thermomagnetic Tmax circuit-breakers are suitable for operation at 16 2/3 Hz frequen-
cies - an application mainly used in the railway sector.
The electrical performances are given below (Breaking capacity Icu) according to the voltage and the
number of poles to be connected in series with reference to the connection diagrams.
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
Icu [kA] Connection B C N N S H L N S N S H L V N S H L V N S H L
diagram
250 V (AC) 2 poles in series A 16 25 36 36 50 70 85 36 50 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100
250 V (AC) 3 poles in series B-C 20 30 40 40 55 85 100 40 55 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
500 V (AC) 2 poles in series A - - - - - - - - - 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 20 35 50 70
500 V (AC) 3 poles in series B-C 16 25 36 36 50 70 85 36 50 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
750 V (AC) 3 poles in series B-C - - - - - - - - - 16 25 36 50 70 16 25 36 50 70 16 20 36 50
750 V (AC) 4 poles in series(1) D - - - - - - 50 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1000 V (AC) 4 poles in series(2) D - - - - - - - - - - - - - 40 - - - - 40 - - - 40
(1)
Circuit-breakers with neutral at 100%
(2)
Use 1000 V DC version circuit-breakers
Connection diagrams
Diagram A: Interruption with one pole for polarity
1SDC210F06F0001
Load
Note: Without neutral connected to earth, the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault nil.
4
Diagram B: Interruption with two poles in series for one polarity and one pole for the other polarity
1SDC210F07F0001
Load
Note: Without neutral connected to earth, the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault nil.
4/61
1SDC210015D0205
Use of apparatus at 16 2/3 Hz
Diagram C: Interruption with three poles in series for one polarity (with neutral earthed)
1SDC210F08F0001
Load
Diagram D: Interruption with four poles in series for one polarity (with neutral earthed)
1SDC210F09F0001
Load
Diagram E: Interruption with three poles in series for one polarity and one pole for the other polarity, and inter-
ruption with two poles in series for each polarity
4 E F
1SDC210F10F0001
Load Load
Note: Without neutral connected to earth, the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault negligible
4/62
1SDC210015D0205
Trip thresholds
The thermal threshold of the circuit-breaker is the same as the normal version.
For the magnetic threshold, a correction coefficient must be used to be made on the protection
thresholds as indicated in the table:
Circuit-breaker Diagram A Diagram B-C Diagram D

T1 1 1 –
T2 0.9 0.9 0.9
T3 0.9 0.9 –
T4 0.9 0.9 0.9
T5 0.9 0.9 0.9
Setting adjustment of the magnetic threshold

The correction factor takes into consideration the phenomena that, with frequencies differing from
50-60 Hz, modifies the tripping value of protection threshold against short circuit. The value that must
be set on the trip unit is therefore the real wanted tripping value divided by the correction factor.
Example
– Service current: Ib = 200 A
– Circuit-breaker: T4 250 In = 250 A
– Desired magnetic protection: I3 = 2000 A
– Magnetic threshold value to be set:
Set: I3 I
km
therefore in this specific case, the setting for the adjustment value for the magnetic
threshold is:
Set: 2000 = 2222 A (roughly equal to 9 In)

4
0.9
4/63
1SDC210015D0205
Use of apparatus at 400 Hz
At high frequencies, the performances of the circuit-breakers are reclassified to take the following
phenomena into account:
• the increase in the skin effect and increase in the inductive reactance, in a way directly propor-
tional to the frequency, cause overheating of the conductor or of the copper components which
normally carry the current in the circuit-breaker;
• the elongation of the hysteresis ring and the reduction in the magnetic saturation value, with
consequent variation in the forces associated with the magnetic field at a given current value.
In general, these phenomena have effects on the behaviour of both the thermomagnetic releases
and of the elements of the circuit-breaker for interrupting the current.
The following tables refer to circuit-breakers with thermomagnetic releases, with a breaking capacity
of less than 36 kA. This value is normally more than sufficient for protection of 400 Hz plants, normally
characterised by fairly low short-circuit currents.
As can be seen from the data indicated, the trip threshold of the thermal component (ln) decreases
as the frequency increases due to the reduced conductivity of the materials and to the increase in
associated thermal phenomena. In general, derating of this performance is equal to 10%.
Vice versa, the magnetic threshold (l3) increases as the frequency increases: for this reason, use of a
5·ln version is recommended. In these tables, Km is the multiplication factor of I3 due to the induced
magnetic fields.
T1 160 - TMD 16÷80 A

I1 (400 Hz) I3
In MIN MED MAX I3 (50 Hz) Km I3 (400 Hz)
T1B 160 16 10 12 14 500 2 1000
T1C 160 20 12 15 18 500 2 1000
T1N 160 25 16 19 22 500 2 1000
32 20 24.5 29 500 2 1000
40 25 30.5 36 500 2 1000
50 31 38 45 500 2 1000
63 39 48 57 630 2 1260
80 50 61 72 800 2 1600
4
T2 160 - TMD 1.6÷80 A
I1 (400 Hz) I3
T2N 160 1.6 1 1.2 1.4 16 1.7 27.2
2 1.2 1.5 1.8 20 1.7 34
2.5 1.5 1.9 2.2 25 1.7 42.5
3.2 2 2.5 2.9 32 1.7 54.4
4 2.5 3 3.6 40 1.7 68
5 3 3.8 4.5 50 1.7 85
6.3 4 4.8 5.7 63 1.7 107.1
8 5 6.1 7.2 80 1.7 136
10 6.3 7.6 9 100 1.7 170
12.5 7.8 9.5 11.2 125 1.7 212.5
16 10 12 14 500 1.7 850
20 12 15 18 500 1.7 850
25 16 19 22 500 1.7 850
32 20 24.5 29 500 1.7 850
40 25 30.5 36 500 1.7 850
50 31 38 45 500 1.7 850
63 39 48 57 630 1.7 1071
80 50 61 72 800 1.7 1360
4/64
1SDC210015D0205
T2 160 - TMG 16÷160 A
I1 (400 Hz) I3
T2N 160 16 10 12 14 160 1.7 272
25 16 19 22 160 1.7 272
40 25 30.5 36 200 1.7 340
63 39 48 57 200 1.7 340
80 50 61 72 240 1.7 408
100 63 76.5 90 300 1.7 510
125 79 96 113 375 1.7 637.5
160 100 122 144 480 1.7 816
T3 250 - TMG 63÷250 A

I1 (400 Hz) I3
T3N 250 63 39 48 57 400 1.7 680
80 50 61 72 400 1.7 680
100 63 76.5 90 400 1.7 680
125 79 96 113 400 1.7 680
160 100 122 144 480 1.7 816
200 126 153 180 600 1.7 1020
250 157 191 225 750 1.7 1275
T3 250 - TMD 63÷125 A

I1 (400 Hz) I3
T3N 250 80
100
50
63
61
76.5
72
90
800
1000
1.7
1.7
1360
1700
4
125 79 96 113 1250 1.7 2125
T4 250 - TMD 20÷50 A

I1 (400 Hz) I3
T4N 250 20 12 15 18 320 1.7 544
32 20 24.5 29 320 1.7 544
50 31 38 45 500 1.7 850
T4 250/320 - TMA 80÷250 A

I1 (400 Hz) I3 settings (MIN=5xIn)
T4N 80 50 61 72 400 1.7 680
250/320 100 63 76.5 90 500 1.7 850
125 79 96 113 625 1.7 1060
160 100 122 144 800 1.7 1360
200 126 153 180 1000 1.7 1700
250 157 191 225 1250 1.7 2125
4/65
1SDC210015D0205
Use of apparatus at 400 Hz
T5 400/630 - TMA 320÷500 A

T5N 320 201 244 288 1600 1.5 2400
400/630 400 252 306 360 2000 1.5 3000
500 315 382 450 2500 1.5 3750
T5 400/630 - TMG 320÷500 A

T5N 320 201 244 288 800...1600 1.5 1200...2400
400/630 400 252 306 360 1000...2000 1.5 1500...3000
500 315 382 450 1250...2500 1.5 1875...3750
T6 630/800 - TMA
T6N 630 630 397 482 567 3150 1.5 4725
T6N 800 800 504 602 720 4000 1.5 6000
Example
Network data:
– rated voltage 400 V AC
– rated frequency 400 Hz
– load current 240 A (Ib)
– current carrying capacity of cable 260 A (Iz)
4 – short circuit current 32 kA
To decide which circuit-breaker is suitable for this application, the two fundamental conditions for
correct use of the circuit-breaker at 400 Hz must be remembered:
– derating of the thermal protection equal to 10%;
– increase in the magnetic threshold according to the Km coefficient.
Should the installation be at power frequency (50/60 Hz), a T4N 250 TMA In = 250 circuit-breaker would
be adequate, based on the rated load current (240 A) and on the installation short-circuit current.
However, since the circuit-breaker must be sized for an application at 400 Hz, it is necessary to
consider the prescriptions listed above and, in particular, the derating of the thermal protection means
a maximum adjustment of:
I1 max 400 Hz = 250 - )

( 250 · 10
100
= 225 A
As can be noted, this value is less than the load current and the circuit-breaker with In = 250 A is not
adequate. It is therefore necessary to use a T4N 320 TMA In = 320 circuit-breaker, since by adjust-
ing the thermomagnetic release to the median value (0.85) and considering the derating of 10%, the
following magnetic trip threshold is obtained:
[
I1 med 400 Hz = 0.85 · 320 - ( 320100· 10 ) ] 244 A
This value is higher than the rated load current and lower than the current-carrying capacity of the
cable and therefore the circuit-breaker is adequate for 400 Hz application. With regard to the mag-
netic threshold, an adjustment at the minimum of the settings available is recommended (5 x In for
a TMA) so as not to have too high a trip value:
I3 = 5 · In · Km = 5 · 320 · 1.7 = 2720 A
4/66
1SDC210015D0205
Use of direct current apparatus

To obtain the number of poles in series needed to guarantee the required breaking capacity at the
various operating voltages, suitable connection diagrams must be used. For the breaking capacity
(Icu), according to the voltage and the number of poles connected in series with reference to the
connection diagrams, please refer to the table on page 4/58.
Protection and isolation of the circuit with three-pole circuit-breakers
Diagram A: Interruption with one pole for polarity
1SDC210F11F0001
Load
Note: With negative polarity not connected to earth, the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault nil.
Diagram B: Interruption with two poles in series for one polarity and one pole for the other polarity
1SDC210F12F0001
Load
Diagram C: Interruption with three poles in series for polarity
1SDC210F13F0001
Load
4/67
1SDC210015D0205
Diagram D: Interruption with four poles in series for one polarity (for use at 1000 V DC)
1SDC210F14F0001
Load
Diagram E: Interruption with three poles in series on one polarity and one pole on the remaining polarity
1SDC210F15F0001
Load
Diagram F: Interruption with two poles in series for polarity
1SDC210F16F0001
Load
4/68
1SDC210015D0205
The following table shows which connection diagram to use according to the number of poles to
be connected in series to obtain the required breaking capacity, in relation to the type of distribution
network:
Distribution system
Insulated
Voltage T1-T2-T3 T4-T5-T6 Earthed polarity(2) Earthed midpoint
network(1)
) 250 V DC Q – A-B B-C-E F(3)
– Q A B F(3)
) 500 V DC Q – B C-E F
– Q A B F(3)
) 750 V DC – Q B C-E F
) 1000 V DC – Q E-F D F
1)
The likelihood of a double earth fault is assumed to be nil
2)
Assuming a negative (-) earthed polarity
3)
Consult ABB on the use of three-pole breakers
General note:
The suitability of the wiring of the poles must be assessed in the light of the short circuit current value and the breaking power specified for the various
circuit breakers. The pole connecting methods C and D are used to achieve a protective function, not to disconnect the earthed polarity.
In the following table, the correction value to be used for the protection thresholds against short circuit
is indicated for each circuit-breaker (the thermal threshold does not undergo any alteration).
Circuit-breaker Diagram A Diagram B Diagram C Diagram D Diagram E Diagram F

T1 1.3 1 1 – – –
T2 1.3 1.15 1.15 – – –
T3 1.3 1.15 1.15 – – –
T4 1.3 1.15 1.15 1 1 1
T5
T6
1.1
1.1
1
1
1
1
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9 4
4/69
1SDC210015D0205
Example of setting the trip thresholds in DC - Diagram A
Setting T1 160 T2 160 T3 250 T4 250

In [A]
I1=0.7÷1xIn I3=10xIn I1=0.7÷1xIn I3=10xIn I1=0.7÷1xIn I3=10xIn I1=0.7÷1xIn I3=10xIn
1.6 1.12÷1.6 20.8
2 1.4÷2 26
2.5 1.75÷2.5 32.5
3.2 2.24÷3.2 41.6
4 2.8÷4 52
5 3.5÷5 65
6.3 4.41÷6.3 81.9
8 5.6÷8 104
10 7÷10 130
12.5 8.75÷12.5 162.5
16 11.2÷16 650 11.2÷16 650
20 14÷20 650 14÷20 650 14÷20 416
25 17.5÷25 650 17.5÷25 650
32 22.4÷32 650 22.4÷32 650 22.4÷32 416
40 28÷40 650 28÷40 650
50 35÷50 650 35÷50 650 35÷50 650
63 44.1÷63 819 44.1÷63 819 44.1÷63 819
80 56÷80 1040 56÷80 1040 56÷80 1040 56÷80 5200÷1040
100 70÷100 1300 70÷100 1300 70÷100 1300 70÷100 650÷1300
125 87.5÷125 1625 87.5÷125 1625 87.5÷125 1625 87.5÷125 812.5÷1625
160 112÷160 2080 112÷160 2080 112÷160 2080 112÷160 1040÷2080
200 140÷200 260 140÷200 1300÷2600
250 175÷250 325 175÷250 1625÷3250
Setting T4 320 T5 400 T5 630 T6 630 T6 800

In [A]
4 20
I1=0.7÷1xIn
14÷20
I3=5÷10xIn
416
I1=0.7÷1xIn I3=5÷10xIn I1=0.7÷1xIn I3=5÷10xIn I1=0.7÷1xIn I3=5÷10xIn I1=0.7÷1xIn I3=5÷10xIn
25
32 22.4÷32 416
40
50 35÷50 650
63
80 56÷80 5200÷1040
100 70÷100 650÷1300
125 87.5÷125 812.5÷1625
160 112÷160 1040÷2080
200 140÷200 1300÷2600
250 175÷250 1625÷3250
320 224÷320 1760÷3520
400 280÷400 2200÷4400
500 350÷500 2750÷5500
630 441÷630 3465÷6930
800 480÷800 4000÷8000
4/70
1SDC210015D0205
Setting adjustment of the magnetic threshold
The correction factor takes into consideration the phenomena that, with direct current applications,
modifies the tripping value of the protection threshold against short circuit.
The value that must be set on the trip unit is therefore the real and wanted trip value divided by the
correction factor.
Example
– Service current: Ib = 550 A
– Circuit-breaker: T6 630 In = 630 A
– Desired magnetic protection: I3 = 5500 A
– Magnetic threshold value to be set (according to diagram A):
I3
Set:
km
therefore, in this specific case, setting of the adjustment value for the magnetic threshold is:
Set: 5500 = 5000 A (roughly equal to 8 In)

1.1
4/71
1SDC210015D0205
The residual current trip units are associated with the circuit-breaker in order to obtain two main
functions in a single device:
– protection against overloads and short-circuits;
– protection against indirect contacts (presence of voltage on exposed conductive parts due to loss
of insulation).
Besides, they can guarantee an additional protection against the risk of fire deriving from the evolu-
tion of small fault or leakage currents which are not detected by the standard protections against
overload.
Residual current devices having a rated residual current not exceeding 30 mA are also used as a means
for additional protection against direct contact in case of failure of the relevant protective means.
Their logic is based on the detection of the vectorial sum of the line currents through an internal or
external toroid.
This sum is zero under service conditions or equal to the earth fault current (IΔ) in case of earth fault.
When the trip unit detects a residual current different from zero, it opens the circuit-breaker through
an opening solenoid.
As we can see in the picture the protection conductor or the equipotential conductor have to be
installed outside the eventual external toroid.
Distribution system (IT, TT, TN)
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Circuit-breaker
Opening
4 Protective conductor
solenoid
Load
1SDC210F17F0001
The operating principle of the residual current release makes it suitable for TT, IT distribution systems
(although with particular attention to the latter) and TN-S, but not for the TN-C systems. In fact, in
these systems the neutral is also used as a protection conductor and therefore determination of the
residual current would not be possible even if the neutral, called PEN in these distribution systems,
passed through the toroid, since the vectorial sum of the currents would always be equal to zero.
One of the main characteristics of a residual current protection is its minimum rated current IΔn. This
represents the sensitivity of the release.
4/72
1SDC210015D0205
According to their sensitivity to the fault current the RCDs are classified as:
– type AC: the tripping is ensured for residual sinusoidal alternating currents
– type A: the tripping is ensured for residual sinusoidal alternating currents in the presence of speci-
fied residual pulsating direct currents
– type B: like the type A and also in presence of residual direct currents
type AC Id
1SDC210F18F0001
type A Id
1SDC210F19F0001
type B Id
1SDC210F20F0001
t
In presence of electrical apparatuses with electronic components (computers, photocopiers, fax etc.)
the earth fault current might assume a non sinusoidal shape but a type of a pulsating unidirectional
dc shape. In these cases it is necessary to use a residual current trip unit classified as type A.
In presence of rectifying circuits (i.e. single phase connection with capacitive load causing smooth
direct current, three pulse star connection or six pulse bridge connection, two pulse connection
line-to-line) the earth fault current might assume a unidirectional DC shape.
In these case it is necessary to use a residual current trip unit classifield as type B.
4/73
1SDC210015D0205
Standard EN 50178 “Electronic equipment for use in power installations” shows several example of
electronic circuits where it is correct to use a type B RCD.
A relevant example of the using of the type B RCD RC223 is a network supplying a three-phase
bridge rectifier:
(+)
Id
L1
L2
L3
t
1SDC210F21F0001
(-)
In fact, in the case of an earth fault occurring in the plant section with direct current supply, a fault
current with marked “direct” characteristics shall practically flow through the section with alternate
current.
The RCD, both A as well as AC type, could be not sensitive to this current and, consequently, not
able to trip the circuit by disconnecting the fault.
On the contrary, the type B RCD results to be suitable to detect the residual currents with continuous
components and thus able to interrupt the circuit in case of earth fault.
The following table shows the main characteristics of ABB SACE residual current devices; they can
be mounted both on circuit-breakers as well as on switch disconnectors (in case of fault currents to
earth lower than the apparatus breaking capacity), are type A devices and they do not need auxiliary
supply since they are self-supplied.
4 RC221 RC222 RC223

Suitable for circuit-breaker T1-T2-T3 T1-T2-T3 T4 T5 T4
type/switch-disconnectors T1D-T3D T1D-T3D T4D T5D T4D
Primary service voltage [V] 85-500 85-500 85-500 85-500 110…500
Rated service current [A] 250 250 250 250 250
Rated residual current trip IΔn [A] 0.03-0.1-0.3- 0.03-0.05-0.1- 0.03-0.05-0.1- 0.03-0.05-0.1- 0.03-0.05-0.1-
0.5-1-3 0.3-0.5-1-3-5-10 0.3-0.5-1-3-5-10 0.3-0.5-1-3-5-10 0.3-0.5-1
Time limit for non-trip (s) instantaneous inst. -0.1-0.2-0.3 inst. -0.1-0.2-0.3 inst. -0.1-0.2-0.3 inst. -0.1-0.2-0.3
0.5-1-2-3 0.5-1-2-3 0.5-1-2-3 0.5-1-2-3
Tolerance over trip times [%] ±20% ±20% ±20% ± 20%
4/74
1SDC210015D0205
Tmax T7 can be equipped with a toroid fitted on the back of the circuit-breaker so as to ensure protec-
tion against earth faults. In particular, the electronic trip unit types able to perform this function are:
– PR332/P-LSIG
– PR332/P-LSIRc
Furthermore ABB SACE moulded-case circuit-breakers serie Tmax can be combined with the
switchboard residual current relay type RCQ, type A, with separate toroid (to be installed externally
on the line conductors).
RCQ
Power supply voltage AC [V] 80-500
DC [V] 48-125
Trip threshold adjustements IΔn
1st range of adjustements [A] 0.03-0.05-0.1-0.3-0.5
2st range of adjustements [A] 1-3-5-10-30
Trip time adjustement [s] 0-0.1-0.2-0.3-0.5-0.7-1-2-3-5
Tolerance over trip times [%] ±20%
The versions with adjustable trip times allow to obtain a residual current protection system coordinated
from a discrimination point of view, from the main switchboard up to the ultimate load.
4/75
1SDC210015D0205
Zone selectivity
This type of coordination, a development of time coordination, is made by means of logic connec-
tions between current measuring devices which, once the set threshold having been exceeded is
detected, allow just the fault area to be identified and to have its power supply cut off.
By means of zone selectivity it is possible obtain selectivity considerably reducing the trip times and
therefore the thermal stresses all the plant components are subjected to during the fault.
X
Zone 1
OUT
IN
X
Zone 2
X
OUT
IN OUT
IN
Zone 3
X X X
1SDC210F22F0001
OUT OUT OUT
IN IN IN
EFDP Zone selectivity (T4L-T5L-T6L with PR223EF)

By means of the new PR223EF electronic trip unit, it is possible to realise EFDP zone selectivity be-
tween moulded-case circuit-breakers of the Tmax T4L, T5L and T6L series, obtaining total selectivity
between these circuit-breakers.
The PR223EF implements the new EF protection function, capable of detecting the short-circuit at its
onset. This is thanks to “predicting” the fault, based on analysis of the trend of the current derivative
4 in relation to the time, di (t)/dt vs i(t).
If the EF protection is enabled, it intervenes for faults of considerable size, replacing the I protection
function against instantaneous short-circuit when there is an auxiliary power supply.
Between PR223EF trip units, EFDP zone selectivity is implemented simultaneously on functions S, G
and EF. It is carried out by means of an interlocking protocol (Interlocking, IL), guaranteed by a couple
of shielded twisted pair cables for modbus RS485 which connect the circuit-breakers equipped with
the PR223EF (ask ABB for further information about cable type).
In the case of a short-circuit, the circuit-breaker immediately to the supply side sends a lock signal
to the hierarchically higher level protection by means of the bus and, before trippping, checks that
a similar lock signal has not come from the load-side protection.
System integrity is controlled by a monitoring function: in the case of a short-circuit, if a fault is found
in the interlocking system, the EF protection function trips (with trip times in the order of tens of ms),
but zone selectivity is not guaranteed.
Furthermore, if the load-side circuit-breaker does not manage to trip, it asks the supply-side circuit-
breaker for help and the latter opens even if it does not detect the fault (SOS function).
A 24 V DC auxiliary power supply is required for operation of the EF protection and zone selectivity.
All the protection functions can be programmed remotely, exploiting the dialogue function on the
trip unit, or locally by means of the PR010/T, which can be connected to a serial port on the front
of the PR223EF.
One of the main advantages in using zone selectivity between MCCBs is the reduction in size of the
circuit-breakers it makes possible.
In fact, in looking for selectivity between moulded-case circuit-breakers with the classic techniques,
it is often necessary to increase the size of the supply-side circuit-breakers to obtain selectivity limits
congruous with the short-circuit current of the installation.
By means of suitably cabled PR223EF releases, it is possible to obtain total selectivity even between
two circuit-breakers of the same size.
An example is given below of how, by means of zone selectivity between moulded-case circuit-
breakers, a reduction in sizes and a considerable reduction in the peak current and specific energy
let through by the circuit-breakers is possible, whilst still maintaining total selectivity.
4/76
1SDC210015D0205
The main parameters, characteristic of the trip unit, are:
Trip delayed Enabling this parameter introduces a trip delay in the case when, on the
load side of a trip unit, Tmax or modular circuit-breakers are installed.
The aim of this parameter is to obtain selectivity with the other devices
on the load side not equipped with PR223EF. This parameter is only
enabled in the circuit-breakers which have the device outside the zone
selectivity chain on the load side.
EF enable/disable Enabling/disabling protection EF.

If protection EF is enabled: the presence of Vaux leads to automatic
exclusion of function I and enabling of protection EF, the lack of Vaux
leads to exclusion of protection EF and to the return of function I (if
enabled).
16 Maximum number of trip units which can be connected to the BUS of

a level.
1 kilometer Maximum overall length of the connection cable. Cabling the different
trip units is carried out as in the classic “Bus topology” (see figure)
PR223EF
Down
PR223EF PR223EF PR223EF

UP
UP UP UP
UP
1SDC210F23F0001
Cable RS485 = 1 Km
4/77
1SDC210015D0205
Zone selectivity
Example of application
The following example shows an installation where selectivity is obtained through EFDP system avail-
able on PR223EF. Besides, in brackets, the circuit-breakers to obtain selectivity with the traditional
solution are reported.
V = 400 V
U Ik = 95 kA
X
QF1
P T6L800 PR223EF In800
(E3H800 PR122/P-LSI In800)
WC1
6x(1x400)+2x(1x240)+1G400
Ib = 740 A
Iz = 1050 A
L = 17 m
PVC
QS1 Switchboard A
T6D800
(E3S/MS 1000)
Ik = 74 kA
X X
QF2 QF3
P T5L630 PR223EF In630 P
T4L250 PR223EF In250
(T6L630 PR222DS-LSI In630) (T4L250 PR222DS-LSI In250)
WC2 WC3
6x(1x300)+2x(1x150)+1G300 3x(1x150)+1x(1x95)+1G95
Ib = 540 A Ib = 200 A
Iz = 681.6 A Iz = 275.0 A
L = 25 m L = 10 m
L1
QS2 L In = 200.0 A
T5D630 Switchboard B
(T6D630)
Ik = 54.5 kA
X X X
4 P
QF4
(T4L250 PR222DS-LSI In250)
P
QF5
(T4H250 PR222DS-LSI In250)
P
QF6
(T4H250 PR222DS-LSI In250)
WC4 WC5 WC4

3x(1x95)+1x(1x50)+1G50 3x(1x95)+1x(1x50)+1G50 3x(1x95)+1x(1x50)+1G50
Ib = 200 A Ib = 170 A Ib = 170 A
Iz = 207 A Iz = 207 A Iz = 207 A
L = 40 m L = 60 m L = 30 m
1SDC210F24F0001
L2 L3 L4
L In = 200.0 A L In = 170 A L In = 170 A
It is evident that selectivity through the traditional techniques affects deeply the choice of the protec-
tion devices and direct it towards differentiated sizes according to the location of the circuit-breakers
in the installation.
The following table summarizes the advantages from a dimensional and economical point of view
which derive from the use of the new electronic trip unit.
Traditional solution Solution with EFDP

QF1 E3H800 PR122/P T6L800 PR223EF
QS1 E3S/MS1000 T6D800
QF2 T6L630 PR221DS T5L630 PR223EF
QS2 T6D630 T5D630
4/78
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Index
Information for reading - Circuit-breakers T1...T6 ...................................................................5/2
Information for reading - Circuit-breakers T7 ..........................................................................5/6
Information for reading - ATS010 for T4-T5-T6 .....................................................................5/10
Information for reading - ATS010 for T7 ................................................................................5/11
Graphic symbols (IEC 60617 and CEI 3-14...3-26 Standards) ..............................................5/12
Wiring diagram of the T1…T6 circuit-breakers .....................................................................5/13
Wiring diagram of the T7 circuit-breakers .............................................................................5/15
Electrical accessories for T1…T6 ..........................................................................................5/17
Electrical accessories for T7 .................................................................................................5/26
Automatic transfer-switch ATS010 for T4-T5-T6...................................................................5/30
Automatic transfer-switch ATS010 for T7..............................................................................5/34
5/1
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Information for reading - Circuit-breakers T1...T6
State of operation represented

The diagram is shown in the following conditions:
– plug-in version circuit-breaker open and racked-in
– contactor for motor starting open
– circuits de-energised
– trip units not tripped
– motor operator with springs charged.
Version
The diagram shows a circuit-breaker or switch-disconnector in the plug-in version (only T2, T3, T4 and
T5) or in the withdrawable version (T6). The diagram is also valid for the fixed and withdrawable version
circuit-breakers or switch-disconnectors.
With the fixed version circuit-breakers or switch-disconnectors, the applications indicated in figures
26-27-28-29-30-31 and 32 cannot be provided.
Caption
= Figure number of the diagram
* = See note indicated by the letter
A1 = Circuit-breaker applications
A11 = FDU interfacing unit (front display)
A12 = AUX-E type signalling unit, with auxiliary relays for electrical signalling of circuit-
breaker open and circuit-breaker tripped
A13 = PR021/K type signalling unit, with auxiliary relays for electrical signalling of the
protection functions of electronic trip unit
A14 = MOE-E type actuation unit, with auxiliary relays for carrying out the commands
coming from the dialogue unit
A15 = PR212/CI type contactor control unit for motor starting
A16 = Solenoid operating mechanism
A17 = Unit for M motor electrical latching
A18 = VM210 type voltage measuring unit
A2 = Applications of the solenoid operator or motor operator
A3 = Applications of the RC221, RC222 or RC223 type residual current release
A4 = Indication apparatus and connections for control and signalling, outside the
circuit-breaker
D = Electronic time-delay device of the undervoltage release (outside the circuit-breaker)
H, H1 = Signalling lamps
K = Contactor for motor starting
K51 = Electronic trip unit:
– PR221 type overcurrent release, with the following protection functions:
5 - L against overload with inverse long time delay

- S against short-circuit with inverse or definite short time delay
- I against short-circuit with instantaneous trip
– PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD, PR223DS or PR223EF, type overcurrent release,
with the following protection functions:
- L against overload with inverse long time delay
- S against short-circuit with inverse or definite short time delay
- I against short-circuit with instantaneous trip time
- G against earth fault with short time trip
– EFDP protection (Earth Fault Detector Prevention) for PR223EF trip unit only
– PR222MP motor protection type trip unit, with the following protection functions:
- against overload (thermal protection)
- against rotor block
- against short-circuit
- against missing or unbalanced current between the phases
K51/1…8 = Contact for electrical signalling of the protection functions of the electronic trip unit
K87 = RC221, RC222 or RC223 type residual current trip unit
M = Motor for circuit-breaker opening and circuit-breaker closing spring charging
M1 = Three-phase asynchronous motor
Q = Main circuit-breaker
Q/0,1,2,3 = Auxiliary circuit-breaker contacts
5/2
1SDC210015D0205
R = Resistor (see note F)
R1 = Motor thermistor
R2 = Thermistor in the motor operator
S1, S2 = Contacts controlled by the cam of the motor operator
S3, S3/1 = Change-over contact for electrical signalling of local/remote selector status
S4/1-2 = Contacts activated by the circuit-breaker rotary handle (see note C)
S51/S = Contact for electrical signalling of overload in progress (start)
S75I/1…3 = Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in racked-in position (only
provided with circuit-breakers in plug-in and withdrawable version)
S75S/1…3 = Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in racked-out position (only
provided with circuit-breakers in plug-in and withdrawable version)
S87/1 = Contact for electrical signalling of RC222 or RC223 type residual current release
pre-alarm
S87/2 = Contact for electrical signalling of RC222 Change-over contact for electrical
signalling of local/remote selector status type residual current release alarm
S87/3 = Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to RC221, RC222
or RC223 type residual current release trip
SC = Pushbutton or contact for closing the circuit-breaker
SC3 = Pushbutton for motor starting
SD = Switch-disconnector of the power supply of the RC221 or RC222 type residual
current release
SO = Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit-breaker
SO1, SO2 = Pushbuttons or contacts for the circuit-breaker opening (see Resetting
instructions for circuit-breaker tripped by trip units)
SO3 = Pushbutton for stopping the motor
SQ = Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open
SY = Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to YO, YO1, YO2 or
YU thermomagnetic trip unit intervention (tripped position)
TI = Toroidal current transformer
TI/L1 = Current transformer placed on phase L1
TI/N = Current transformer placed on the neutral
W1 = Serial interface with the control system (EIA RS485 interface. See note D)
W2 = Interface to upstream circuit-breaker for zone selectivity interlocking (for PR223EF
trip unit only)
W3 = Interface to downstream circuit-breaker for zone selectivity interlocking (for
PR223EF trip unit only)
X1,X2,X5…X9 = Connectors for the circuit-breaker auxiliary circuits (in the case of circuit-breakers
in plug-in version, removal of the connectors takes place simultaneously with
that of the circuit-breaker. See note E)
X11 = Back-up terminal box
X3,X4 = Connectors for the circuits of the electronic trip unit (in the case of circuit-
breakers in the plug-in version, removal of the connectors takes place
simultaneously with that of the circuit-breaker)
5
XA = Interfacing connector of the PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD, PR223DS or PR223EF
trip unit
XA1 = Three-way connector for YO/YU (see note E)
XA10 = Six-way connector for solenoid operator
XA2 = Twelve-way connector for auxiliary contacts (see note E)
XA5 = Three-way connector for contact of electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open
due to trip of the RC221, RC222 or RC223 type residual current release (see
note E)
XA6 = Three-way connector for contact of electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open
due to trip of the overcurrent release (see note E)
XA7 = Six-way connector for auxiliary contacts (see note E)
XA8 = Six-way connector for contacts operated by the rotary handle or for the motor
operator (see note E)
XA9 = Six-way connector for the electrical signalling of RC222 or RC223 type residual
current release pre-alarm and alarm and for opening by means of the release itself
(see note E)
XB,XC,XE = Interfacing connectors of the AUX-E unit
XD = Interfacing connector of the FDU unit
5/3
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Information for reading - Circuit-breakers T1...T6
XF = Interfacing connector of the MOE-E unit

X0 = Connector for the YO1 trip coil
X01 = Connector for the YO2 trip coil
XV = Terminal boxes of the applications
YC = Closing release of the motor operating mechanism
YO = Opening release
YO1 = Trip coil of the electronic trip unit
YO2 = Trip coil of the RC221, RC222 or RC223 type residual current release
YO3 = Shunt opening release of the solenoid operator
YU = Undervoltage release (see note B).
Description of figures
Fig. 1 = Opening release.
Fig. 2 = Permanent opening release.
Fig. 3 = Instantaneous undervoltage release (see note B and F).
Fig. 4 = Undervoltage release with electronic time-delay device outside the circuit-breaker (see
note B).
Fig. 5 = Instantaneous undervoltage release in version for machine tools with one contact in series
(see note B, C, and F).
Fig. 6 = Instantaneous undervoltage release in version for machine tools with two contacts in
series (see note B, C, and F).
Fig. 7 = One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to RC221,
RC222 or RC223 type residual current release trip.
Fig. 8 = RC222 or RC223 type residual current release circuits.
Fig. 9 = Two electrical signalling contacts for RC222 or RC223 type residual current release pre-
alarm and alarm.
Fig. 10 = Solenoid operator.
Fig. 11 = Stored energy motor operator.
Fig. 12 = Local/remote auxiliary contact for stored-energy motor operating mechanism.
Fig. 21 = Three changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open or closed and one
changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to YO, YO1, YO2 and
YU thermomagnetic trip unit intervention (tripped position).
Fig. 22 = One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open or closed and a
changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to YO, YO1, YO2
or YU the thermomagnetic trip unit intervention (tripped position).
Fig. 23 = Two changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open or closed.
Fig. 24 = One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to overcurrent
release trip (T2).
Fig. 25 = One contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to overcurrent release trip
(T4-T5-T6).
Fig. 26 = First position of circuit-breaker changeover contact, for electrical signalling of racked-in.
5 Fig. 27
Fig. 28
=
=
Second position of circuit-breaker changeover contact, for electrical signalling of racked-in.
Third position of circuit-breaker changeover contact, for electrical signalling of racked-in.
Fig. 29 = First position of circuit-breaker changeover contact, for electrical signalling of isolated.
Fig. 30 = Second position of circuit-breaker changeover contact, for electrical signalling of isolated.
Fig. 31 = Third position of circuit-breaker changeover contact, for electrical signalling of isolated.
Fig. 32 = Circuit of the current transformer on neutral conductor outside the circuit-breaker (for
plug-in and withdrawable version circuit-breaker).
Fig. 39 = Auxiliary circuits of the PR223DS trip units connected to VM210 voltage measuring unit.
Fig. 40 = Auxiliary circuits of the PR223EF trip units connected to VM210 voltage measuring unit.
Fig. 41 = Auxiliary circuits of the PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD, PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip
unit connected with FDU front display unit.
Fig. 42 = Auxiliary circuits of the PR222DS/PD, PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected
with PR021/K type signalling unit.
with FDU front display unit and with PR021/K type signalling unit.
with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts.
with the auxiliary contacts AUX-E and with MOE-E type actuation unit.
with FDU front display unit and with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts.
5/4
1SDC210015D0205
Fig. 47 = Auxiliary circuits of the PR222MP electronic trip unit connected with PR021/K signalling
unit (see note I).
unit and with PR212/CI type contactor control unit for motor starting (see note I).
unit and with PR212/CI type contactor control unit and an ABB series AF contactor (see
note I).
Fig. 51 = Auxiliary circuit of the PR222MP trip unit connected to SACE PR212/CI motor starting
contactor control unit and 24 V DC auxiliary supply (see note I).
Incompatibility
The circuits indicated by the following figures cannot be supplied at the same time on the same
circuit-breaker:
1-2-3-4-5-6
5 - 6 - 11
10 - 11 - 45
10 - 12
21 - 22 - 23 - 44 - 45 - 46
24 - 25
26 - 32
39 - 40 - 41 - 42 - 43 - 44 - 45 - 46 - 47 - 48 - 49 - 50 - 51
Notes
A) The circuit-breaker is only fitted with the applications specified in the ABB SACE order con-
firmation. To make out the order, please consult this catalogue.
B) The undervoltage release is supplied for power supply branched on the supply side of the
circuit-breaker or from an independent source: circuit-breaker closing is only allowed with
the release energised (the lock on closing is made mechanically).
C) The S4/1 and S4/2 contacts shown in figures 5-6 open the circuit with the circuit-breaker
open and close it again when a manual closing command is given by means of the rotary
handle, in accordance with the Standards regarding machine tools (in any case, closing does
not take place if the undervoltage release is not supplied).
E) Connectors XA1, XA2, XA5, XA6, XA7, XA8 and XA9 are supplied on request. They are
always supplied with T2 and T3 circuit-breakers in the plug-in version, and with T4 and T5
circuit-breakers in the plug-in version equipped with unwired electronic accessories.
Connectors X1, X2, X5, X6, X7, X8 and X9 are supplied on request. They are always sup-
plied with T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers in the fixed version or in the withdrawable version
equipped with unwired electronic accessories.
F) Additional external resistor for undervoltage release supplied at 250 V DC, 380/440 V AC
and 480/500 V AC.
G) In the case of fixed version circuit-breaker with current transformer on external neutral con-
ductor outside the circuit-breaker, when the circuit-breaker is to be removed, it is necessary
5
to short-circuit the terminals of the TI/N transformer.
H) SQ and SY contacts of AUX-E signalling unit are opto-isolated contacts.
I) The connection to poles 3-4 of X4 connector can be used in two ways: connecting a generic
digital input or connecting the motor thermistor. The two functions are alternative.
5/5
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Information for reading - Circuit-breakers T7
Warning
Before installing the circuit-breaker, carefully read notes F and O on the circuit diagrams.
Operating status shown

The circuit diagram is for the following conditions:
– withdrawable circuit-breaker, open and racked-in
– circuits de-energised
– releases not tripped
– motor operating mechanism with springs discharged.
Versions
Though the diagram shows a circuit-breaker in withdrawable version, it can be applied to a fixed ver-
sion circuit-breaker as well.
Fixed version
The control circuits are fitted between terminals XV (connectors X12-X13-X14-X15 are not supplied).
With this version, the applications indicated in figure 31A cannot be provided.
Withdrawable version
The control circuits are fitted between the poles of connectors X12-X13-X14-X15 (terminal box XV is
not supplied).
Version without overcurrent release
With this version, the applications indicated in figures 13A, 14A, 41A, 42A, 43A, 44A, 45A, 62A can-
not be provided.
Version with PR231/P or PR232/P electronic trip unit
With this version, the applications indicated in figures 41A, 42A, 43A, 44A, 45A, 62A cannot be pro-
vided.
Version with PR331/P electronic trip unit
With this version, the applications indicated in figures 42A, 43A, 44A, 45A cannot be provided.
Version with PR332/P electronic trip unit
With this version, the applications indicated in figure 41A cannot be provided.
Caption
=
Circuit diagram figure number
* =
See note indicated by letter
A1 =
Circuit-breaker accessories
A3 =
Accessories applied to the fixed part of the circuit-breaker (for withdrawable
5 A4
version only)
= Example switchgear and connections for control and signalling, outside the
circuit-breaker
A13 = PR021/K signalling unit (outside the circuit-breaker)
A19 = PR330/R actuation unit
AY = SOR TEST UNIT Test/monitoring Unit (see note R)
D = Electronic time-delay device of the undervoltage release, outside the circuit-
breaker
K51 = PR231/P, PR232/P, PR331/P, PR332/P type electronic trip unit with the follow-
ing protection functions:
– L overload protection with inverse long time-delay trip - setting I1
– S short-circuit protection with inverse or definite short time-delay trip - setting I2
– I short-circuit protection with instantaneous time-delay trip - setting I3
– G earth fault protection with inverse short time-delay trip - setting I4
K51/1...8 = Contacts of the PR021/K signalling unit
K51/GZin (DBin) = Zone selectivity: input for protection G or “reverse” direction input for protection
D (only with Uaux. and PR332/P trip unit)
K51/GZout (DBout) = Zone selectivity: output for protection G or “reverse” direction output for pro-
tection D (only with and PR332/P trip unit)
K51/SZin (DFin) = Zone selectivity: input for protection S or “direct” input for protection D (only
with Uaux. and PR332/P trip unit)
5/6
1SDC210015D0205
K51/SZout (DFout) = Zone selectivity: output for protection S or “direct” output for protection D (only
with Uaux. and PR332/P trip unit)
K51/YC = Closing control from PR332/P electronic trip unit with communication module
PR330/D-M and PR330/R actuation unit
K51/YO = Opening control from PR332/P electronic trip unit with communication module
PR330/D-M and PR330/R actuation unit
M = Motor for charging the closing springs
Q = Circuit-breaker
Q/1...6 = Circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
S33M/1...3 = Limit contacts for spring-charging motor
S4/1-2-3 = Contacts activated by the rotary handle of the circuit-breaker – only for circuit-
breakers with manual control (see note C)
S43 = Switch for setting remote/local control
S51 = Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the
overcurrent trip unit. The circuit-breaker may be closed only after pressing the
reset pushbutton, or after energizing the coil for electrical reset (if available)
S51/P1 = Programmable contact (as default it signals overload present - start)
S75E/1...2 = Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in racked-out position (only
with withdrawable circuit-breakers)
S75I/1...7 = Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in racked-in position (only
S75T/1..2 = Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in test isolated position (only
SC = Pushbutton or contact for closing the circuit-breaker
SO = Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit-breaker
SO1 = Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit-breaker with delayed trip
SO2 = Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit-breaker with instantaneous trip
SR = Pushbutton or contact for electrical circuit-breaker reset
SRTC = Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open, with springs charged
and ready to close
SY = Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to trip units tripped, YO,
YO1, YO2, YU (tripped position) only for circuit-breakers with direct control
TI/L1 = Current transformer located on phase L1
T0 = Homopolar Toroidal current transformer (see note T)
TU = Insulating voltage transformer
Uaux. = Auxiliary power supply voltage (see note F)
UI/L1 = Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on phase L1
UI/N = Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on neutral
UI/0 = Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on the conductor connecting to earth
W1
the star point of the MV/LV transformer (see note G)
= Serial interface with control system (external bus): EIA RS485 interface (see
5
note E)
W2 = Serial interface with the accessories of PR331/P and PR332/P trip units (internal
bus)
X12…X15 = Delivery connectors for auxiliary circuits of withdrawable version circuit-breaker
XB1...XB7 = Connectors for the accessories of the circuit-breaker
XF = Delivery terminal box for the position contacts of the withdrawable circuit-breaker
(located on the fixed part of the circuit-breaker)
XO = Connector for YO1 release
XR1 – XR2 = Connector for power circuits of PR231/P, PR232/P, PR331/P, and PR332/P
trip units
XR5 – XR13 = Connector for power circuits of PR332/P trip unit
XV = Delivery terminal box for the auxiliary circuits of the fixed circuit-breaker
XK5 = Connectors for the auxiliary circuits of the PR332 trip unit
YC = Shunt closing release
YO = Shunt opening release
YO1 = Overcurrent shunt opening release (trip coil)
YO2 = Second shunt opening release (see note Q)
YR = Coil to electrically reset the circuit-breaker
YU = Undervoltage release (see notes B, C and Q)
5/7
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Information for reading - Circuit-breakers T7
Description of figures
Fig. 1A = Motor circuit to charge the closing springs.
Fig. 2A = Circuit of shunt closing release.
Fig. 4A = Shunt opening release.
Fig. 6A = Instantaneous undervoltage release (see notes B, C and Q).
Fig. 7A = Undervoltage release with electronic time-delay device, outside the circuit-breaker (see
notes B and Q).
Fig. 8A = Second shunt opening release (see note Q).
Fig. 11A = Contact for electrical signalling of springs charged or discharged.
Fig. 12A = Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open, with springs charged, and ready
to close.
Fig. 13A = Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the overcurrent
release. The circuit-breaker may be closed only after pressing the reset pushbutton, or
after energizing the coil for electronic reset (if available).
Fig. 14A = Electrical reset control.
Fig. 15A = Contact operated by the circuit-breaker rotary handle – for circuit-breakers with manual
control only (see note C).
Fig. 21A = Circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts (for circuit-breakers with manual control only).
Fig. 22A = Circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts (for circuit-breakers with motor control only).
Fig. 31A = First set of contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in racked-in, test isolated,
racked out position.
Fig. 41A = Auxiliary circuits of PR331/P trip unit (see note F).
Fig. 42A = Auxiliary circuits of PR332/P trip units (see notes F and N).
Fig. 43A = Circuits of the measuring module PR330/V of the PR332/P trip units internally connected
to the circuit-breaker (optional).
Fig. 44A = Circuits of the measuring module PR330/V of the PR332/P trip units externally con-
nected to the circuit-breaker (optional; see note O).
Fig. 45A = Circuits of the PR332/P trip unit with communication module PR330/D-M connected
to PR330/V actuation unit (see notes E, F and N).
Fig. 46A = Circuits of the PR332/P trip unit PR330/V measuring module connected internally to
the three-pole circuit-breaker with external neutral conductor (optional)
Fig. 61A = SOR TEST UNIT Test/monitoring unit (see note R).
Fig. 62A = Circuits of the PR021/K signalling module (outside the circuit-breaker).
Incompatibilities
The circuits indicated in the following figures cannot be supplied simultaneously on the same circuit-
breaker:
6A - 7A - 8A
21A - 22A
5 41A - 42A - 45A

43A - 44A - 46A
5/8
1SDC210015D0205
Notes
A) The circuit-breaker is only fitted with the applications specified in the ABB SACE order con-
firmation. To make out the order, please consult this catalogue.
B) The undervoltage release is supplied for operation using a power supply branched on the
supply side of the circuit-breaker or from an independent source. The circuit-breaker can
only close when the release is energized (there is a mechanical lock on closing).
C) In conformity with the Standards governing machine tools, contacts S4 shown in Fig. 15A
can be used to open the Yu undervoltage release circuit (Fig. 6A) when the circuit-breaker
is open and close it again upon a manual closing command from the rotary handle.
E) For the EIA RS485 serial interface connection see document RH0298 regarding MODBUS
communication.
F) The auxiliary voltage Vaux allows actuation of all operations of the PR331/P, PR332/P and
trip units.
Having requested a Vaux insulated from earth, one must use “galvanically separated convert-
ers” in compliance with IEC 60950 (UL 1950) or equivalent standards that ensure a com-
mon mode current or leakage current (see IEC 478/1, CEI 22/3) not greater than 3.5 mA,
IEC 60364-41 and CEI 64-8.
G) Earth fault protection is available with the PR332/P trip unit by means of a current sensor
located on the conductor connecting to earth the star centre of the MV/LV transformer.
The connections between terminals 1 and 2 (or 3) of current transformer UI/O and poles
T7 and T8 of the X (or XV) connector must be made with a two-pole shielded and stranded
cable (see user manual), no more than 15 m long. The shield must be earthed on the circuit-
breaker side and current sensor side.
N) With PR332/P trip unit, the connections to the zone selectivity inputs and outputs must be
made with a two-pole shielded and stranded cable (see user manual), no more than 300 m
long. The shield must be earthed on the selectivity input side.
O) Systems with rated voltage greater than 690V require the use of an insulation voltage trans-
former to connect to the busbars.
P) With PR332/P trip unit with communication module PR330/D-M, the coils YO and YC can
be controlled directly from contacts K51/YO and K51/YC with maximum voltages of 110-
120 V DC e 240-250 V AC.
Q) The second opening release may be installed as an alternative to the undervoltage re-
lease.
R) The SACE SOR TEST UNIT + opening release (YO) is guaranteed to operate starting at 75%
of the Vaux of the opening release itself.
While the YO power supply contact is closing (short-circuit on terminals 4 and 5), the SACE
SOR TEST UNIT is unable to detect the opening coil status. Consequently:
– For continuously powered opening coil, the TEST FAILED and ALARM signals will be
activated
– If the coil opening command is of the pulsing type, the TEST FAILED signal may appear
at the same time. In this case, the TEST FAILED signal is actually an alarm signal only if
it remains lit for more than 20s.
S)
T)
The connection cable shield must only be earthed on the circuit-breaker side.
The connections between the TO toroidal transformer and the poles of the X13 (or XV)
5
connector of the circuit-breaker must be made using a four-pole shielded cable with paired
braided conductors (BELDEN 9696 paired type), with a length of not more than 15 m. The
shield must be earthed on the circuit-breaker side.
5/9
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Information for reading - ATS010 for T4-T5-T6

The circuit diagram is for the following conditions:
– circuit-breakers open and connected
– circuit-breakers de-energized
– closing springs discharged
– overcurrent relays not tripped *
# The present diagram shows withdrawable circuit-breakers, but is also valid for fixed circuit-break-
ers: connect terminal 17 to 20 and terminal 35 to 38 on the ATS010 device.
* The present diagram shows circuit-breakers with overcurrent trip unit (T4-T5), but is also valid
for circuit-breakers with thermomagnetic trip unit and to circuit-breakers with out relay (switch-
disconnectors): connect terminal 18 to 20 and terminal 35 to 37 of the ATS010 device.
@ The present diagram shows four-pole circuit-breakers but is also valid for two-pole circuit-break-
ers: use only terminals 26 and 24 (phase and neutral) for the voltage connection of the normal
power supply to the ATS010 device; also use the Q61/2 two-pole rather than four-pole auxiliary
protection circuit-breaker.
Caption
A = Device type ATS010 for the automatic transfer switch of two circuit-breakers
A17 = Unit for M motor electrical latching
K1 = Auxiliary contactor type VB6-30-01 for the emergency supply voltage presence
K2 = Auxiliary contactor type VB6-30-01 for the normal supply voltage presence
K51/Q1 = Overcurrent release for emergency supply line*
K51/Q2 = Overcurrent release for normal supply line*
KC1-KC2 = Auxiliary contactors type BC6-30 for circuit-breaker closing
KO1-KO2 = Auxiliary contactors type BC6-30 for circuit-breaker opening
M = Motor with series energization for the circuit-breaker opening and closing
Q/1 = Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact
Q1 = Circuit-breaker for emergency supply line
Q2 = Circuit-breaker for normal supply line
Q61/1-2 = Miniature circuit-breakers for auxiliary circuits protection @
S1, S2 = Position contact operated by a cam of the operating mechanism
S3 = Key lock contact operated by the remote opening trip unit or the operating mecha-
nism
S11…S16 = Contacts for the ATS010 device inputs
S75I/1 = Contact signalling circuit-breaker in withdrawable version connected #
SY = Contact signalling circuit-breaker tripped through trip units operation (tripped posi-
tion)*
TI/… = Current trasformers feeding the overcurrent relay
X2 = Connector for the circuit-breaker auxiliary circuits
XV = Terminal boards of the accessories.
5/10
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Information for reading - ATS010 for T7

The circuit diagrams are for the following conditions:
– circuit-breakers open and connected
– circuits de-energized
– closing springs discharged
– overcurrent relays not tripped *
– ATS010 not powered
– generator in automatic mode, not started
– transfer switch enabled
– generator not in alarm
– logic enabling command on (terminal 47).
# The present diagram shows withdrawable circuit-breakers, but is also valid for fixed circuit-breakers:
circuit-breaker auxiliary circuits are not connected to X12-X15 connectors but to the XV terminal
board; furthermore connect terminal 17 to 20 and terminal 35 to 38 on the ATS010 device.
* The present diagram shows circuit-breakers with overcurrent trip unit, but is also valid for circuit-
breakers with thermomagnetic trip unit and to circuit-breakers with out relay (switch-disconnec-
tors): connect terminal 18 to 20 and terminal 35 to 37 of the ATS010 device.
@ The present diagram shows four-pole circuit-breakers but is also valid for two-pole circuit-break-
ers: use only terminals 26 and 24 (phase and neutral) for the voltage connection of the normal
power supply to the ATS010 device; also use the Q61/2 two-pole rather than four-pole auxiliary
protection circuit-breaker.
Caption
A = Device type ATS010 for the automatic transfer switch of two circuit-breakers
K1 = Auxiliary contactor type VB6-30-01 for the emergency supply voltage presence
K2 = Auxiliary contactor type VB6-30-01 for the normal supply voltage presence
K51/Q1 = Overcurrent release for emergency supply line*
K51/Q2 = Overcurrent release for normal supply line*
KC1-KC2 = Auxiliary contactors type BC6-30 for circuit-breaker closing
KO1-KO2 = Auxiliary contactors type BC6-30 for circuit-breaker opening
M = Motor with series energization for the circuit-breaker opening and closing
Q/1 = Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact
Q1 = Circuit-breaker for emergency supply line
Q2 = Circuit-breaker for normal supply line
Q61/1-2 = Miniature circuit-breakers for auxiliary circuits protection @
S11…S16 = Contacts for the ATS010 device inputs
S33M/1 = Limit switch of the closing springs
S51 = Contact signalling circuit-breaker tripped through the overcurrent relay *
S75I/1 = Contact signalling circuit-breaker in withdrawable version connected #
TI/… = Current transformers feeding the overcurrent relay
X12-X15
XF
XV
=
=
=
Connectors fort he auxiliary circuits of the circuit-breaker in withdrawable version
Terminal board fort he position contacts of the withdrawable circuit-breaker
Terminal boards of the accessories.
5
YC = Shunt closing release
YO = Shunt opening release
Note
A) For the auxiliary circuits of the circuit-breakers see the relative diagrams. The applications
indicated in the following figures are compulsory: 1A - 2A - 4A - 13A (only if the overcurrent
release is supplied) - 22A - 31A (only for withdrawable version circuit-breakers).
5/11
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Graphic symbols (IEC 60617 and CEI 3-14...3-26 Standards)
Thermal effect Connection of conductors Position switch (limit Differential current relay
switch), break contact
Electromagnetic effect Terminal Position switch (limit switch) Phase-failure detection

change-over break before relay in a three-phase
make contact system
Delay Plug and socket (male Contactor (contact open Locked-rotor detection
and female) in the unoperated posi- relay operating by current
tion) sensing
Mechanical connection Resistor (general symbol) Circuit-breaker discon- Lamp, general symbol
(link) nector with automatic
trip unit
Manually operated control Temperature dependent Switch-disconnector (on- Mechanical interlock

(general case) resistor load isolating switch) between two devices
Operated by turning Motor (general symbol) Operating device (general Operated by electric
symbol) M motor
Operated by pushing Induction motor, three- Thermal relay Motor with series ener-
phase, squirrel cage gization
M
Operated by key Current transformer Instantaneous overcurrent Screen, shield (it may be
or rate-of-rise relay drawn in any convenient
shape)
Operated by cam Current transformer with Overcurrent relay with Equipotentiality

four threaded winding and adjustable short time-lag
with one permanent wind- characteristic
ing with one tapping
Hearth, groung (general Make contact Overcurrent relay with Voltage transformer
symbol) inverse short time-lag
characteristic
Converter with galvanic Break contact Overcurrent relay with Winding of three-phase
separator inverse long time-lag char- transformer, connection
acteristic star
5 Conductors in a screened
cable, two conductors
Change-over break before
make contact
Earth fault overcurrent relay
with inverse short time-lag
Current sensing element
shown characteristic
Twisted conductors, two Position switch (limit Phase-balance current relay

conductors shown switch), make contact
5/12
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagram of the T1…T6 circuit-breakers
State of operation
1SDC210G02F0001
1SDC210G02F0001
1SDC210G02F0001
Three-pole or four-pole circuit-breaker with Three-pole circuit-breaker with magnetic Three-pole or four-pole switch-discon-
thermomagnetic trip unit trip unit nector (on-load isolating switch)
1SDC210G02F0001
1SDC210G03F0001
PR221MP
PR221GP
PR221DS
Three-pole or four-pole circuit-breaker with Three-pole or four-pole circuit-break-

PR221 electronic trip unit er with PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD,
PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit
(for T4, T5 and T6)
5
1SDC210G03F0001
1SDC210G03F0001
Three-pole circuit-breaker with Three-pole or four-pole circuit-breaker with

PR222MP electronic trip unit RC221, RC222 or RC223 residual current
trip unit
5/13
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagram of the T1…T6 circuit-breakers
State of operation
PR221DS
PR222DS/P
PR222DS/PD-A
1SDC210G03F0001
1SDC210G04F0001
RC221
RC222
RC223
Three-pole or four-pole circuit-breaker with Fixed version three-pole circuit-breaker with current trans-
PR221DS, PR222DS/P or PR222DS/PD electronic former on neutral conductor, external to circuit-breaker (for
trip unit and RC221, RC222 or RC223 residual cur- T4, T5 and T6)
rent trip unit (for T4, T5 and T6 four-pole only)
5
1SDC210G04F0001
Plug-in or withdrawable version three-pole circuit-breaker with current transformer

on neutral conductor, external to circuit-breaker (for T4, T5 and T6)
5/14
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagram of the T7 circuit-breakers
State of operation
1SDC210G25F0001
Three-pole circuit-breaker with PR231/P, PR232/P, PR331/P, PR332/P electronic trip unit
N L1 L2 L3 PE L1 L2 L3 N N L1 L2 L3
K51
Q Q
XR1
T11 9
TI/L1 T12 10
UI/O >
T21 11
4 TI/L2 T22 12
In 400/800A 3 T31 13 >>
In 100/250A 2 TI/L3 T32 14
1
XO
>> 1
XR1
5
1
T13 1
UI/L1 T14 2 >>> Y01
* G) T23 3
UI/L2 XO
2
T24 4
>> 2
T33 5
UI/L3 T34 6
T43 7
UI/N
1SDC210G25F0001
T44 8
PR231/P
PR232/P
PR331/P
1SDC210G25F0001
X13 XV
T7 T7 T7
T8 T8 T8
PR332/P
G)
*
Three- or four-pole Four-pole circuit-breaker with PR231/P, PR232/P, PR331/P, PR332/P electronic trip unit
switch-disconnector
5/15
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagram of the T7 circuit-breakers
State of operation
Three-pole circuit-breaker with PR332/P electronic trip unit, residual current protection and U ) 690 V
5/16
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Electrical accessories for T1…T6
Shunt opening and undervoltage releases
1SDC210G05F0001
Residual current releases and remote controls
1SDC21038FF0001
5
5/17
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Auxiliary contacts
1SDC210G07F0001
Position contacts
5
1SDC210G08F0001
5/18
1SDC210015D0205
PR223DS electronic trip unit connected with the VM210 voltage
measuring device
1SDC210063F1002
PR223EF electronic trip unit connected with the VM210 voltage

measuring device
5
1SDC210G20F0001
5/19
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD, PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip

unit connected with the FDU front display unit
1SDC210G09F0001
PR222DS/PD, PR223DS or PR223EF electronic trip unit connected

with the PR021/K signalling unit
5
1SDC210G10F0001
5/20
1SDC210015D0205
with the FDU front display unit and the PR021/K signalling unit
1SDC210G11F0001
with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts
5
1SDC210G12F0001
5/21
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams

with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts and the MOE-E actuation unit
45
Q
1SDC210G13F0001
with the FDU front display unit and with the AUX-E auxiliary
contacts
5
1SDC210G14F0001
5/22
1SDC210015D0205
PR222MP electronic trip unit connected with the PR021/K
signalling unit
1SDC210G15F0001
signalling unit and with the PR212/CI contactor control unit
5
1SDC210G16F0001
(*)
As an alternative to generic contact 0/1
5/23
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Electrical accessories for T1...T6

signalling unit, with the PR212/CI contactor control unit and with
a contactor
1SDC210G17F0001
(*)
5/24
1SDC210015D0205
PR222MP electronic trip unit with auxiliary power supply and
PR212/CI contactor control unit
1SDC210G30F0001
(*)
5/25
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Electrical accessories for T7
Motor operating mechanism, opening, closing and undervoltage

releases
1SDC210G29F0001
Signalling contacts
5
1SDC210G29F0001
5/26
1SDC210015D0205
Signalling contacts
1SDC210G31F0001
Auxiliary circuits of the PR331/P and PR332/P trip units
1SDC210G31F0001
5
5/27
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Electrical accessories for T7
PR332/P electronic trip units connected to PR330/R actuation unit

and PR330/D-M dialogue unit
1SDC210G32F0001
Measuring module PR330/V
5
1SDC21039FF0001
5/28
1SDC210015D0205
PR021/K signalling unit for PR331/P and PR332/P
1SDC210G26F0001
5/29
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Automatic transfer-switch ATS010 for T4-T5-T6
ATS010 device for the automatic transfer switch of two T4-T5-T6

circuit-breakers without safety auxiliary voltage supply
TO NEXT PAGE
1SDC210G21F0001
5
1SDC210G22F0001
5/30
1SDC210015D0205
circuit-breakers without safety auxiliary voltage supply
L1/Q2
1 1
N/Q2
K2 K1
40 15
2 2
L1/Q1
CB-N/O CB-N/C CB-E/O CB-E/C
A
ATS 010
N/Q1
41 42 43 44 14 13 12 11
11 11
K1 K2
XA8 5 3 4 2 XA8 5 3 4 2
12 12
XV XV
A17 A17
S1 S1
S2 S2
A1 A1 4 4
Q2 Q1
K2 K1 K2 K1 M YC M YC
A2 A2 3 3
1SDC210G23F0001
S3 S3
XV XV
XA8 1 XA8 1
5/31
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Automatic transfer-switch ATS010 for T4-T5-T6

circuit-breakers with safety auxiliary voltage supply in alternating
current (AC)
~ ~
40 15
CB-N/O CB-N/C CB-E/O CB-E/C

A
ATS 010
41 42 43 44 14 13 12 11
XA8 5 3 4 2 XA8 5 3 4 2
XV XV
A17 A17
S1 S1
S2 S2
Q2 Q1
M YC M YC
S3 S3
1SDC210G24F0001
XV XV
XA8 1 XA8 1
~ ~
5/32
1SDC210015D0205
circuit-breakers with safety auxiliary voltage supply in direct
current (DC)
1SDC210G34F0001
5/33
1SDC210015D0205
Wiring diagrams
Automatic transfer-switch ATS010 for T7
Automatic transfer-switch ATS010 for the automatic transfer switch of

the two T7 circuit-breakers, without safety auxiliary voltage supply
EMERGENCY SUPPLY NORMAL SUPPLY
TO NEXT PAGE
1SDC210G35F0001
LOAD
5
1SDC210G37F0001
5/34
1SDC210015D0205
FROM PREVIOUS PAGE
1SDC210G23F0001
1SDC210015D0205
5/35
5
Wiring diagrams
Automatic transfer-switch ATS010 for T7
Automatic transfer-switch ATS010 for the automatic transfer

switch of the two T7 circuit-breakers, with safety auxiliary voltage
supply in alternating current (AC)
1SDC210G38F0001
5/36
1SDC210015D0205
Automatic transfer-switch ATS010 for the automatic transfer
switch of the two T7 circuit-breakers, with safety auxiliary voltage
supply in direct current (DC)
1SDC210G39F0001
5/37
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Index
Fixed circuit-breaker and terminals
Tmax T1 and single-pole Tmax T1 ..........................................................................................6/2
Tmax T2...................................................................................................................................6/5
Tmax T3...................................................................................................................................6/8
Tmax T4.................................................................................................................................6/11
Tmax T5.................................................................................................................................6/14
Tmax T6.................................................................................................................................6/17
Tmax T7.................................................................................................................................6/22
Tmax T7M .............................................................................................................................6/27
Plug-in circuit-breaker and terminals

Tmax T2.................................................................................................................................6/32
Tmax T3.................................................................................................................................6/35
Tmax T4.................................................................................................................................6/38
Tmax T5.................................................................................................................................6/41
Withdrawable circuit-breaker and terminals

Tmax T4.................................................................................................................................6/44
Tmax T5.................................................................................................................................6/46
Tmax T6.................................................................................................................................6/49
Tmax T7.................................................................................................................................6/51
Tmax T7M .............................................................................................................................6/53
Circuit-breaker with RC221/222 residual current release .....................................................6/55
Accessories
Tmax T1 - T2 - T3..................................................................................................................6/63
Tmax T4 - T5 .........................................................................................................................6/70
Tmax T6.................................................................................................................................6/77
6
Tmax T7.................................................................................................................................6/83
Distances to be respected ....................................................................................................6/88
6/1
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T1 and single-pole Tmax T1
Fixed circuit-breaker
Fixing on sheet Fixing on DIN EN 50022 rail

1SDC210H01F0001
1SDC210H03F0001
1SDC210H02F0001
Without inserts With inserts

1SDC210H04F0001
1SDC210H06F0001
1SDC210H05F0001
1SDC210H07F0001
T1 1P (SINGLE-POLE) T1 1P (SINGLE-POLE)
Caption Drilling templates for support sheet

1 Depth of the switchboard in For front terminals Without inserts With inserts
the case of circuit-breaker
6 with face not extending from

the compartment door, with
or without flange
2 Depth of the switchboard in

with face extending from the
compartment door, without
1SDC210H08F0001
flange
1SDC210H09F0001
3 Bracket for fixing onto rail

1SDC210H10F0001
4 Bottom terminal covers with

IP40 degree of protection
3 POLES 4 POLES
T1 1P (SINGLE-POLE)
6/2
1SDC210015D0205
Terminals
Front for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl Front extended - EF
1SDC210H11F0001
1SDC210H12F0001
Rear flat horizontal - HR Front for copper cables - FC Cu
25 25 25
14
4
99.5
92.5
60.8
1.4
1SDC210H14F0001
1SDC210H15F0001
1SDC210H13F0001
49.5
42.5
Caption Front for copper/aluminum cables - FC CuAl 50 mm2
1 High terminal covers with IP40

24.5
degree of protection (compul-
sory) 9.5x9.5
5 Nm
2 Insulating barriers between

phases (compulsory in the ab-
sence of top terminal covers)
1SDC210L69F0001
52
6
11.5
3 Front extended terminals
4 Terminals for CuAl cables X X

95 mm2
6/3
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T1 and single-pole Tmax T1
Terminals Flange for the compartment door
Drilling templates of the compartment door 1SDC210H16F0001

1SDC210H17F0001
1SDC210H18F0001
1SDC210H17F0001
With flange and Without flange and (SINGLE-POLE) Without flange and
circuit-breaker face flush circuit-breaker face flush circuit-breaker face
with door (3-4 POLES) with door (3-4 POLES) extending (4 POLES)
or extending (3 POLES)
Drilling templates for support sheet

For rear terminals
1SDC210H19F0001
1SDC210H20F0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
6/4
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T2
1SDC210H21F0001
1SDC210H23F0001
1SDC210H22F0001
Flange for the Drilling templates of the compartment door

compartment door
1SDC210H24F0001
1SDC210H25F0001
With flange and Without flange and Without flange and Without flange and
circuit-breaker face circuit-breaker face circuit-breaker face circuit-breaker face
flush with door flush with door extending (3 POLES) extending (4 POLES)
(3-4 POLES) (3-4 POLES)

1 Depth of the switchboard For front terminals For rear terminals
in the case of circuit-break-
er with face not extend-
ing from the compartment
door, with or without flange
2 Depth of the switchboard

in the case of circuit-breaker
with face extending from the 6
1SDC210H26F0001
1SDC210H27F0001
compartment door, without

flange
3 Bracket for fixing onto rail
4 Low terminal covers with 3 POLES 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES

degree of protection IP40
6/5
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T2
Terminals
Front - F Front for copper cables - FC Cu Front for copper/aluminium cables -
FC CuAl 95 mm2
1SDC210H28F0001
1SDC210H29F0001
1SDC210H30F0001
Caption Front for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl 185 mm2
2 Front terminals for cables

185 mm2 CuAl
3 Insulating courtse plate

(compulsory)
4 High terminal covers with

(compulsory)
5 Drilling templates for sup-

port sheet
6
1SDC210H31F0001
25
1SDC210H32F0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
Caption Front extended spread - ES
6 1 Insulating barriers between

phases (compulsory)
18
6
1SDC210H33F0001
6/6
1SDC210015D0205
Caption Front extended - EF


phases (compulsory with-
out 1)
1SDC210H34F0001
9
Caption Rear horizontal - R
1 Low terminal covers with


1SDC210H35F0001
6/7
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T3
1SDC210H38F0001
1SDC210H36F0001
1SDC210H37F0001
Caption
1 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit-breaker with face 3 Bracket for fixing on rail
not extending from the compartment door, with or without flange
4 Low terminal covers with degree of protection IP40
2 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit-breaker with face
extending from the compartment door
Flange for Drilling templates of the compartment door

compartment door
1SDC210H39F0001
1SDC210H40F0001

For front terminals For rear terminals
6
1SDC210H41F0001
1SDC210H42F0001
3 POLES 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES
6/8
1SDC210015D0205
Terminals
FC CuAl 185 mm2
1SDC210H45F0001
1SDC210H44F0001
1SDC210H43F0001

240 mm2 CuAl

(compulsory)

(compulsory)

port sheet 8
1SDC210H46F0001
31
64
1SDC210H47F0001
3 POLES 4 POLES

phases (compulsory)
6
8
18
1SDC210H48F0001
6/9
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T3
Terminals


out 1)
1SDC210H49F0001
18
8


1SDC210H50F0001
6/10
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T4
Caption Fixing on sheet
1 Overall dimensions with cabled

accessories mounted (SOR-C,
UVR-C, RC222-223)

auxiliary contacts mounted
(only 3Q 1SY)
1SDC210H51F0001
1SDC210H52F0001
compartment door
1SDC210H53F0001
1SDC210H54F0001
1SDC210H55F0001
3-4 POLES 3-4 POLES
With flange Without flange

6
1SDC210H57F0001
1SDC210H56F0001
1SDC210H59F0001
1SDC210H58F0001
6/11
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T4
Terminals Front - F
1SDC210H60F0001
1SDC210H61F0001
Front for copper cables - FC Cu Front for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl
10 Nm
= =
1SDC210H62F0001
1SDC210H63F0001
1SDC210H64F0001
Caption Front multicable - MC
1 Front terminals for cable con-

nection 2x150 mm2
2 Front terminals for multicable 28

connection

1SDC210H66F0001
1SDC210H65F0001
30
6 1 Insulating barriers between

phases (compulsory)
= = = =
1SDC210H67F0001
1SDC210H68F0001
1SDC210H69F0001
6/12
1SDC210015D0205


phases (compulsory without 1)
1SDC210H71F0001
1SDC210H70F0001

1SDC210H73F0001
1SDC210H72F0001
6
1SDC210H74F0001
6/13
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T5
Fixed circuit-breaker Fixing on sheet
Caption

UVR-C, RC222)

(only 3Q 1SY)
1SDC210H75F0001
1SDC210H76F0001
compartment door
1SDC210H77F0001
1SDC210H79F0001
1SDC210H78F0001
With flange (3-4 POLES) Without flange (3-4 POLES)

= =
= =
1SDC210H81F0001
1SDC210H80F0001
1SDC210H82F0001
1SDC210H83F0001
6
6/14
1SDC210015D0205
Terminals Front - F
MAX 10 MIN 5
1SDC210H84F0001
1SDC210H85F0001
Front for copper cables - FC Cu Front for copper cables - FC Cu 2x240 mm2
51.75
31 Nm
24x24 26.75 Ø 21.5
Y
34.25
18 Nm
60
1SDC210H86F0001
29.25
102.5
86.25
1SDC210L73F0001
1SDC210L72F0001
X X X
Y
Front for copper/aluminum cables - FC CuAl 2x120 mm2 Front for copper/aluminum cables - FC CuAl 1x240 mm2
31 Nm
48.75
26.76 Ø 15.5
Y
43 Nm
26.7
34.25
18 Nm
Ø 20.8
18 Nm
60
22
Y
29.25
124
102.5
1SDC210L74F0001
1SDC210L75F0001
1SDC210L71F0001
1SDC210L70F0001
86.25
86.5
X X X X X X
Y Y
Caption Front for copper/aluminium cables - Front for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl 2x240 mm2
FC CuAl 300 mm2
degree of protection IP40 26
54
6
1SDC210H87F0001
1SDC210H88F0001
1SDC210H89F0001
6/15
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T5
Terminals

phases (compulsory)
1SDC210H90F0001
1SDC210H91F0001
1SDC210H92F0001


phases (compulsory without 1)
1SDC210H94F0001
1SDC210H93F0001
Rear horizontal - R
6
1SDC210H96F0001
1SDC210H97F0001
1SDC210H95F0001
Caption

6/16
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T6
Fixed circuit-breaker Fixing on sheet
210 (3P)
Caption
105
115
1 Overall dimensions with cabled 70 70 70
103.5
UVR-C)
61.25
2.7 140 5.5
2 Overall dimensions with cabled = =
auxiliary contacts mounted 134 2.7
(only 3Q 1SY)
105
268
1SDC210H98F0001
1SDC210H99F0001
3 107 2
280 (4P) 159
Flange for the Drilling templates of the compartment door

compartment door
142
62.25
66.75
149
77.75
152 = =
= = = =
107
116
138
1SDC210I01F0001
1SDC210I02F0001
1SDC210I03F0001
With flange 3-4 POLES Without flange 3-4 POLES

For front terminals F, EF, ES, FC Cu, FC CuAl
140
70 5.5 - M5
5.5 - M5 = = 35
118.5
118.5
237
237
1SDC210I04F0001
1SDC210I05F0001
6
3 POLES 4 POLES
6/17
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T6
Fixed circuit-breaker Drilling templates for support sheet

For rear terminals for copper/aluminium cables - RC CuAl
140
70
= = 35
5.5 - M5 5.5 - M5
150.5
150.5
118.5
118.5
301
237
301
237
1SDC210I06F0001
1SDC210I07F0001
R 18 R 18
84
168
238
630 A (3 POLES) 630 A (4 POLES)
140
70 35
5.5 - M5 = = 5.5 - M5
150.5
150.5
118.5
118.5
301
301
237
237
1SDC210I08F0001
1SDC210I09F0001
R 21.5 85.75
171.5 R 21.5
241.5
800 A (3 POLES) 800 A (4 POLES)
For rear terminals - R
70 140
35 35
Ø 5.5 M5 Ø 5.5 M5
Y Y
120.5
120.5
118.5
118.5
6
241
237
237
241
X X X X
8
8
1SDC210L76F0001
1SDC210L77F0001
Ø 35
70 Y 70 Ø 35 70 70 Y 70
6/18
1SDC210015D0205
Terminals Front - F
MAX 40
23 MIN5 MAX10
22.5 ±0.1
6.5
18 MIN
MAX 12
120.5
1SDC210I10F0001
1SDC210I11F0001
Front for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl 2x240 mm2
45.7
70 70 70
28
20.25 21.5
120.5
134
1SDC210I13F0001
1SDC210I12F0001
630 A
70 70 70
20 59 19
25.5
39
120.5
134
1SDC210I15F0001
1SDC210I14F0001
800 A
70 70 70
59 19
26
26
6
39
120. 5
134
1SDC210I17F0001
1SDC210I16F0001
1000 A
6/19
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T6
Terminals Front extended - EF
70 70 70
40 11 36.5 5
48.5
167.5
134
1SDC210I18F0001
1SDC210I19F0001
630 A
70 70 70
50
33.5 8
14
53.5
167.5
134
1SDC210I20F0001
1SDC210I21F0001
800 A
280
70 70 70
14
Y
125.5
105.5

1SDC210963F0004
1SDC210962F0004
134

X X
1000 A
Caption

phases (compulsory) Front extended spread - ES
45 116 116 116 45 45 116 116 45

90 88 88 90 88 88 90
45 23 45 23
6 13 13 50 8
1
116.5
116.5
230.5
134
134
1SDC210I22F0001
1SDC210I24F0001
1SDC210I23F0001
4 POLES 3 POLES
6/20
1SDC210015D0205
Rear for copper/aluminium cables - RC CuAl
70 70 70 48.1
21.5
39.5
28 23.1
120.5
147
134
1SDC210I25F0001
1SDC210I26F0001
630 A
48.1
70 70 70
23.1
17.5
39.5
41
147
137.5
120.5
134
1SDC210I28F0001
1SDC210I27F0001
800 A
Rear horizontal - R
280 (4P)
210 (3P)
53
70 70 70
8
33
14
120.5
1SDC210I30F0001
1SDC210I29F0001
73
53
1SDC210I31F0001
3-4 POLES
1
53
70 70 70
33
8
Caption
6
14
120.5
1 Low terminal covers with de-

73
1SDC210I32F0001
1SDC210I33F0001
gree of protection IP40
3-4 POLES
6/21
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T7
Fixed circuit-breaker Front - F
Caption
1 Front terminals for flat connec-

tion
2 Busbars
3 Flange for the compartment
door
4 Flange fixing screws
6 Drilling template for fixing onto
support sheet
7 Tightening torque: 18 Nm
8 Key lock (optional)
9 Padlock (optional)
10 Tightening torque: 2.5 Nm
1SDC210L42F0001
11 Sheet drilling for compartment
door with flange
12 Sheet drilling for compartment 4 poles
door for front 206 x 204 3 poles
13 Terminal for auxiliary contacts
14 Reduce flange for the compart- With flange Without flange
ment door (optional) A 125...141 147
door with reduced flange
door for front 190 x 105
1SDC210L58F0001
Flange for the

compartment door
(supplied as standard)
Drilling templates for Drilling templates of the

support sheet compartment door
1SDC210L58F0001
1SDC210L58F0001
6
1SDC210L43F0001
III IV
C 70 140
1SDC210L43F0001
1SDC210L43F0001
HOLES
6/22
1SDC210015D0205
Terminals Rear flat horizontal or vertical - HR/VR
Caption
1 Rear horizontal terminals

2 Rear vertical terminals
6 Support sheet drilling tem-
plate
1SDC210L59F0001
Drilling templates for
support sheet
1SDC210L52F0001
1SDC210L52F0001
III IV
B 70 140
C 192.5 262.5
6/23
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T7
Terminals Rear horizontal - R
Y
59 70 70 70
1 7 2
3.75
Y 2 Y
15
44
127.25
106
254.5
277
212
X X X X X X
18.5
1.5
15
23.5
Y Y
R5
.5 3.75
46.5 70 70 70
70 70 70 59 Y
.5
44 23.5 1.5
R5
1
46.5
1SDC210L78F0001
Y

C
2 Rear vertical terminals 61.25
6
59.75
6 Drilling template for fixing onto Y

42.75
support sheet
8
6 7 Tightening torque: 20 Nm
122.5
35
X
245
X
17.5
R10
III IV
1SDC210L79F0001
B 70 140
Ø5.5 - M5 C 192.5 262.5

B Y
6/24
1SDC210015D0205
1 Extended front terminals EF 320
2 Extended front spread terminals 250

125 100
ES 1 29.5
70 70 70
6 Drilling template for fixing onto 25
15 8
44 Ø 11
support sheet Y 9
1
8 Phase separator 100 mm 7
25
9 Protection plate
12.5
10 Phase separator 200 mm
250
229
199.5
13 Clamp for auxiliary contacts
160.5
118.5
1SDC210L80F0001
79
X X X X
Front extended spread - ES
100
9
10
40.5
15 7
334
118.5
1SDC210L81F0001
X X
6
1SDC210L58F0001
III IV
C 70 140
6/25
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T7
Terminals Front for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl 2x240 mm2
70 70 70 42.75
Caption
1 2
25
1 Front terminals for cables Y 7
FC CuAl
support sheet
X X X
8 Protection plate X
Y
Ø 21.5
Y
1SDC210L83F0001
Y
320 101
250
125 66.25
70 70 70 34.75
28 8
Y 1
1
2
7
150
202
79
X X X X
Y
Ø 21.5
Y
6
1SDC210L82F0001
6/26
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T7M
Fixed circuit-breaker Front - F
Caption
1 Front terminal for flat connec-

tion
2 Busbars
door
support sheet
11 Compartment door with flange
1SDC210L46F0001
sheet drilling
12 Compartment door without
flange sheet drilling
13 Terminal for auxiliary contacts
1SDC210L63F0001

A 125...164 170
Standard Ronis Profalux Kirk Castell

B 208 216 224 no no
III IV
C 70 140
Flange for the Drilling templates for Drilling templates of the

compartment door support sheet compartment door
(supplied as standard) HOLES
6
1SDC210L63F0001
1SDC210L63F0001
1SDC210L47F0001
6/27
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T7M
Rear flat horizontal or vertical - HR/VR
59
7 2
Y 1
44
118.5
109
237
273
218
X X X X X
18.5
15
25
Y Ø 11
46.5
59
70 70 70
44 25 1
1
Ø1
46.5
Caption
Y 1 Rear horizontal terminals

70 70 70
15 6 Drilling template for fixing
Y onto support sheet
2
7 Tightening torque 20 Nm
1SDC210L84F0001
C
61.25
6
Y
39.75
8
6
122.5
52.5
245
X X
17.5 R 10
III IV
1SDC210L85F0001
B 70 140
Ø 5.5 - M5 Y
B C 192.5 262.5
6/28
1SDC210015D0205
Rear horizontal - R
70 70 70
59 3.75
2 2 15
Y Y Y
1 7
44
127.25
106
254.5
273
212
X X X X X X
18.5
1.5
23.5
15
R 5.5
Y Y
46.5 3.75
70 70 70
59 Y
70 70 70
44 23.5 1.5 R 5.5
Y 1
46.5
Y
1SDC210L86F0001

C
2 Rear vertical terminals 61.25
6
59.75
6 Drilling template for fixing Y

42.75
onto support sheet

8
6
122.5
35
X
245
X
17.5
R10
III IV
1SDC210L87F0001
B 70 140
Ø5.5 - M5 Y
B C 192.5 262.5
6/29
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T7M
1 Front extended spread termi-

nals - ES
3 Phase separators 200 mm
4 Protection plate
5 Extended front terminals - EF
6 Phase separators 100 mm
13 Overall dimensions of auxiliary
contact terminal
1SDC210M01F0001
Front extended - EF
13
1SDC210M02F0001
6/30
1SDC210015D0205
Terminals Front for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl 2x240 mm2
Caption
1 Front terminals for cable

FC CuAl
8 Protection plate
1SDC210M03F0001
6
1SDC210M04F0001
6/31
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T2
Plug-in Fixing on sheet
circuit-breaker
Caption

with face not extending
from the compartment

with face extending from
the compartment door,
without flange
3 Fixed part 1SDC210I34F0001
4 Moving part with terminal

covers, degree of protec-
tion IP40
1SDC210I35F0001
compartment door
1SDC210I37F0001
1SDC210I36F0001

6
1SDC210I38F0001
1SDC210I39F0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
3 POLES 4 POLES
6/32
1SDC210015D0205
Terminals
FC CuAl 95 mm2
1SDC210I40F0001
1SDC210I41F0001
1SDC210I42F0001

185 mm2 CuAl

1
(compulsory)


port sheet
6
1SDC210I43F0001
25
1SDC210I44F0001
3 POLES 4 POLES

phases (compulsory)
6
1SDC210I45F0001

6/33
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T2


out 1)
1SDC210I46F0001


6
1SDC210I47F0001
6/34
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T3
circuit-breaker
Caption

with face not extending
from the compartment

with face extending from
the compartment door,
without flange
3 Fixed part
1SDC210I48F0001
covers, degree of protec-
tion IP40
1SDC210I49F0001
compartment door
1SDC210I51F0001
1SDC210I50F0001

6
1SDC210I52F0001
1SDC210I53F0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
3 POLES 4 POLES
6/35
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T3
Terminals
FC CuAl 185 mm2
1SDC210I54F0001
1SDC210I55F0001
1SDC210I56F0001

240 mm2 CuAl

(compulsory)
1

port sheet
1SDC210I57F0001
8
31
1SDC210I58F0001
3 POLES 4 POLES

phases (compulsory)
6
1SDC210I59F0001

6/36
1SDC210015D0205
Caption


out 1)
1SDC210I60F0001


1SDC210I61F0001
6/37
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T4
circuit-breaker
Caption
1 Fixed part

covers, degree of protection
IP40

UVR-C, RC222-223)

1SDC210I62F0001
(only 3Q 1SY)
1SDC210I63F0001
compartment door
1SDC210I64F0001
1SDC210I66F0001
1SDC210I65F0001

6
1SDC210I67F0001
1SDC210I68F0001
1SDC210I70F0001
1SDC210I69F0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
3 POLES 4 POLES
6/38
1SDC210015D0205
1SDC210I72F0001
1SDC210I71F0001
Caption Front for copper cables - FC Cu or for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl
1 For Cu cables
2 For Cu Al cables

1SDC210I74F0001
1SDC210I73F0001
6/39
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T4
Rear flat vertical - VR
1SDC210I76F0001
1SDC210I75F0001
18
1SDC210I77F0001
3-4 POLES
Rear flat horizontal - HR

1SDC210I79F0001
1SDC210I78F0001
18
6
1SDC210I80F0001
3-4 POLES
6/40
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T5
Plug-in
circuit-breaker
Fixing on sheet
1SDC210I81F0001
1SDC21040FF0001
1SDC210I83F0001
1SDC21041FF0001
400 A 630 A
Caption Flange for Drilling templates of the compartment door

1 Fixed part
compartment door
2 Moving part with terminal cov-

ers, degree of protection IP40

UVR-C, RC221-222)
1SDC210I85F0001
1SDC210I87F0001
1SDC210I86F0001

(only 3Q 1SY)

For front terminals 400 A For front terminals 630 A
For rear terminals 400 A - 630 A
1SDC210I89F0001
1SDC210I88F0001
6
1SDC210I90F0001
1SDC210I91F0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
3 POLES 4 POLES
A B C D E
Rear 400 A 32.5 128.5 143 172.5 64.5
Front and rear 630 A 61.8 139 142 185.5 69.5
6/41
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T5
Terminals Front extended 400 A - EF Front extended 630 A - F
1SDC210I93F0001
1SDC210I95F0001
1SDC210I92F0001
1SDC210I94F0001
Caption Front for copper cables - FC Cu or for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl
1 Front terminals for cables Cu

Cu/Al 24x24

1SDC210I96F0001
1SDC210I97F0001
Caption Front extended spread 630 A - ES

phases (compulsory)
28 Nm
1SDC210J01F0001
1SDC210I98F0001
1SDC210I99F0001
6/42
1SDC210015D0205
Terminals
Rear flat horizontal 630 A - HR

1SDC210J08F0001
1SDC210J02F0001
1SDC210J04F0001
1SDC210J10F0001
1SDC210J09F0001
18
1SDC210J03F0001
1SDC210J11F0001
Rear flat vertical 400 A - VR
1SDC210J05F0001

1SDC210J07F0001
1SDC210J12F0001
1SDC210J14F0001
104
84
64
18
44
1SDC210J06F0001
1SDC210J13F0001
1SDC210015D0205
6/43
6
Overall dimensions
Tmax T4
Withdrawable Fixing on sheet
circuit-breaker isolating distance
1SDC210J17F0001
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part
3 Lock for compartment door

(available on request)

UVR-C, RC222-223)
1SDC210J16F0001
1SDC21042FF0001
Flange for compartment Drilling templates of the compartment door

door
1SDC210J18F0001
1SDC210J19F0001

6
1SDC210J21F0001
1SDC210J20F0001
1SDC210J22F0001
1SDC210J23F0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
3 POLES 4 POLES
6/44
1SDC210015D0205
Front - EF
1SDC210J24F0001
10.5 Terminals
3-4 POLES
1SDC210J34F0001
1SDC210J33F0001
1SDC210J25F0001
1SDC210J35F0001
1SDC210J26F0001
Front for copper cables - FC Cu
1SDC210J27F0001
3-4 POLES
1SDC210J37F0001
1SDC210J36F0001
1SDC210J28F0001
1SDC210J38F0001
Front for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl
1SDC210015D0205
6/45
1SDC210J29F0001
6
Overall dimensions
Tmax T5
Withdrawable
circuit-breaker
Fixing on sheet
1SDC210J42F0001
1SDC210J39F0001
isolating distance
isolating distance
1SDC21043FF0001
1SDC21046FF0001
1SDC21045FF0001
1SDC210J44F0001
400 A 630 A
Caption Flange for compartment Drilling templates of the compartment door

1 Fixed part
door

covers, degree of protection
IP40

(available on request)
1SDC210J45F0001

1SDC210J46F0001
UVR-C, RC222)
Drilling templates for support sheet For front terminals 630 A

For rear terminals 400 A - 630 A
For front terminals 400 A
6
1SDC210J48F0001
1SDC210J47F0001
1SDC210J49F0001
1SDC210J50F0001
3 POLES 4 POLES
3 POLES 4 POLES
A B C D E
Rear 400 A 32.5 128.5 143 172.5 64.5
Front and rear 630 A 61.8 139 142 185.5 69.5
6/46
1SDC210015D0205
Terminals Front extended 400 A - EF Front extended 630 A - EF
1SDC210J51F0001
1SDC210J53F0001
1SDC210J52F0001
1SDC210J54F0001
Caption Front for copper cables - FC Cu or for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl 400 A
1 Front terminals for copper

cables
2 Front terminals for copper/ 24 x 24

aluminium cables
3 Terminals with degree of

protection IP40
1SDC210J55F0001
1SDC210J56F0001

phases (compulsory)
28 Nm
98.5
98.5
1SDC210J57F0001
1SDC210J58F0001
1SDC210J59F0001

phases (compulsory) 6
28 Nm
1SDC210J60F0001
1SDC210J61F0001
1SDC210J62F0001
6/47
1SDC210015D0205
6
6/48
1SDC210015D0205

1SDC210J71F0001
1SDC210J69F0001 1SDC210J65F0001 1SDC210J63F0001
“A”
Top view
Tmax T5
1SDC210J72F0001
1SDC210J70F0001
1SDC210J64F0001
Overall dimensions
25
1SDC210J75F0001 1SDC210J66F0001
1SDC210J73F0001

1SDC210J68F0001
1SDC210J74F0001
1SDC210J67F0001
Overall dimensions
Tmax T6 630 A - T6 800 A
Withdrawable Fixing on sheet
1SDC210J78F0001
circuit-breaker isolating
27.5 corsa di distance
sezionamento
280 (4P)
210 (3P)
4
3
70 70 70
Caption
1 Fixed part
2 Moving part
84.5
77
3 Lock for compartment (avail-
144.75
140
able on request)
273
295
208
145
4 Overall dimensions with
cabled accessories mounted
(SOR-C, UVR-C)
5
1SDC210J77F0001
1SDC210J76F0001
167 4 123.5 136.5
≤2 190.5 35.5 193.5
196
Flange for compartment Drilling templates of the compartment door

door
43 14
210
75.25
96.5
18.5
89.5
32
150
100.25
173
1SDC210J79F0001
18
148.5
1SDC210J80F0001
= =
122
R min. 200
210
140 70
R2 R2
77.5
77.5
144
120
144
120
6
77.5
77.5
8.5 - M8
8.5 - M8
1SDC210J81F0001
1SDC210J82F0001
214 107
284
3 POLES 4 POLES
6/49
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T6 630 A - T6 800 A

70 70 70
31 3
40
10
20
14
172.5
1SDC210J83F0001
1SDC210J84F0001
80.5
3
70 70 70
10
40
20
14
1SDC210J87F0001
1SDC210J85F0001
1SDC210J86F0001
3-4 POLES
80.5
3 20
70 70 70
10
40
1SDC210J90F0001
1SDC210J88F0001
14
1SDC210J89F0001
3-4 POLES
6/50
1SDC210015D0205
Withdrawable circuit-breaker
Fixing on sheet
348 D
278 251
155.5
70 70 70 14 14
15
8
13 13
11
2 2
3 10 16
9
121.5
44
99
99
20
35
363.25
554
198
243
198
343
25
15
42
15
1SDC210L89F0001
159.5
1SDC210L64F0001
239.5
4 5 14
29
11
12.5
1SDC210M05F0001
Ø
?3
1SDC210M06F0001
7 47
25
49 2
25 44 154 104.5
Terminals Caption
1 Compartment door with

Rear flat vertical - VR Rear flat horizontal - HR flange sheet drilling
2 Rear segregation for rear

25 44 terminals
9
1SDC210L64F0001
29
3 Compartment door flange

16.5
6 Drilling template for fixing

Rear spread terminal - RS onto support sheet
1SDC210L57F0001
90 90

25 25 25
Ø 11
8 Front terminals


90
77.5
59
41.5
17 11 Rear segregation for front

terminals
90 90 90
12 Flange for compartment
door
6
25 25 25 25
2.5 Ø 11
13 Auxiliary contact terminal
14 Insulating protection
90
80.5
67
1SDC210L90F0001
41.5
15 Rear spread terminals (4

15 poles)

poles)
6/51
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T7
Withdrawable circuit-breaker Caption
Front extended spread - ES 1 Drilling a hole in the sheet

metal door to the compart-
ment with the flange for the
RS-VR-HR-EF-ES terminals

terminals
14
19
12
6 Drilling template for fixing
onto support sheet
8 Front terminals
11 Rear segregation for front

terminals

door
18 Spread terminals
1SDC210M05F0001
19 Overall dimensions of auxil-

iary contact terminal
1SDH000529R0121
18
Drilling templates of the compartment door

1SDC210L64F0001
1SDC210L64F0001
20 50
6 14
1SDC210L57F0001
30
100
115
Ø7
230
III IV
A 160 230
199
460
99.5
109.5
B 206 276
103
C 219 289
1SDC210M07F0001
11
1SDC210L64F0001
B
C
D 287 291 299 298 328
6/52
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T7M
Withdrawable circuit-breaker
Front extended - EF
348 305
278 E
155.5
70 70 70 16
16
10
15 15
13 2 2
3 12 18
11
121.5
44
102
99
99
20
363.25
35
343
198
198
243
554
204
8
25
15
159.5
1SDC210L92F0001
15
7
1SDC210L65F0001
4 5
14
?3
9 47 42
12.5
29
1 49 2
Ø1
1SDC210M08F0001
1SDC210M09F0001
154 64.5
25
249
275.5
25 44
D
Caption
1 Compartment door steel sheet

drilling for flange
Rear flat vertical - VR Rear flat horizontal - HR
2 Rear segregation for rear ter-
minals
15
1SDC210L56F0001

door

Rear spread terminal - RS
1SDC210L56F0001
35 90 90 9 Tightening torque: 21 Nm
190
25 25 25
206 Ø 11
10 Front terminal
90
77.5
11 Rear horizontal terminal

59
41.5
12 Rear vertical terminal

19
25
90
25
90
25
90
25
terminals
14 Flange for compartment door

6
2.5 Ø 11
15 Overall dimensions of the aux-
iliary contact terminals
90
80.5
67
41.5
1SDC210L93F0001
17 17 Rear spread terminals (4
poles)

poles)
6/53
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T7M
Withdrawable circuit-breaker Caption
Front extended spread - ES 1 Drilling a hole in the sheet

metal door to the compart-
ment with the flange for the
RS-VR-HR-EF-ES terminals

terminals
16
10 4 Flange fixing screws
15
13
14 6 Drilling template for fixing
onto support sheet
10 Front terminal

terminals

door
15 Clamp for auxiliary contacts
20 Spread terminals
1SDH000529R0121
20

1SDC210L65F0001
1SDC210L65F0001
6 20 50
1SDC210L56F0001
16
30
III IV
A 160 230
115
Ø7
230
B 206 276
199
460
C 219 289
99.5
109.5
103
1SDC210L65F0001
13
1SDC210M10F0001
D 290 298 306 NO NO

B
E 287 291 299 298 328
C
6/54
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Circuit-breaker with RC221/222 residual current release
Tmax T1 with RC222 for 200 mm module
Fixed version Front terminals - F Fixing on sheet

153.2
101.2 102
Caption 38.1
11.5
1 Depth of the switchboard with
circuit-breaker face extending
65
76.2
52
with circuit-breaker face 24.5
17
104
flush with door
155.5
45
3 Terminal covers with degree of
protection IP40
3 1.1 Nm 7 Nm
70
1SDC210J91F0001
25 25 25
168.2
Drilling templates of the compartment door Drilling templates for

For A = 71 - without flange support sheet
116.1 39.1
87.5
18
25 25
47
1SDC210J92F0001
53.5
107
For A = 79 - without flange
1SDC210J92F0001
116.1
54 78.2
18
47
1SDC210J92F0001
6/55
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T1 - T2 - T3
Fixed version
Front - F Fixing on sheet Rear flat horizontal - HR
T1
102
83
60.8
17
45
184.8
70
1SDC210J94F0001
1SDC210J93F0001
T2
1SDC210J95F0001
T3
Caption
6 1 Depth of the switchboard

with circuit-breaker face
extending

with circuit-breaker face
flush with door
3 Front terminals for cable

connection
1SDC210J96F0001

6/56
1SDC210015D0205
Fixed version Flange for the compartment door
T1 T2 T3
3 POLES
1SDC210J97F0001
1SDC210J97F0001
1SDC210J97F0001
4 POLES
1SDC210J97F0001
1SDC210J97F0001
1SDC210J97F0001
Drilling template for fixing sheet
T1 - T2 - T3 T1 rear flat horizontal - HR
3 POLES 4 POLES 4 POLES
78.1
25 25
53.5
25 25 25
107
124
133
1SDC210J97F0001
1SDC210J97F0001
15.5
1SDC210J98 F0001
36.75
98.5
A B C D E F
T1 124 107 53.5 78.1 25 53.1 6

T2 124 107 53.5 90 30 60
T3 141.5 122 61 102.5 35 67.5
6/57
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Tmax T1 - T2 - T3
Without flange Without flange With flange

face extending face not extending face not extending
3 POLES
T1 - T2 - T3 T1 T1 - T2 - T3
T2 - T3
4 POLES
T1 - T2 - T3 T1 - T2 - T3 T1 - T2 - T3
1SDC210J99F0001
A B C D E F G H
T1 18 108.2 94.1 – 23.5 113 78.1 39.1
T2 18 122 106 76 23.5 120 90 46
T3 13.5 137 118.5 83.5 19 127.4 102.5 53.5
6/58
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Circuit breaker with RC223 residual current release
Tmax T3
Fixed version
Caption Front terminals with residual current
1 Front terminals for bars con-

nection
2 Fixing on sheet steel
3 Compartment door sheet

steel drilling
4 Tightening torque 1.1 Nm
1SDC210Z67F0001
1SDC210Z66F0001
1SDC210Z67F0001
1SDC210Z67F0001
6/59
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Circuit-breaker with RC222 residual current release
Tmax T4 - T5
Fixed version Front - F, fixing on sheet
T4 T5 (400 A)(1)
1SDC210K03F0001
1SDC210K02F0001
1SDC210K01F0001
1SDC210K04F0001
Caption

(only 3Q 1SY)
(1)
For T5 (630 A) ask ABB SACE
Flange for the Drilling templates of compartment door
compartment door and fitting flange
1SDC210K06F0001
1SDC210K05F0001
1SDC210K07F0001
1SDC210K08F0001
For circuit-breakers For residual current

release
6/60
1SDC210015D0205
T4 T5
1SDC210K09F0001
1SDC210K10F0001
1SDC210K12F0001
1SDC210K11F0001
A B C D E
With flange – 115 115 64.5 63.5
Without flange – 107 107 60.5 54.5
6/61
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Circuit-breaker with RC222 residual current release
Tmax T4 - T5
Plug-in version Front - F, fixing on sheet
T4 T5 (400 A)(1)
1SDC210K13F0001
1SDC210K14F0001
1SDC210K16F0001
1SDC210K15F0001
52.5
Caption Flange for the compartment door Drilling templates of compartment

1 Fixed part
door and fitting flange
2 Mobile part

(only 3Q 1SY)
1SDC210K17F0001
1SDC210K18F0001
(1)
For T5 (630 A) ask ABB SACE
For circuit-breakers For residual current

1SDC210K19F0001
1SDC210K20F0001
release
T5
6 T4
1SDC210K21F0001
1SDC210K22F0001
6/62
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Accessories for Tmax T1 - T2 - T3
Fixed version Solenoid operator superimposed
T1 T2
1SDC210K23F0001
1SDC210K24F0001
1SDC210K25F0001
Caption T3

with operating mechanism
face extending

with operating mechanism
face flush with door

1SDC210K26F0001
1SDC210K27F0001
Flange for compartment door Drilling templates of the compartment door

1SDC210K28F0001
6
1SDC210K29F0001
Without flange Without flange With flange

A B C Operating mechanism face Operating mechanism face Operating mechanism face
extending flush with door flush with door
T1 33.5 18 23.5
T2 33.5 18 23.5
T3 29 13.5 19
6/63
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Fixed version Solenoid operator side by side
Caption T1
1 Circuit-breaker face
extending
2 Circuit-breaker face flush

with door

1SDC210K30F0001
1SDC210K31F0001
Drilling templates for fixing sheet Drilling templates of the compartment
door
1SDC210K33F0001
1SDC210K32F0001
3 POLES
A B
3P 79 161.3
71 161.3
1SDC210K32F0001
4P 79 161.3
71 186.3
4 POLES
6/64
1SDC210015D0205
Caption Solenoid operator side by side
1 Circuit-breaker face
extending T2
2 Circuit-breaker face flush

with door

1SDC210K34F0001
1SDC210K35F0001
Drilling templates for fixing sheet Drilling templates of the compartment
door
1SDC210K36F0001
1SDC210K37F0001
3 POLES
A B
3P 79 161.3
1SDC210K36F0001
71 161.3
4P 79 161.3
71 198.2
4 POLES
6/65
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Fixed version Rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door
Caption
1 Transmission unit
2 Rotary handle operating

mechanism on the com-
partment door
1SDC210K39F0001
1SDC210K38F0001
A B
Heights for door with maximum distance
T1-T2 28 14
T3 32.5 9.5
178 with IP54
Drilling template of the compartment
door
1SDC210K41F0001
1SDC210K40F0001
Minimum rotation radius

Heights for door with minimum distance for door fulcrum
Caption Rotary handle operating mechanism on circuit-breaker

1 Rotary handle operating
mechanism on circuit-
breaker
A B C D
T1-T2 67.7 28 53.2 60.5
T3 63.2 32.5 48.7 56

1SDC210K42F0001
1SDC210K43F0001
Drilling template of the compartment door Flange for the compartment door
6 Drilling: see Det. “A”
1SDC210K44F0001
1SDC210K46F0001
1SDC210K45F0001
6/66
1SDC210015D0205
Mechanical interlock between circuit-breakers
Front interlocking plate between two circuit-breakers
305 3 110.5
152.5 152.5 92
65 100 81 MIN.
25
8
25
17
110
97
60
45
1SDC210K47F0001
Caption B C
307
A D
1 Drilling templates of the 153.5 153.5
26
compartment door
F
F

97
62
1SDC210K49F0001
E
port sheet
1SDC210K48F0001
Front interlocking plate between three circuit-breakers
470 3 110.5
152.5 165 152.5 92
65 65 100 81 MIN.
25
17
45 8
25
110
97
60
1SDC210K50F0001
165
B C C 472
A D D 153.5 165 153.5
26
6
F
F
F
97
1SDC210K52F0001
62
1SDC210K51F0001
E
E
E
A
B
A B C D E F
T1 52.5 77.5 112.5 87.5 53.5 53.5
T2 50 80 115 85 53.5 53.5
T3 47.5 82.5 117.5 82.5 56.5 65.5
6/67
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Caption Mechanical rear horizontal interlock between two T3 circuit-breakers

1 Interlocking mechanism
2 Circuit-breakers coupling
plate
440
3 Drilling template for all termi- 17.32 400
15.75
nal versions 400
15.75 68.5
99.25 134.25 2.7
3.91 5.28 7
Ø 0.28
Ø
3 46
165 165
88
6.5 6.5
11.81
11.81
12.99
300
300
330
22
56
0
R 3 .18
3 46
88
R1
3
1
2.56
65
1SDC210L94F0001
Caption Mechanical rear vertical interlock between two T3 circuit-breakers
228 190
== ==
2 Circuit-breakers coupling = 190 = 65
n
165 25
== 7
plate Z Z
=
3 Drilling template for all termi- 2

=
nal versions R
30
88
56
88
K K K K K K
590
540
540
==
28
==
==
==
6 1
88
56
88
1SDC210961F0001
=
=
Z Z
The mechanical rear vertical interlock for Tmax T3 is not compatible with the RC221 and RC222 residual
current releases.
6/68
1SDC210015D0205
Caption Protection kit IP 42 for T1 fixed
1 IP 42 protection

steel drilling
1SDC210Z74F0001
1 IP 42 protection

steel drilling
1SDC210Z75F0001

1 IP 42 protection

steel drilling
6
1SDC210Z76F0001
6/69
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Accessories for Tmax T4 - T5
Caption
1 Transmission unit
2 Rotary handle assembly with

door lock device
3 Padlock device for open posi-

tion (maximum 3 padlocks to
be provided by the user)
1SDC210K53F0001
1SDC210K54F0001
4 IP54 protection (supplied on
request)
5 Min…max distance from the

front of the door without ac-
cessory 4 Drilling of compartment door
front of the door with acces-
sory 4
7 Dimension with AUE connector

(early making contact)
1SDC210K56F0001
1SDC210K55F0001
Minimum rotation radius for door

fulcrum

Det. “A”
1 Rotary handle operating mech-
anism on circuit-breaker
1SDC210K59F0001
Det. “A”

4 Compartment door lock

1SDC210K57F0001
1SDC210K58F0001
6 Drilling template of the compartment door Flange for the

compartment door
1SDC210K62F0001
1SDC210K60F0001
1SDC210K61F0001
6/70
1SDC210015D0205
Caption Motor operator
1 Overall dimensions with cabled T4 T5
(only 3Q 1SY)
1SDC210K64F0001
1SDC210K63F0001
1SDC210K65F0001
Flange for the Drilling template of the compartment door
compartment door
1SDC210K66F0001
1SDC210K68F0001
1SDC210K67F0001
Drilling template for support sheet
T4 T5
1SDC210K71F0001
1SDC210K72F0001
1SDC210K70F0001
1SDC210K69F0001
3 POLES 4 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES 6
6/71
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Fixed version Front for lever operating mechanism
Caption T4 T5
1 Front for lever operating mech-

anism
2 Lock for the compartment Det. “A”

door (supplied on request)
1SDC210K74F0001
1SDC210K73F0001
1SDC210K75F0001
Flange for the Drilling template for the compartment door
compartment door
(supplied as standard) Drilling for detail “A” Det. “A”
1SDC210K79F0001
1SDC210K76F0001
1SDC210K78F0001
1SDC210K77F0001
min min

1SDC210K81F0001
1SDC210K80F0001
A B C
6 T4
T5
35
46.5
70
93
17.5
23.25
3 POLES 4 POLES
6/72
1SDC210015D0205
Caption Interlock between two circuit-breakers placed side by side
2 Circuit-breaker coupling plate
1SDC210K82F0001
1SDC210K83F0001
Caption Drilling templates for fixing the circuit-breaker on the support sheet
1 Drilling template for all versions
with rear terminals
1SDC210K84F0001
6/73
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Fixed version Interlock between two circuit-breakers placed side by side
1SDC210K85F0001
1SDC210K87F0001
1SDC210K86F0001
A B C
1SDC210K88F0001
1SDC210K90F0001
1SDC210K89F0001
D E F
Type Circuit-breakers
A N° 1 T4 (F-P-W)
N° 1 T4 (F-P-W)
B N° 1 T4 (F-P-W)
N° 1 T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 630 (F)
C N° 1 T4 (F-P-W)
N° 1 T5 630 (P-W)
D N° 1 T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 630 (F)

N° 1 T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 630 (F)
E N° 1 T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 630 (F)

N° 1 T5 630 (P-W)
F N° 1 T5 630 (P-W)
N° 1 T5 630 (P-W)
Note:
6 (F) Fixed circuit-breaker

(P) Plug-in circuit-breaker
(W) Withdrawable circuit-breaker
6/74
1SDC210015D0205
Withdrawable Motor operator
T4 T5 (400 A)
version
1.2 Nm
isolating distance
2 Nm
2 Nm
1SDC210K92F0001
1SDC210K93F0001
1SDC210K91F0001
T5 (630 A)
121.8
2 272 75.2 101.3
5 25 46.5 46.5 46.5
27.5 isolating distance
46.5
1.1 Nm
125
156.5
166
89
59.5
2 Nm
105
12
250
n 5.5
313
2 Nm 105
1SDC210K94F0001
283
n 10
3
17.5 69.75
Flange for the Drilling templates for the compartment

compartment door door and fitting flange
6
1SDC210K95F0001
1SDC210K96F0001
6/75
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Withdrawable Rotary handle operating mechanism on the circuit-breakers

version isolating distance
Caption
1SDC210K97F0001
Det. “A”
3 Dimension with AUE connector 3

1SDC210K99F0001
1SDC210K98F0001
24.5
Flange for the Drilling template for compartment

Drilling for detail “A”
1SDC210L01F0001
1SDC210L02F0001
6/76
1SDC210015D0205
Caption Protection kit IP42 for T4 fixed
1 IP42 protection

steel drilling
3 Spacing when equipped

with SOR-C, UVR-C,
RC221-222
1SDC210Z86F0001
Caption Protection kit IP42 for T5 fixed
1 IP42 protection
2 Compartment door sheet steel

drilling
3 Spacing when equipped with

SOR-C, UVR-C, RC221-222
4 Spacing when equipped with

AUX-C (3Q 1SY only)
1SDC210Z86F0001
6/77
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Accessories for Tmax T6

110..500
5.5 4.33..19.68
Caption 5.5 103.5 85..500
4.07 3.35..19.68
1 Transmission unit 25 25
0.98 0.98
2 Rotary handle assembly with

door lock device
105.5
82
42.5
3 Padlock device for open
position (maximum 3 5.5
padlocks to be provided
by the user) 2.7
1SDC210L03F0001
1SDC210L04F0001
4 IP54 protection (supplied 2
2
on request) 2.7 0.08 0.08
3
5 Min…max distance from the 41.5 0.12
front of the door without ac-
cessory 4
Drilling of compartment door
R 31.5
front of the door with acces- 50
45
sory 4
42.5
50
5
83
1SDC210L06F0001
1SDC210L05F0001
32
105 R 200 min. 41.5
Minimum rotation
radius for door
fulcrum

1 Rotary handle operat- Det. “A”
190 33
ing mechanism on circuit- 146.5
breaker 140
4
103.5 5.5 5.5
1SDC210L09F0001
tion (maximum 3 padlocks to 5.5
2
84.5

42.5
140
4 Compartment door lock

1SDC210L07F0001
2.7
1SDC210L08F0001
≥3 140.5 ≤2 2.7 41.5
Drilling template of the compartment door Flange for the

6 43 14
43 14
compartment door
152
100.25
96.5
96.5
90
85.5
151
173
142
1SDC210L12F0001
1SDC210L11F0001
1SDC210L10F0001
148.5
142
R min. 200
R min. 200
6/78
1SDC210015D0205
Fixed version Motor operator
Caption 140
5.5 = = 5.5 191.5

(only 3Q 1SY)
70
14 0
5.5
1SDC210L13F0001
1SDC210L14F0001
3 222 2
233
Flange for the Drilling template of the compartment door

compartment door
148,5 142
152 = = = =
= =
71.25
75,75
86.5
173
142
151
1SDC210L15F0001
1SDC210L16F0001
1SDC210L17F0001
R min. 200 R min. 200

70 140
5.5 -M5 5.5 -M5
118.5
118.5
35
237
237
1SDC210L18F0001
1SDC210L19F0001
6
3 POLES 4 POLES
6/79
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Caption Front for lever operating mechanism

158
1 Front for lever operating mech- 140
146.5
17
2.7
anism 2.7 = = 103.5
Det. “A”
2 Lock for the compartment
door
84.5
140
1SDC210L21F0001
1SDC210L20F0001
3 140.5 2
Flange for the Drilling template for the compartment door

compartment door Drilling of details “A”
(supplied as standard) Det. “A”
43 14 43 14
152
4
= =
96.5
96.5
85.5
90
151
142
100.25
1SDC210L25F0001
173
1SDC210L22F0001
1SDC210L23F0001
1SDC210L24F0001
148.5 142
R min. 200 R min. 200
70 140
5.5 -M5 5.5 - M5
118.5
118.5
35
237
237
1SDC210L26F0001
1SDC210L27F0001
6 3 POLES 4 POLES
6/80
1SDC210015D0205
Withdrawable Motor operator
version isolating
27.5 corsa di distance
sezionamento
241 140
37
70
14 0
1SDC210L29F0001
1SDC210L28F0001
3
281.5
Flange for the Drilling templates for the compartment

210
75.25
75.25
32.5
150
32
86.25
173
1SDC210L30F0001
18
1SDC210L31F0001
148.5
= =
122
R min. 200
6/81
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Caption Rotary handle operating mechanism on the circuit-breakers

1 Padlock device for open
4
position (maximum 3 padlocks 140
isolating
27.5 corsa distance
di sezionamento
to be provided by the user)
1SDC210L36F0001
2 Lock for compartment door 1
2
84.5
140
4 Interlock mechanism
5 Frame
1SDC210L33F0001
6 Drilling template for each ver-
sion of terminals 3
1SDC210L32F0001
≥3 190.5 ≤2
240 33
Flange for the Drilling template for compartment

Drilling for detail “A”
210 43 14
75.25
96.5
100.25
89.5
18.5
32
150
1SDC210L34F0001
173
1SDC210L35F0001
18
148.5
= =
122
R min. 200
Mechanical interlock
5
1SDC210L96F0001
6
4
isolating distance
1SDC210L95F0001
6/82
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Fixed circuit-breaker Rotary handle operating mechanism on the circuit-breaker
Caption
1 Rotary handle operating mech-

anism for circuit-breaker
2 Compartment door interlock

door
6 Support sheet drilling tem-

plate
9 Compartment door with flange
1SDC210L50F0001
sheet drilling
10 Compartment door sheet drill-

ing for front 206 x 204
11 Terminal for auxiliary contacts With flange Without flange
12 Reduced flange of the rotary A 125...141 147

handle for the compartment
door (optional) III IV
13 Compartment door sheet drill- C 70 140
ing for rotary handle
1SDC210L66F0001
14 Compartment door sheet drill-

ing without the rotary handle
flange
Flange for the compartment door (supplied as standard) Drilling templates for support sheet
1SDC210L51F0001
1SDC210L66F0001
1SDC210L66F0001

6
1SDC210L51F0001
HOLES
6/83
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door
Caption
1 Transmission mechanism
for rotary handle operating
mechanism
2 Grip with key lock in open posi-
tion (max n° 3 padlocks _7 mm
not included in the supply)
3 Drilling template for compart-
ment door
4 Tightening torque 2.5 Nm
1SDC210L97F0001
5 Accessory for IP54 degree

of protection (available on
request)
front of the door
front of the door (with ac-
cessory with IP54 degree of
protection)
6/84
1SDC210015D0205
Withdrawable Rotary handle operating mechanism on the circuit-breakers
circuit-breaker
Caption
16
16
1 Rotary handle operating me-
chanism on circuit-breakers
10
15 15
2 Rear segregation for rear ter-
13
minals
3
door

7

support sheet
4 5
9 Compartment door with flange 1
sheet drilling 8
1SDC210M12F0001
1SDC210M11F0001
10 Front terminals

terminals
12
1
door
15 Auxiliary contact terminal
1SDC210M14F0001
1SDC210M13F0001
III IV
A 160 230
B 206 276
Drilling templates for support sheet C 219 289
16
2 6
6 14
1SDC210M15F0001
1SDC210M17F0001
1SDC210M18F0001
1SDC210M16F0001
13
6/85
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Caption Mechanical interlock for fixed circuit-breakers

3 Mechanical vertical interlock
for fixed circuit-breakers
4 Mechanical horizontal interlock

for fixed circuit-breakers
5 Sheet drilling for wire passage

of the mechanical interlock
1SDC210L68F0001
6/86
1SDC210015D0205
Caption Mechanical interlock for withdrawable circuit-breakers
1 Mechanical vertical interlock for
withdrawable circuit-breakers
2 Mechanical horizontal inter-

lock for withdrawable circuit-
breakers
5 Sheet drilling for wire passage

of the mechanical interlock
1SDC210L68F0001
6/87
1SDC210015D0205
Overall dimensions
Distances to be respected
Insulation distances for installation in metallic cubicle
A B C
(mm) (mm) (mm)
T1 25 20 20
T2 25 20 20
T3 50 25 20
T4 30(**) 25 25(**)
T5 30(**) 25 25(**)
(*)
T6 35 25 20
(*)
T7 50 20 10
1SDC210L37F0001
(*)
For Ub * 440 V and T6L all versions: distances A 100 mm
(**)
For Un *440 V and ) 690 V: A = 60 mm, C = 45 mm and ) 690 V
Note: For the insulation distances of the 1000 V circuit-breakers, please ask ABB SACE.
Minimum centre distance between two circuit-breakers side by side or superimposed

For assembly side by side or superimposed, check that the connection busbars or cables do not reduce the
air insulation distance
Minimum centre distance for two circuit-breakers side by side
Circuit-breaker width (mm) Centre distance I (mm)

3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles
T1 76 102 76 102
T2 90 120 90 120
T3 105 140 105 140
(*)
T4 105 140 105 140(*)
1SDC210L38F0001
T5 140 186 140(*) 186(*)
T6 210 280 210 280
T7 210 280 210 280
(*)
T4 A For Ub: * 500 V and ) 690 V minimum centre I (mm) 3 poles 145, minimum centre I (mm) 4 poles 184
T5 A For Ub: * 500 V and ) 690 V minimum centre I (mm) 3 poles 180, minimum centre I (mm) 4 poles 224
Minimum centre distance for superimposed circuit-breakers
H (mm)
T1 60
T2 90
T3 140
T4 160
T5 160
6 T6 180
T7 180
Caption
1 Connection - not insulated

2 Insulated cable
1SDC210L39F0001
3 Cable terminal
Note: The dimensions shown apply for operating voltage Ub up to 690 V. The
dimensions to be respected must be added to the maximum dimensions of the
various different versions of the circuit-breakers, including the terminals.
For 1000 V versions, please ask ABB SACE.
6/88
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Index
General information ..................................................................................................................7/2
Instructions for ordering ............................................................................................................7/3
Power distribution circuit-breakers ............................................................................................7/7
Circuit-breakers for zone selectivity .........................................................................................7/22
Motor protection circuit-breakers ............................................................................................7/24
Circuit-breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC .....................................................7/28
Switch disconnectors .............................................................................................................7/33
Breaking units.........................................................................................................................7/36
Trip units .................................................................................................................................7/38
Fixed parts, conversion kit and accessories for fixed parts ......................................................7/41
Accessories ............................................................................................................................7/45
7/1
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
General information
Abbreviations used to describe the apparatus
F = Front EF = Front ES = Front

terminals extended extended
terminals spread
terminals
FC Cu = FC CuAl = FC CuAl =
Front termi- Front Front
nals for cop- terminals for terminals for
per cables Cu/Al cables Cu/Al cables
(housed externally)
RC CuAl = R= MC =
Rear Rear Multi-cable
terminals for terminals terminals
Cu/Al cables
HR for HR = VR =
RC221/222 = Rear flat Rear flat
Rear flat horizontal vertical
horizontal terminals terminals
terminals
HR/VR = RS =
Rear flat Rear spread
terminals terminals
I3 Magnetic trip Iu Rated N= 50% Protection of

current [A] uninterrupted N= 100% the neutral
current of the at 50% or
circuit-breaker [A] at 100% of
that of the
In Rated current phases [A]
of the Icu Rated ultimate
thermomagnetic short-circuit
trip unit [A] breaking capacity
[A]
Icw Rated short-time

withstand current
for 1s
TMF = Thermomagnetic TMA = Thermomagnetic MF = Fixed magnetic

trip unit with fixed trip unit with only trip units
thermal and adjustable thermal
magnetic threshold and magnetic MA = Adjustable
threshold magnetic only
TMD = Thermomagnetic trip units
trip unit with TMG = Thermomagnetic
adjustable thermal trip unit for PR22_ = Electronic trip units
and fixed magnetic generator
7 threshold protection PR23_ = Electronic trip units
PR33_ = Electronic trip units
7/2
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Instructions for ordering
Ordering Tmax circuit-breakers fitted with the accessories indicated in the catalogue means that
these must be indicated by means of the relative sales codes expressly associated with the circuit-
breaker code. The following examples are of particular importance for correctly loading orders for
Tmax circuit-breakers fitted with accessories.
1) Terminal Kit for fixed circuit-breaker

To fit the circuit-breaker with different terminal accessories than those supplied on the basic circuit-
breaker, it is possible to ask for complete kits (6 or 8 pieces) or half kits (3 or 4 pieces). For conversion
of a complete circuit-breaker, it is necessary to specify the complete terminal kit. In the case of a
mixed solution, the first code specified indicates the terminals to be mounted at the top, the second
indicates the terminals to be mounted at the bottom. On the other hand, when only 3 or 4 pieces
are requested, it is important to specify expressly whether the half kit is to be mounted at the top (*)
rather than at the bottom (**).
a) Tmax T3N 250 with top FC Cu and bottom F terminals

1SDA...R1
T3N 250 TMD 63 3p F F 051241
1/2 KIT FC Cu T3 3p(*) 051482
c) Tmax T3N 250 with top F and bottom FC Cu terminals

1SDA...R1
T3N 250 TMD 63 3p F F 051241
1/2 KIT FC Cu T3 3p(**) 051482
d) Tmax T3N 250 with FC Cu top and bottom terminals

1SDA...R1
T3N 250 TMD 63 3p F F 051241
1 KIT FC Cu T3 3p 051480
e) Tmax T3N 250 with top ES and FC Cu bottom terminals

1SDA...R1
T3N 250 TMD 63 3p F F 051241
1/2 KIT ES T3 3p(*) 051494
1/2 KIT FC Cu T3 3p(**) 051482
2) T2-T3 electrical accessories on moving part of plug-in circuit-breaker

Fitting the moving parts of plug-in T2-T3 circuit-breakers with SOR, UVR and AUX and with SOR-C,
UVR-C and AUX-C accessories always requires the appropriate plug-socket indicated in the cata-
logue.
a) Tmax T2N 160 moving part of plug-in circuit-breakers with auxiliary contacts
1SDA...R1
T2N 160 F F PR221DS-LS 10 4p 051128
Kit P MP T2 4p 051412
AUX-C 2Q 1SY 055504
socket-plug connectors 6 pole 051363
b) Tmax T2N 160 moving part of plug-in circuit-breakers with auxiliary contacts and opening coil
1SDA...R1
T2N 160 F F TMD 10 4p 050970
Kit P MP T2 4p 051412
AUX 3Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC 051369
SOR 220...240 V AC / 220...250 V DC
socket-plug connectors 6 pole
051336
051363
7
7/3
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
3) T4-T5 electrical accessories on moving part of plug-in circuit-breaker

Fitting the moving parts of plug-in T4-T5 circuit-breakers with SOR, UVR and AUX accessories
always requires the appropriate plug-sockets, i.e. in the case of cabled electrical accessories
SOR-C, UVR-C, AUX-C, MOE , MOE-E and AUE, the ADP adapters indicated in the catalogue.
a) Tmax T4H 250 moving part of plug-in circuit-breakers with auxiliary contacts
1SDA...R1
T4L 250 F F P221DS-LS/I 100 4p 054081
Kit P MP T4 4p 054840
AUX 3Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC 051369
b) Tmax T4H 250 moving part of plug-in circuit-breakers with cabled auxiliary contacts
1SDA...R1
T4L 250 F F P221DS-LS/I 100 4p 054081
Kit P MP T4 4p 054840
AUX-C 3Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC 054911
ADP – 12 pin adapter 054923
c) Tmax T5H 630 moving part of plug-in circuit-breaker with SOR-C, MOE and AUX-C
1SDA...R1
T4L 250 F F P221DS-LS/I 100 4p 054081
Kit P MP T4 4p 054840
SOR-C 220..240 V AC – 220...250V DC 054873
MOE T4-T5 220...250 V AC/DC 054897
AU-C 1Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC 054910
4) T4-T5 electrical accessories on moving part of withdrawable circuit-breaker

Fitting the moving parts of T4-T5 withdrawable circuit-breakers can only take place using electrical
accessories in the cabled version, i.e. SOR-C, UVR-C, AUX-C, MOE, MOE-E and AUE with ADP
adapter.
a) Tmax T5V 630 moving part of withdrawable circuit-breaker with UVR-C and MOE
1SDA...R1
T5V 630 F F TMA 500 4p N=100% 054495
Kit W MP T5 630 4p 054850
UVR-C 24...30 V AC/DC 054887
MOE T4-T5 24 V DC 054894
b) Tmax T4S 250 moving part of withdrawable circuit-breaker SOR-C, RHE and AUE
1SDA...R1
T4S 250 PR221DS-LS/I 100 4p F F 054033
KIT W MP T4 4p 054842
RHE normal for withdrawable circuit-breaker 054933
AUE – 2 early contacts 054925
SOR-C 220...240 V AC / 220...250 V DC 054873
7/4
1SDC210015D0205
5) Rear mechanical interlock T3
The rear MIR interlock for T3 allows all the accessories to be used. To be able to take the circuit-
breakers and/or the fixed parts mounted directly on the interlocking plate, it is necessary to use
code 1SDA050093R1 to be specified regarding the second circuit-breaker (or fixed part) to be
interlocked.
Horizontal mechanical interlock made between two T3S 250

1SDA...R1
POS1 T3S 250 TMD 200 4p FF 051305
MIR-H rear mechanical interlock for T3 063324
POS2 T3S 250 TMD 160 4p FF 051304
Extra code for circuit-breaker/fixed part mounted on the interlock 050093
6) T4-T5 mechanical interlock

The rear interlock for T4 and T5, consisting of the MIR-HB or MIR-VB frame unit and the MIR-P
plates, allows use of all the front accessories compatible with the circuit-breakers used. To be able
to receive the circuit-breakers mounted directly on the interlock plate, code 1SDA050093R1 must
be specified regarding the second circuit-breaker (or fixed part) which is to be interlocked.
Horizontal mechanical interlock made between T4H 320 and T5L 630
1SDA...R1
POS1 T4H 320 PR221DS-LS/I 320 4p F F 054137
MIR-HB horizontal interlock frame unit 054946
MIR-P plates for type C interlock 054950
POS2 T5L 630 PR221DS-LS/I 630 4p F F 054424
Code for circuit-breakers mounted on the plate 050093
7) PR222DS/PD T4-T5
The T4 and T5 circuit-breakers can be fitted with the PR222DS/PD electronic trip unit, with commu-
nication and integrated control functions, using the special extracodes indicated in the catalogue.
The circuit-breakers fitted with the PR222DS/PD trip unit can only have the AUX-E electronic version
of auxiliary contacts mounted, to communicate the state of the circuit-breaker to the PR222DS/PD,
and the MOE-E dedicated stored energy operating mechanism, to remotely control circuit-breaker
opening and closing.
a) T4V 250 with dialogue, auxiliary contacts and motor operator

1SDA...R1
T4V 250 PR222DS/PD-LSIG 250 3p F F 054104
Extracode - Dialogue unit for LSIG 055067
AUX-E-C 1Q 1SY 054916
MOE-E T4-T5 380 V AC 054903
X3 for PR222DS/P/PD T4-T5 F 055059
b) T4V 250 moving part of withdrawable circuit-breaker with dialogue, auxiliary contacts and motor
operator
1SDA...R1
T4V 250 PR222DS/PD-LSIG 250 3p F F 054104
Extracode - Dialogue unit for LSIG 055067
Kit W MP T4 054841
AUX-E-C 1Q 1SY 054916
ADP - 6 pin adapter 054922
MOE-E T4-T5 380 V AC 054903
X3 for PR222DS/P/PD T4-T5 P/W 055061
7/5
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
8) Rating plug for Tmax T7

Thanks to the extra codes for the Tmax T7 rating plug (see page 3/42), it is possible to ask for a
Tmax T7 circuit-breaker with lower rated current than the standard versions.
T7S 400 with PR332/P LSIG – lever operating mechanism

1SDA...R1
T7S 800 PR332/P-LSIG In=800 3p F F 061968
Extra code for 400 A rating plug 063153
9) Sliding contacts for Tmax T7 in version withdrawable

The electrical accessories of Tmax T7 in the withdrawable version must be fitted with suitable sliding
contacts for the moving part and for the fixed part, as per table on page 3/4.
(a) T7S 1000 PR231/P with lever operating mechanism in withdrawable version, opening coil and
auxiliary contacts
1SDA...R1
POS1 T7S 1000 PR231/P LS/I In=1000A 3p F F 062738
Kit MP T7-T7M W 3p 062162
SOR 240...250 V AC/DC Opening coil 062070
AUX 1Q + 1SY Auxiliary contacts 062104
Right PM sliding block 062166
POS2 Fixed part for withdrawable T7 062045
Right PF sliding block 062169
(b) T7S 1250 PR332/P with lever operating mechanism in withdrawable version and undervoltage release
1SDA...R1
POS1 T7S 1250 PR332/P LSIG In=1250A 3p F F 062871
Kit MP T7-T7M W 3p 062162
UVR 240...250 V AC/DC Undervoltage release 062092
Right PM sliding block 062166
Central PM sliding block 062165
POS2 Fixed part for withdrawable T7 062045
Right PF sliding block 062169
Central PF sliding block 062168
10) Interchangeability of the PR231/P trip unit for Tmax T7
Interchangeable T7S 800 PR231/P, with lever operating mechanism

1SDA...R1
T7S 800 PR231/P LS/I In=800 A 4p F F 061973
Extra code for PR231/P interchangeability 063140
11) Motorisation for Tmax T7

For Tmax T7 motorisation, the circuit-breaker in T7M version which can be motorised, must be fitted
with spring charging geared motor, opening coil and closing coil.
Motorised T7S 1000 PR232/P

1SDA...R1
T7S 1000 M PR232/P LSI In=1000 A 4p F F 062763
220…250 V AC/DC Spring charging geared motor 062116
SOR 240…250 V AC/DC Opening coil 062070
7 SCR 240…250 V AC/DC Closing coil 062081
7/6
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Power distribution circuit-breakers
T1 1p 160 – Fixed (F) – 1 Pole - Front terminals for copper cables (FC Cu)
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
B
Thermomagnetic trip unit Icu (230 V) 25 kA(1)
with fixed thresholds - TMF
1SDC210180F0004
16 630 052616
20 630 052617
25 630 052618
32 630 052619
40 630 052620
50 630 052621
63 630 052622
80 800 052623
100 1000 052624
125 1250 052625
160 1600 052626
(1)
In = 16 A, In = 20 A A Icw @ 230 V = 16 kA
T1 160 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles - Front terminals for copper cables (FC Cu)
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
B C N
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMD Icu (415 V) 16 kA 25 kA 36 kA
16 500 063514
1SDC210302F0004
630 050870
20 500 063515
630 050871
25 500 063516 063526
630 050872 050894
32 500 063517 063527 050917
630 050873 050895
40 500 063518 063528 050918
630 050874 050896
50 500 063519 063529 050919
630 050875 050897
63 630 050876 050898 050920
80 800 050877 050899 050921
100 1000 050878 050900 050922
125 1250 050879 050901 050923
160 1600 050880 050902 050924
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
B C N
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMD Icu (415 V) 16 kA 25 kA 36 kA
16 500 063520
630 050881
20 500 063521
630 050882
25 500 063522 063530
630 050883 050905
32 500 063523 063531 050928
630 050884 050906
40 500 063524 063532 050929
630 050885 050907
50 500 063525 063533 050930
630 050886 050908
63 630 050887 050909 050931
80 800 050888 050910 050932
100 1000 050889 050911 050933
N=50%
N=100%
125
160
160
1250
1600
1600
050890
050891
050936
050912
050913
050937
050934
050935
050938
7
see “Abbreviation caption” page 7/2
7/7
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
T2 160 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles - Front terminals (F)

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMD Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 85 kA
1.6 16 050940 050984 051028 051072
2 20 050941 050985 051029 051073
1SDC210303F0004
2.5 25 050942 050986 051030 051074

3.2 32 050943 050987 051031 051075
4 40 050944 050988 051032 051076
5 50 050945 050989 051033 051077
6.3 63 050946 050990 051034 051078
8 80 050947 050991 051035 051079
10 100 050948 050992 051036 051080
12.5 125 050949 050993 051037 051081
16 500 050950 050994 051038 051082
20 500 050951 050995 051039 051083
25 500 050952 050996 051040 051084
32 500 050953 050997 051041 051085
40 500 050954 050998 051042 051086
50 500 050955 050999 051043 051087
63 630 050956 051000 051044 051088
80 800 050957 051001 051045 051089
100 1000 050958 051002 051046 051090
125 1250 050959 051003 051047 051091
160 1600 050960 051004 051048 051092
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S
Thermomagnetic trip unit for
Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA
generator protection - TMG(1)
25 160 061867 061883
40 200 061868 061884
63 200 061869 061885
80 240 061870 061886
100 300 061871 061887
125 375 061872 061888
160 480 061873 061889
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
Electronic trip unit Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 85 kA
PR221DS-LS/I 10 051123 051133 051143 051153
PR221DS-LS/I 25 051124 051134 051144 051154
PR221DS-LS/I 63 051125 051135 051145 051155
PR221DS-LS/I 100 051126 051136 051146 051156
PR221DS-LS/I 160 051127 051137 051147 051157
PR221DS-I 10 051163 051174 051184 051194
PR221DS-I 25 051164 051175 051185 051195
PR221DS-I 63 051165 051176 051186 051196
PR221DS-I 100 051166 051177 051187 051197
PR221DS-I 160 051168 051178 051188 051198
PR221GP 63 065352 065358
PR221GP 100 065353 065359
PR221GP 160 065354 065360
7 Note:
The trip coil of the T2 circuit-breaker with PR221DS electronic trip unit is housed in the right slot.
For T2 with PR221DS the following groups of auxiliary contacts are available:
– 1SDA053704R1 Aux-C 1S51-1Q-1SY
– 1SDA055504R1 Aux-C 2Q-1SY
(1)
For availability, please ask ABB SACE see “Abbreviation caption” page 7/2
7/8
1SDC210015D0205
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMD Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 85 kA
1.6 16 050962 051006 051050 051094
2 20 050963 051007 051051 051095
1SDC210303F0004
2.5 25 050964 051008 051052 051096

3.2 32 050965 051009 051053 051097
4 40 050966 051010 051054 051098
5 50 050967 051011 051055 051099
6.3 63 050968 051012 051056 051100
8 80 050969 051013 051057 051101
10 100 050970 051014 051058 051102
12.5 125 050971 051015 051059 051103
16 500 050972 051016 051060 051104
20 500 050973 051017 051061 051105
25 500 050974 051018 051062 051106
32 500 050975 051019 051063 051107
40 500 050976 051020 051064 051108
50 500 050977 051021 051065 051109
63 630 050978 051022 051066 051110
80 800 050979 051023 051067 051111
100 1000 050980 051024 051068 051112
N=50% 125 1250 050981 051025 051069 051113
N=50% 160 1600 050982 051026 051070 051114
N=100% 125 1250 051115 051117 051119 051121
N=100% 160 1600 051116 051118 051120 051122
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S
generator protection - TMG(1) Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA
25 160 061875 061891
40 200 061876 061892
63 200 061877 061893
80 240 061878 061894
100 300 061879 061895
125 375 061880 061896
160 480 061881 061897
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
PR221DS-LS/I 10 051128 051138 051148 051158
PR221DS-LS/I 25 051129 051139 051149 051159
PR221DS-LS/I 63 051130 051140 051150 051160
PR221DS-LS/I 100 051131 051141 051151 051161
PR221DS-LS/I 160 N=50% 051132 051142 051152 051162
PR221DS-LS/I 160 N=100% 051613 051614 051615 051616
PR221DS-I 10 051169 051179 051189 051199
PR221DS-I 25 051170 051180 051190 051200
PR221DS-I 63 051171 051181 051191 051201
PR221DS-I 100 051172 051182 051192 051202
PR221DS-I 160 N=50% 051173 051183 051193 051203
PR221DS-I 160 N=100% 051617 051618 051619 051620
PR221GP 63 065355 065361
PR221GP 100 065356 065362
PR221GP 160 065357 065363
Note:
The trip coil of the T2 circuit-breaker with PR221DS electronic trip unit is housed in the right slot.
For T2 with PR221DS the following groups of auxiliary contacts are available:
7
– 1SDA053704R1 Aux-C 1S51-1Q-1SY
– 1SDA055504R1 Aux-C 2Q-1SY
(1)
For availability, please ask ABB SACE see “Abbreviation caption” page 7/2
7/9
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMD Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA
63 630 051241 051263
80 800 051242 051264
100 1000 051243 051265
1SDC210304F0004
125 1250 051244 051266

160 1600 051245 051267
200 2000 051246 051268
250 2500 051247 051269
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S
Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA
generator protection - TMG
63 400 055105 055119
80 400 055106 055120
100 400 055107 055121
125 400 055108 055122
160 480 055109 055123
200 600 055110 055124
250 750 055111 055125

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMD Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA
63 630 051252 051274
80 800 051253 051275
100 1000 051254 051276
N=50% 125 1250 051255 051277
N=50% 160 1600 051256 051278
N=50% 200 2000 051257 051279
N=50% 250 2500 051258 051280
N=100% 125 1250 051303 051307
N=100% 160 1600 051304 051308
N=100% 200 2000 051305 051309
N=100% 250 2500 051306 051310
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S
Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA
generator protection - TMG
63 400 055112 055126
80 400 055113 055127
100 400 055114 055128
125 400 055115 055129
160 480 055116 055130
200 600 055117 055131
250 750 055118 055132
7
7/10
1SDC210015D0205
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Thermomagnetic trip unit - Icu
TMD and TMA (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA
20 320 054171 054189 054207 054225 054243

32 320 054172 054190 054208 054226 054244
50 500 054173 054191 054209 054227 054245
1SDC210305F0004
80 400...800 054174 054192 054210 054228 054246

100 500...1000 054175 054193 054211 054229 054247
125 625...1250 054176 054194 054212 054230 054248
160 800...1600 054177 054195 054213 054231 054249
200 1000...2000 054178 054196 054214 054232 054250
250 1250...2500 054179 054197 054215 054233 054251
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
Electronic trip unit (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA
PR221DS-LS/I 100 053997 054021 054045 054069 054093

PR221DS-LS/I 160 053998 054022 054046 054070 054094
PR221DS-LS/I 250 053999 054023 054047 054071 054095
PR221DS-I 100 054000 054024 054048 054072 054096
PR221DS-I 160 054001 054025 054049 054073 054097
PR221DS-I 250 054002 054026 054050 054074 054098
PR222DS/P-LSI 100 054003 054027 054051 054075 054099
PR222DS/P-LSI 160 054004 054028 054052 054076 054100
PR222DS/P-LSI 250 054005 054029 054053 054077 054101
PR222DS/P-LSIG 100 054006 054030 054054 054078 054102
PR222DS/P-LSIG 160 054007 054031 054055 054079 054103
PR222DS/P-LSIG 250 054008 054032 054056 054080 054104
PR223DS 160 059491 059499 059507 059515 059523
PR223DS 250 059493 059501 059509 059517 059525
7
7/11
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Thermomagnetic trip unit - Icu
TMD and TMA (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA
20 320 054180 054198 054216 054234 054252

32 320 054181 054199 054217 054235 054253
50 500 054182 054200 054218 054236 054254
1SDC210305F0004
80 400...800 054183 054201 054219 054237 054255

100 500...1000 054184 054202 054220 054238 054256
N=50% 125 625...1250 054185 054203 054221 054239 054257
N=50% 160 800...1600 054186 054204 054222 054240 054258
N=50% 200 1000...2000 054187 054205 054223 054241 054259
N=50% 250 1250...2500 054188 054206 054224 054242 054260
N=100% 125 625...1250 054271 054275 054279 054283 054287
N=100% 160 800...1600 054272 054276 054280 054284 054288
N=100% 200 1000...2000 054273 054277 054281 054285 054289
N=100% 250 1250...2500 054274 054278 054282 054286 054290
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
PR221DS-LS/I 100 054009 054033 054057 054081 054105

PR221DS-LS/I 160 054010 054034 054058 054082 054106
PR221DS-LS/I 250 054011 054035 054059 054083 054107
PR221DS-I 100 054012 054036 054060 054084 054108
PR221DS-I 160 054013 054037 054061 054085 054109
PR221DS-I 250 054014 054038 054062 054086 054110
PR222DS/P-LSI 100 054015 054039 054063 054087 054111
PR222DS/P-LSI 160 054016 054040 054064 054088 054112
PR222DS/P-LSI 250 054017 054041 054065 054089 054113
PR222DS/P-LSIG 100 054018 054042 054066 054090 054114
PR222DS/P-LSIG 160 054019 054043 054067 054091 054115
PR222DS/P-LSIG 250 054020 054044 054068 054092 054116
PR223DS 160 059492 059500 059508 059516 059524
PR223DS 250 059494 059502 059510 059518 059526
7
7/12
1SDC210015D0205
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
PR221DS-LS/I 320 054117 054125 054133 054141 054149

PR221DS-I 320 054118 054126 054134 054142 054150
PR222DS/P-LSI 320 054119 054127 054135 054143 054151
1SDC210305F0004
PR222DS/P-LSIG 320 054120 054128 054136 054144 054152

PR223DS 320 059495 059503 059511 059519 059527

In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
PR221DS-LS/I 320 054121 054129 054137 054145 054153

PR221DS-I 320 054122 054130 054138 054146 054154
PR222DS/P-LSI 320 054123 054131 054139 054147 054155
PR222DS/P-LSIG 320 054124 054132 054140 054148 054156
PR223DS 320 059496 059504 059512 059520 059528
7
7/13
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMA (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA
320 1600...3200 054436 054440 054444 054448 054452

400 2000...4000 054437 054441 054445 054449 054453
1SDC210306F0004
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
Electronic trip unit 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA 200 kA
(415 V)
PR221DS-LS/I 320 054316 054332 054348 054364 054380
PR221DS-LS/I 400 054317 054333 054349 054365 054381
PR221DS-I 320 054318 054334 054350 054366 054382
PR221DS-I 400 054319 054335 054351 054367 054383
PR222DS/P-LSI 320 054320 054336 054352 054368 054384
PR222DS/P-LSI 400 054321 054337 054353 054369 054385
PR222DS/P-LSIG 320 054322 054338 054354 054370 054386
PR222DS/P-LSIG 400 054323 054339 054355 054371 054387
PR223DS 320 059529 059535 059541 059547 059553
PR223DS 400 059531 059537 059543 059549 059555

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
N=50% 320 1600...3200 054438 054442 054446 054450 054454

N=50% 400 2000...4000 054439 054443 054447 054451 054455
N=100% 320 1600...3200 054477 054479 054481 054483 054485
N=100% 400 2000...4000 054478 054480 054482 054484 054486
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
PR221DS-LS/I 320 054324 054340 054356 054372 054388

PR221DS-LS/I 400 054325 054341 054357 054373 054389
PR221DS-I 320 054326 054342 054358 054374 054390
PR221DS-I 400 054327 054343 054359 054375 054391
PR222DS/P-LSI 320 054328 054344 054360 054376 054392
PR222DS/P-LSI 400 054329 054345 054361 054377 054393
PR222DS/P-LSIG 320 054330 054346 054362 054378 054394
PR222DS/P-LSIG 400 054331 054347 054363 054379 054395
PR223DS 320 059530 059536 059542 059548 059554
PR223DS 400 059532 059538 059544 059550 059556
7
7/14
1SDC210015D0205
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
500 2500...5000 054456 054461 054465 054469 054473
In 1SDA ...... R1
1SDC210306F0004
N S H L V
Icu
PR221DS-LS/I 630 054396 054404 054412 054420 054428

PR221DS-I 630 054397 054405 054413 054421 054429
PR222DS/P-LSI 630 054398 054406 054414 054422 054430
PR222DS/P-LSIG 630 054399 054407 054415 054423 054431
PR223DS 630 059533 059539 059545 059551 059557

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
N=50% 500 2500...5000 054459 054463 054467 054471 054475

N=100% 500 2500...5000 054487 054489 054491 054493 054495
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
PR221DS-LS/I 630 054400 054408 054416 054424 054432

PR221DS-I 630 054401 054409 054417 054425 054433
PR222DS/P-LSI 630 054402 054410 054418 054426 054434
PR222DS/P-LSIG 630 054403 054411 054419 054427 054435
PR223DS 630 059534 059540 059546 059552 059558
7
7/15
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMA Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA
630 3150…6300 060202 060204 060206 060208
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
1SDC210A13F0001
PR221DS-LS/I 630 060226 060236 060246 060256

PR221DS-I 630 060227 060237 060247 060257
PR222DS/P-LSI 630 060228 060238 060248 060258
PR222DS/P-LSIG 630 060229 060239 060249 060259
PR223DS 630 060230 060240 060250 060260

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
N=50% 630 3150…6300 060203 060205 060207 060209
N=100% 630 3150…6300 060210 060211 060212 060213
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
PR221DS-LS/I 630 060231 060241 060251 060262
PR221DS-I 630 060232 060242 060252 060263
PR222DS/P-LSI 630 060233 060243 060253 060264
PR222DS/P-LSIG 630 060234 060244 060254 060265
PR223DS 630 060235 060245 060255 060266

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
800 4000…8000 060214 060216 060218 060220
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
PR221DS-LS/I 800 060268 060278 060289 060299
PR221DS-I 800 060269 060279 060290 060300
PR222DS/P-LSI 800 060270 060280 060291 060301
PR222DS/P-LSIG 800 060271 060281 060292 060302
PR223DS 800 060272 060282 060293 060303
7
7/16
1SDC210015D0205
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
N=50% 800 4000…8000 060215 060217 060219 060221
N=100% 800 4000…8000 060222 060223 060224 060225
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
1SDC210A13F0001

PR221DS-LS/I 800 060273 060283 060294 060305
PR221DS-I 800 060274 060284 060295 060306
PR222DS/P-LSI 800 060275 060285 060296 060307
PR222DS/P-LSIG 800 060276 060286 060297 060308
PR223DS 800 060277 060287 060298 060309
T6 1000 – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles

In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
PR221DS-LS/I 1000 060537 060547 060561 060574
PR221DS-I 1000 060538 060548 060562 060575
PR222DS/P-LSI 1000 060539 060552 060563 060576
PR222DS/P-LSIG 1000 060540 060554 060564 060577
PR223DS 1000 060541 060555 060565 060578
Note: A type of terminal among ES - FC CuAl - R must necessarly be mounted on the T6 1000 A circuit-breaker.
T6 1000 – Fixed (F) – 4 Poles

In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
PR221DS-LS/I 1000 060542 060556 060566 060580
PR221DS-I 1000 060543 060557 060567 060581
PR222DS/P-LSI 1000 060544 060558 060568 060582
PR222DS/P-LSIG 1000 060545 060559 060569 060583
PR223DS 1000 060546 060560 060573 060584
Note: A type of terminal among EF - ES - FC CuAl - R must necessarly be mounted on the T6 1000 A circuit-breaker.
If the T6 1000 will be ordered without one of the previous terminal kits, the EF terminals are supplied by default.
7
7/17
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P LS/I(1) 800 061963 062642 062674 062706
PR231/P I(1) 800 061962 062641 062673 062705
PR232/P LSI 800 061964 062643 062675 062707
PR331/P LSIG 800 061965 062644 062676 062708
PR332/P LI 800 061966 062645 062677 062709
1SDC210P08F0001
PR332/P LSI 800 061967 062646 062678 062710

PR332/P LSIG 800 061968 062647 062679 062711
PR332/P LSIRc(2) 800 061969 062648 062680 062712
(1)
To allow the interchangeability of PR231, T7-T7M circuit-breakers must be ordered specifying extra codes for its interchangeability. See page 7/60.
(2)
RC protection can be obtained only with 1SDA063869R1 toroid.

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P LS/I(1) 800 061973 062650 062682 062714
PR231/P I(1) 800 061972 062649 062681 062713
PR232/P LSI 800 061974 062651 062683 062715
PR331/P LSIG 800 061975 062652 062684 062716
PR332/P LI 800 061976 062653 062685 062717
PR332/P LSI 800 061977 062654 062686 062718
PR332/P LSIG 800 061978 062655 062687 062719
PR332/P LSIRc(2) 800 061979 062656 062688 062720
(1)
(2)

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P LS/I(1) 1000 062738 062770 062802 062834
PR231/P I(1) 1000 062737 062769 062801 062833
PR232/P LSI 1000 062739 062771 062803 062835
PR331/P LSIG 1000 062740 062772 062804 062836
PR332/P LI 1000 062741 062773 062805 062837
PR332/P LSI 1000 062742 062774 062806 062838
PR332/P LSIG 1000 062743 062775 062807 062839
PR332/P LSIRc(2) 1000 062744 062776 062808 062840
(1)
(2)

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P LS/I(1) 1000 062746 062778 062810 062842
PR231/P I(1) 1000 062745 062777 062809 062841
PR232/P LSI 1000 062747 062779 062811 062843
PR331/P LSIG 1000 062748 062780 062812 062844
PR332/P LI 1000 062749 062781 062813 062845
PR332/P LSI 1000 062750 062782 062814 062846
7 PR332/P LSIG
PR332/P LSIRc(2)
1000
1000
062751
062752
062783
062784
062815
062816
062847
062848
(1)
(2)
7/18
1SDC210015D0205
In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P LS/I(1) 1250 062866 062898 062930 062962
PR231/P I(1) 1250 062865 062897 062929 062961
PR232/P LSI 1250 062867 062899 062931 062963
PR331/P LSIG 1250 062868 062900 062932 062964
PR332/P LI 1250 062869 062901 062933 062965
1SDC210P08F0001
PR332/P LSI 1250 062870 062902 062934 062966

PR332/P LSIG 1250 062871 062903 062935 062967
PR332/P LSIRc(2) 1250 062872 062904 062936 062968
(1)
(2)

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P LS/I(1) 1250 062874 062906 062938 062970
PR231/P I(1) 1250 062873 062905 062937 062969
PR232/P LSI 1250 062875 062907 062939 062971
PR331/P LSIG 1250 062876 062908 062940 062972
PR332/P LI 1250 062877 062909 062941 062973
PR332/P LSI 1250 062878 062910 062942 062974
PR332/P LSIG 1250 062879 062911 062943 062975
PR332/P LSIRc(2) 1250 062880 062912 062944 062976
(1)
(2)

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L
Electronic trip unit Icu (415 V) 50 kA 70 kA 120 kA
PR231/P LS/I(1) 1600 062994 063026 063058
PR231/P I(1) 1600 062993 063025 063057
PR232/P LSI 1600 062995 063027 063059
PR331/P LSIG 1600 062996 063028 063060
PR332/P LI 1600 062997 063029 063061
PR332/P LSI 1600 062998 063030 063062
PR332/P LSIG 1600 062999 063031 063063
PR332/P LSIRc(2) 1600 063000 063032 063064
(1)
(2)

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L
PR231/P LS/I(1) 1600 063002 063034 063066
PR231/P I(1) 1600 063001 063033 063065
PR232/P LSI 1600 063003 063035 063067
PR331/P LSIG 1600 063004 063036 063068
PR332/P LI 1600 063005 063037 063069
PR332/P LSI 1600 063006 063038 063070
PR332/P LSIG
PR332/P LSIRc(2)
1600
1600
063007
063008
063039
063040
063071
063072 7
(1)
(2)
7/19
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
T7 800 M – Fixed (F) – 3 Poles - Front terminals (F)

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P LS/I(1) 800 061981 062658 062690 062722
PR231/P I(1) 800 061980 062657 062689 062721
PR232/P LSI 800 061982 062659 062691 062723
PR331/P LSIG 800 061983 062660 062692 062724
1SDC210N68F0001
PR332/P LI 800 061984 062661 062693 062725

PR332/P LSI 800 061985 062662 062694 062726
PR332/P LSIG 800 061986 062663 062695 062727
PR332/P LSIRc(2) 800 061987 062664 062696 062728
(1)
(2)

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P LS/I(1) 800 061989 062666 062698 062730
PR231/P I(1) 800 061988 062665 062697 062729
PR232/P LSI 800 061990 062667 062699 062731
PR331/P LSIG 800 061991 062668 062700 062732
PR332/P LI 800 061992 062669 062701 062733
PR332/P LSI 800 061993 062670 062702 062734
PR332/P LSIG 800 061994 062671 062703 062735
PR332/P LSIRc(2) 800 061995 062672 062704 062736
(1)
(2)

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P LS/I(1) 1000 062754 062786 062818 062850
PR231/P I(1) 1000 062753 062785 062817 062849
PR232/P LSI 1000 062755 062787 062819 062851
PR331/P LSIG 1000 062756 062788 062820 062852
PR332/P LI 1000 062757 062789 062821 062853
PR332/P LSI 1000 062758 062790 062822 062854
PR332/P LSIG 1000 062759 062791 062823 062855
PR332/P LSIRc(2) 1000 062760 062792 062824 062856
(1)
(2)

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P LS/I(1) 1000 062762 062794 062826 062858
PR231/P I(1) 1000 062761 062793 062825 062857
PR232/P LSI 1000 062763 062795 062827 062859
PR331/P LSIG 1000 062764 062796 062828 062860
PR332/P LI 1000 062765 062797 062829 062861
PR332/P LSI 1000 062766 062798 062830 062862
7 PR332/P LSIG
PR332/P LSIRc(2)
1000
1000
062767
062768
062799
062800
062831
062832
062863
062864
(1)
(2)
7/20
1SDC210015D0205
In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P LS/I(1) 1250 062882 062914 062946 062978
PR231/P I(1) 1250 062881 062913 062945 062977
PR232/P LSI 1250 062883 062915 062947 062979
PR331/P LSIG 1250 062884 062916 062948 062980
1SDC210N68F0001
PR332/P LI 1250 062885 062917 062949 062981

PR332/P LSI 1250 062886 062918 062950 062982
PR332/P LSIG 1250 062887 062919 062951 062983
PR332/P LSIRc(2) 1250 062888 062920 062952 062984
(1)
(2)

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P LS/I(1) 1250 062890 062922 062954 062986
PR231/P I(1) 1250 062889 062921 062953 062985
PR232/P LSI 1250 062891 062923 062955 062987
PR331/P LSIG 1250 062892 062924 062956 062988
PR332/P LI 1250 062893 062925 062957 062989
PR332/P LSI 1250 062894 062926 062958 062990
PR332/P LSIG 1250 062895 062927 062959 062991
PR332/P LSIRc(2) 1250 062896 062928 062960 062992
(1)
(2)

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L
PR231/P LS/I(1) 1600 063010 063042 063074
PR231/P I(1) 1600 063009 063041 063073
PR232/P LSI 1600 063011 063043 063075
PR331/P LSIG 1600 063012 063044 063076
PR332/P LI 1600 063013 063045 063077
PR332/P LSI 1600 063014 063046 063078
PR332/P LSIG 1600 063015 063047 063079
PR332/P LSIRc(2) 1600 063016 063048 063080
(1)
(2)

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L
PR231/P LS/I(1) 1600 063018 063050 063082
PR231/P I(1) 1600 063017 063049 063081
PR232/P LSI 1600 063019 063051 063083
PR331/P LSIG 1600 063020 063052 063084
PR332/P LI 1600 063021 063053 063085
PR332/P LSI 1600 063022 063054 063086
PR332/P LSIG
PR332/P LSIRc(2)
1600
1600
063023
063024
063055
063056
063087
063088
7
(1)
(2)
7/21
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Circuit-breakers for zone selectivity
T4L 250 – Fixed (F) - Front terminals (F)

In 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Electronic trip unit Icu (415 V) 120 kA 120 kA
PR223EF 160 059477 059478
PR223EF 250 059479 059480
T4L 250 – Fixed (F) - Terminals for copper cables FC Cu 1000 V (AC)
In 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
PR223EF 160 064270 064271
PR223EF 250 064272 064273

In 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
PR223EF 320 059481 059482

In 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
PR223EF 320 059483 059484
PR223EF 400 059485 059486
In 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
PR223EF 320 064274 064275
PR223EF 400 064276 064277

In 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
PR223EF 630 059487 059488
In 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
7 PR223EF 630 064278 064279
7/22
1SDC210015D0205
In 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
PR223EF 630 060261 060267

In 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
PR223EF 800 060304 060310
T6L 1000 – Fixed (F)

In 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
PR223EF 1000 060579 060585
Note: A type of terminal among ES - FC CuAl - R must be mounted on the T6 1000 A circuit-breaker.
7/23
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Motor protection circuit-breakers

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
Magnetic only trip unit - MF and MA Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 85 kA
1 13 053110 053121 053132 053143
1.6 21 053111 053122 053133 053144
1SDC210303F0004
2 26 053112 053123 053134 053145

2.5 33 053113 053124 053135 053146
3.2 42 053114 053125 053136 053147
4 52 053115 053126 053137 053148
5 65 053116 053127 053138 053149
6.5 84 053117 053128 053139 053150
8.5 110 053118 053129 053140 053151
11 145 053119 053130 053141 053152
12.5 163 053120 053131 053142 053153
20 120...240 051207 051216 051224 051232
32 192...384 051208 051217 051225 051233
52 312...624 051209 051218 051226 051234
80 480...960 051210 051219 051227 051235
100 600...1200 051211 051220 051228 051236
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
PR221DS-I 10 051163 051174 051184 051194
PR221DS-I 25 051164 051175 051185 051195
PR221DS-I 63 051165 051176 051186 051196
PR221DS-I 100 051166 051177 051187 051197
PR221DS-I 160 051168 051178 051188 051198
PR221MP 40 065340 065343 065346 065349
PR221MP 63 065341 065344 065347 065350
PR221MP 100 065342 065345 065348 065351
Note: The trip coil of the T2 circuit-breaker with PR221DS electronic trip unit is housed in the right slot.
For T2 with PR 221DS the following groups of auxiliary contacts are available:
- 1SDA053704R1 Aux-C 1S51-1Q-1SY
- 1SDA055504R1 Aux-C 2Q-1SY

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S
Magnetic only trip unit - MA Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA
100 600...1200 051315 051320
125 750...1500 051316 051321
160 960...1920 051317 051322
200 1200...2400 051318 051323
7 Note: T2, T4, T5 and T6 in the three-pole version equipped with PR221DS-I electronic trip units and T7 in the three-pole version equipped with
PR231/P-I electronic trip units, can be used for motor protection.
7/24
1SDC210015D0205
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
N S L
Magnetic only trip unit - MA Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA 120 kA
10 60...140 055068 055071 055074
25 150...350 055069 055072 055075
52 312...728 055070 055073 055076
80 480...1120 054296 054302 054308
1SDC210305F0004
100 600...1400 054297 054303 054309

125 750...1750 054298 054304 054310
160 960...2240 054299 054305 054311
200 1200..2800 054300 054306 054312
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S L
Electronic trip unit for motor
Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA 120 kA
protection
PR222MP 100 054522 054525 054528
PR222MP 160 054523 054526 054529
PR222MP 200 054524 054527 054530
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
PR221DS-I 100 054000 054024 054048 054072 054096

PR221DS-I 160 054001 054025 054049 054073 054097
PR221DS-I 250 054002 054026 054050 054074 054098

In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
PR221DS-I 320 054118 054126 054134 054142 054150
Note: T2, T4, T5 and T6 in the three-pole version equipped with PR221DS-I electronic trip units and T7 in the three-pole version equipped with
7
7/25
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Motor protection circuit-breakers

In 1SDA ...... R1
N S L
Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA 120 kA
protection
PR222MP 320 054551 054553 054555
PR222MP 400 054552 054554 054556
1SDC210306F0004
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
PR221DS-I 320 054318 054334 054350 054366 054382

PR221DS-I 400 054319 054335 054351 054367 054383

In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L V
Icu
PR221DS-I 630 054397 054405 054413 054421 054429

In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
PR221DS-I 630 060227 060237 060247 060257

In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
Icu (415 V) 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA
protection
PR222MP 630 060311 060312 060313 060314
In 1SDA ...... R1
N S H L
PR221DS-I 800 060269 060279 060290 060300
7
7/26
1SDC210015D0205
In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P I 800 061962 062641 062673 062705

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P I 1000 062737 062769 062801 062833

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P I 1250 062865 062897 062929 062961

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L
PR231/P I 1600 062993 063025 063057

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P I 800 061980 062657 062689 062721

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P I 1000 062753 062785 062817 062849

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L V
PR231/P I 1250 062851 062913 062945 062977

In 1SDA ...... R1
S H L
PR231/P I 1600 063009 063041 063073
7
7/27
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
In 1SDA ...... R1
L V
Icu (1000 V AC) 12 kA 20 kA
Electronic trip unit Icu (1150 V AC) 12 kA
PR221DS-LS/I 100 054505 054513
PR221DS-I 100 054506 054514
PR222DS/P-LSI 100 054507 054515
PR222DS/P-LSIG 100 054508 054516
PR221DS-LS/I 250 054509 054517
1SDC210244F0004
PR221DS-I 250 054510 054518

PR222DS/P-LSI 250 054511 054519
PR222DS/P-LSIG 250 054512 054520
PR222MP 100 063434
PR222MP 160 063435
PR222MP 200 063436
In 1SDA ...... R1
L V
Icu (1000 V AC) 12 kA 20 kA
PR221DS-LS/I 100 063418 063426
PR221DS-I 100 063419 063427
PR222DS/P-LSI 100 063420 063428
PR222DS/P-LSIG 100 063421 063429
PR221DS-LS/I 250 063422 063430
PR221DS-I 250 063423 063431
PR222DS/P-LSI 250 063424 063432
PR222DS/P-LSIG 250 063425 063433
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
V
Thermomagnetic trip unit - Icu (1000 V AC) 20 kA
TMD and TMA Icu (1150 V AC) 12 kA
32 320 063410
50 500 063411
80 400...800 063412
100 500...1000 063413
125 625...1250 063414
160 800...1600 063415
200 1000...2000 063416
250 1250...2500 063417
7
7/28
1SDC210015D0205
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
V
Icu (1000 V AC) 20 kA
Thermomagnetic trip unit - Icu (1150 V AC) 12 kA
TMD and TMA Icu (1000 V DC) 40 kA
32 320 054497
50 500 054498
80 400...800 054499
100 500...1000 054500
1SDC210244F0004
125 625...1250 054501

160 800...1600 054502
200 1000...2000 054503
250 1250...2500 054504
In 1SDA ...... R1
L V
Icu (1000 V AC) 12 kA 20 kA
PR221DS-LS/I 320 063477 063485
PR221DS-I 320 063478 063486
PR222DS/P-LSI 320 063479 063487
PR222DS/P-LSIG 320 063480 063488
PR221DS-LS/I 400 054535 054539
1SDC210247F0004
PR221DS-I 400 054536 054540

PR222DS/P-LSI 400 054537 054541
PR222DS/P-LSIG 400 054538 054542
PR222MP 320 063456
PR222MP 400 063457
In 1SDA ...... R1
L V
Icu (1000 V AC) 12 kA 20 kA
PR221DS-LS/I 320 063481 063489
PR221DS-I 320 063482 063490
PR222DS/P-LSI 320 063483 063491
PR222DS/P-LSIG 320 063484 063492
PR221DS-LS/I 400 063440 063444
PR221DS-I 400 063441 063445
PR222DS/P-LSI 400 063442 063446
PR222DS/P-LSIG 400 063443 063447
7
7/29
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
V
Icu (1000 V AC) 20 kA
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMA Icu (1150 V AC) 12 kA
320 1600...3200 063437
400 2000...4000 063438
1SDC210247F0004
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
V
Icu (1000 V AC) 20 kA
Icu (1150 V AC) 12 kA
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMA Icu (1000 V DC) 40 kA
320 1600...3200 054531
400 2000...4000 054532
7
7/30
1SDC210015D0205
In 1SDA ...... R1
L V
Icu (1000 V AC) 12 kA 20 kA
PR221DS-LS/I 630 054543 054547
PR221DS-I 630 054544 054548
PR222DS/P-LSI 630 054545 054549
PR222DS/P-LSIG 630 054546 054550
1SDC210247F0004
In 1SDA ...... R1
L V
Icu (1000 V AC) 12 kA 20 kA
PR221DS-LS/I 630 063448 063452
PR221DS-I 630 063449 063453
PR222DS/P-LSI 630 063450 063454
PR222DS/P-LSIG 630 063451 063455
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
V
Icu (1000 V AC) 20 kA
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMA Icu (1150 V AC) 12 kA
500 2500...5000 063439
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
V
Icu (1000 V AC) 20 kA
Icu (1150 V AC) 12 kA
500 2500...5000 054533
7
7/31
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes

In 1SDA ...... R1
L
PR221DS-LS/I 630 060319
PR221DS-I 630 060320
PR222DS/P-LSI 630 060321
PR222DS/P-LSIG 630 060322
1SDC210A13F0001

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
L
Icu (1000 V AC) 12 kA
630 3150…6300 060315

In 1SDA ...... R1
L
PR221DS-LS/I 800 060323
PR221DS-I 800 060324
PR222DS/P-LSI 800 060325
PR222DS/P-LSIG 800 060326

In I3 1SDA ...... R1
L
Icu (1000 V AC) 12 kA
800 4000…8000 060317
7
7/32
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Switch disconnectors
T1D 160 – Fixed (F) - Front terminals for copper cables (FC Cu)
1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 2 kA 2 kA
051325 051326
1SDC210302F0004
T3D 250 – Fixed (F) - Front terminals (F)

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 3.6 kA 3.6 kA
051327 051328
1SDC210304F0004

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 3.6 kA 3.6 kA
057172 057173

1SDA ...... R1
1SDC210305F0004
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 3.6 kA 3.6 kA
054597 054598

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 6 kA 6 kA
054599 054600

1SDA ...... R1
1SDC210306F0004
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 6 kA 6 kA
054601 054602
7
7/33
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Switch disconnectors

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 15 kA 15 kA
060343 060344
1SDC210P04F0001

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 15 kA 15 kA
060345 060346
T6D 1000 – Fixed (F)

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 15 kA 15 kA
060594 060595
Note: A type of terminal among ES - FC CuAl - R must necessarly be mounted on the 1000 A circuit-breaker.

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 20 kA 20 kA
062032 062033
1SDC210P05F0001

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 20 kA 20 kA
062036 062037

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 20 kA 20 kA
062040 062041
7
7/34
1SDC210015D0205
T7D 1000 M – Fixed (F) - Front terminals (F)
1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 20 kA 20 kA
062034 062035
1SDC210P09F0001

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 20 kA 20 kA
062038 062039

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Icw 20 kA 20 kA
062042 062043
7
7/35
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Breaking units
T4 250 - F = Front terminals

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
T4N 250 Breaking unit 054557 054562
T4S 250 Breaking unit 054558 054563
T4H 250 Breaking unit 054559 054564
T4L 250 Breaking unit 054560 054565
T4V 250 Breaking unit 054561 054566

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
7
7/36
1SDC210015D0205
1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
T6 1000
1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
T6N 1000 Breaking unit 060586 060590
T6S 1000 Breaking unit 060587 060591
T6H 1000 Breaking unit 060588 060592
T6L 1000 Breaking unit 060589 060593
Note: A type of terminal among ES - FC CuAl - R must necessarly be mounted on the 1000 A circuit-breaker.
7
7/37
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Trip units
Trip units for T4

1SDC210189F0004
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMD and TMA N= 50% N= 100%
TMD 20-200 20 320 054651 054660
TMD 32-320 32 320 054652 054661
TMD 50-500 50 500 054653 054662
TMA 80-800 80 400...800 054654 054663
TMA 100-1000 100 500...1000 054655 054664
TMA 125-1250 125 625...1250 054656 054665 054671
TMA 160-1600 160 800...1600 054657 054666 054672
TMA 200-2000 200 1000…2000 054658 054667 054673
TMA 250-2500 250 1250...2500 054659 054668 054674
In 1SDA ...... R1
Electronic trip unit 3 poles 4 poles
PR221DS-LS/I 100 054603 054615
PR221DS-LS/I 160 054604 054616
PR221DS-LS/I 250 054605 054617
PR221DS-LS/I 320 054627 054631
PR221DS-I 100 054606 054618
PR221DS-I 160 054607 054619
PR221DS-I 250 054608 054620
PR221DS-I 320 054628 054632
PR222DS/P-LSI 100 054609 054621
PR222DS/P-LSI 160 054610 054622
PR222DS/P-LSI 250 054611 054623
PR222DS/P-LSI 320 054629 054633
PR222DS/P-LSIG 100 054612 054624
PR222DS/P-LSIG 160 054613 054625
PR222DS/P-LSIG 250 054614 054626
PR222DS/P-LSIG 320 054630 054634
PR222DS/PD-LSI 100 054635 054641
PR222DS/PD-LSI 160 054636 054642
PR222DS/PD-LSI 250 054637 054643
PR222DS/PD-LSI 320 054647 054649
PR222DS/PD-LSIG 100 054638 054644
PR222DS/PD-LSIG 160 054639 054645
PR222DS/PD-LSIG 250 054640 054646
PR222DS/PD-LSIG 320 054648 054650
PR223DS 160 059561 059562
PR223DS 250 059563 059564
PR223DS 320 059565 059566
Electronic trip unit In 1SDA ...... R1

for motor protection 3 poles
PR222MP 100 054688
PR222MP 160 054689
PR222MP 200 054690
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Magnetic only trip unit - MA N= 50% N= 100%
MA 10-140 10 60…140 055077 055080
MA 25-350 25 150…350 055078 055081
MA 52-728 52 312…728 055079 055082
MA 80-1120 80 480…1120 054676 054682
MA 100-1400 100 600…1400 054677 054683
MA 125-1750 125 750…1750 054678 054684
7
MA 160-2240 160 960…2240 054679 054685
MA 200-2800 200 1200…2800 054680 054686
7/38
1SDC210015D0205
Trip units for T5
1SDC210189F0004
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMA N= 50% N= 100%
TMA 320-3200 320 1600...3200 054723 054725 054731
TMA 400-4000 400 2000...4000 054724 054726 054732
TMA 500-5000 500 2500...5000 054727 054729 054733
Thermomagnetic trip In I3 1SDA ...... R1

unit for generator
protection - TMG 3 poles 4 poles
TMG 320-1600 320 800...1600 055093 055101
TMG 400-2000 400 1000...2000 055098 055102
TMG 500-2500 500 1250...2500 055099 055103
In 1SDA ...... R1
PR221DS-LS/I 320 054691 054699
PR221DS-LS/I 400 054692 054700
PR221DS-LS/I 630 054707 055159
PR221DS-I 320 054693 054701
PR221DS-I 400 054694 054702
PR221DS-I 630 054708 055160
PR222DS/P-LSI 320 054695 054703
PR222DS/P-LSI 400 054696 054704
PR222DS/P-LSI 630 054709 055161
PR222DS/P-LSIG 320 054697 054705
PR222DS/P-LSIG 400 054698 054706
PR222DS/P-LSIG 630 054710 055162
PR222DS/PD-LSI 320 054711 054715
PR222DS/PD-LSI 400 054712 054716
PR222DS/PD-LSI 630 054719 054721
PR222DS/PD-LSIG 320 054713 054717
PR222DS/PD-LSIG 400 054714 054718
PR222DS/PD-LSIG 630 054720 054722
PR223DS 320 059567 059568
PR223DS 400 059569 059570
PR223DS 630 059571 059572

PR222MP 320 054735
PR222MP 400 054736
7
7/39
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Trip units
Trip units for T6

1SDC210B06F0001
In I3 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Thermomagnetic trip unit - TMA N= 50% N= 100%
TMA 630-6300 630 3150…6300 060347 060348 060472
TMA 800-8000 800 4000…8000 060349 060350 060473
In 1SDA ...... R1
PR221DS-LS/I 630 060351 060357
PR221DS-LS/I 800 060363 060369
PR221DS-LS/I 1000 060596 060602
PR221DS-I 630 060352 060358
PR221DS-I 800 060364 060370
PR221DS-I 1000 060597 060603
PR222DS/P-LSI 630 060353 060359
PR222DS/P-LSI 800 060365 060371
PR222DS/P-LSI 1000 060598 060604
PR222DS/P-LSIG 630 060354 060360
PR222DS/P-LSIG 800 060366 060372
PR222DS/P-LSIG 1000 060599 060605
PR222DS/PD-LSI 630 060355 060361
PR222DS/PD-LSI 800 060367 060373
PR222DS/PD-LSI 1000 060600 060606
PR222DS/PD-LSIG 630 060356 060362
PR222DS/PD-LSIG 800 060368 060374
PR222DS/PD-LSIG 1000 060601 060607
PR223DS 630 060376 060377
PR223DS 800 060378 060379
PR223DS 1000 060608 060609

PR222MP 630 060375
Note: The releases for the T6 1000 A necessarily have to be fitted with the following types of terminal: EF - ES - FC CuAl - R.
1SDC210B10F0001
Trip units for T7-T7M

1SDA ...... R1
Electronic trip unit
PR231/P-LS/I 3p(1) 063128
PR231/P-I 3p(1) 063129
PR231/P-LS/I 4p(1) 064179
PR231/P-I 4p(1) 064180
PR232/P-LSI 063130
PR331/P-LSIG 063133
PR332/P-LI 063134
PR332/P-LSI 063135
PR332/P-LSIG 063136
PR332/P-LSIRc T7(2) 063137
PR332/P-LSIRc T7M(2) 064190
Note: Loose trip units for T7-T7M are supplied without rating Plug. For T7-T7M in withdrawable version, sliding contact blocks for fixed and moving
part are necessary. See page 3/4 and 7/43.
7 (1)
(2)
To have the possibility to substitute PR231 with a different electronic trip unit, key plug must be ordered. Extra code for PR231 interchangeability
1SDA063140R1 must be specified.
7/40
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Fixed parts, conversion kit and accessories for fixed parts
Plug-in (P) – Fixed part
F = Front terminals
1SDA ...... R1
1SDC210197F0004
3 poles 4 poles
T2 P FP F(1) 051329 051330
T3 P FP F(2) 051331 051332
(1)
For the circuit-breaker in plug-in version In max = 144 A
(2)
EF = Front extended terminals

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
T4 P FP EF 054737 054740
T5 400 P FP EF 054749 054752
T5 630 P FP EF(1) 054762 054765
(1)

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
T4 P FP VR 054738 054741
T5 400 P FP VR 054750 054753
T5 630 P FP VR(1) 054763 054766
(1)
HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
T4 P FP HR 054739 054742
T5 400 P FP HR 054751 054754
T5 630 P FP HR(1) 054764 054767
(1)
Fixed parts for T4 250 - T5 400 circuit-breakers at 1000 V AC
FC Cu = Front terminals for copper cables

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
T4 250 P FP 1000 V AC 063458 063459
T5 400 P FP 1000 V AC 063462 063463
7
7/41
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Withdrawable (W) – Fixed part
EF = Front extended terminals

1SDA ...... R1
1SDC210198F0004
3 poles 4 poles
T4 W FP EF 054743 054746
T5 400 W FP EF 054755 054758
T5 630 W FP EF(1) 054768 054771
T6 630/800 W FP EF 060384 060387
T7-T7M W FP EF 062045 062049
(1)
For the circuit-breaker in the withdrawable version In max = 570 A

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
T4 W FP VR 054744 054747
T5 400 W FP VR 054756 054759
T5 630 W FP VR(1) 054769 054772
T6 630/800 W FP VR 060386 060389
(1)
HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
T4 W FP HR 054745 054748
T5 400 W FP HR 054757 054761
T5 630 W FP HR(1) 054770 054774
T6 630/800 W FP HR 060385 060388
(1)
HR/VR = Rear flat terminals

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
T7-T7M W FP HR 062044 062048
Nota: Fixed parts of T7-T7M circuit-breaker with rear terminals are supplied as standard with terminals mounted horizontally. To order the terminals
mounted vertically, the extra code 1SDA063571R1 must be specified.
1SDC210N69F0001
Fixed parts for T4 250 - T5 400 circuit-breakers at 1000V AC
FC Cu = Front terminals for copper cables

1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
T4 250 W FP 1000 V AC 063460 063461
T5 400 W FP 1000 V AC 063464 063465
7
7/42
1SDC210015D0205
Conversion of the version
Conversion kit from fixed into moving part of plug-in T2…T5

Type 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Kit P MP T2(1) 051411 051412
Kit P MP T3(2) 051413 051414
Kit P MP T4 054839 054840
Kit P MP T5 400 054843 054844
1SDC210190F0004
Kit P MP T5 630(3) 054847 054848

Note: The plug-in version must be composed as follows
a) Fixed circuit-breaker
b) Conversion kit from fixed into moving part of plug-in
c) Fixed part of plug-in
(1)
(2)
(3)
Conversion kit from fixed into moving part of withdrawable T4...T7

Type 1SDA ...... R1
3 poles 4 poles
Kit W MP T4 054841 054842
Kit W MP T5 400 054845 054846
Kit W MP T5 630(1) 054849 054850
1SDC210200F0004
Kit W MP T6 630/800 060390 060391

Kit W MP T7-T7M 062162 062163
Note: The withdrawable version must be composed as follows
a) Fixed circuit-breaker
b) Conversion kit from fixed into moving part of withdrawable
c) Fixed part of withdrawable
d) Front for lever operating mechanism or rotary handle or motor operator (only T4, T5 and T6)
e) Sliding contacts blocks if the circuit-breaker is automatic or fitted with electrical accessories (only for T7)
(1)
For the circuit-breakers in withdrawable version In max = 570 A.
1SDC210N70F0001
Sliding contacts blocks for T7

Type 1SDA.....R1
1SDC210N71F0001
Lef block - MP T7 - T7M 062164

Central block - MP T7 - T7M 062165
Right block - MP T7 - T7M 062166
Left block - FP T7 063572
Left block - FP T7M 062167
Central block - FP T7 - T7M 062168
Right block - FP T7 - T7M 062169
Note: Moving part of a circuit-breaker fitted with electronic accessories or PR331/P and PR332/P electronic trip units is supplied as standard with
blocks for the connection, while blocks for fixed part must always be ordered.
Conversion kit from fixed into plug-in for RC222 and RC223
Type 1SDA.....R1
4 poles
Kit P MP RC T4
Kit P MP RC T5 400
054851
054852 7
7/43
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Conversion kit from plug-in into withdrawable for RC222 and RC223
Type 1SDA.....R1
4 poles
Kit W MP RC T4-T5 055366
Conversion kit from fixed part of plug-in into fixed part of withdrawable
Type 1SDA.....R1
Kit FP P in FP W T4 054854
Kit FP P in FP W T5 054855
Terminals for fixed parts T4…T7

Type 1SDA.....R1
1SDC210N72F0001
3 pieces 4 pieces
EF T6 013984 013985
EF T7-T7M 062171 062172
1SDC210N73F0001

ES T5 (630 A) 055271 055272
ES T7-T7M 065620 065621
FC Cu T4 1x185mm2 054831 054832
FC Cu T5 1x240mm2 054833 054834
1SDC210N74F0001
Front terminals for copper-aluminium cables - FC CuAl

FC CuAl T4 1x185mm2 054835 054836
FC CuAl T5 1x240mm2 054837 054838
VR T6 013988 013989
HR T6 013986 013987
Rear flat terminals - HR/VR
HR/VR T7-T7M 063089 063090
Rear spread terminals - RS
RS T7-T7M 063577 063578
Note: The FC Cu and FC CuAl terminals are supplied with insulating terminal covers for TC-FP fixed parts.
Lock for fixed part of withdrawable circuit-breaker

Type 1SDA.....R1
T4-T5-T6
KLF-D FP - Different key for each circuit-breaker 055230
KLF-S FP - Same key for different groups of circuit-breakers 055231
PLL FP - Lock padlocks 055232
KLF-D Ronis FP - Lock type Ronis 055233
Terminal covers for fixed part - TC-FP

Type 1SDA.....R1
3 poles 4 poles
TC-FP T4 054857 054858
7 TC-FP T5 054859 054861
7/44
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Accessories
Service releases
Shunt opening release - SOR

Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5-T6 T7-T7M
uncabled version
1SDC210204F0004
SOR 12 V DC 053000 054862

SOR 24 V AC / DC 062065
SOR 24...30 V AC / DC 051333 054863
SOR 30 V AC / DC 062066
T4 - T5 - T6
SOR 48 V AC / DC 062067
SOR 48...60 V AC / DC 051334 054864
SOR 60 V AC / DC 062068
SOR 110…120 V AC / DC 062069
SOR 110...127 V AC - 110...125 V DC 051335 054865
SOR 120…127 V AC / DC 063547
1SDC210N75F0001
SOR 220…240 V AC / DC 063548

SOR 220...240 V AC - 220...250 V DC 051336 054866
SOR 240…250 V AC / DC 062070
T7 SOR 380…400 V AC 062071
SOR 380...440 V AC 051337 054867
SOR 415…440 V AC 062072
SOR 480...525 V AC 051338 054868
cabled version(1)
SOR-C 12 V DC 053001 054869
SOR-C 24...30 V AC / DC 051339 054870
SOR-C 48...60 V AC / DC 051340 054871
SOR-C 110...127 V AC - 110...125 V DC 051341 054872
SOR-C 220...240 V AC - 220...250 V DC 051342 054873
SOR-C 380...440 V AC 051343 054874
SOR-C 480...525 V AC 051344 054875
Note: For T7-T7M in withdrawable version, sliding contact blocks for fixed and moving part are necessary. See page 3/4 and 7/43.
(1)
Compulsory with T4-T5-T6 in the withdrawable or motorized versions.
SOR Test Unit

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7-T7M 050228
1SDC210P07F0001
Shunt closing release - SCR

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7M
1SDC210N75F0001
cabled version
SCR 24 V AC / DC 062076
SCR 30 V AC / DC 062077
SCR 48 V AC / DC 062078
SCR 60 V AC / DC 062079
SCR 110...120 V AC / DC 062080
SCR 120...127 V AC / DC 063549
SCR 220...240 V AC / DC 063550
SCR 240...250 V AC / DC 062081
SCR 380...400 V AC
SCR 415...440 V AC
062082
062083 7
7/45
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Accessories
Undervoltage release - UVR

Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5-T6 T7-T7M
uncabled version
UVR 24 V AC / DC 062087
UVR 24...30 V AC / DC 051345 054880
1SDC210204F0004
UVR 30 V AC / DC 062088
UVR 48 V AC / DC 051346 054881 062089
UVR 60 V AC/DC 052333 054882 062090
T4 - T5 - T6 UVR 110…120 V AC / DC 062091
UVR 110...127 V AC – 110...125 V DC 051347 054883
UVR 120…127 V AC / DC 063551
UVR 220…240 V AC / DC 063552
UVR 220...240 V AC - 220…250 V DC 051348 054884
UVR 240…250 V AC / DC 062092
1SDC210N75F0001
UVR 380…400 V AC 062093

UVR 380...440 V AC 051349 054885
UVR 415...440 V AC 062094
UVR 480...525 V AC 051350 054886
T7
cabled version(1)
UVR-C 24...30 V AC / DC 051351 054887
UVR-C 48 V AC / DC 051352 054888
UVR-C 60 V AC/DC 052335 054889
UVR-C 110...127 V AC - 110...125 V DC 051353 054890
UVR-C 220...240 V AC - 220…250 V DC 051354 054891
UVR-C 380...440 V AC 051355 054892
UVR-C 480...525 V AC 051356 054893
(1)
Compulsory with T4-T5-T6 in the withdrawable or motorized versions.
Shunt opening release with permanent operation - PS-SOR

Type 1SDA.....R1
T4-T5-T6
uncabled version
PS-SOR 24 V AC/DC 054876
PS-SOR 110...120 V AC 054877
cabled version
PS-SOR-C 24 V AC/DC 054878
PS-SOR-C 110...120 V AC 054879
Connectors and socket-plugs for electrical accessories

Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5-T6
Socket-plug 12 poles 051362 051362
3-way connector for second SOR-C 055273
Loose cables
Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3
Kit 12 cables L=2m for AUX 051365
7 Kit 6 cables L=2m for AUX

Kit 2 cables L=2m for SOR-UVR
051366
051367
7/46
1SDC210015D0205
Time delay device for undervoltage release - UVD
Type 1SDA.....R1
T1…T6 T7-T7M
UVD 24…30 V AC / DC 051357 038316
UVD 48 V AC / DC 038317
UVD 48…60 V AC / DC 051358
1SDC210147F0004
UVD 60 V AC / DC 038318
UVD 110...125 V AC / DC 051360 038319
UVD 220...250 V AC / DC 051361 038320
Electrical signals
Auxiliary contacts - AUX

Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5-T6 T7 T7M
uncabled version(1)
AUX 1Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC 051368 051368
AUX 3Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC 051369 051369
AUX 1Q 1SY 400 V AC 062104
AUX 2Q 400 V AC 062102 062102
AUX 1Q 1SY 24 V DC 068797 062103
1SDC210205F0004
1SDC210148F0004
AUX 3Q 1SY 24 V DC 054914 054914

AUX 2Q 24 V DC 062101 062101
cabled version(1) with 1 m long
cables
T1 - T2 - T3 AUX-C 1Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC 051370 054910
AUX-C 3Q 1SY 250 V AC/DC 051371 054911
AUX-C 1Q 1SY 400 V AC 054912
AUX-C 2Q 400 V AC 054913
1SDC210N76F0001
AUX-C 1Q 1SY 24 V DC 066075

AUX-C 3Q 1SY 24 V DC 055361 054915
cabled version for T2 with
PR221 DS trip unit
T7
AUX-C 1 S51 1Q SY 053704
AUX-C 2Q 1SY 055504
cabled contact for signalling
trip coil release trip
AUX-SA 1 S51 T4-T5 NO 055050
AUX-SA 1 S51 T4-T5 NC 064518
AUX-SA 1 S51 T6(2) 060393
AUX-SA 1 S51 T7-T7M 24 V 066099 066100
AUX-SA 1 S51 T7-T7M 250 V 062105 063553
cabled contact for signalling
manual/remote operation
AUX-MO-C(3) 054917
cabled contact circuit breaker
ready to close
AUX-RTC 24 V DC 062108
AUX-RTC 250 V AC/DC 062109
cabled contact signalling
spring charged
AUX-MC 24 V DC 062106
AUX-MC 250 V AC/DC 062107
cabled contacts in electronic
version
AUX-E-C 1Q 1SY T4-T5(4) 054916
AUX-E-C 1Q 1SY T6(4) 064161
(1)
(2)
These cannot be combined with T2 circuit-breaker fitted with PR221DS electronic trip unit.
7
Available only mounted on the circuit-breaker.
(3)
For T4, T5 and T6 in plug-in/withdrawable version, it is necessary to order a socket plug connector 3 poles 1SDA051364R1
(4)
Only with circuit-breakers equipped with PR222DS/PD and PR223DS trip units.
7/47
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Accessories
Auxiliary position contacts - AUP

Type 1SDA.....R1
T2-T3 T4-T5-T6 T7-T7M
AUP T2-T3 - 1 contact signalling circuit-
breakers racked-in 051372
AUP-I T4-T5 24 V DC - 1 contact signalling
1SDC210152F0004
circuit-breakers racked-in 054920

AUP-I T4-T5 400 V AC/DC - 1 contact for
signalling circuit-breakers racked-in 054918
AUP-R T4-T5 24 V DC - 1 contact for signal-
ling circuit-breakers racked-out 054921
AUP-R T4-T5 400 V AC/DC - 1 contact for
signalling circuit-breakers racked-out 054919
AUP T7-T7M 24 V DC 062110
AUP T7-T7M 250 V AC 062111
Note: For T4-T5-T6 in withdrawable version, contacts signaling circuit-breaker racked-in. For T4-T5-T6 in plug-in version, contacts signaling circuit-
breaker racked-in/racked-out.
1SDC210N77F0001
Early auxiliary contacts - AUE

Type 1SDA.....R1
1SDC210206F0004
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5 T6 T7
AUE - early contacts 051374 054925 060394 062112
Note: On the T7, the anticipated auxiliary contacts (AUE) can only be ordered already installed on the circuit-breaker.
For T7 in withdrawable version, sliding contact blocks for fixed and moving part are necessary. See page 3/4 and 7/43.
Adapters - ADP
Type 1SDA.....R1
T4-T5-T6
ADP - Adapters 5pin 055173
Testing extension
Type 1SDA.....R1
1SDC210125F0004
T4-T5-T6
5pin checking extension for blanck tests on T4-T5-T6 P/W service releases 055351
6pin checking extension for blanck tests on T4-T5-T6 P/W auxiliary contacts (1+1)
service and residual current releases 055063
12pin checking extension for blanck tests on T4-T5-T6 P/W auxiliary contacts (3+1) 055064
10pin checking extension for blanck tests on T4-T5-T6 P/W motor operator and
early contacts 055065
Trip reset
Type 1SDA.....R1
T7M
Trip reset 24-30 V AC/DC 063554
7
1SDC210N78F0001
7/48
1SDC210015D0205
Mechanical signals
Mechanical operation counter

Type 1SDA.....R1
1SDC210N79F0001
T7M
Mechanical operation counter 062160
1SDC210154F0004
Motor operator
Solenoid operator - MOS

Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3
MOS 5 cables, superimposed 48...60 V DC 059596
MOS 5 cables, superimposed 110...250 V AC/DC 059597
Note: It is always fitted with crimped cables
MOS 5 cables T1-T2, side-by-side, 48...60 V DC 059598

1SDC210155F0004
MOS 5 cables T1-T2, side-by-side, 110...250 V AC/DC 059599

Note: It is always fitted with socket plug connector.
Stored energy motor operator - MOE

Type 1SDA.....R1
T4-T5 T6
MOE 24 V DC 054894 060395
1SDC210207F0004
MOE 48...60 V DC 054895 060396

MOE 110...125 V AC/DC 054896 060397
MOE 220...250 V AC/DC 054897 060398
MOE 380 V AC 054898 060399
Stored energy motor operator with electronics - MOE-E

Type 1SDA.....R1
T4-T5 T6
MOE-E 24 V DC 054899 060400
MOE-E 48...60 V DC 054900 060401
MOE-E 110...125 V AC/DC 054901 060402
MOE-E 220...250 V AC/DC 054902 060403
MOE-E 380 V AC 054903 060404
Note: Always supplyed complete with the AUX-E-C electronic auxiliary contact.
Spring charging motor

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7M
Spring charging motor 24…30 V AC/DC 062113
1SDC200580F0001

Spring charging motor 380…415 V AC 062117
7
7/49
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Accessories
Rotary handle operating mechanism

Direct- RHD
Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5 T6 T7
1SDC210159F0004
RHD normal for fixed and plug-in 051381 054926 060405 062120
RHD_EM emergency for fixed and
plug-in 051382 054927 060406 062121
RHD normal for withdrawable 054928 060407 062120
RHD_EM di emergency for
withdrawable 055234 060408 062121
1SDC210208F0004
1SDC210N81F0004
Transmitted - RHE
Type 1SDA.....R1
1SDC210158F0004
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5 T6 T7
RHE normal for fixed and plug-in 051383 054929 060409 062122
RHE_EM emergency for fixed and
plug-in 051384 054930 060410 062123
RHE normal for withdrawable 054933 060411 062122
RHE_EM di emergency for
withdrawable 054934 060412 062123
Individual components
1SDC210209F0004
RHE_B just base for RHE for fixed

and plug-in 051385 054931 060413 062124
RHE_B just base for RHE
withdrawable 054935 060414 062124
RHE_S just rod 500mm for RHE 051386 054932 054932 064104
RHE_H just handle for RHE 051387 054936 060415 062125
RHE_H_EM just emergency handle
for RHE 051388 054937 060416 062126
1SDC210N82F0004
IP54 protection for rotary handle

1SDC210292F0023
Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5-T6 T7
RHE_IP54 protection kit IP54 051392 054938 054938
7
7/50
1SDC210015D0205
Padlock lever lock - PLL

Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3 T7 T7M
1SDC210167F0004
PLL - plug-in in open position 051393

PLL for T1 1p - plug-in in open position 060199
PLL - plate in open/closed position 051394
PLL - plate in open position 060534
PLL - padlock in open position 062150 062151
Note: On T7, the padlock is an alternative to the key lock
1SDC210N83F0004
“Ronis” key lock in open position on the circuit-breaker - KLC (1)

1SDC210163F0004
Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3
standard version
KLC same key - T1 053528
version with key removable in both positions
KLC-S same key - T1 051395
(1)
It cannot be mounted when there is a front operationg mechanism, a rotary handle operating mechanism, motor operator or RC221/RC222 residual
current device and, only in the case of three pole circuit-breakers, with the service releases (UVR, SOR).
Key lock in open position on the circuit-breaker - KLC

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7 T7M
1SDC210N84F0004
KLC-D - different key 062134 062141

KLC-S - same key for different groups of circuit-breakers (N. 20005) 062135 062142
KLC-R - arrangement for Ronis key lock 062139 062146
KLC-P - arrangement for Profalux key lock 062140 062146
Key lock for rotary handle - RHL

1SDC210162F0004
Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3
RHL - different keys for each circuit-breaker/in open position 051389
RHL - same key for different groups of circuit-breakers (N. 20005) 051390
RHL - different keys for each circuit-breaker/in open-closed position 052021
7
7/51
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Accessories
Key lock for front/rotary handle - KLF

Type 1SDA.....R1
T4-T5 T6 T7
KLF-D - different key 054939 060658 063555
KLF-S - same key for different groups of
circuit-breakers (N. 20005) 054940 060659 063556
KLF-S - arrangement for Ronis key lock 063560
KLF-S - arrangement for Profalux key lock 063561
Key lock for motor operator - MOL

Type 1SDA.....R1
T4-T5 T6
MOL-D different key 054904 060611
MOL-S - same key for different groups of
circuit-breakers (N. 20005) 054905 060612
MOL-M - lock only on manual operation with same key 054909 054909
Key lock in racked-in/test isolated/racked-out position

Type 1SDA.....R1
1SDC210N85F0004
T7-T7M
For 1 circuit-breaker - different key 062153
For groups of circuit-breakers - same key (N. 20005) 062154
Arrangement for Ronis key lock 063567
Arrangement for Profalux key lock 063570
Arrangement for Castell key lock 063568
Arrangement for Kirk key lock 063569
Note: The fixed part can be equipped with two different key locks.
Accessory for lock in racked-out position

1SDC210N86F0004
Type 1SDA.....R1
T7-T7M
Lock in racked-out position 062158
Note: As optional in addition to the circuit-breaker lock in racked-in/isolated-test/racked-out position
7
7/52
1SDC210015D0205
Mechanical compartment door lock
Type 1SDA.....R1
T7-T7M
Mechanical compartment door lock with cables for T7-T7M(1) 062159
Mechanical compartment door lock (fixing to wall) for T7-T7M F 063722
1SDC210N87F0004
Mechanical compartment door lock (fixing to floor) for T7-T7M F 063723

Mechanical compartment door lock for T7-T7M W 063724
Note: A circuit-breaker equipped with mechanical compartment door lock can not be interlocked with another circuit-breaker.
(1)
To be ordered with cables kit for interlock and plate for interlock consistent with the circuit-breaker.
Front lever operating mechanism - FLD

Type 1SDA.....R1
T4-T5 T6
FLD - for fixed and plug-in 054944 060417
FLD - for withdrawable 054945 060418
1SDC210210F0004
Mechanical interlock - MIF

Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3
MIF front interlocking plate between 2 circuit-breakers 051396
MIF front interlocking plate between 3 circuit-breakers 052165
1SDC210169F0004
Mechanical interlock - MIR

Type 1SDA.....R1
T4-T5
MIR-HB - frame unit horizontal interlock 054946
MIR-VB - frame unit vertical interlock 054947
MIR-P - plate for interlock type A T4 (F-P-W) + T4 (F-P-W) 054948
1SDC210373F0004
MIR-P - plate for interlock type B T4 (F-P-W) + T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 630 (F) 054949
MIR-P - plate for interlock type C T4 (F-P-W) + T5 630 (P-W) 054950
MIR-P - plate for interlock type D T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 630 (F) + T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 630 (F) 054951
MIR-P - plate for interlock type E T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 630 (F) + T5 630 (P-W) 054952
MIR-P - plate for interlock type F T5 630 (P-W) + T5 630 (P-W) 054953
Note: To interlock two circuit-breakers you have to order a frame unit interlock and a plate (for type A or B or C or D or E or F) interlock.
Mechanical interlock - MIR

Type 1SDA.....R1
T3 T6
Horizontal interlock 063324 060685
Vertical interlock 063325 060686
7
7/53
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Accessories
Mechanical interlock with cables between two circuit-breakers

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7-T7M
Cables kit for interlock 062127
Plate for fixed unit – floor fixed 062130
Wiring kit for interlock with Emax 064568
Plate for fixed unit – wall fixed 062129
1SDC210N89F0004
Plate for withdrawable cb 062131

Shoulders for fixing to floor 063856
Note: To interlock two circuit-breakers you have to order a cables kit and two plates in function of the version of the circuit-breaker.
Floor fixing plate

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7-T7M
Floor fixing plate for fixed unit 063856
Sealable lock of thermal adjustment

1SDC210164F0004
Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3
TMD release anti-adjustment seal 051397
Transparent protection for buttons

1SDC210N90F0004
Type 1SDA.....R1
T7M
Transparent protection for buttons 062132
Transparent protection for buttons - independent 062133
IP54 door protection

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7M
IP54 door protection 062161
1SDC210170F0004
SACE RC221, SACE RC222, SACE RC223

Type 1SDA.....R1
3 poles 4 poles
RC222/1 MOD 200 mm for T1 053869
RC221/1 for T1 051398 051401
1SDC210212F0004
RC222/1 for T1 051400 051402

RC221/2 for T2 051403 051405
RC222/2 for T2 051404 051406
RC221/3 for T3 051407 051409
RC222/3 for T3 051408 051410
RC223/3 for T3 064302
RC222/4 for T4 054954
RC223/4 for T4 250 054956
1SDC210213F0004
RC222/5 for T5 054955

Note: The residual current releases for the T2 and T3 circuit-breakers, except for the RC for T3, are always supplied complete with FC Cu terminal kits.
7
1SDC210214F0004
7/54
1SDC210015D0205
SACE RCQ
Type 1SDA.....R1
1SDC210172F0004
T1...T7-T7M
Relay and closed toroid - diameter 60 mm 037388
Relay and toroid which can be opened - diameter 110 mm 037390
Relay only 037393
Closed toroid only - diameter 60 mm 037394
Toroid which can be opened - diameter 110 mm 037396
Note: Opening coil and undervoltage coil to be ordered separately.
Installation accessories
Bracket for fixing onto DIN rail

Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3
DIN50022 T1-T2 051437
DIN50022 T3 051439
DIN 50022 T1 - T2 for RC221/RC222 051937
1SDC210173F0004
DIN 50022 T3 for RC221/RC222 051938

DIN 50022 T1 -T2 for MOS side-by-side 051939
DIN 50022 T1 for RC222 mod. 200 mm 053940
Connections terminals
High insulating terminal covers - HTC

Type 1SDA.....R1
3 poles 4 poles
HTC T1 051415 051416
HTC T2 051417 051418
HTC T3 051419 051420
HTC T4 054958 054959
1SDC210124F0004
HTC T5 054960 054961

HTC T6 014040 014041
HTC T7-T7M 063091 063092
Protection for high insulating terminal covers - HTC-P

Type 1SDA.....R1
3 poles 4 poles
HTC-P T4 054962 054963
HTC-P T5 054964 054965
7
7/55
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Accessories
Low insulating terminal covers - LTC

Type 1SDA.....R1
3 poles 4 poles
LTC T1 051421 051422
LTC T2 051423 051424
LTC T3 051425 051426
LTC T4 054966 054967
1SDC210123F0004
LTC T5 054968 054969

LTC T6 014038 014039
LTC T7-T7M F 063093 063094
IP40 front protections for screw terminals - STC

Type 1SDA.....R1
3 poles 4 poles
STC T1 051431 051432
STC T2 051433 051434
STC T3 051435 051436
Sealable screws for terminal covers

Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3-T4-T5 T6-T7-T7M
Sealable screws 051504 013699
1SDC210127F0004
Separating partitions - PB
Type 1SDA.....R1
T1-T2-T3 T4-T5 T6 T7-T7M
PB100 low (H=100 mm) -
1SDC210203F0004
4 pieces - 3p 051427 054970 050696 054970

PB100 low (H=100 mm) -
6 pieces - 4p 051428 054971 050697 054971
PB200 high (H=200 mm) -
4 pieces - 3p 051429 054972 054972
PB200 high (H=200 mm) -
6 pieces - 4p 051430 054973 054973

Type 1SDA.....R1
3 pieces 4 pieces 6 pieces 8 pieces
EF T1 051442 051443 051440 051441
1SDC210384F0004
EF T2 051466 051467 051464 051465

EF T3 051490 051491 051488 051489
EF T4 055000 055001 054998 054999
EF T5 055036 055037 055034 055035
EF T6 630 023379 023389 013920 013921
7 EF T6 800
EF T6 1000
023383
064319
023393
064320
013954
064321
013955
064322
EF T7-T7M 063103 063104 063105 063106
7/56
1SDC210015D0205
Front terminals for copper-aluminium cables - FC CuAl
Type 1SDA.....R1
FC CuAl T1 50mm2 -
1SDC210391F0004
external terminal 064186 064187 064188 064189

FC CuAl T1 95mm2 -
FC CuAl T2 95mm2 051458 051459 051456 051457
FC CuAl T2 2x95mm2 -
FC CuAl T2 185mm2 -
1SDC210392F0004

FC CuAl T3 185mm2 051486 051487 051484 051485
FC CuAl T3 150…240mm2 -
FC CuAl T4 1x50mm2 054984 054985 054982 054983
FC CuAl T4 1x185mm2 054988 054989 054986 054987
FC CuAl T5 400 2x120mm2 -
FC CuAl T5 400 1x240mm2 055020 055021 055018 055019
FC CuAl T5 400 1x300mm2 055024 055025 055022 055023
FC CuAl T6 630 2x240mm2 023380 023390 013922 013923
FC CuAl T6 800 3x185mm2 -
FC CuAl T6 1000 4x150mm2 -
FC CuAl T7 1250-T7M 630
2x240mm2 - external terminal 063865 063866 063867 063868
FC CuAl T7 1250-T7M 1250
4x240mm2 - external terminal 063112 063113 063114 063115
Front terminals - F (1)

Type 1SDA.....R1
1SDC210387F0004
F T2 - Plugs with screws 051450 051451 051448 051449

F T6 630-800 - Plugs with screws 060421 060422 060423 060424
F T7-T7M - Plugs with screws 063099 063100 063101 063102
(1)
To be requested as loose kit

Type 1SDA.....R1
1SDC210385F0004
ES T2 051470 051471 051468 051469

ES T3 051494 051495 051492 051493
ES T4 055004 055005 055002 055003
ES T5 055040 055041 055038 055039
ES T6 (1/2 upper kit) 050692
ES T6 (1/2 lower kit) 050704
ES T6 050693 050688 050689
ES T7-T7M (1/2 upper kit)
ES T7-T7M (1/2 lower kit)
063107
063108
7
ES T7-T7M 063109 063110 063111
7/57
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Accessories

Type 1SDA.....R1
FC Cu T2 051454 051455 051452 051453
FC Cu T3 051482 051483 051480 051481
1SDC210389F0004
FC Cu T4 1x185mm2 054980 054981 054978 054979

FC Cu T5 400 1x240mm2 055016 055017 055014 055015
FC Cu T5 630 2x240mm2 055364 055365 055362 055363
Rear terminals for copper-aluminium cables - RC CuAl

Type 1SDA.....R1
RC CuAl T6 630 2x240mm2 023381 023391 013924 013925
RC CuAl T6 800 3x185mm2 023385 023395 013958 013959
Note: For ordering methods, please ask ABB SACE.
Front multi-cable terminals - MC

Type 1SDA.....R1
MC CuAl T4 6x35mm2 054996 054997 054994 054995
1SDC210395F0004
MC CuAl T5 6x50mm2 064182 064183 064184 064185
Rear terminals
Type 1SDA.....R1
R T2 051474 051475 051472 051473
1SDC210C50F0001
R T3 051498 051499 051496 051497

R T4 055008 055009 055006 055007
R T5 055044 055045 055042 055043
R T6 060425 060426 060427 060428
R T7 063116 063117 063118 063119
1SDC210N91F0004

Type 1SDA.....R1
HR T7-T7M 063120 063121 063122 063123
1SDC210N92F0004

Type 1SDA.....R1
VR T7-T7M 063124 063125 063126 063127

Type 1SDA.....R1
7 HR T1
HR RC221/222 T1
053865 053866
053987
053867 053868
7/58
1SDC210015D0205
Kit for taking up voltage for auxiliares
Type 1SDA.....R1
3 pieces 4 pieces
AuxV T2 FC Cu 051500 051501
AuxV T3 FC Cu 051502 051503
AuxV T4 FC Cu 055046 055047
AuxV T4-T5 F 055048 055049
Note: Only available for fixed version circuit-breaker.
Front display unit - FDU

Type 1SDA.....R1
T4-T5 T6
FDU display unit with PR222 or PR223 055051 060429
1SDC210326F0004

Type 1SDA.....R1
ATS010 for T4, T5, T6, T7 and T7M 052927
HMI030 interface on the front of switchgear

Type 1SDA.....R1
T4...T7-T7M
HMI030 interface on the front of switchgear 063143
Note: It can be used with circuit-breaker equipped with PR222DS/PD, PR223EF, PR223DS, PR331/P and PR332/P trip units.
Modules for PR33x electronic trip unit

1SDC210N94F0004
1SDC210N93F0004
Type 1SDA.....R1
T7 T7M
PR330/V + internal voltage socket(1) 063144 063574
PR330/V + external voltage socket(1) 069126 069127
PR330/D-M communication module (Modbus RTU) 063145 063145
1SDC210N96F0004
PR330/R actuator module 063146 063146

1SDC210N95F0004
BT030 external wireless communication module 058259 058259

PR030B power supply unit 058258 058258
Arrangement for internal voltage socket for PR332/P
with PR330/V module(1) 063573 063573
1SDC210N97F0004
Extracode for external voltage socket for PR332/P LSIRC 069128 069128
1SDC210N98F0004
(1)
Can be ordered only mounted on the circuit-breakers. See page 3/42.
Dialogue unit PR222DS/PD

Type 1SDA.....R1
T4-T5-T6
LSI 055066
LSIG 055067
Note: To be specified only in addition to the code of the automatic circuit-breaker, with analogous overcurrent release (PR222DS/P). To order the trip
unit separately, see pag 7/38.
7
7/59
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Accessories
Extracode for PR231 interchangeability

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7-T7M
Extracode for PR231 interchangeability 063140
Note: In order to replace the PR231 with another electronic trip unit, the key-plug must be ordered. The extra-code 1SDA063140R1 for the
interchangeability of the PR231 trip unit must be specified.
Trip unit adapters for PR33x

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7 T7M
1SDC210N99F0004
Adapters for PR331-PR332 063141

Adapters for PR33x 063142
Note: Always provided with the circuit-breaker.
CT for external neutral

Type 1SDA.....R1
CT for external neutral - T4 320 055055

Note: Connector X4 is not included and must be ordered separately.
Current sensor for external neutral

Type 1SDA.....R1
Current sensor for external neutral - T7-T7M 400…1600 063159
Rating plug
Type 1SDA.....R1
T7-T7M
In = 400 A 063147
In = 630 A 063148
In = 800 A 063149
In = 1000 A 063150
In = 1250 A 063151
In = 1600 A 063152
1SDC210P01F0004
In = 400 A for RC protection(1) 063725

7 In = 1600 A for RC protection(1)

(1)
For PR332/P LSIRc, PR332/P LSIG with PR330/V and RC toroid.
063732
7/60
1SDC210015D0205
Extracode rating plug
Type 1SDA.....R1
In = 400 A 063153
In = 630 A 063154
In = 800 A 063155
In = 1000 A 063156
In = 1250 A 063157
Note: To be specified only in addition to the code of the automatic circuit-breaker.
(1)
For PR332/P LSIRc
Homopolar toroid for residual current protection

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7-T7M
1SDC210P02F0004
Toroid RC 063869
Homopolar sensor for the earthing conductor of the main power supply
Type 1SDA.....R1
1SDC210P03F0004
T7-T7M
Sensor 059145

Type 1SDA.....R1
T4-T5-T6 T7-T7M
1SDC210216F0004
X3 Connector for fixed circuit-breaker PR222DS or

PR223DS 055059
X3 Connector for plug-in/withdrawable circuit-breaker 055061
X4 Connector for fixed circuit-breaker 055060
X4 Connector for plug-in/withdrawable circuit-breaker 055062
TT1 - Test Unit(1) 037121
TT1 - Test Unit for PR231/P, PR232/P electronic trip
units 037121
PR010/T - Test and configuration unit for PR222DS/P,
PR222DS/PD, PR223DS, PR222MP electronic trip units 048964
PR010/T - Test and configurator unit for PR33x and
PR232 electronic trip unit 048964
PR021/K - Signalling unit for PR222DS/PD, PR223DS,
PR223EF, PR222MP, PR223EF, PR331 or PR332
electronic trip units 059146
PR212/CI - Contactor control unit for PR222MP 050708
EP010 - Interface module for PR222/PD 059469
EP010 - Interface module for PR332/P electronic trip
unit 060198
EP010 - Interface module for PR223/DS 063166
EP010 - Interface module for PR223EF 064515
VM210 measurement module for PR223DS and
PR223EF
SW210 Bus Switch for PR223EF
059602
064269
7
Note: For the use of X3 and X4 connectors, see page 3/44.
(1)
Available also for T2. see “Abbreviation caption” page 7/2
7/61
1SDC210015D0205
Ordering codes
Accessories
Spare parts
Flanges for compartment door

Type 1SDA.....R1
1SDC210P06F0004
Flange for compartment door for T1-T2-T3 051509

Flange for compartment door for MOS or RHD T1-T2-T3 051510
Flange for compartment door T1 with RC221 or RC222 3p 051511
Flange for compartment door T1-T2-T3 with RC221 or RC222 4p 051514
Flange for compartment door for T4-T5 fixed or plug-in 055094
Flange for compartment door for T4-T5 withdrawable 055095
Flange for compartment door for RC222 for T4-T5 055096
Flange for the T6 compartment door 060432
Flange for the withdrawable T6 compartment door 060433
Flange for the fixed T6 compartment door with MOE/MOE-E, RHD and FLD 060434
Flange for compartment door for T7-T7M fixed 063160
Flange for compartment door for T7-T7M withdrawable 063161
Flange for compartment door for T7 fixed with rotary handle 063162
Solenoid operator for residual current device

Type 1SDA.....R1
RC221/RC222 for T1 051506

RC221/RC222 for T2 051507
RC221/RC222 for T3 051508
RC223 for T3 064548
RC222/RC223 for T4-T5 055097
Connecting terminals for electrical accessories

Type 1SDA.....R1
T7-T7M
Single terminal 062170
Note: To have a complete overview of the spare parts available for the Tmax family of circuit-breakers, please consult the “Spare Parts Catalogue”.
SD-View 2000 software

Type 1SDA.....R1
SD-View 2000 software 060549

SD-View 2000 software - 5000 tags license 060550
7
7/62
1SDC210015D0205
Notes
1SDC210015D0205
Notes
1SDC210015D0205
Notes
1SDC210015D0205
Notes
1SDC210015D0205
Contact us
ABB SACE The data and illustrations are not binding. We reserve
1SDC210015D0205 - 07/2010 - 6.000
Tmax. T Generation Low voltage moulded-case circuit-breakers up to 1600 A

the right to modify the contents of this document on
A division of ABB S.p.A. the basis of technical development of the product,
L.V. Breakers without prior notice.
Via Baioni, 35 Copyright 2010 ABB. All rights reserved.
24123 Bergamo
Phone: +39 035.395.111
Fax: +39 035.395.306-433
www.abb.com
Technical catalogue - Edition 2010
Tmax. T Generation
Low voltage moulded-case
circuit-breakers up to 1600 A

Abb Tmax Breaker Catalogue

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Abb Tmax Breaker Catalogue

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Abb Tmax Breaker Catalogue

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contact us

1SDC210015D0205 - 07/2010 - 6.000

Tmax. T Generation Low voltage moulded-case circuit-breakers up to 1600 A

Technical catalogue - Edition 2010

BE FREE TO RIDE THE MOST ADVANCED FREEDOM OF TOTALLY SAFE SELECTION.

Modularity of the series ...........................................................................................................1/6

Distinguishing features of the series .......................................................................................1/8

Circuit-breakers for AC-DC distribution

Circuit-breakers for zone selectivity

Circuit-breakers for motor protection

Circuit-breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC

T3D T4D T5D T6D T7D

Standards and comply with what is foreseen by the UL 489 Standard.

With Without Without With high With low With IP40

Altitude [m] 2000 3000 4000 5000

Resistance to shocks and vibrations

closing springs and shunt opening and closing releases.

Racking-out with the door closed

(Russia Certiﬁcate of Conformity) certiﬁcation organisation. The pieces of apparatus comply

Tmax circuit-breakers for power distribution

Electrical characteristics .........................................................................................................2/4

Electronic trip units................................................................................................................2/11

Circuit-breaker for zone selectivity

Electrical characteristics .......................................................................................................2/38

EFDP zone selectivity: PR223EF ...........................................................................................2/40

ZS zone selectivity: PR332/P ................................................................................................2/43

Tmax circuit-breakers for motor protection

Electrical characteristics .......................................................................................................2/46

Protection against short-circuit .............................................................................................2/49

Integrated protection: PR221MP...........................................................................................2/51

Integrated protection: PR222MP...........................................................................................2/52

Tmax circuit-breakers for use up to 1150 V AC and 1000 V DC

Electrical characteristics .......................................................................................................2/60

Electrical characteristics .......................................................................................................2/64

Tmax circuit-breakers for power distribution

Electrical characteristics .........................................................................................................2/4

Electronic trip units................................................................................................................2/11

Tmax T1 1P Tmax T1 Tmax T2

2 (DC) 750 V - 3 poles in series

100% 100% 100% 100% 100%

100% 100% 100% 100%

Thermomagnetic trip units TMD e TMG (for T1, T2 and T3)

Neutral [A] - 100% 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 – 160 200 250

I1=0.7…1 x In Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – – 80 100 125 160 2

I3 = 10 x In Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – – 800 1000 1250 1600

I1=0.7…1 x In Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 80 100

I3 = 10 x In Neutral [A] - 50% – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 800 1000

Neutral [A] - 100% 25 40 63 80 100 125 160

I3 [A] 400 400 400 400 480 600 750

Notes: (1) only T1B (2)

Characteristics of the Tmax electronic trip units

Basic protection functions

(S) Protection against short-circuit with time delay

(I) Instantaneous protection against short-circuit

(G) Protection against earth fault

(L) Protection against overload (IEC 60255-3)

(U) Protection against unbalanced phase

(OT) Protection against overtemperature

(ZS) Zone selectivity (2)